THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED

REPUBLIC OF TANZANIA

MINISTRY OF WORKS, TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION

DAR ES SALAAM BUS RAPID TRANSIT SYSTEM

PROJECT – PHASE 4

TENDER No.: AE/001/2019-2020/HQ/W/…

FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF DAR ES SALAAM BUS RAPID TRANSIT (BRT)

INFRASTRUCTURE - PHASE 4, LOT 1: ROAD WORKS (30.45KM) INCLUDING 44
BUS STATIONS ALONG AND 4 PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE.

BIDDING DOCUMENT

VOLUME II-A

ROAD WORKS SPECIFICATIONS

(SECTION VI. WORKS REQUIREMENTS)

MAY, 2021.
Section VI. Works Requirements

Contents
Section VI 1 Scope of Works
Section VI 2 Specifications
Section VI 3 Drawings Bound In Separate Volumes i.e. 3A – 3D
Section VI 4 Suplementary Information
 Section VI (1) - Scope of Works

Description of the Works

Background of the Project

The Government of the United Republic of Tanzania has received loans from the WB to
finance the Dar es Salaam Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) System Project – Phase 4. The
Tanzania National Roads Agency (TANROADS), an Agency of the Ministry of Works,
Transport and Communication intends to apply a portion of the proceeds of this loan to
eligible payments under the contract for which this Invitation for Bids is issued.

The project involves the construction of BRT infrastructure along Bibi Titi Mohamed road
from Maktaba Street junction to Ohio Street junction (0.23km), Ali Hassan Mwinyi road
(from the junction of Ohio Street to Mwenge) (10.22 km), New Bagamoyo Road from
Mwenge -Tegeta (DAWASA Daladala Bus Station) (16 km) and a spur on Sam Nujoma
Road from its junction with New Bagamoyo Road to Ubungo junction (4 km).

The works in all stretches will involve constructing two BRT lanes in the right of way
provided in the center of existing mixed traffic lanes with, bicycle lanes and pedestrian
walkways and service roads will be constructed in some sections where the road corridor
is sufficient.

The entire Phase 4 trunk system of 30.45 kilometres will be built along the middle of
existing roads. The average distance between bus stops will be 300m to 800m and
system users will be encouraged to either walk or bicycle to the bus stops (privately
operated bicycle parking facilities are planned at each bus stop).

Scope of work
Construction of 30.45 km of BRT Phase 4 roads and non-motorized lanes on the
periphery of the motor lanes, together with associated storm water sewer system:
BRT Phase 4 infrastrcure 30.45km cover the following;
• Bibi Titi Mohamed road from Maktaba Street junction to Ohio Street junction
(0.23km),
• Ali Hassan Mwinyi road (from the junction of Ohio Street to Mwenge) (10.22 km),
• New Bagamoyo Road from Mwenge -Tegeta (DAWASA Daladala Bus Station)
(16 km) and
• A spur on Sam Nujoma Road from its junction with New Bagamoyo Road to
Ubungo junction (4 km).
• Construction of 43 bus stations, 3 Deport, 2 Terminals and 21 feeder stations
along the project roads.
Construction of 4 Pedestrian Bridge (pedestrian flyover)
Solar street lighting
Solar traffic signals at intersections
Widening of existing cross drainage structures

Estimated major quantities of Works are:

S/N DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITIES

1 Clearing and Grubbing ha 79

2 Common Excavation including Cut to Spoil cu.m 767,090

3 Rock Excavation (Provisional) cu.m 45,982

4 Improved Subgrade Natural Gravel (G7) cu.m 104,276

5 Improved Subgrade Natural Gravel (G15) cu.m 109,153

6 Natural Gravel Material Natural Gravel (G45) tonne 3,705

Bitumen, PG penetration grade, for Asphalt concrete

7 Tones 3,324
binder course and surfacing

8 Cement Stabilised Subbase, C1 cu.m 143,383

9 Cement Stabilised Subbase, C2 cu.m 24,651

10 Crushed aggregate base course, CRR cu.m 115,552

11 Prime coat, MC-30 Cutback Bitumen lts 802,023

12 Asphalt concrete surfacing, SP12.5 cu.m 39,183

13 Asphalt concrete surfacing, SP19 cu.m 0

14 Concrete Pipe Culverts all Sizes m 15,410

15 Service Ducts (150mm, 200mm, 300mm) m 14,150

16 Concrete all Classes cu.m 166,916

17 Interlocking Paving Blocks sq.m 12,158

18 Kerbs m 366,000

19 Reinforcement Steel Tones 5,646

20 Piling m 4,104

21 Bus Stations (Platform and Shed Structures) No 43

22 Feeder Stations No 21
Figure 1: Location of BRT Phase 4 System

i
 Specifications

Specification for the works comprise of

Part I: Standard Specification
Part II: Special Specification

PART 1: STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

The Standard Specifications shall be those forming the “Standard Specification for
Road Works 2000” prepared by the Ministry of Works (now the Ministry of Works,
Transport and Communication), Tanzania. The Standard Specifications are subject to
the variations and additions set out in Part 2, hereto entitled “Special Specifications”.

Copies of the Standard Specifications can be obtained from: CENTRAL MATERIALS

LABORATORY (TANLAB)
P.O. BOX 9452, DAR ES SALAAM
Tel: 022 2866122; Fax:022 2866088
E-mail:[email protected]

PART 2: SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications for the Works are covered in Volume II bound separately
containing the following:
Volume II-Technical Specifications

Section VI: 2A-1: Standard Specifications for Roadworks

Section VI: 2A-2Special Specifications for Roadworks, Street lighting and traffic signs
Section VI: 2A-3: Specifications for Relocation of Water pipelines along BRT 4
Section VI: 2A-4: Specifications for Duct PVC And Duct Jointing Compound and
Polyethylene Cables for External Use
Section VI: 2A-5: Technical Field Requirements and Specifications for Relocation of
Powerlines
Section VI: 2A-6 Specifications for Building Works (Bus and Feeder stations)
Section VI: 2A-7: Specifications for Electrical works
Section VI: 2A- 8: Plumbing & Mechanical works
Section VI: 2A-8 Specifications- ICT

ii
Section VI: 2A-1 :Standard Specifications for Roadworks

The Standard Specifications shall be the "Standard Specification for Road Works
2000" as published by the Ministry of Works of the United Republic of Tanzania in
June 2000.

These Standard Specifications are not reproduced in this Volume, as they are
protected by copyright. However, a copy may be obtained from:

CENTRAL MATERIALS LABORATORY (CML)

P.O. BOX 9452
DAR ES SALAAM
Tel: 022 2866122
Fax: 022 2866088
E-mail: [email protected]

Equivalency of Standards and Codes

Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be
met by the materials, Plant, and other supplies to be furnished, and work performed
or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant
standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the
Contract. Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to a particular
country or region, other authoritative standards that ensure substantial equivalence to
the standards and codes specified will be accepted subject to the Engineer’s prior
review and written approval. Differences between the standards specified and the
proposed alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the Contractor
and submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor
desires the Engineer’s approval. In the event the Engineer determines that such
proposed deviations do not ensure substantially equal performance, the Contractor
shall comply with the standards specified in the documents.

iii
Section VI: 2A-2: Special Specifications for Roadworks, Street lighting and
traffic signs

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Section VI: 2A-1: Standard Specifications for Roadworks ........................................... ii
Section VI: 2A-2Special Specifications for Roadworks, Street lighting and
traffic signs ........................................................................................... ii
Section VI: 2A-3: Specifications for Relocation of Water pipelines along BRT 4 ......... ii
Section VI: 2A-4: Specifications for Duct PVC And Duct Jointing Compound
and ..................................................... Polyethylene Cables for External Use ii
Section VI: 2A-5: Technical Field Requirements and Specifications for
Relocation of ..................................................................................... Powerlines ii
Section VI: 2A-6 Specifications for Building Works (Bus and Feeder stations) ......... ii
Section VI: 2A-1 :Standard Specifications for Roadworks ........................................... iii
Section VI: 2A-2: Special Specifications for Roadworks, Street lighting and
traffic signs .......................................................................................... iv
1100 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS .............................................................. 25
1167 ADDENDUM ...................................................................................... 25
1168 DITCH OR OPEN DRAIN .................................................................. 25
1169 EMPLOYER ....................................................................................... 25
1170 ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................. 25
1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS ............................ 30
1202 SERVICES ......................................................................................... 30
1204 PROGRAMME OF WORKS AND TEMPORARY WORKS ................ 30
1207 NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS .................................... 30
1209 METHODS OF PAYMENT ................................................................. 30
1224 THE HANDING OVER OF THE SITE ................................................ 31
1227 ACCESS TO CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS, MONTHLY SITE
MEETINGS AND PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .............................. 31
SS12.21 Provision of As-Built drawings:........................................................... 32
SS12.40 Dispute Board (DB): ........................................................................... 33
1300 CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE AND GENERAL
OBLIGATIONS ................................................................................... 33
1302 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 33
1303 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICES, STORES, WORKSHOPS,
CAMPS ETC. ..................................................................................... 34
1400 ENGINEER'S ACCOMMODATION AND ATTENDANCE UPON
ENGINEER AND HIS SITE PERSONNEL ......................................... 35
1402 FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER.................................................... 35
1403 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER ....................................................... 35
1404 OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER ......................................................... 35

v
1407 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER ..................................................... 41
1409 PROVISION OF SURVEY EQUIPMENT ........................................... 42
1410 LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER .............................................. 43
1412 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 48
1500 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC .................................................... 50
1502 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 50
1503 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC-CONTROL FACILITIES.............................. 50
1504 CONSTRUCTION OF DEVIATIONS.................................................. 50
1507 GRAVELLING OF DEVIATIONS OR EXISTING ROADS USED
AS DEVIATIONS ............................................................................... 51
1510 RIDING QUALITY AND MAINTENANCE OF DEVIATIONS
AND EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS ............................. 51
1512 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE THE ROAD IS
CONSTRUCTED IN HALF WIDTHS .................................................. 51
1600 OVERHAUL ....................................................................................... 52
1700 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL ........... 52
1700.01 Restriction on Depth and Spacing of Borrow Pits and Quarry
site ..................................................................................................... 52
1702 GENERAL .......................................................................................... 53
1703 LANDSCAPE PRESERVATION ........................................................ 53
1704 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL ....................................... 54
1705 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND SHRUBBERY ............................ 54
SS1715 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY HSMP ............................. 54

SECTION SS.1800: HIV/AIDS AND CHILD ABUSE ................................................. 58

2000 DRAINAGE ........................................................................................ 64
2100 DRAINS ............................................................................................. 64
2102 OPEN DRAINS .................................................................................. 64
2104 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE ........................................................................ 64
2107 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 66
2200 PREFABRICATED CULVERTS ......................................................... 67
2204 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ........................................................... 67
2215 SERVICE DUCTS .............................................................................. 67
2218 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 67
2307 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 68
2500 PITCHING, STONEWORK AND PROTECTION AGAINST
EROSION .......................................................................................... 69
2508 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 69
2600 GABIONS........................................................................................... 69

vi
2602 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 69
2603 CONSTRUCTION OF GABION CAGES ............................................ 71
3000 EARTHWORKS & PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR
CRUSHED STONE ............................................................................ 71
3100 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOI .................... 71
3102 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS .............................................................. 71
3400 BORROW PIT AND QUARRY ACQUISITION AND
EXPLOITATION ................................................................................. 71
3402 NEGOTIATIONS WITH LANDOWNERS, AUTHORITIES AND
LEGAL OCCUPANTS OF LAND ....................................................... 71
3404 OBTAINING BORROW OR QUARRIED MATERIALS ...................... 71
3405 OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS ..................................... 72
3500 SELECTING AND UTILISING MATERIAL FROM BORROW
PITS AND CUTTINGS ....................................................................... 72
3506 COMPACTION OF MATERIALS ....................................................... 72
3600 EARTHWORKS ................................................................................. 74
3601 SCOPE .............................................................................................. 74
3602 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 75
3604 PREPARATION OF ROADBED ......................................................... 75
3605 EMBANKMENTS ............................................................................... 75
3610 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT .................................................. 75
3700 PAVEMENT LAYERS OF NATURAL GRAVEL ................................. 76
SS.3705 Maintenance of Existing Roads .......................................................... 76
3800 STABILISATION ................................................................................ 76
3802 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 76
3803 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 79
3804 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES ..................................................... 86
3805 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 88
3900 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ....................................... 89
3901 SCOPE .............................................................................................. 89
3902 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 89
3903 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 90
4000 BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND SEALS ................................................ 91
4102 MATERIALS....................................................................................... 91
4105 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED OR TO
RECEIVE A CURING MEMBRANE ................................................... 92
4106 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT OR CURING
MEMBRANE ...................................................................................... 92
4107 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC ................................. 93

vii
4108 TOLERANCES ................................................................................... 93
4110 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................... 93
4200A BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT CONCRETE
SURFACING ...................................................................................... 93
4201A SCOPE .............................................................................................. 93
4202A MATERIALS....................................................................................... 94
4203A COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES FOR BITUMINOUS BASE
COURSE AND SURFACING ............................................................. 98
4204A PLANT AND EQUIPMENT............................................................... 100
4205A GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS AND THE
STOCKPILING OF MIXED MATERIAL ............................................ 101
4206A PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE MIXTURE .................... 101
4207A SPREADING THE MIXTURE ........................................................... 102
4208A JOINTS ............................................................................................ 102
4209A COMPACTION ................................................................................. 103
4211A LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS ............................................................. 103
4213A TESTING ......................................................................................... 105
4214A MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 106
4200B RIGID PAVEMENT .......................................................................... 107
4201B SCOPE ............................................................................................ 107
4202B MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE ....................................................... 108
4203B PREPARING THE UNDERLYING LAYERS .................................... 121
4204B PREPARING THE UNDERLYING LAYERS .................................... 123
4205B SIDE-FORMS, RAILS AND GUIDE WORES ................................... 125
4207B PLACING, COMPACTING AND FINISHING WITH SLIPFORM
EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 129
4208B PLACING, COMPACTING AND FINISHING WITH HAND
EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 130
4209B STEEL REINFORCEMENT ............................................................. 131
4210B SURFACE TEXTURE ...................................................................... 134
4211 B CURING ........................................................................................... 136
4212 B TRANSVERSE JOINTS ................................................................... 137
4213 B LONGITUDINAL JOINTS ................................................................. 139
4214 B LONGITUDINAL JOINTS ................................................................. 140
4215B THE BARS AND DOWELS .............................................................. 142
4218B CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES ................................................... 148
4219 B PROCESS CONTROL ..................................................................... 148
4220B QUALITY CONTROL AND WORKMANSHIP .................................. 148
4221B REMEDIAL WORK........................................................................... 150

viii
4222B OPENING TO TRAFFIC .................................................................. 154
4223B MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 154
5000 ANCILLARY ROADWORKS ............................................................ 157
5100 MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS .............................................. 157
5106 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 157
5200 GUARDRAILS .................................................................................. 157
5202 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 157
5400 ROAD SIGNS .................................................................................. 158
5403 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 158
5404 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ 158
5409 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 159
5500 ROAD MARKINGS........................................................................... 159
5501 SCOPE ............................................................................................ 159
5502 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 159
400 Poise at 160 °C ................................................................................ 160
100 Poise at 190 °C ................................................................................ 160
5503 WEATHER LIMITATIONS................................................................ 161
3.1 Graded Glass Beads: ....................................................................... 162
3.2 Pigments: ......................................................................................... 162
3.3 Heating indicators: ........................................................................... 163
3.4 Skid Resistance: .............................................................................. 163
3.5 Thickness: ........................................................................................ 163
3.6 Versatility: ........................................................................................ 163
3.7 Environmental Resistance: .............................................................. 163
3.8 Retroreflectivity: ............................................................................... 163
3.9 Asphalt ............................................................................................. 164
4.0 Portland Cement Concrete:.............................................................. 164
5504 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING ................................. 165
5507 APPLYING THE THERMOPLASTIC PAINT .................................... 165
5509 ROAD STUDS ................................................................................. 166
5513 PROTECTION ................................................................................. 166
5514 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 166
5600 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS ................... 167
5601 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING ............................................................ 167
5602 SCOPE ............................................................................................ 167
5603 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 168
5604 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........ 168
5605 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ 176
5606 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .................................................. 178

ix
5606 DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................... 183
5607 SPARE PARTS ................................................................................ 183

STREET LIGHTING ENERGIZED THROUGH COMMERCIAL POWER................ 184

5609 SCOPE ............................................................................................ 184
5610 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 185
5611 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ 199
5612 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .................................................. 205
5614 SPARE PARTS ................................................................................ 212
5615 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 213
5616 TRAFFIC SIGNALS SPECIFICATIONS........................................... 214
5617 Q3x100 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS....................................... 214
5618 Q3x200 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS....................................... 215
5619 Q3x300 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS....................................... 215
5620 Ø 2x200 mm LED PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL LIGHTS ......................... 216
5621 Q1x200-Q1x300 mm LED ARROW AUTO SIGNAL LIGHT............. 216
5622 Q3x200-Q3x300 mm LED ARROW AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS .......... 217
5623 Q1x200 – Q1x300 mm DOWN COUNT LIGHT ............................... 218
5624 Q1x200 - Q1x300 mm LED FLASHING LIGHT ............................... 218
5625 Q200 - Q300 mm. ANIMATED PEDESTRIAN & COUNT
DOWN LIGHT’S ............................................................................... 219
5626 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT ................................................ 220
5700 LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING ................................................... 221
5702 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 221
5704 PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING .......................................... 221
5705 GRASSING AND SPRIGGING ........................................................ 221
5708 GENERAL ........................................................................................ 222
5709 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 223
5800 FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE AND
TREATING OLD ROADS ................................................................. 223
5804 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................. 223
6000 STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 224
6100 FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES ............................................. 224
6101 SCOPE ............................................................................................ 224
6102 MATERIALS..................................................................................... 224
6108 Backfill and Fill near Structures ........................................................ 225
6113 FOUNDATION PILING..................................................................... 225
6113.01 General ............................................................................................ 225
6113.02 Scope of Works ............................................................................... 226

x
6113.02.01 Provisional Number of Piles............................................................. 226
6113.02.02 Other ................................................................................................ 227
6113.03 Contractor to Acquaint Himself with the Site of Work ...................... 227
6113.04 Subsoil Data .................................................................................... 227
6113.05 Unexpected Ground Conditions ....................................................... 228
6113.06 Systems and Nature of Neighbouring Buildings .............................. 229
6113.07 Site Access ...................................................................................... 230
6113.08 System of Piles Foundation ............................................................. 230
6113.09 Alternative Design by Contractor ..................................................... 233
6113.10 Piles Group ...................................................................................... 235
6113.11 Underground Services ..................................................................... 235
6113.12 Equipment and Labour .................................................................... 235
6113.13 Programme of Works ....................................................................... 236
6113.14 Method Statements for Construction Operations ............................. 236
6113.15 Engineer's Inspection Program ........................................................ 238
6113.15.01 Adequate Notice of Supervision ...................................................... 238
SS 6113.16 Setting Out ....................................................................................... 239
6113.17 Emphasis on Dimensional Accuracy ............................................... 239
6113.18 Pile Position Tolerance .................................................................... 240
6113.19 Forcible Corrections .......................................................................... 240
6113.20 Adjacent Piles .................................................................................... 241
6113.21 Faulty Piles ...................................................................................... 241
6113.22 Stripping or Cutting of Piles to Cut-Off Levels ................................... 241
6113.23 Cleaning Up ....................................................................................... 244
6113.24 Pile Length ......................................................................................... 244
6113.25 Marking of Piles ................................................................................. 244
6113.26 As-Built Drawings .............................................................................. 244
6113.27 Piling Records.................................................................................... 245
6113.28 Wastages ........................................................................................... 246
6400 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES ................................................... 246
6401 SCOPE ............................................................................................ 246
6404 MATERIALS.................................................................................... 246
6900 REHABILITATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE AND MASONRY
STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 247
6901 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 247
6902 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................ 247
6903 MATERIALS.................................................................................... 247
6905 PATCHING ..................................................................................... 250
6906 POINTING....................................................................................... 252

xi
6907 COPING .......................................................................................... 253
6908 EXTENSION OF EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES ............. 254
6909 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................. 255
7000 TOLERANCES, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL .................... 257
7100 TESTING OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ......................... 257
7109 TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES .......................................... 257
7110 TESTING METHODS....................................................................... 258
7114 (b) FIELD DENSITY TESTING .............................................................. 258
7114 (d) FIELD DENSITY TESTING ........................................................ 259
7115 TESTS OF SURFACE REGULARITY, LEVELS AND
THICKNESS .................................................................................... 260
7200 QUALITY CONTROL ....................................................................... 260
7204 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 260
7205 PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 261

SIGNAL TRANSMITTER PILLAR ........................................................................... 264

8301 STANDARD SIGNAL TRANSMITTING ANCHORAGE PILLAR ...... 264

SECTION VI (2C): BUILDING WORK SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUS

STATIONS ....................................................................................... 267
1.0 General description of materials and workmanship ......................... 268
1.1 Alterations, additions and Extensions .............................................. 268
1.2 Quality, samples, testing and approval ............................................ 268
1.2.1 Materials .......................................................................................... 268
1.2.2 Manufacturer’s recommendations .................................................... 268
1.2.3 Standards......................................................................................... 268
1.2.4 Local conditions ............................................................................... 269
1.2.5 Samples ........................................................................................... 269
2.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS .............................................. 269
2.1 Generally.......................................................................................... 269
2.2 Interpretation of terms ...................................................................... 270
3.0 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK ................................................. 271
3.1 Nature of excavation ........................................................................ 271
3.2 Excavations generally ...................................................................... 271
3.3 Site clearance .................................................................................. 271
3.4 Over-site excavation ........................................................................ 271
3.5 Excavations for Foundations and Structures.................................... 271
3.6 Rock ................................................................................................. 272
3.7 Blasting ............................................................................................ 272

xii
3.8 Inspection......................................................................................... 272
3.9 Excavation below required depths ................................................... 273
3.10 Filling................................................................................................ 273
3.11 Return, fill in and ram ....................................................................... 273
3.12 Levelling ........................................................................................... 274
3.13 Soil sterilisation ................................................................................ 274
3.14 Disposal of surplus excavated material ............................................ 275
3.15 Disposal of water ............................................................................. 275
3.16 Planking and strutting....................................................................... 275
3.17 Hardcore .......................................................................................... 276
3.18 Rates for excavations....................................................................... 276
3.19 Rates for Disposal ............................................................................ 277
3.20 Dampproof Membrane ..................................................................... 277
3.21 Cutting down trees ........................................................................... 277
4.0 CONCRETE WORK ......................................................................... 278
4.1 Materials and workmanship generally .............................................. 278
4.2. Materials generally ........................................................................... 278
4.3 Cement ............................................................................................ 278
4.4 Aggregate generally ......................................................................... 278
4.5 Fine Aggregate ................................................................................ 279
4.6 Coarse aggregate ............................................................................ 279
4.7 Water ............................................................................................... 279
4.8 Admixtures ....................................................................................... 280
4.9 Steel reinforcement .......................................................................... 280
4.10 Bending and fixing of reinforcement ................................................. 280
4.11 Formwork to produce a fair face board finish(wrought formwork) .... 281
4.12 Construction and Movement joints ................................................... 282
4.13 Concrete grades .............................................................................. 282
4.14 Concrete Production, Supervision and Tests ................................... 282
4.15 Preliminary cube tests ...................................................................... 282
4.16 Work cube tests ............................................................................... 283
4.17 Quality control requirements ............................................................ 285
4.17.1 Supervision ...................................................................................... 285
4.17.2 Batching and mixing plant ................................................................ 285
4.18 Workmanship ................................................................................... 285
4.18.1 Placing of reinforcement .................................................................. 285
4.18.2 Formwork generally.......................................................................... 286
4.18.3 Mixing of Concrete ........................................................................... 287
4.18.5 Distribution of Concrete.................................................................... 289

xiii
4.18.6 Placing of Concrete .......................................................................... 289
4.18.7 Vibration ........................................................................................... 290
4.18.8 Working joints .................................................................................. 290
4.18.9 Protection of Concrete ..................................................................... 290
4.18.10 Concrete in Excavation. ................................................................... 290
4.18.11 Removal of formwork. ...................................................................... 291
4.18.12 Surface finishes ............................................................................... 291
4.19. Precast Concrete ............................................................................. 292
4.20 Sub-contractors work Incorporated in the Structure ......................... 292
4.21 General ............................................................................................ 293
4.22 Movements and Separation Joints ................................................... 293
4.23 Mortise and Pockets......................................................................... 293
4.24 Pricing concrete work ....................................................................... 294
5.0 WATERPROOFING ......................................................................... 295
5.1 General ............................................................................................ 295
5.1.1 Description ....................................................................................... 295
5.3 Waterproofing Mortar, ...................................................................... 298
5.3.1 Slurry,............................................................................................... 298
5.3.2 Fibre Reinforced Mortar, .................................................................. 298
5.3.3 Complementary products for joint sealing and waterproofing .......... 298
5.3.3.1 Waterstops, ...................................................................................... 298
5.3.3.2 Sealants and Profiles ....................................................................... 298
6.1 Water ............................................................................................... 300
6.3. Fine Aggregate ................................................................................ 300
6.4 Coarse Aggregate ............................................................................ 300
6.5 Lime ................................................................................................. 300
6.8 Concrete Blocks ............................................................................... 300
6.9 Stone................................................................................................ 301
6.10 Fair face work .................................................................................. 301
6.11 Wall reinforcement ........................................................................... 301
6.12 Wall ties ........................................................................................... 301
6.13 Chasing ............................................................................................ 302
6.14 Mortar............................................................................................... 302
6.15 Workmanship ................................................................................... 302
6.16 Setting out ........................................................................................ 302
6.17 Bonding walling ................................................................................ 302
6.18 Laying and Jointing .......................................................................... 303
6.19 Putlog holes ..................................................................................... 303
6.20 Damp proof course........................................................................... 303

xiv
6.21 Prices to include ............................................................................... 303
7.0 FIBERCEMENT REINFORCED PANEL .......................................... 304
8.0 ROOFING ........................................................................................ 312
8.1 Vermiculite lightweight screed.......................................................... 312
8.2 Roof waterproofing ........................................................................... 312
8.3 Bitumen felt roofing .......................................................................... 312
8.3.1 Generally.......................................................................................... 312
8.3.2 Materials .......................................................................................... 312
8.3.3 Fixing of Bitumat Polyframe Waterproofing ...................................... 312
8.3.4 Fixing of Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems ........................................ 313
8.3.5 Guarantee ........................................................................................ 313
8.4. Aluminium sheet roofing................................................................... 313
8.4.1 Materials .......................................................................................... 313
8.4.2 Fixing ............................................................................................... 313
8.5 Zicalume roofing sheet ..................................................................... 313
8.5.1 Materials .......................................................................................... 313
8.5.2 Fixing ............................................................................................... 313
9.0 JOINERY ......................................................................................... 314
9.1 General ............................................................................................ 314
9.2 Hardwood Facia Board .................................................................... 314
9.3 Workmanship ................................................................................... 314
9.4 Flush doors ...................................................................................... 315
9.5 Plywood ........................................................................................... 315
9.6 Blockboard ....................................................................................... 315
9.7. Chipboard ........................................................................................ 315
9.8 Plugging ........................................................................................... 315
9.9 Protection ......................................................................................... 316
9.10 Ironmongery ..................................................................................... 316
9.11 Prices to include ............................................................................... 316
10.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS ...................................................... 317
10.1 Generally.......................................................................................... 317
10.2 Shop drawings ................................................................................. 317
10.3 Submittals ........................................................................................ 317
10.4 Bolts ................................................................................................. 317
10.5 Welding ............................................................................................ 317
10.6 Painting ............................................................................................ 317
10.6.1 Shop painting ................................................................................... 317
10.6.2 Field painting .................................................................................... 317
11.0 METALWORK .................................................................................. 318

xv
11.1 Mild steel .......................................................................................... 318
11.2 Galvanised work .............................................................................. 318
11.3 Aluminium ........................................................................................ 318
11.4 Smithing, welding and cutting .......................................................... 318
11.5 Bolts ................................................................................................. 318
11.6 Anchor bolts ..................................................................................... 318
11.7 Perforated Aluminium Facade Sheet ............................................... 318
11.8 Louvre windows ............................................................................... 319
11.9 Metal doors ...................................................................................... 319
11.10 Roller Shutter Door .......................................................................... 319
11.11 Burglar bars ..................................................................................... 320
11.12 Structural hollow sections ................................................................ 321
11.13 Mild steel tubing ............................................................................... 321
11.14 Shop inspection ............................................................................... 321
11.15 Marking ............................................................................................ 321
11.16 Storage ............................................................................................ 321
11.17 Erection ............................................................................................ 321
12.0 PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATION ......................... 322
12.1 Execution of Works .......................................................................... 322
12.2 Extent of Works ................................................................................ 322
12.3 Extent of Contractor’s duties ............................................................ 323
12.4 Quality of Materials and Workmanship............................................. 324
12.4.1 Materials and workmanship generally .............................................. 324
12.4.2 Tubing Generally .............................................................................. 324
12.4.3 Galvanized Mild Steel Tubing .......................................................... 327
12.4.4 Black Steel Tubing ........................................................................... 327
12.4.5 Cooper Tubing ................................................................................. 328
12.5 Geberit Mepla .................................................................................. 328
12.5.1 PVC, HDPE and PE Pipes ............................................................... 329
12.5.2 Pipework Ancillaries ......................................................................... 329
12.6 Valves, Cocks, Taps, Etc ................................................................. 329
12.7 Waste Traps..................................................................................... 331
12.8 Galvanized Mild Steel Water Mains ................................................. 331
12.9 Sanitary and Other Appliances ........................................................ 331
12.10 Floor Gully........................................................................................ 332
12.11 GRP Water Storage Tank ................................................................ 332
12.12 Commissioning and Testing ............................................................. 332
13.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHINGS .................................... 333
13.1 Sand................................................................................................. 333

xvi
13.2 Aggregate ........................................................................................ 333
13.3 Cement ............................................................................................ 333
13.4 Lime ................................................................................................. 333
13.5 Workmanship ................................................................................... 333
13.6 In-situ pavings generally .................................................................. 333
13.6.1 Cement and sand paving ................................................................. 334
13.6.2 Concrete paving ............................................................................... 334
13.6.3 Internal plaster ................................................................................. 334
13.6.4 "Sandtex" finish ................................................................................ 335
13.7 Floor tiles ......................................................................................... 335
13.8 Tactile Walking Surface Tile Resilient .............................................. 335
13.8.1 Construction ..................................................................................... 335
13.8.2 Styles ............................................................................................... 336
13.8.3 Product Performance and Technical Data ....................................... 336
13.8.4 Installation ........................................................................................ 336
14.0 GLAZING ......................................................................................... 337
14.1 General ............................................................................................ 337
14.2 Putty ................................................................................................. 337
14.3 Workmanship ................................................................................... 337
14.4 Cleaning and protection ................................................................... 337
15.0 PAINTING ........................................................................................ 338
15.1 Colour range .................................................................................... 338
15.2 Materials .......................................................................................... 338
15.3 Preparation ...................................................................................... 338
15.4 Plastered surfaces ........................................................................... 338
15.5 Woodwork preparations ................................................................... 339
15.6 Metalwork......................................................................................... 339
16.0 DRAINAGE ...................................................................................... 340
16.1 Generally.......................................................................................... 340
16.2 PVC drain pipes ............................................................................... 340
16.3 Cast iron drainpipes ......................................................................... 340
16.4 Concrete drain pipes ........................................................................ 340
16.5 Pitch impregnated fibre drainpipes ................................................... 341
16.6 Manholes ......................................................................................... 341
16.7 Concrete beds etc ............................................................................ 342
16.8 Trenches and manhole excavation and back filling .......................... 342
16.9 Pipe laying and jointing generally ..................................................... 343
16.9.1 Jointing PVC Drainpipes .................................................................. 343
16.9.2 Jointing precast concrete pipes ........................................................ 344

xvii
16.10 Position of floor gullies etc. .............................................................. 345
16.11 Testing ............................................................................................. 345
17.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ........................................................ 346
17.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ........................................................... 346
17.1.1 Scope of work .................................................................................. 346
17.1.1.1 Working drawings ............................................................................ 346
17.1.1.2 Record drawings .............................................................................. 347
17.1.1.3 As Built Drawings ............................................................................. 347
17.1.1.4 Shop drawings ................................................................................. 347
17.1.1.10 Workmanship ................................................................................... 349
17.1.1.11 Codes, Standards and Regulations ................................................. 349
17.1.1.12 Safety and Property Protection ........................................................ 350
17.1.2.1 General ............................................................................................ 351
17.1.2.2 Noise criteria .................................................................................... 351
17.1.3 Drawings, Data and documentation ................................................ 351
17.1.3.1 Drawings .......................................................................................... 351
17.1.3.2 Operator’s Instruction and Facility manuals ..................................... 352
17.1.3.3 Service and maintenance manuals .................................................. 352
17.1.3.4 Language, Measurement and format ............................................... 352
17.1.4 Equipment registration .................................................................... 353
17.1.4.1 Certificate and registration of Equipment ......................................... 353
17.1.4.2 Plant and Equipment ........................................................................ 353
17.1.4.3 Electrical Equipment ........................................................................ 353
17.1.4.4 Materials .......................................................................................... 353
17.1.4.5 Site Testing ...................................................................................... 353
17.1.5 Tagging and identification ................................................................ 354
17.1.6 Painting ............................................................................................ 354
17.1.7 Spare parts ...................................................................................... 354
17.1.8 Use of Site ....................................................................................... 354
17.1.7 Procurement, Inspection and Expediting.......................................... 355
17.1.7.1 Contractor’s responsibility ................................................................ 355
17.1.8 General requirement for commissioning .......................................... 357
17.2: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS................................................... 359
17.2.1.0 General ............................................................................................ 359
17.2.1.1 Scope of Works ................................................................................ 359
17.2.1.2 Codes, Standards and Specifications .............................................. 360
17.2.2 Supply of Electricity .......................................................................... 361
17.2.3.0 Supply and Distribution .................................................................... 361
17.2.3.1 Sub Main Lv Switchboard ................................................................ 361

xviii
17.2.3.2 MCB Distribution Boards .................................................................. 362
17.2.4.0 Electrical Installations Related to Mechanical Plants ....................... 362
17.2.4.1 Scope ............................................................................................... 362
17.2.4.2 Motor Control Centres ...................................................................... 362
17.2.4.2.1 Scope ............................................................................................... 362
17.2.4.2.2 Mechanical Plants ............................................................................ 363
17.2.5.0 Lighting Installation .......................................................................... 363
17.2.5.1 Lighting Fittings ................................................................................ 363
17.2.5.2 Emergency Lighting ......................................................................... 364
17.2.5.3 Internal Lighting ............................................................................... 364
17.2.5.4 External Lighting .............................................................................. 364
17.2.6 Fire Alarm System........................................................................... 364
17.2.6.1 Voice and Data Installation .............................................................. 365
17.2.8 Earthing Systems ............................................................................ 366
17.2.8.1 Types of Earth Termination Networks .............................................. 366
17.2.8.2 Earthing and Equipotential Connections .......................................... 366
17.2.8.3 Earthing and Protective Conductors ................................................ 367
17.2.8.4 Principal Earth Continuity Conductors and Joints ............................ 367
17.2.8.5 Branch Protective Conductors and Bonding .................................... 368
17.2.8.6 Earth Terminations ........................................................................... 368
17.2.8.7 Earthing Conductor and Connections .............................................. 369
17.2.8.8 Earth Resistance .............................................................................. 370
17.2.8.9 Soil Resistivity .................................................................................. 370
17.2.8.10 Conductor Type and Size................................................................. 370
17.2.8.11 Depth of Burial of Earth Grid ............................................................ 370
17.2.8.12 Duration of Fault Current.................................................................. 370
17.2.8.13 Magnitude of Fault Current .............................................................. 370
17.2.8.14 Test Points ....................................................................................... 371
17.2.9 Emergency Power Supply ................................................................ 371
17.2.9.1 Stand by Generators ........................................................................ 371
17.2.9.1.1 General ............................................................................................ 371
17.2.9.1.2 Scope of Supply ............................................................................... 371
17.2.9.1.3 Technical Requirements .................................................................. 374
17.2.9.1.3.1 Diesel Engine ................................................................................... 374
17.2.9.1.3.2 Coupling and Bearing Arrangement ................................................. 374
17.2.9.1.3.3 Foundations ..................................................................................... 375
17.2.9.1.3.4 Pumps .............................................................................................. 375
17.2.9.1.3.5 Governor .......................................................................................... 375
17.2.9.1.3.6 Charge Air System ........................................................................... 376

xix
17.2.9.1.3.7 Cooling System ................................................................................ 376
17.2.9.1.3.8 Lubrication Oil Cooler....................................................................... 376
17.2.9.1.3.9 Exhaust System ............................................................................... 376
17.2.9.1.3.10 Service Tank .................................................................................... 376
17.2.9.1.3.11 Starting System ................................................................................ 377
17.2.9.1.3.12 Automatic Change-over Switch ........................................................ 378
17.2.9.1.4 Control and Supervisory System ...................................................... 378
17.2.9.1.4.1 Control Panel ................................................................................... 378
17.2.9.1.4.2 General Protection Features ............................................................ 378
17.2.9.1.4.3 Protective Features, Warning ........................................................... 379
17.2.9.1.4.4 Protective Features, Alarm............................................................... 379
17.2.9.1.4.5 Instruments ...................................................................................... 379
17.2.9.1.4.6 Alarms and Indicators ...................................................................... 380
17.2.9.1.4.7 Controls............................................................................................ 380
17.2.9.1.5 Operation ......................................................................................... 381
17.2.9.1.5.1 Starting Sequence ........................................................................... 381
17.2.9.1.5.2 Engine Shutdown Sequence ............................................................ 381
17.2.10 POWER CABLES ............................................................................ 381
17.2.10.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................ 381
17.2.10.2.1 PVC, SWA, PVC Cables .................................................................. 385
17.2.10.2.2 LV Cables ........................................................................................ 385
17.2.10.2.3 Wiring ............................................................................................... 385
17.2.11 Conduits, Trunking and Associated Fittings ..................................... 386
17.2.11.1 General ............................................................................................ 386
17.2.11.2 Steel Conduits - Steel Trunking ....................................................... 388
17.2.11.3 Non Metallic Conduits - Trunkings ................................................... 390
17.2.11.4 Flexible Connections ........................................................................ 392
17.2.12 Testing and Inspection ..................................................................... 392
17.2.12.1 Site Tests ......................................................................................... 393
17.2.12.1.1 Verification of Polarity ...................................................................... 393
17.2.12.1.2 Earthing............................................................................................ 393
17.2.12.1.3 Insulation.......................................................................................... 394
17.2.12.1.4 Continuity ......................................................................................... 394
17.2.12.1.4 MCB’s and Overload settings ........................................................... 394
17.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE A –
BUS STATIONS ............................................................................... 396
17.3.1 EARTHING SYSTEM ...................................................................... 396
17.3.1.1 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip ................................................... 396
17.3.1.2 D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod ....................................................... 396

xx
17.3.1.4 Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm ......................................................... 396
17.3.1.5 Earthing Cable, 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable ................ 396
17.3.1.6 Bonding Cable, 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable ................ 396
17.3.2 LIGHTING, SOCKET OUTLET, POWER DIST., VANTILATION
SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 396
17.3.2.1 Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED Lamp .......................... 396
17.3.2.2 Battery Pack for emergency lighting (1 hour) ................................... 397
17.3.2.3 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail ......................................................... 397
17.3.2.4 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting Fixture ........................ 397
17.3.2.5 Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp ....................................... 397
17.3.2.6 Single Pole One Gang lighting switch .............................................. 398
17.3.2.7 Grounded Socket (1 phase) ............................................................. 398
17.3.2.8 Data Socket ..................................................................................... 398
17.3.2.9 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable ................................................... 398
17.3.2.10 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable ................................................... 398
17.3.2.11 0.6/1 kV, 4x4+4 mm2 N2XH Cable .................................................. 399
17.3.2.12 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable .................................................. 399
17.3.2.13 Ventilation Fan, 220V, 300W ........................................................... 399
17.3.2.14 Air Condation, 1000W ...................................................................... 400
17.3.3 Pipe and Cable Tray System .......................................................... 400
17.3.3.1 D:100mm, PE Pipe........................................................................... 400
17.3.3.2 Galvanized Steel Cable Trays, Cable Ladders And Their
Accessories...................................................................................... 400
17.3.4 Distribution Boards .......................................................................... 401
17.3.4.1 415V/240V, 25A, 10kA(1 sec) Normal Lighting Distribution
Board ............................................................................................... 401
17.3.4.2 415V/240V, 25A, 10kA(1 sec) Emergency Lighting Distribution
Board ............................................................................................... 402
17.3.4.3 415V/240V, 50A, 16kA(1 sec) Main Distribution Board .................... 403
17.3.4.4 415V/240V, 40A, 16kA(1 sec) UPS Main Distribution Board ......... 405
17.3.5 STAND-BY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM...................................... 406
17.3.5.1 10kVA or 15 kVA, 6 hours UPS System, including all parts and
accessories ...................................................................................... 406
17.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE B –
BUS STATIONS ............................................................................... 407
17.4.1 EARTHING SYSTEM ...................................................................... 407
17.4.1.1 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip ................................................... 407
17.4.1.2 D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod ....................................................... 407
17.4.1.3 Thermo Welding ............................................................................... 407

xxi
17.4.1.4 Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm ......................................................... 407
17.4.1.5 Earthing Cable, 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable ................ 407
17.4.1.6 Bonding Cable, 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable ................ 408
17.4.2 LIGHTING, SOCKET OUTLET, POWER DIST. SYSTEM .............. 408
17.4.2.1 Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED Lamp .......................... 408
17.4.2.2 Battery Pack for Emergency Lighting (1 hour) ................................. 408
17.4.2.3 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail ......................................................... 408
17.4.2.4 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting Fixture ........................ 409
17.4.2.5 Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp ....................................... 409
17.4.2.6 Single Pole One Gang lighting switch .............................................. 409
17.4.2.7 Grounded Socket (1 phase) ............................................................. 409
17.4.2.8 Data Socket ..................................................................................... 409
17.4.2.9 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable ................................................... 409
17.4.2.10 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable ................................................... 410
17.4.2.11 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable .................................................. 410
17.4.2.12 0.6/1 kV, 4x10+10 mm2 N2XH Cable .............................................. 410
17.4.2.13 0.6/1 kV, 4x16+16 mm2 N2XH Cable .............................................. 411
17.4.2.14 Ventilation Fan, 220V, 300W ........................................................... 411
17.4.2.15 Air Condation, 1000W ...................................................................... 412
17.4.3 PIPE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM ................................................ 412
17.4.3.1 D:100mm, PE Pipe........................................................................... 412
17.4.3.2 Galvanized steel cable trays, cable ladders and their
accessories. ..................................................................................... 412
17.4.4 Distribution Boards .......................................................................... 413
17.4.4.1 415V/240V, 40A, 10kA(1 sec) Normal Lighting Distribution
Board ............................................................................................... 413
17.4.4.2 415V/240V, 32A, 10kA(1 sec) Emergency Lighting Distribution
Board ............................................................................................... 414
17.4.4.3 415V/240V, 80A, 16kA(1 sec) Main Distribution Board .................. 415
17.4.4.4 415V/240V, 40A, 16kA(1 sec) UPS Main Distribution Board ......... 416
17.4.5 Stand-By and Emergency System .................................................. 418
17.4.5.1 15 kVA, 180 min.UPS System, including all parts and
accessories ...................................................................................... 418
18.0 Specifications for ICT Installations .................................................. 419
18.1 Description. ...................................................................................... 419
18.18 Payment and Measurement ............................................................. 421

xxii
 PREAMBLE

These Special Specifications shall be regarded as additions, amendments and

modifications to the Standard Specifications. Where references appear in the text of
these Special Specifications to specific clauses in the Standard Specifications, then
both clauses must be read together. In the case of clauses where these Special
Specifications are silent, the Standard Specifications remain fully applicable where
relevant.

In the event of there being a conflict or inconsistency between the Standard

Specifications and the Special Specifications, the Special Specifications shall take
precedence.
Both the Standard Specifications and these Special Specifications are divided into
Series as follows:

Series 1000: General

Series 2000: Drainage
Series 3000: Earthworks and Pavement Layers of Gravel or Crushed Stone
Series 4000: Bituminous Layers and Seals
Series 5000: Ancillary Roadworks
Series 6000: Structures
Series 7000: Tolerances, Testing and Quality Control

Each of the Series is divided into Sections comprising a number of Clauses,

designated by a four digit number where the first digit is the Series number; the
second digit is the Section number, while the last two digits is a sequential number
followed by the Clause title.
Each Clause may have been divided into Sub-clauses designated (a), (b), (c), etc.

These Special Specifications and the Standard Specifications may contain cross
references to other Sections and Clauses in these Special Specifications or to the
Drawings and other parts of the Contract Documents which shall likewise be
construed as Specifications for the Item of Work involved.

In the Bill of Quantities reference may have been made to certain Section(s) or
Clause(s) in these Special Specifications or the Standard Specifications
corresponding to the main type of Works involved, but this shall not be construed as
limiting the specifications for such item of work only to the Section(s) or Clause(s)

xxiii
referred to. All relevant requirements of these Special Specifications and the
Standard Specifications for the particular Item of Work shall be complied with.

The apparent silence of these Special Specifications, the Drawings or other Contract
Documents as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed
description concerning any Works or requirements, shall be regarded as meaning
that good engineering practice shall apply and shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.

xxiv
1000 GENERAL

1100 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS

In Clause 1112 substitute "2.0 metres or more" by "3.0 metres or more".

At the end of Section 1100 of the Standard Specifications add the

following definitions of words and expressions and definition of
abbreviations:

1167 ADDENDUM
Amendment of or revision to any of the Contract Documents issued to
Tenderers, and which is deemed to form part of the Contract
Documents.

1168 DITCH OR OPEN DRAIN

Lined or unlined open drain constructed for the collection of surface
water from the pavement, shoulders and adjacent land.

1169 EMPLOYER
The Employer is the Chief Executive, Tanzania National Roads Agency
(TANROADS).

1170 ABBREVIATIONS
Wherever the following abbreviations of titles, terms and units of
measurement are used in the Standard and Special Specifications or on
the Drawings, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as described
hereunder.

25
 ABBREVIATION
% percent
A amperes
A.C. Alternate Current
AADT Aannual Average Daily Traffic
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AC10, AC14, AC20 Asphalt concrete (max. particle size 10 / 14 / 20mm)
ACV Aggregate Crushing Value
AIV Aggregate Impact Value
ALD Average Least Dimension
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
av. Average
BEMIX Bitumen emulsion mix
bit. Bitumen/bituminous
BoQ Bill of Quantities
BS British Standard
C Celsius (Centigrade)
C1, C2 cemented material layer (UCS minimum 1 MPa and 2 MPa)
CBR California Bearing Ratio
CKS Standard Coordination Specification
CM cemented material (modified to UCS minimum 0.5 MPa)
cm centimetre(s)
CML Central Materials Laboratory (TANLAB)
conc. concrete
CRR crushed aggregate base with enhanced requirements
CRS crushed aggregate base
CSS-1hr Cationic Slow Setting-1 hour
Cst centistoke(s)
cu.m or m3 cubic metre(s)
D.C. direct current
dB decibel(s)
DBM30, DBM40 dense bituminous mix (max. particle size 30 / 40mm)
DBSD double bituminous surface dressing
DR dump rock
equiv. equivalent
ESA Equivalent Standard Axles
EVA plastomerpolymer
FBMIX foamed bitumen mix
FI Flakiness Index

26
g gram(s)
G25, G45, G60,G80 natural gravel with CBR value min. 25 / 45 / 60 / 80% for
pavement layers
G3, G7, G15 natural gravel with CBR value min. 3 / 7 / 15% for earthworks
GM Grading Modulus (GM = (300 - %pass2mm - %pass0.425mm -
%pass0.075mm) / 100
GVM gross vehicle mass
GW gravel wearing course
ha hectare(s)
HP horsepower
hr/hrs hour(s)
Hz Hertz (Frequency)
i.a. inter alia
kg kilogram
kl kilolitre
km kilometre(s)
km/hr kilometres per hour
kN kilo Newtons
kPa kilo Pascal
kW or kVA kilowatt
LAA Los Angeles Abrasion
LAMBS large aggregate mixes for base (hot-mixed bituminous base)
LCD liquid crystal display
lin.m linear metre(s)
LL Liquid Limit
LS Linear Shrinkage
ltr. litre(s)
m metre(s)
max. maximum
MC moisture content
MC-30, MC-70 medium curing cut-back bitumen
MDD Maximum Dry Density
min minute(s)
min. minimum
ml millilitre(s)
mm millimetre(s)
MoI DMinistry of Infrastructure Development
MoW Ministry of Works
MPa mega Pascal

27
N Newtons
N/A Not applicable
Ndes Design Number of Gyrations
Nini Initial Number of Gyrations
Nmax Maximum Number of Gyrations
no. number
OMC Optimum Moisture Content
OPC Ordinary Portland cement
Pa Pascal(s)
PBFC Portland blast-furnace cement
PI Plasticity Index
PL Plastic Limit
PM Plasticity Modulus (PM = PI x %pass0.425mm)
PM30/PM60/PM80 Penetration Macadam
ppm parts per million
PSV Polished Stone Value
pts. points
PVC polyvinyl chloride
R&B ring and ball softening point test
RC reinforced concrete
ROW right-of-way
rpm revolutions per minute
SABITA Southern African Bitumen and Tar Association
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
SATCC Southern African Transport Coordinating Commission
SBR styrene-butadiene rubber
SBS styren-butadiene-styrene
SBSD single bituminous surface dressing
SE Sand Equivalent
sec seconds
SG Specific Gravity
SP 12.5 Super pave
SP Shrinkage Product (SP = LS x %pass0.425mm)
sq.cm or cm2 Square centimetre(s)
sq.m or m2 square metre(s)
sq.mm or mm2 square millimetre(s)
SSS Sodium Sulphate Soundness
St. Station (location along the designed road centreline)
TANROADS Tanzania National Roads Agency

28
TFOT Thin Film Oven Test
TFV Ten Percent Fines Value
TLA Trinidad Lake Asphalt
ton metric ton (1,000 kg)
TRL Transport Research Laboratory (previously TRRL)
TSR Tensile Strength Ratio
UCS Unconfined Compressive Strength
UPS uninterrupted power supply
V volt(s)
VFA Voids Filled with Asphalt
VMA Voids in Mineral Aggregates
W Watt

29
1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS
1202 SERVICES
Replace the first sentence of the third paragraph of Sub-clause 1202(a)
of the Standard Specifications by the following:

The Utilities drawings indicate existing overhead services and identified

underground services within about 25m of the road centreline based on
surveys by M/s Kunhwa Engineering & Consulting Co. Ltd in JV with
M/s Seoul Housing & Communities Corporation and M/s Dongsung
Engineering Co. Ltd., in Association with M/s Aqgola Engineering &
Management Services Ltd in 2020. However, the Contractor shall check
and determine on the Site the position of any and all existing overhead
and underground services prior to starting construction works on
individual sections of the road.

1204 PROGRAMME OF WORKS AND TEMPORARY WORKS

Insert after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1204(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The Contractor shall use Microsoft Project as his software for planning
purposes or as otherwise agreed with the Engineer. Detailed time
programmes submitted to the Engineer shall be in both hard copy and
digital copy.

1207 NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS

Delete following words: "the details shown on the Drawings" from the
end of the last sentence of the 3rd paragraph of Clause 1207 of the
Standard Specifications, and replace with following:

"the description in Sub-clause 1302(c) of the Standard Specifications".

1209 METHODS OF PAYMENT

In Sub-clause 1209(b) of the Standard Specifications substitute the
words "maintenance during the period of maintenance." and replace by
"obligations during Defects Notification Period."

Delete the entire text of paragraph "(e) Materials on the Site" of Clause
1209 of the Standard Specifications, and replace with the following:

30
 (e) Materials on Site
Payment in respect of Materials on Site for subsequent incorporation
into the Permanent Works will be in accordance with Clause 14.5 of the
Conditions of Contract, subject to such payment being allowable in said
Clause.

1224 THE HANDING OVER OF THE SITE

Insert at the end of Clause 1224 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

In accordance with Supplement No. 4 of 23rd January 2009 to the

Roads Act, 2007, the width of road reserve is 60 metres i.e. 30 metres
either side of the road centreline, however, the acquired land for
Corridor of Impact (CoI) is 45 mm i.e. 22.5 metres either side of the
road centreline. The handing over of the Site will in general include the
land within these right-of-way limits. However, any property found within
the road reserve shall be preserved by the Contractor unless it will be
affected by the permanent works in which case the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer at the earliest possible time. Any work affecting such
property may only be started after obtaining the Engineer's
authorisation.

1227 ACCESS TO CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS, MONTHLY SITE

MEETINGS AND PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
The progress photographs referred to in the last paragraph of Clause
1227 of the Standard Specifications shall be taken by digital camera.

SS1239 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

ADD THE FOLLOWING PAYMENT ITEMS:

Item Unit

SS12.07 Road project sign board number

Payment shall be for the number of project signboards as per
Engineer’s Instruction. The minimum size of the board shall be
1.6 m x 4.2 m x 4.9 m (steel plate) on steel frame. The final layout shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

31
 The cost shall be inclusive of all materials necessary for the erection of
the board on timber poles as instructed by the Engineer, and the
replacement of the board if damaged."
Item Unit

SS12.21 Provision of As-Built drawings:

The Contractor shall submit draft “As-built” drawings to the Engineer as
part of his obligations by the time of completion and the Engineer shall
only issue the Taking Over Certificate after receipt of the draft “As-built”
drawings. Within 28 days after receiving the draft drawings the Engineer
shall provide comments thereon, and before the issuance of the
Performance Certificate, the Contractor shall include such comments
and insert further as built details as may arise during the Defect
Notification Period and submit the revised “As-built” drawings to the
Engineer.

Should further alterations be required to the revised “As-built” drawings,

the Contractor shall undertake these and submit the final “As-built”
drawings to the Engineer prior to submitting his draft final statement.

The final “As-built” drawings will be submitted as digital (AutoCAD and

PDF files) as well as 2 sets of A2 sized bound drawings.

The Contractor shall prepare 2 sets of “As-built drawings” to be

submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the Completion Date.
The Contractor shall carry out any corrections to these drawings to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before the end of Defects Notification
Period. There shall be no separate Payment for preparation of accepted
as-built drawings, as it is deemed the cost for as-built drawings and
operating manuals are included in the Contractor’s build up rates.

Item Unit

32
SS12.40 Dispute Board (DB):
(a) Provisional sum to cover the Employer's obligation to pay the DB
provisional sum
(b) Allow for Contractors' overheads and profits as a percentage of
sub-item SS12.40 (a) percentage (%)

The Provisional Sum shall be made only upon certification by the

Engineer for the reimbursement of the net cost of compensating the DB
Members for the Employer's portion of the payment in accordance with
para 3 of Sub-Clause 6 to the Appendix – General Conditions of
Dispute Adjudication Agreement. The percentage inserted by the
Contractor shall be for overheads and costs.

1300 CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON SITE AND GENERAL

OBLIGATIONS
1302 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1302(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The requirements specified in Clauses 1703 and 1705 concerning

preservation of landscape and trees must be complied with when
selecting sites for construction camps, offices, stores, workshops etc.
This implies that such facilities should not be located in woodland and
forest areas requiring the felling of trees with a diameter of more than
0.25 metre in a height of 1.0 metre above ground level.

Before choosing the sites for work camps it must be assured that waste
and sewage can not pollute the local water resources for instance by
placing the work camps away from human habitation and under no
circumstances upstream to such. Preferably work camps should be
located in small water catchment areas more than 500 metres from
rivers and larger watercourses (more than 1 m wide in the rainy
season). Sufficient sanitation must be provided. According to Tanzania
law it is not permitted to build anything closer than 200 m from rivers.

Good and sufficient water supplies must be guaranteed by the

Contractor both to the workers and the local people, if their access to
water is hindered.

33
 Delete the first sentence of Sub-Clause 1302 (c) of the Standard
Specifications and replace with:

“The Contractor shall provide and erect 6 sign boards (one at each
entrance of the road sections). In addition, the Contractor shall provide
and erect signboards at the site camps, where directed by the Engineer.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 1302(c) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

Suitable inscription shall include the logos of the respective entities, and
both text and logo shall be in colours to be approved by the Engineer.

1303 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICES, STORES, WORKSHOPS, CAMPS ETC.

Insert the following text at the beginning of Sub-clause 1303(a) of the
Standard Specifications:

The contractor will have to make his own arrangements for a suitable
site for his offices, stores, workshops, camps and other services at his
own expenses pursuant sub- clause 1303 (a) and (e) of standard
Specifications.

The contractor is to make his own arrangements concerning erecting

offices, camps, workshops, garages, stockpiling of materials, housing of
labour and staff, welfare facilities and supply of electrical power and all
other services. No direct payment will be made for the provision of
contractors temporary site facilities. The cost thereof is deemed to be
included in the rates and amounts tendered for the various items of
work for which these facilities are required.

The Contractor shall hire or aquire such land as it may reasonably

require for establishment of offices, stores, workshops, laboratories,
camps, etc..

Insert at the end of Sub Clause 1303 the following:

Upon completion of the contract the Contractor’s office, stores,
workshop, camps etc shall become property of the Contractor.

34
1400 ENGINEER'S ACCOMMODATION AND ATTENDANCE UPON
ENGINEER AND HIS SITE PERSONNEL
1402 FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
Insert the following text at the end of Sub-clause 1402(e):

The Contractor shall pay all charges associated with installation,

subscription and consumption of public utilities [water, electricity and
telecommunication including internet (through monthly subscription)].

1403 HOUSES FOR THE ENGINEER

In Clause 1403 of the Standard Specifications, delete all references to
the illustration of houses for the Engineer in the drawings, and insert the
following text at beginning of Sub-Clause 1403(a):

Subject to the availability of suitable houses in Dar es Salaam, and the

agreement of the Engineer, it may be agreed that the Contractor rents
suitable accommodation for the Engineer. In such case, certain
refurbishment may be required to bring the rented accommodation to a
level comparable with the description of facilities for the Engineer, as
specified in Clause 1402 and furnished as in Tables 1403/1 to 1403/4
respectively; specifically the houses must have an internal floor area
comparable to Type I, II, III and multiple living accommodation as
specified under Clause 1403(a)(i) – (iv).

Upon completion of the contract the facilities provided by the Contractor

for the Houses for the Engineer and his staff shall become property of
the Contractor.

1404 OFFICE FOR THE ENGINEER

Replace the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1404(a) of the Standard
Specification with following:

Upon completionof the contract, the Engineer’s office equipment

specified herein shall revert to the Employer.

Delete 4th paragraph of Sub-clause 1404(a) of the Standard

Specifications and replace with following:

35
Adequate electric lighting shall be provided in each room of the office
building together with sufficient power points to supply the office
equipment.

The office building shall be provided with a Subscriber Trunk Dial (STD)
telephone line with Internet connection and extensions to all offices. A
separate dedicated telefax line shall also be provided. The telephone
lines shall be completely independent of the Contractor's. If STD line is
unavailable, provision of telecommunication facilities including Internet
connection may be by mobile phone and/or data operators through
monthly subscription.

The Contractor shall pay all charges associated with connecting and
establishing electricity supply and telephone and power lines, and shall
further pay all electricity and telephone consumption by the Engineer for
the duration of the Contract.

In the 5th paragraph of Clause 1404(a) of the Standard Specifications,

beginning with "The Contractor shall provide an access road.....",
replace "parking area" with:"shaded parking area".

Delete 1st paragraph of Sub-clause 1404(b) of the Standard

Specifications and replace with following:

The Contractor shall provide and erect for the duration of the Contract a
site office for the exclusive use of the Engineer’s staff.
The office building shall comprise an area of approximately 160 m2 with
internal access to the following rooms:

- 1 single man office of about 15 m2

- 3 single man offices of about 8.5 m2 each
- 3 double man offices of about 15 m2 each
- 1 meeting room of minimum 20 m2
- 2 store rooms of minimum 5 m2 each

The office building shall in addition be equipped with two flush toilets,
changing room and kitchen facilities.

36
 The kitchen area shall be provided with a fixed table for hot plates,
sockets for hot plates and refrigerator and a steel sink with running
water.

The building shall be constructed with a minimum of 2.8 m internal

headroom, and be complete with ceiling, linoleum tiled or wooden floor,
and a minimum 2.0 m wide covered veranda in front of the entrance to
the office. The rooms shall be adequately ventilated and lighted.

The Drawings include an acceptable layout plan for the Site Office, but
the Contractor may propose modified layout of the office building for the
approval by the Engineer.

Delete Sub-clause 1404(c) of the Standard Specifications in its entirety,

and replace with the following:

(c) Furniture and Equipment

The Contractor shall supply the following new furniture and equipment
for the offices of the Engineer and his staff:

Table 1404/1: Office Furniture and Equipment

S/No. Description Quantity
Conference table, minimum 3.6 m x 1.5 m, with 12 chairs 1
Round meeting table, 0.9 m diameter, with 4 chairs 1
Desk, minimum 1.8 m x 0.9 m, with lockable double chest of drawers 1
Desk, minimum 1.5 m x 0.75 m, with lockable single chest of drawers 10
Tables with smooth flat top, minimum 1.8 m x 0.9 m 4
Table for printers and scanner, minimum 1.2 m x 0.6 m 3
Swivel type sturdy and comfortable desk chairs 14
Visitors chairs (standard office chair including meeting room chairs) 20
Table lamps 15
Waste paper baskets 15
White board with accessories 2
Wall boards 2.4 m x 1.2 m 8
Steel filing cabinets, 1300 mm high, 460 mm wide and 600 mm deep, each 6
fitted with four lockable drawers on runners.
Steel general purpose lockable cabinets with shelves with at least 1.5 sq.m. 6
shelf area

37
Steel drawing cabinets suitable for storing all contract drawings 2
Filing trays 12
Desktop Computers 27” All In One Touch Screen 7760 UHD 4K 10
with Articulating Stand with 8th Gen Intel Core i7-6700, Memory 32GB / 1TB
PCIe SSD / Touch / AMD R9 M485X 4GB GDDR5. At least 5 USB ports, with
HDMI out, SD car, Thunderbolt 3, 10/100/1000 Ethernet, and Operating System
– Windows 10 Business or latest supplied with UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply) Unit 1 kVA with surge protector, capable to support and back-up each
PC.
Laptop computer (space gray colour) Intel Core i7 (2.9 GHz Turbo boost up to 4
3.9GHZ), with minimum 512 GBPCLe-based onboard SSD configurable to 2TB
SSD, 16GB RAM of 2133 MHZ LPDDR3 onboard memory, Fullsize backlit
keyboard with Force Touch trackpad, 802.11ac Wi-Fi networking, Etrhernet,
Bluetooth 4.2 wireless technology, HD camera, Thunderbolt 3 digital video
output, USB-C to (1.USB, 2.Digital AV, 3.VGA and 4.Gigabit Ethernet
adapters), up to 30 days standby time,15.4" LG Ultrafine 4K display, wireless
blue tooth, Gigabit Ethernet and
WLAN. At least 3 USB ports, macOS High Sierra,
Office2013 or latest versionandBlack leather carryingbackpack for use by the
Employer

38
Laptop computer 8th Gen Intel Core i7 (2.7 GHz), with minimum 512 SSD, 2
16GB Memory, DDR4 RAM Dual Layer DVD +/- RW Drive,
15.4" wide screen LED, wireless blue tooth, Thunderbolt, Gigabit Ethernet, built
in HD webcam with four microphones and
802.11a/g/n WLAN. At least 3 USB 3.0 & 2.0 ports, Windows 10 professional,
Office2013 or latestandcarryingcase. (1 for the Employer)

The tendered amount shall include for the maintenance of the desk top and
Laptop computers throughout the Contract period.
All desktop and laptop computers shall be supplied with one latest version of
the following software:
MS windows 10 or higher or mac OS Sierra or higher
MS office professional. (Latest Version)
MS Project and/or Primavera licences (latest versios), one for Windows and the
other for macOS
Approved virus detection software with update support.
Lap link for windows with associated cable
Microstation SS3 or AutoCAD 2019/2021 with corporate licences for Windows
and macOS with mínimum of 20 users for each operating software.
Road design software compatible with the design or as approved by the
Engineer e.g. Civil3D (Autodesk) appropriate for supplied MS Windows and
macOS with (2 corporate licenses for mínimum of 20 Users for each operating
system)
Software package for downloading and processing of survey data compatible
with the surveying instrument.
Laser printerwith speed of 22 / 11 pages per minute for A4 / A3 and a resolution 3
of 1200x1200 dpi with paper tray for both A4 and A3 including stationery for the
duration of the Contract.
Colour laser printer, with speed of 28 / 14 pages per minute for A4 / A3 and a 1
resolution of 1200x1200 dpi with paper tray for both A4 and A3 including
stationery for the duration of the Contract.
Photocopier, with speed of 35 pages per minute, resolution 1200 x 1220 dpi 1
including paper and other supplies for the duration of the Contract.
Facsimile transmitting machine (approved by the Engineer) 1
Plotter, HP DesignJet 750 or approved similar type, including provision of 1
paper, inks and maintenance of the machine for the duration of the Contract.
Digital flatbed scanner, including USB cable. 1
Electronic calculators 12
Handheld GPS (Garmin eMap) or latest (1 for the Employer) 3

39
Digital camera, min. 20.1 mega pixels and min. 64 GB SDXC memory card, 2
Dual Battery Kit plus full accessory bundle (1 for Employer personnel)
Powerpoint overhead projector, wireless, full HD 1080p, 2500 lumens color 2
brightness, 2500 lumens white brightness (white colour light output), 2xHDMI
(1MHL), Miracast, 3LCD projector with SXGA (1280 x 1024), contrast ratio
60,000:1 (1 for Employer)
Binding machine (1 for the Employer) 2
Paper punches i(1 heavy duty and 11 standard size punch machine) 12
Paper staplers (2 heavy duty and 10 standard size) 12
Paper shredder (heavy duty), 1 for the Employer 2
Rain gauges 3
Thermometer (max/min) 2
First aid and snake bit kit 2
Fire extinguishers (dry type) 4
Ceiling fans or portable fans as agreed with the Engineer 9
Air conditioners, 12,000 BTU/hr 9
Safe, min. size approx. 0.8 m x 0.5 m x 0.4 m, to be concreted in place (either 1
wall or floor mounted) complete with lock and keys.
Refrigerator (minimum 200 litres), one for the Employer’s personnel 2
Twin hot plates 1
Microwave Oven combi Sage or similar Turntable, 34 litre, outer Dim 2
305x515x445mm, interior Dim 206x325x333mm, crisp pan, weight 15kg, 900W
power, convection oven/grill, push dials and buttons (1 for the Employer)
Electric kettle, Cuisnart CPK-17 or equivalent, 1500W (1 for Employer) 2
Water dispenser with hot cold functions (heating ≥ 90°C and cooling ≤10°C) and 3
rated voltage frequency 220-224~50HZ (1for the Employer)
Thermos jugs, 4.5 litres capacity (1 for Employer) 3
Set of plates, cups and glasses for 24 persons plus cutlery 1

40
 The Contractor shall supply all other necessary office equipment including
stationery, A4 and A3 size papers and consumables for the Engineer’s printers
in a quantity sufficient to complete the contract. The Contractor shall also
supplythe Engineer’s office with potable wáter.

The equipment to be supplied shall be new and of a make approved by the

Engineer. Acceptable makes shall be from well known and reputable
companies with spare parts supply outlets in Tanzania.

The site office shall be connected to a sufficient water and electricity supply.
The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning and maintaining the offices
and toilets and shall provide soap, towels and all necessary fittings and
cleaning materials.

1407 VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER

Add after the first paragraph in Clause 1407 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

Unless otherwise agreed prior to signing of the Contract Agreement the

Contractor shall provide the following vehicles for the Engineer and the
Employer:

- 4nos. 4 Wheel Drive Station Wagon with Minimum Engine Capacity 3.0
litre diésel, Gear box 6 speed manual, Fuel Tank Capacity Minimum 80
litre or similar approved by the Engineer made from a Country
acceptable by the Employer.
- 7nos. 4 Wheel Drive Double Cab Pickups (Minimum Engine Capacity
2.8 litre diésel, 5 speed Manual Transmission, Fuel tank Capacity
minimum 76 litres or similar approved by the Engineer)

Replace the last paragraph of Sub-clause 1407 of the Standard Specification

with following:

The ownership of the vehicles provided by the Contractor as specified in

Clause 1407 of the Specifications shall revert to the Employer upon
completion of the Contract.

41
1409 PROVISION OF SURVEY EQUIPMENT
Replace the second paragraph of Sub-clause 1409 of the Standard
Specification with following:

The ownership of the survey equipment provided by the Contractor as

specified in Clause 1409 of the Specifications shall revert to the Employer
upon completion of the Contract.
Replace Table 1409/1 of the Standard Specification with following:

Table 1409/1: New Survey Equipment, to the Approval of the Engineer

No. Description Quantity
LEICA TS16P Total Station with angular accuracy of 1” (1 Second) or 2
latest make
Digital level, Leica NA&AK Automatic level 2
Trimble R10 GNSS receiver set or latest make 1 Set
Motorola 10Km TLKR T80 Extreme Twin Long Range two-way long 2 Sets
range Walkie-Talkies Two way Radio IPX4 set or later version
Wooden tripod, heavy duty 2
Aluminium tripod 2
Sectioned fibreglass levelling staff 4
Telescopic pole 5
Quick stand for telescopic pole 2
Circular reflector prisms with holders 5
Triple prism holder 1
Plug-in NiMH battery 3
PCMCIA-ATA flashcard, 16 MB 2
Rapid battery chargers 2
Steel tape, 50 m 2
Steel tape, 25 m 5
Fibre-glass tapes, 50 m 4
Ranging rods, 2.5 m long 12
Optical square 1
Steel hammers (4 kg) 2
Spirit levels for staves 6
Metal pocket tapes (5 m) 10
Surveying umbrella 2
Reflective road safety vests 12
Writing boards (field book frames A4 size with cover) 10

42
1410 LABORATORY FOR THE ENGINEER
Delete the first and second paragraph under Sub-clause 1410(a) of the
Standard Specifications and replace by the following:

Further to providing a laboratory for his own day-to-day testing supervised by

the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide, erect, equip and maintain for the
duration of the Contract a separate laboratory adjacent to the office of the
Engineer's Representative for the Engineer's independent testing. The
laboratory building for the Engineer and all furniture, equipment and apparatus
to be provided shall revert to the Employer upon completion of the Contract.

The Contractor shall operate and maintain his own laboratory during the
Contract Period, whereas the Engineer will operate the independent separate
laboratory, but the Contractor shall maintain the laboratory and provide the
necessary unskilled and skilled labourers including experienced laboratory
technicians as required for the Engineer’s independent testing. All costs
necessary for the provision and upkeep of these labourers (unskilled and
skilled) shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor.

The laboratory building for the Engineer shall comprise an area of

approximately 110 m2, comprising an office of approximately 10 m2, a store
room of about 15 m2,the rest being for testing purposes. Furthermore, a
minimum 15 m2 covered drying shed and minimum 2.0 m wide veranda along
the full length of the laboratory building shall be provided.

Replace reference to drawings in 3rd paragraph of Sub-clause 1410(a), with

the following:

The Contractor shall submit a proposed layout of the laboratory for the
approval of the Engineer.

Delete last paragraph of Sub-clause 1410(a), including Table 1410/1, and

replace with following:

The laboratory for the Engineer shall be complete with following furnishings
and equipment:

- Desks, minimum 1.8 m x 0.9 m, with lockable single chest of drawers 1

- Table with smooth flat top, minimum 1.8 m x 0.9 m 1

43
 - Table lamps 2
- Swivel type desk chairs 2
- Visitors chairs 2
- Waste paper baskets 1
- Filing trays 2
- Wall boards 2.4 x 1.2 m 1
- Steel cupboard with shelves 1
- Steel filing cabinet with 4 lockable drawers 1
- Shelves, 2 m long 2
- Air conditioner, 12,000 BTU/hr 2
- Portable fan 1
- Work benches 3
- Curing tanks 1
- Stools, 1 m high 4
- Stools, 0.4 m high 4

Delete Sub-clause 1410(b) of the Standard Specifications in its entirety, and

replace with following:

The equipment and apparatus to be provided for the separate independent

Engineer's laboratory shall be new and shall permit the execution of the
AASHTO, ASTM, SABS and BS standard tests mentioned in these Special
Specifications. Such tests include, but not necessarily limited to, those
summarized in Table 1402/1, Table 1402/2 and Table 1402/3 below.

However, testing equipment shall not be provided for specialized tests

indicated with an asterix in the tables. Such specialized tests may be
performed at authorised testing institutes approved by the Engineer.

44
Table 1402/1: Applicable Standard Tests for Soils, Gravel and Cement
Treated Materials

CML Name of Test Test Method

1.1
No. Moisture Content BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.2 Liquid Limit (Cone Penetrometer) BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.3 Plastic Limit & Plasticity Index BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.4 Linear Shrinkage BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.5 Particle Density Determination - BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.6 Bulk Density for undisturbed
Pyknometer BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.7 Particle
samples Size Distribution - Wet BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.8 Particle
sieving Size Distribution - BS1377:Part 2:1990
1.9 Compaction Test - BS Light and
Hydrometer Method BS1377:Part 4:1990
1.10 CBR Test - One point method
BS Heavy BS1377:Part 4:1990
BS1377:Part 4:1990 &
1.11 CBR Test - Three point method
TMH1:method A8:1986
Organic Content - Ignition Loss BS1377:Part 3:1990 &
1.16
Method NPRA 014 test 14.445
1.18 pH Value (pH meter) BS1377:Part 3:1990
1.19 Preparation of Stabilised Samples BS1924:Part 2:1990 &
for UCS TMH1:method A14:1986
1.20 Compaction Test - Stabilised BS1924:Part 2:1990 &
Materials TMH1:method A14:1986
1.21 UCS of Stabilised Materials BS1924:Part 2:1990 &
TMH1:method A14:1986
1.22 Initial Consumption of Lime - ICL BS1924:Part 2:1990
Density of Soil In-place by Sand AASHTO T 191
Density of Soil In-place by Nuclear
Cone Method AASHTO T 238
Method

45
Table 1402/2: Applicable Standard Tests for Aggregates and Concrete
CML Name of Test Test Method
2.1
No. Moisture Content of Aggregates BS562:Part 109:1990
2.2 Relative Density and Water BS562:Part 2:1975
2.3 Sieve Tests on Aggregates
Absorption BS562:Part 103.1:1985
2.4 Flakiness Index (FI) and Average BS562:Sect. 105.1:1989
2.5 Elongation Index (ALD)
Least Dimension BS562:Sect. 105.2:1990
2.7 Ten Percent Fines Value (TFV) BS562:Part 111:1990
2.9 Los Angeles Abrasion Test (LAA) ASTM C535-89
2.10 Sodium Soundness Test (SSS) * ASTM C88-90
2.11 Slump Test BS1856:Part 102:1983
2.12 Making of Concrete Test Cubes BS1856:Part 108:1983
2.13 Concrete Cube Strength BS1856:Part 116:1983
Quality of Water to be used in * BS3148
Polished
Concrete Stone Value * BS562:Part 114
Soluble Chloride Content * BS562:Part 117
Organic Impurities in Sands for AASHTO T 21
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
Aggregate AASHTO T 112
Sand Equivalent
in Aggregates AASHTO T 176
Cement Content AASHTO T211
Washable Particles ASTM C 117

Table 1402/3: Applicable Standard Tests for Bituminous Materials

CML No. Name of Test Test Method
3.1 Preconditioning of Bitumen NPRA 014 test 14.511
Samples Prior to Mixing or
Testing
3.2 Density of Bituminous Binders ASTM D70-97
3.3 Flash and Fire Point by Cleveland ASTM D92-90
Open Cup
3.4 Rotating Thin-Film Oven Test AASHTO T 240
(RTFOT)
3.5 Penetration of Bituminous ASTM D5-86
Materials
3.6 Softening Point Test ASTM D36-70
3.7 Ductility ASTM D113-86
3.8 Viscosity Determination using ASTM D4402-91
Brookfield Thermosel Apparatus

46
CML No. Name of Test Test Method
3.9 Density and Water Absorption of ASTM C127-88
Aggregates Retrieved on a 4.75
mm Sieve
3.10 Density and Water Absorption of ASTM C128-88
Aggregates Passing the 4.75 mm
Sieve
3.11 Calibration of Glass Pycnometers NPRA 014 test 14.5922
(0.5-1 litre)
3.23 Effect of Water on Bituminous ASTM D3625-96
Coated Aggregates, Boiling Test
Sand Equivalent AASHTO T 176
Distillation of Cut-back Asphaltic AASHTO T 78 and
Products ASTM D 402
Moisture and Volatile Distillates AASHTO T 110 and
ASTM D 1461
Superpave PG Characterisation, * PP6-93
all relevant tests
Short Term Ageing PP2-94
Gyratory Compaction TP4-93
Recovery of Asphalt AASHTO T 170
Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts * AASHTO T 201 and
ASTM D 2170
Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum * AASHTO T 202 and
Capillary Viscometer ASTM D 2171
Degree of Pavement Compaction AASHTO T 230
Wheel Tracking Test * Hamburg-standard
TV62/652.010-10
Stripping and Coating * See Sub-clause
4202(d)(i) of these
Specifications

Note: Tests marked by an asterix may be carried out at an authorized testing

institute approved by the Engineer, who also may accept manufacturer’s
specifications and certificates of test results.

47
 Costs associated with performance of the above special tests in asterix
(including transportation of samples and Engineer’s and Employer’s personnel
and upkeep during witnessing of testing) are assumed to be built in the
Contractor’s rates.

The Contractor shall within thirty (30) days of the date of the order to
commence submit to the Engineer for his approval a detailed lay-out plan of
the laboratory building together with a complete listing of all the equipment,
apparatus and supplies he proposes to furnish for the laboratories.

The laboratory including all required equipment to be provided under the

Contract shall be handed over to the Engineer in finished condition not later
than 4 months after the Engineer's order to commence the Works.
Construction of the Permanent Works shall not be commenced before the
Contractor has established the independent laboratory for the Engineer as well
as his own laboratory to the satisfaction of the Engineer, including the relevant
test equipment.

1412 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add the following at the beginning of Clause 1412 of the Standard
Specifications:

Only those costs that are covered by pay items listed in Bill No.1 - General will
be paid for separately and in accordance with Clause 1412 of the Standard
Specifications. All other applicable costs related to Clause 1400 of the
Standard Specifications shall be deemed included in the General Obligations
of the Contractor.

Add the following new Pay items :

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS.14.02 Provide for Airtime charges for Twelve (12) nos.
(c) Mobile phones for the engineers office, limited to PS
Tshs 5,000/= per telephone per day.
SS.14.02 Allow Contractor’s overhead over the above item
(d) 14.02(c) %

48
In clarification to Pay items 14.05 & 14.06 of the Standard Specifications the
following applies:

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

14.05 FWD Station Wagon for the Engineer
(a) Provide four (4) vehicles for the Engineer L.S.
(b) Operate and maintain vehicles for an average of 4500 veh.x mth
km per month
(c) Operate and maintain vehicles for travel distance in km
excess of average 4500 km per month
14.06 FWD Double Cab Pick-up for the Engineer
(a) Provide seven (7) vehicles for the Engineer L.S.
(b) Operate and maintain vehicles for an average of 4500 veh.x mth
km per month
(c) Operate and maintain vehicles for travel distance in km
excess of average 4500 km per month

Payment for operating and maintaining vehicles under ITEMS 14.05 and
14.06, SUBITEMS (b) and (c) above, for the Engineer, his staff and the
Employer’s, will be made as follows:

(i) By rates per vehicle month, SUBITEM (b). Such rates shall include for the
first 4,500 km per vehicle travelled in any calendar month. Should a vehicle be
used for less than 4,500 km in a particular month, then the unused distance
shall be offset against months when the distance travelled exceeds 4,500 km.
(ii) By a rate per km, SUBITEM (c), over and above the first 4,500 km per
vehicle travelled in any one calendar month, subject to the condition
mentioned in (i) above.

The rates bid by the Contractor shall include for provision of the vehicle all
licensing, insurance, fuel, lubricants, maintenance and repairs, drivers salaries
and allowances and replacement of the vehicles should this be considered
necessary by the Engineer.

All payments are subject to deduction of Retention Money, as provided in the

Conditions of Contract”

49
1500 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC
1502 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Replace the text in Sub-clause 1502(a) of the Standard Specifications
with the following:

The Contractor will be given possession of the BRT Phase 4 corridor on

the Commencement Date subject to completion of compensation of
affected properties within the construction corridor. However, the
Contractors attention is drawn to Sub-clause 1202(d) of the
Specifications as regards to relocation of existing services that, in
certain instances, can be relocated only after the Contractor has
advanced sufficiently. The Contractor's programme of works must allow
sufficient time for relocation of such existing services.

Add the following paragraph at the end of Sub-clause 1502(b) of the

Standard Specifications:

Notwithstanding that the Contractor may, as part of his tender, have

submitted a proposal for accommodation of traffic, the Contractor is
required to submit together with the Programme of Works referred to in
Clause 1204, a detailed plan for the maintaining of public traffic for the
Engineer's approval.

1503 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC-CONTROL FACILITIES

Delete all references to "as shown on the Drawings" in Clause 1503.
The Contractor shall present suitable proposals for the approval of the
Engineer.

Include the following bullet at the end of Sub-clause 1503(a) of the

Standard Specifications:
- Traffic-control signs shall be erected in accordance with the
requirements of the Traffic Police and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

1504 CONSTRUCTION OF DEVIATIONS

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1504(b) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

50
 If deviations for certain sections of the project road are proposed by the
Contractor, the cleared width of the deviations accommodating two-way
traffic shall be not less than 9 m and they shall be constructed to a
formation width of 7 m. Where diversions consist of two separate one-
way lanes, the minimum cleared width and formation width of each lane
shall be 7 m and 4 m respectively.

The temporary traffic diversions shall have a minimum horizontal radius

of 30 metres and a maximum gradient of 8 percent unless otherwise
agreed to by the Engineer in exceptional cases.

1507 GRAVELLING OF DEVIATIONS OR EXISTING ROADS USED AS

DEVIATIONS
Add at the end of Clause 1507 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

Gravelling shall be carried out where instructed by the Engineer, who

will take due cognisance of the season during which the deviation is to
be operational.

1510 RIDING QUALITY AND MAINTENANCE OF DEVIATIONS AND

EXISTING ROADS USED AS DEVIATIONS
Add at the end of Clause 1510 of the Standard Specifications the
following
Deviations shall be maintained to a standard that generally allows a
travelling speed of 30 km/h for all vehicular groups. Regular watering,
several times daily if necessary, must be carried out to minimise the
nuisance of dust.

1512 ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC WHERE THE ROAD IS

CONSTRUCTED IN HALF WIDTHS
Add after the first paragraph of Clause 1512 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The total length of half-width construction sections, where the other

roadway lane is open to one-way traffic only, shall at all times be
restricted to 500 metres in length and the distance between such
sections shall not be less than 2 km. Traffic control for short sections of
maximum 250 m in length of one-way traffic may be controlled by

51
 qualified flagmen and portable STOP and GO signs. Traffic lights shall
be used for longer sections unless otherwise agreed to by the Engineer.
Unless clear vision can be maintained at all times between the staff
operating the traffic control, communication shall be established through
radio systems (walkie-talkies).

1600 OVERHAUL
Delete Section 1600 in its entirety.Overhaul will not be measured and
paid for separately. The tendered rates for other items involving
haulage shall be deemed to include the cost of all haulage
requirements.

1700 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL

1700.01 Restriction on Depth and Spacing of Borrow Pits and Quarry site
In addition to the provisions of Section 1700 of the Standard
Specification, the following shall apply:

The final depth of any borrow pit shall not exceed 3m and the Engineer
shall have discretion to restrict the spacing of borrow pits to minimize
environmental degradation. Furthermore, all new borrow pits should be
established outside the 60m wide corridor of the Right of Way (RoW).
According to the Environmental Code of Practice for Road Works
(2009) prepared by the Ministry of Works, all borrow pits must be
established to a distance of at least 100m from centreline of the road.
So this requirement must be observed by Contractor.

The quarry site must be established far away from the major settlement
to a distance or periphery of at least 500m. Where necessary to
establish the quarry site near the major settlement all properties found
within the area of 500 m periphery must be evaluated for compensation
and ensure all affected persons have moved from the area before
excavation starts.

52
1702 GENERAL
In minimising adverse environmental impacts, the Contractor shall
perform his duties strictly in accordance with the Site-specific
Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMP),
which shall be approved by the Engineer and is to be prepared by the
Contractor following Contract award. The ESMP shall also be submitted
to the Employer for review and comments prior to implementation. The
ESMP shall reflect the present social and physical situation on the
project site, and shall be based on these Technical Specifications and
Conditions of the Environmental Impact Assessment Certificate (EIAC).

1703 LANDSCAPE PRESERVATION

Add after the second paragraph of Sub-clause 1703(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:
Topsoil shall at all times be preserved for later redistribution to the
disturbed areas such as borrow areas, haul roads, contractors yards
and all construction areas within the road reserve.

Add after the third paragraph of Sub-clause 1703(a) of the Standard

Specifications the following:

Certified seed is to be used when obtained from commercial sources.

Locally harvested seed may be used in conjunction with commercial
seed.

Replace last sentence in the last paragraph of Sub-clause 1703(a) of

the Standard Specifications by the following:

When available, well decomposed compost/manure should be preferred

to fresh manure.

Add at the end of first paragraph of Sub-clause 1703(e) of the Standard

Specifications the following:

Topsoil to be removed and stockpiled (windrows) for reuse after

closure.

53
1704 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1704(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

Special care with soil erosion control must be exercised, not only for
works within the road reserve, but also in opening and working borrow
pits, quarries, work camps and access roads. Operations in highly
erodible areas must be avoided.

1705 PRESERVATION OF TREES AND SHRUBBERY

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 1705(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:
In general no trees with a diameter of more than 0.25 m in a height of
1.0 m above ground level must be felled without the approval of the
Engineer.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 1705(c) of the Standard Specifications the

following

Where trees or shrubs for replacement are obtained from commercial

sources, such trees shall be stored on site for a period of 3 months in
order to acclimatise and harden prior to planting. The plants shall be
maintained by the Contractor during the entire period of the Contract up
to Defects Notification Period and the cost thereof shall be included in
the tendered rates.

Where trees or shrubs are obtained from selected areas on site and
transplanted to designated locations, such plants shall be maintained as
specified.

No separate pay ítem for 1703 – 1704 except Item 1705 with pay item
17.05 (c) and 57.09(b)(i). 50% of Payment for ítem 57.09(b)(i) should be
made upon planting the trees to be specified by the Engineer
(preferably Dodoma Tree) and 50% of the payment for this particular
ítem shall be released at the end of DLP.

SS1715 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY HSMP

The Contractor must describe in a separate document on Health and
Safety Management Plan (HSMP) which measures are to be taken to

54
obtain a good occupational health and safety standard at the working
sites before the start of construction. The HSMP should be approved by
the Engineer.

The plan must include but not limited to the following items:

Welfare measures at the site including accommodation. The plan

should include access to fresh drinking water, washing facilities, toilets,
shelters for use on breaks, etc.;
Separation of working area and traffic area (speed restrictions, marking,
fencing);

Breaking up of existing structures. This work is likely to cause exposure

to high noise levels, vibrations and dust. It must be described how
machinery is noise and vibration damped and which measures are
taken concerning personal protection (hearing protection, dust masks),
job rotation, etc.,’

Handling of raw materials (earthwork, gravel, crushed rock, sand).

Handling of the raw materials is likely to cause exposure to dust and
heavy manual handling. It must be described which measures are taken
to minimise exposure to dust (watering, dust masks) and which
technical equipment are used to reduce manual handling;

Building of new road bed. Exposure to noise, vibration and dust should
be reduced as best possible. Methods should be described in the plan;

Handling of asphalt. Handling of the hot asphalt can cause severe

burns. Inhalation of fumes can cause irritations of respiratory organs.
Fumes and bitumen are suspected to be carcinogenic. It must be
described which measures are taken to avoid skin contact, which first
aid equipment (should include easy access to water) are on site, and
how inhalation of fumes are minimized (working with the wind in the
back);

Similar considerations should be made on how to handle inflammable

materials and fire (fuelling must only take place at the work station);

55
Handling of hydrated lime and other activators and additives. Meas ures
to avoid skin contact and to minimise manual handling must be
described;

Handling of other materials causing dust development such as cement.

Measures to minimise manual handling and use of dust masks must be
described. Dust masks should be of a type with exhaust valves to make
them easier in use. Rubber masks with replaceable filters should be
preferred as they usually fit the face better than paper masks. Use of
replaceable filters also gives the opportunity to shift to other filter types
(dust filter, organic vapours and combinations);

Maintenance of vehicles and machinery (contact with solvents);

Instruction and training. To ensure that workers are aware of the

occupational safety and health risk, and of the measures described to
minimise these risks, instruction and training should be given.
Instructions must be given on the importance of using hearing
protectors and dust masks where the working environment has a high
noise level or with dust development. Information on health risks must
include (but not necessarily be limited to): malaria, bilharzia, yellow
fever, hepatitis, meningitis, hook worms, tape worms, intestinal
worms, giardia, amoebae, venereal diseases, scorpions, snakes
and stinging insects. Proper information to both local and foreign
workers will minimise the number of casualties and smaller accidents.
The occupation health risks connected to working with heavy
machinery, dust noises etc. are treated under the activities where they
are prevalent. The responsibility for the instruction and training must be
described;

All quarries and borrow pits shall be drained and kept drained and,
where they have been excavated so that they will not drain naturally,
they shall be kept pumped dry and back filled after work has finished;
and Responsibilities for health and safety on the site must be described
in the plan.

The Contractor shall provide, equip, maintain and operate a clinic on

site or make alternative arrangements with existing local clinic as
approved by the Engineer. Adequate first-aid stations shall be available

56
through-out the Works, and the Contractor shall erect conspicuous
notice boards directing where these are situated and provide all
requisite transport. The Contractor shall comply with the Government
medical or labour requirements at all times and provide, equip and
maintain base dressing stations where directed and at all times have
experienced first-aid men and dressers available throughout the Works
for attending minor injuries.

Reporting
The Contractor will produce the following reports to be submitted to the
Consultant and TANROADS/Engineering Monitoring Consultant.

Monthly progress briefs on implementation of Environmental and Social

Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMP) and Occupational Health
and Safety Management Plan (HSMP) issues for inclusion in site
meeting reports.

Quarterly reports detailing environmental, occupational health and

safety activities carried out, follow ups, etc.

Annual report detailing the implementation of Environmental and Social

Management Plan and Occupational Health and Safety Management
Plan (HSMP). The report should indicate methodology and activities
carried out under this project including lessons learnt, impact and
mitigation measures applied, improved or changed mitigation
measures, limitations faced, liaison with the Contractor and other
parties, etc.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Except as specifically included in the Bill of Quantities or otherwise
provided above no separate measurement or payment will be made for
any work included in this section, the relevant cost of all these
requirement are deemed to have been included by the Contractor in his
rates in the Bill of Quantities for other items of work.

57
 Add the following new Pay items
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
Provide for Compliance with provisions for Environmental and Social
Management Plans (ESMP's) for compliance with the general
SS 17.01 requirements of Clause 1700 of the Standard Specification (Payment
shall be based on the proportion of certified value of executed works
on each certificate)
To cover for compliance with the provisions for temporary soil
(a) Months
erosion control during construction period (Section 1704)
To cover for compliance with the provisions for prevention of water
(b) Months
pollution during construction period (Section 1706)
To cover compliance with the provisions for dust abatement during
(c) Months
construction period (Section1708)
Allow for contractor's overhead and profits as a percentage of
(d) %
subitem 17.01 (a) to ( c )

SECTION SS.1800: HIV/AIDS AND CHILD ABUSE

1) SCOPE
This specification sets out the Contractors obligations with regard to on-
site HIV/AIDS awareness campaign and preventive measures which
are to be instituted. The protection of children against sexual abuse and
labour exploitation are also included.

2) HIV/AIDS CONSIDERATIONS
Given the increasing seriousness of the HIV/AIDS problem and the
perception that roads and personnel involved in road works serve as
one of the principal means of the virus moving from one part of the
country to another, the Employer is integrating HIV/AIDS issues into all
of its activities.

Road works staff has been identified as a vulnerable group by the

Employer and the National Strategic Plan on HIV/AIDS.
The Contractor is required to initiate an awareness campaign targeting
all persons involved on the Contract.

The Contractor is also required to institute an AIDS/HIV prevention

program. As part of the programme he will make available condoms to
all personnel employed on the contract.

58
The Contractor shall keep detailed records of the number of condoms
issued, copies of which shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly
basis.

3) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
HIV/AIDS, STIS and STDS Prevention and Awareness Programs
The Contractor shall institute an HIV/AIDS, STIs and STDs prevention
and awareness campaigns amongst his workers for the duration of the
contract.

As part of the campaign the Contractor will be required to display AIDS

awareness posters in all buildings frequented by workers employed on
the contract, where such building fall under the control of the
Contractor.

Aids awareness shall also be included in the orientation process of all

workers employed on the contract.

As part of the campaign the Contractor will be required to make

condoms available to his workers. The price to the workers shall be as
specified in the Employer’s Requirements.

The sexual abuse and exploitation of children will form part of this
campaign.

HIV/AIDS Training
Introduction
HIV/AIDS is having a significant and increasing impact in Tanzania.
Interventions that stimulate the movement of people are likely to
increase both exposure to the HIV virus and the spread of the virus.
Road construction has been identified as one such intervention.

MOID policy is to integrate HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention

activities into all road construction and rehabilitation programs.

The Rehabilitation/upgrading of the road will involve local labour,

contractor labour, and local contractor. It is a contractual requirement
that HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention activities are carried out

59
during the construction period. This specification provides details of
these requirements.

Objective
The objective is to reduce the risk of exposure to and spread of the HIV
virus in the area of the construction. The target group will be local
labourers and their supervisors employed by the works contractors. The
wider community will benefit indirectly through their normal day-to-day
interaction with the target group.

Scope of activities
Activities for HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention will be broad based
targeting both individuals and groups. They may consist of:
(i) Information posters in public places both on and off site (eating
places, bars, guest houses, etc.)
(ii) Availability of socially marketed condoms for purchase
(maximum 100 Shillings each).
(iii) Peer educators (reference people) drawn from the local labour
and trained in HIV/AIDS issues for discussions with colleagues
(estimate 1 per 100 employees).
(iv) Small focus group discussions and information covering key
issues.
(v) Theatre groups and video presentations.
(vi) Promotional events (such as football matches) to encourage
openness and discussion of HIV/AIDS issues.
(vii) Promotional bill boards to raise awareness of the integration of
road construction and HIV/AIDS activities.
(viii) Inclusion of HIV/AIDS activities at site meetings, other
discussions, and with the Community Liaison Committee.
(ix) Availability of promotional materials such as T-shirts, caps,
bumper stickers, key rings, etc.

The scope of activities may be tailored as required to meet the

perceived needs and priorities of the labourers, determined by
participatory approaches, to ensure they are appropriate, desired and
have a public health impact. The scale and frequency of activities may
also be adjusted to suit requirements of the target group.

60
 Education will cover:
• Preventive behaviours including partner reduction, condom use, and
awareness and importance of treatment of stis
• skills including negotiating safer sex, correct condom use, purchase
without embarrassment; and
• Referral to local health centres and services available.

Tasks to support the above activities will be to:

➢ Establish the status and focus of all current and planned HIV/AIDS
activities in the area to ensure complimentarily and determine potential
involvement in project activities.
➢ Carry out a brief review of regional activities combining road
construction with HIV/AIDS campaigns to determine options, best
practice, key issues, constraints, etc.
➢ Review of Information, Education and Communication (IEC) materials
available and their relevance to road construction, making
recommendations for future development of IEC materials.
➢ Provide education and training for site personnel, supervisors and peer
educators for the scope of activities as above.
➢ Provide supervision for peer educators to ensure sustained quality of
education. Incentives for their continual work may be small promotional
items such as T-shirts, caps, etc.
➢ Provide mechanisms for the social marketing of condoms and
distribution of materials.
➢ Monitor activities regularly to assess effectiveness and impact. This
should include an initial, interim and final assessment of basic
Knowledge, Attitude and Practices (KAP) taking account of existing
data sources and recognising the limitations due to the short timeframe
to show behaviour change. The KAP will be supported by qualitative
information from focus group discussions.

Collaboration
Representatives of local health authorities will be invited to attend training
and communication activities.

Activities on the construction site will be linked as far as possible with

ongoing HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention in the area. This will ensure
complimentarily of approaches, reinforcing education and minimising

61
duplication. In addition, these links will assure the target group access to
continued information after the end of the construction period.

Contractor Responsibilities
The Contractor and implementing organization will work closely together to
support the HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention activities. This will ensure
maximum effectiveness and integration with construction activities. Specific
but not exclusive issues are:

Scheduling of appropriate timing and duration for the implementation of

HIV/AIDS activities as part of work plan for labourers and supervisors.
Designated rest times such as lunch breaks and pay days should be
excluded.

Identification of suitable individuals for education from recruitment records

with the implementing organisation.

Provision of suitable sites for communication activities and for condom

distribution.

Monitoring of the implementation of peer educator activities.

Provision of support as necessary to the implementing organisation.

Inputs
An organization experienced in the provision of HIV/AIDS awareness and
prevention activities will be selected as a subcontractor to provide the
above scope of activities on behalf of the main Contractor.

Reporting
The implementing organization will produce the following reports to be
submitted to the Contractor, Consultants, and TANROADS/Engineering
Monitoring Consultants.
➢ monthly progress briefs for inclusion in site meetings.
➢ quarterly reports detailing activities carried out, issues, follow up, etc.
➢ a review report of activities in the road construction sector.
➢ a review report of existing IEC materials with recommendations for
development of materials specifically for the road sector.

62
➢ a final report detailing the methodology and activities carried out under
this project including lessons learnt, impact, liaison with the Contractor
and other parties, etc.

In addition, a report with the recommended approach for integration of

HIV/AIDS awareness and prevention activities in the road construction
sector will be produced. This will be a synthesis of project activities
including contractual approaches, communication activities, availability of
materials, liaison with existing organizations, etc. It will be developed with
all parties involved in the construction activities to ensure the wide range of
views and experiences is gained.

The final report and recommended approach will be presented to

TANROADS and other interested organizations.

Timing
Activities will commence at the start of the construction period and
continue throughout the 36 months to ensure a sustained impact.

Reporting and dissemination activities will continue for a short period

after the project is completed to ensure integration into current practice.

DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS18.01 Institute and Maintain HIV/AIDS Awareness Month
Campaign
The unit of measurement shall be the calendar month or part
thereof, measured over the duration of the campaign. The tender
rate shall include for providing a Health Officer to deal with HIV/AIDS
together with his/her transport requirements. The payment shall be
made monthly, pro-rata for parts of a month, from the date of
appointment of the officer until the completion of the Works or
substantial demobilization of the local workforce, whichever comes
first.

63
 ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS18.02 Institute and Maintain HIV/AIDS Prevention PS
Campaign
Payment shall include the cost of providing a clinic or make alternative
suitable arrangements, running the clinic, providing condoms as per the
specifications.

In addition, the Contractor will be paid for overheads and profit at a

percentage (%) rate of the expenses incurred.

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

SS18.03 HIV/AIDS Training PS

Payment shall be made for the actual expenditure incurred by the

Contractor for which receipted vouchers shall be produced. The
tendered rate shall include full compensation for equipment, labour
and material required for the provision of the services.

In addition, the Contractor will be paid for handling, overheads and

profit at a percentage (%) rate of the receipted expenses incurred.

2000 DRAINAGE
2100 DRAINS
2102 OPEN DRAINS
Add at the end of the first paragraph of Clause 2102 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

Open drain excavation shall also include excavating open drains to direct
runoff into and out of the drainage structure within the right of way or as
instructed by the Engineer. The open drains on downstream side shall be
to the lowest point. The excavation on the upstream side drainage structure
shall be made to ensure smooth flow to the inlet. Earthworks for
Longitudinal open drains excavated within road prism covered by Clause
3601.

2104 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE

Replace the first three paragraphs of Sub-clause 2104(a)(i) of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

64
Pipes for subsoil drainage shall be 125/112 mm diameter slotted corrugated
unplasticised PVC pipes complying with SABS 791 or equivalent.

Replace the penultimate paragraph of Sub-clause 2104(b)(i) of the Standard

Specifications by the following:

Unless the pipe at the higher end is connected to manhole or inspection

chamber, this higher end of the drain pipes shall be bend in 750 mm radii to
end 200 mm below ground level. A 500 x 500 x 100 mm Class 20/19 concrete
frame shall be cast around the pipe end, which shall be sealed off with a loose
concrete cap of Class 20/19 concrete as shown on the Drawings. The lower
end of the drain pipe shall be built into a Class 20/19 concrete headwall, 1000
x 500 x 200 mm, providing a positive outlet or connected to culvert drop inlet,
wingwall, inspection chambers or manholes. The complete system, together
with concrete outlet structure, shall be constructed in one process starting from
the outlet.

65
2107 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Change Pay Item 21.01(a)(i) and 21.03(a)(i) to read:
(i) 0.0 m up to 1.5 m cubic metre (m3)

Replace the first and second paragraph under Pay Item 21.02 by the following:

The unit of measurement shall be the linear metre of side drains cleared and
shaped.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for excavating soil material and
any vegetation to facilitate proper run-off and will generally involve deepening
the drains up to a maximum of 0.20 m including the disposal and haulage of
the excavated material and vegetation as directed.

Add Pay Item 21.19 at end of Clause 2107 of the Standard Specification as
follows:

ITEM UNIT
21.19 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric, square metre (m2)
150 g/sq.m.

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of area covered with
synthetic-fibre filter fabric.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and
installing the synthetic-fibre filter fabric, including wastage and overlap.

66
2200 PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
2204 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Replace the second and third paragraph of Clause 2204 of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

All prefabricated culverts shall generally be constructed under trenched

conditions.
2210 LAYING AND BEDDING OF PREFABRICATED CULVERTS

Replace the first sentence of Sub-clause 2210(a) of the Standard

Specifications by the following:

Concrete pipe culverts shall be laid on Class B bedding or as directed by the

Engineer.Concrete pipe culverts for cross/access culverts shall be laid on
Class A bedding and reinforced concrete surround concrete.

2215 SERVICE DUCTS

Add at the end of Clause 2215 of the Standard Specifications the following:

The duct marker block shall be constructed by Class 30 concrete with cross
sectional dimensions of 100 x 100mm and total length of 750mm.

2218 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Change Pay Item 22.01(a)(i) to read:
(i) 0.0 m up to 1.5 m cubic metre (m3)

Add at the end of second paragraph under Pay Item 22.03 in the Standard
Specifications the following:

The bid rate shall also include for jointing with existing pipes where culverts
have to be extended. Any concrete required for the jointing or for bedding,
haunching and surround will be paid for separately under Item 22.07.

Add Pay Item 22.07(f) at end of Pay Item 22.07 of the Standard Specification
as follows:

67
 ITEM UNIT
(f) Precast concrete end unit for 600 mm number (no.)
diameter access culvert including
reinforcement in accordance with the
Drawings

Add at the end of the penultimate paragraph of Pay Item 22.12 in the Standard
Specifications the following:

Plain concrete shall, for the purpose of this item, be deemed to include stone
masonry and brickwork.

2307 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Delete entire Pay Item 23.06 of the Standard Specification and substitute by:
ITEM Unit
23.06 Inlet, outlet, transition and similar concrete
structure for slope drains
(a) Concrete Class 25 including formwork cubic metre (m3)

Add Pay Item 23.16 at end of Clause 2307 of the Standard Specification as
follows:

ITEM UNIT
23.16 Slope drain of 300 mm diameter reinforced metre (m)
concrete pipe

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of completed slope drain as

constructed, including any overlap measured along the slope as laid but
excluding transition sections and inlet and outlet structures measured
separately.

The bid rate per metre shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing
and installing the completed slope drain as specified and all excavation and
the preparation of bedding, backfilling, formwork and finishing required.

68
2500 PITCHING, STONEWORK AND PROTECTION AGAINST EROSION
2508 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Add at the end of Pay Item 25.03 under Clause 2508 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

Grouted stone pitching to be provided in front of the erosion checks as shown

on the Drawings will be paid for separately under Pay Item 25.01(b).

Add Pay Item 25.08 at end of Clause 2508 of the Standard Specification as
follows:

ITEM UNIT
25.08 Reinforced concrete erosion cubic metre (m3)
checks including reinfircement
and formwork

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of completed slope drain as

constructed, including any overlap measured along the slope as laid but
excluding transition sections and inlet and outlet structures measured
separately.

The bid rate per metre shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing
and installing the completed slope drain as specified and all excavation and
the preparation of bedding, backfilling, formwork and finishing required.

2600 GABIONS
2602 MATERIALS
Replace entire Sub-clause 2602(d) of the Standard Specifications by the
following:

All wire used in the fabrication of gabions shall be galvanised in accordance

with the provisions of SABS 675 or equivalent, for Class A heavy galvanised
mild steel wire. The minimum mass of the zinc coating shall be according to
Table 2602/2 below:

69
Table 2602/2: Zinc coating
Nominal diameter of coated Mass of coating (g/m2 surface area)
wire(mm)
Below 2.2 245
2.2-2.9 260
3.0-3.6 275
3.7-4.0 290

The adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be such that when the wire is
wrapped six turns round a mandrel of four times the diameter of the wire, it
shall not flake nor crack to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by
rubbing with the bare fingers.

Replace entire Sub-clause 2602(e) of the Standard Specifications by the

following:

Wire mesh shall comply with the requirements of SABS 1580 or equivalent.
The wire mesh shall be hexagonal-woven mesh wherein the joints are formed
by twisting each pair of wires through the three half turns. The tightness of the
twisted joints shall be such that a force of not less than 1.7 kN is required
when pulling on one wire in order to separate it from the other wire provided
each wire is prevented from turning the applied forces and the wire are all kept
in the same plane.

The diameter of the wire and the size of mesh used shall be as follows:
Table 2602/3: Mesh size and wire diameter

Depth of gabion Mesh size (mm) Wire diameter (mm)

Mesh wire Selvedge
0.5 m and over 80*100 2.5 3.0
100*120 2.7 3.4
0.23 and 0.30 m 80*100 2.2 2.7
60*80 2.0 2.4

The shorter dimensions of the mesh shall be taken from centre to centre of the
twisted joints, and the larger dimensions shall be between the inside ends of
twisted joints.

70
2603 CONSTRUCTION OF GABION CAGES
Replace first paragraph of Sub-clause 2603(b) of the Standard Specifications
by the following:

The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of gabions, except the
bottom edge of diaphragms and end panels, shall be selvedge with wire as
specified in Table 2602/3 above.

3000 EARTHWORKS & PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR CRUSHED

STONE
3100 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOI
3102 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

Replace last sentence of the second paragraph of Sub-clause 3102(g) of the

Standard Specifications by the following:

Such timber shall not be used by the Contractor and shall remain the property
of the owner or legal occupants of the land unless otherwise agreed on with
the Engineer.

3400 BORROW PIT AND QUARRY ACQUISITION AND EXPLOITATION

3402 NEGOTIATIONS WITH LANDOWNERS, AUTHORITIES AND LEGAL
OCCUPANTS OF LAND
Replace the third paragraph of Clause 3402 of the Standard Specifications by
the following:

The Employer will refund to Contractor such payments, which he upon

authorisation by the Employer is requested to pay to Owners or Legal
Occupants of Land, and all lands so purchased shall be the property of the
Employer.

3404 OBTAINING BORROW OR QUARRIED MATERIALS

Replace first sentence in Sub-clause 3404(a) of the Standard Specifications by
the following:

Borrow pit and quarry plans are included in the Soils and Materials Report,
that has been issued for information purposes only and do not form part of the
Contract Documents. The purpose of borrow pit and quarry site information
given in the Soils and Materials Report is to illustrate the availability and

71
 quality of potential materials sources. Any assessment and conclusions made
by the Contractor based on the information provided is at his own risk.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3404(b) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

The Contractor shall in any case supplement the investigations undertaken by

or for the Employer, by field investigations with trial holeexcavations, sampling
and laboratory testing in particular to locate natural gravel of required quality,
all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If natural gravel of required quality
material cannot be located within the reasonable haulage distance, the
Contractor shall identify the most suitable natural gravel within the reasonable
haulage distance for mechanical stabilisation by mixing the natural gravel with
crushed aggregate Class CRS or CRR.

3405 OPENING AND WORKING BORROW PITS

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3105(a) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

Material required for the construction of pavement layers shall be stockpiled in

heaps within the borrow area. All stockpiles shall be of maximum size and
shape required by the Engineer (generally rectangular and of uniform height of
not more than 3 m and volume not exceeding 4,000 cubic metres). The
Contractor shall in his programme of works, allow for the necessary period of
time for testing and approval of stockpiled gravel before it may be used on the
road.
No separate payment will be made in regard to such stockpiling of materials.

3500 SELECTING AND UTILISING MATERIAL FROM BORROW PITS AND

CUTTINGS
3506 COMPACTION OF MATERIALS
Add additional Sub-clause 3506(d) at the end of Clause 3506 of the Standard
Specifications as follows:

(d)Site trials to confirm compliance with the Specifications

Full-scale laying and compaction of site trials shall be carried out by the
Contractor on all earthworks and pavement materials to be incorporated into
the Works, using the construction plant and methods proposed by the

72
Contractor. The trials shall be carried out with the agreement, and in the
presence of the Engineer's Representative.

The trials shall be carried out to enable the Contractor to demonstrate the
suitability of his mixing and compaction equipment to provide, lay and compact
the material to the specified density and level, and to confirm that the other
specified requirements of the completed earthworks and layers can be
achieved.

Each trial area shall be at least 100 metres long unless otherwise specified
and to the full construction width (half road width where appropriate) and shall
be laid to the specified depth for the material. It may form part of the
permanent works provided it complies with the Specifications. Any areas that
do not comply with the Specifications shall be reworked or removed.

The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting site trials and for
carrying out the appropriate tests on them. The trial on each pavement layer
shall be undertaken at least 21 days ahead of the Contractor's intended date
for commencing full-scale work on the particular pavement layer.

The Contractor shall compact each section of trial by the range of compactive
effort, which the Contractor is proposing and if appropriate, the following data
shall be recorded for each level of compactive effort at site trial:

The composition and grading of the material before the site trial;
The composition and grading of the material including stabilising agent, if any;
The moisture content at the time of compaction and the optimum moisture
content for the specified compaction;

The type, size, type pressures, frequency of vibration and the number of
passes of the compaction equipment;

The maximum dry density or target density as appropriate, measured on a

sample before and at intervals through the site trials;
The density achieved;
The compacted thickness of the layer; and
Any other relevant information as directed by the Engineer.

73
 At least eight sets of tests shall be made by the Contractor and the Engineer
on each 100 metres for each level of compactive effort. Provided all eight sets
of results over the range of compactive effort proposed by the Contractor meet
the specified requirements for the material, the site trial shall be deemed
successful. The above data recorded in the trial shall become the agreed basis
on which the particular material shall be provided and processed to achieve
the specified requirements.

If during the execution of the Works, the construction control tests indicate that
the requirements for the material are not being consistently achieved, then
work on the layer shall stop until the cause is investigated by the Contractor.
Such investigation may include effect of using other compaction methods,
further laboratory tests and site trials on the material to determine a revised set
of data, as above, which when agreed shall be the basis on which all
subsequent material will be provided and processed to achieve the specified
requirements.

Agreement by the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a site trial shall not
relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to comply with the requirements of
the Specifications.

3600 EARTHWORKS
3601 SCOPE
Replace the first paragraph of Clause 3601 of the Standard Specifications by
the following:

This Section covers work in connection with the construction of cuts and fills,
the removal to spoil of material unsuitable for use or surplus materials not
required for fill or improved subgrade construction, the construction and
compaction of fills and improved subgrade layers with cut material from the
road prism or borrow material from approved borrow pits, the compaction of
the roadbed and finishing of cuts and fills, up to the stage where fills are ready
for the placing of the pavement layers.

74
3602 MATERIALS
Add at the beginning of Clause 3602 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The applicable climatic zone, as referred to in Table 3602/1, shall be the wet
climatic zone.

3604 PREPARATION OF ROADBED

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3604 (a) (ii) Wet Material

No payment will be made for replacing material, if the materials become

unstable after exposing it to traffic (public or construction traffic).

Replace the first sentence of Sub-clause 3604(b)(i) of the Standard

Specifications by the following:

Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the

roadbed shall be scarified, watered or dried to adjust the moisture content to
within OMC 2%.

3605 EMBANKMENTS
Replace the first sentence of Sub-clause 3605(c) of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

Where the natural cross fall of the roadbed or the existing or already
constructed embankments exceeds 30%, the fills shall be bonded to the
roadbed by means of benches excavated in the roadbed or existing
embankment.

Add the following new Pay items

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS 36.05 Rock fill to Unsuitable areas
36.05 (h) Rock fill to unsuitable areas cu.m

3610 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT

Replace the last sentence in first paragraph after Pay Item 36.01 in Clause
3610 of the Standard Specification by the following:

75
 Measurement of common excavation to spoil shall exclude any quantity of
material already paid for under other bill items and shall only be applicable for
either material deemed by the Engineer to be unsuitable for the Works or
surplus material not required for fill or improved subgrade construction.

3700 PAVEMENT LAYERS OF NATURAL GRAVEL

SS.3705 Maintenance of Existing Roads
In modification to what is provided in Section 3705 (a) (and in fulfillment
of the provisions of SS 1510) the following applies:

The Contractor shall soon after been given possession of Site carryout
a general repair of the existing roads as shall always be instructed by
the Engineer. This work shall be paid from Items 37.03 and 37.04 as
appropriate. The Contractor shall also comply with requirement of
Clause 1500 of the Standard Specifications for the entire duration of the
Project execution.

3800 STABILISATION
3802 MATERIALS
In Clarification to what provided in Article 3802 (a) and (b), the most suitable
type of stabilizer is Portland cementwith ordinary early strenght (EN 197-CEM1
32.5N)
Replace Ordinary Portland Cement with Protland Cement; and TZS 177:1999
and BS 12 in Clause 3802(a) (ii) by TZS 727:2002 and EN 197:2000
respectively.

Add to Sub-clause 3802(c) of the Standard Specifications:

Deliveries of cement shall be accompanied by the Manufacturer's Certificate

for each batch. In addition to the requirements given in ASTM 150C, the
Certificate shall provide the following information:

The date of producing the cement;

All the required test results to document that the material is the specified type
of cement;
Batch number of the cement.

76
Replace Note 1 in Table 3802/2 of the Standard Specifications by the
following:

Note 1:
The unconfined compressive strength (UCS) shall be measured after 7 days
airtight curing and 4 hours soaking in water.

Add new Sub-clause 3802(e) and 3802(f) as follows:

(e) Water
Water shall be clean and free from injurious concentrations of acids, alkalis,
salts, sugar and other organic or chemical substances harmful to the finished
soil-cement mix. The water shall have a pH-value between 6 and 8.

If the water used is not obtained from a public drinking water main, tests shall
be required to prove its suitability.

If the suitability of a source of water in the opinion of the Engineer is doubtful,

the Contractor shall carry out comparative testing of strength with 10
specimens (compacted to the specified density and prepared with the Mix
Design Cement Content) prepared using distilled water and 10 specimens
using the proposed source of water. The difference in the average strength
after 14 days curing between the two sets of specimens shall not exceed 10%.

(f) Mix design

The Contractor shall - as part of his pre-construction testing - perform
complete mix designs for cement stabilised subbase course using material
from approved borrow pits on Lot 3 (at least one complete mix design for each
separate borrow area proposed).

Complete mix designs shall unless otherwise approved by the Engineer be

carried out (i) for each new borrow area; (ii) at changes in the quality of the
material within the borrow area; (iii) at changes in cement quality; (iv) at
changes in work method; or (v) when so instructed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall plan and execute all mix design testing in due course
prior to the planned use of the material in the Permanent Works. The results of
the job mix testing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval minimum

77
fourteen days before the intended commencement of the Trial Section or the
Works as applicable.

The mix design programme shall as a minimum include:

Moisture Density Relationship

The Contractor shall carry out complete moisture-density relationship using
Modified Proctor equipment as per CML test 1.20. The cement content
referred to in CML 1.20 shall be changed to three different cement contents,
e.g 2.0%, 3.5% and 5.0% (by mass of oven-dry virgin material). In addition to
these cement contents, OMC and MDD shall be determined for the approved
Mix Design Cement Content.

The Contractor is reminded that the compaction of the stabilised material shall
be delayed approx. 4 hours after the mixing-in of the stabiliser and water as
per standard.

Unconfined Compressive Strength (UCS)

One set of minimum three specimens each shall be prepared at each cement
content and corresponding Optimum Moisture Content (determined above); all
as described in CML 1.19. The compaction energy shall be reduced as
compared to CML 1.19 to prepare samples having the compaction degree
specified in Sub-clause 3803(i).

The sets of specimens shall be cured for 7 days airtight followed by 4 hours
soaking in water before the Unconfined Compressive Strength is tested.
Each set of specimens shall meet the minimum strength requirement of Table
3802/2.

Mix Design Cement Content

The cement content, that meet the minimum requirement of Table 3802/2 for
the stabilised material as approved by the Engineer, shall be the Mix Design
Cement Content. This may require inter- or extrapolation of the UCS strength
to estimate the Mix Design Cement Content.

UCS at 7 Days Curing

The Contractor shall prepare at least 3 samples at the Mix Design Cement
Content and compact them to the field density as described above.

78
 These shall be crushed after 7 days curing and 4 hours soaking. The total
content of stabiliser to be used for in-place stabilisation depends on the
application method. Where manual or mechanical "dry in advance spreading"
methods of cement are employed, the total cement content shall exceed the
nominal design content by 1%-point. Should the effect of this 1%-point
additional cement be considered detrimental, adjustment of the nominal design
content shall be made as approved by Engineer.

In case a cement-slurry mixer is used (Wirtgen WR1000 or similar), which

premix cement with water and injects the slurry into the mixing chamber of the
soil stabiliser machine, only the nominal design content and no additional
cement shall be used.

3803 CONSTRUCTION
Add at the beginning of Clause 3803 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

Construction of cement modified subbase Class C1 and CM shall be carried

out using a mix-in-place construction method with purpose-built equipment
capable of mixing-in the cement and water in full depth.

Construction of the cement modified subbase shall as a minimum comprise

the following operations but actual work procedures shall be defined during
trial section as these will depend on the actual choice of equipment by the
Contractor:

Obtain approval of the underlying subgrade;

Haul and spread imported borrow material to be stabilised;
Correction of the profile to the specified lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings and compact with at least one pass or more of a flatwheel roller;

Determination of the moisture content of the material to be stabilised and the

amount of water to be added to allow the material to be compacted as
specified;
Mixing-in cement using a soil stabiliser machine / pulvimixer capable of mixing
to the specified depth;
Compaction to the specified field density, lines and grades;
Curing of the compacted surface.

79
Replace Sub-clause 3803(a) of the Standard Specifications by the following:

Preparatory works shall be initiated at such time that it will be completed well
in advance of the programmed stabilisation operations. The preparatory works
shall comprise material testing and investigations, excavation and replacement
of unsuitable materials or other works as instructed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall include adequate time in his construction programme for
execution of such type of investigations and any pre-stabilisation work that
may be needed. Sufficient equipment for execution of the preparatory works
shall be available to match the capacity of the stabilisation operations.

The preparatory works shall be carried out daily by the Contractors soil
investigation team and shall in addition to the above operations include soil
investigations at intervals detailed in Table 3804/1 to classify the material to be
stabilised according to AASHTO M145 (Sieve Analysis, Atterberg Limits and
Free Swell). The Engineer may instruct new mix design investigations should
the soil classification differ from the approved mixes.

Proof-rolling of the surface in each lane by the heavy equipment, such as a 35

tonnes rubber tired roller or a loaded dual wheeled truck having axle load of
minimum 13 tonnes or as decided by the Engineer

Stringent depth control shall be applied during the pulverisation and

stabilisation passes.
The minimum compacted layer thickness shall be 150mm.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3803(b) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

Soil Stabiliser Machine:

The soil stabiliser machine shall, as a minimum, have the following features:
Capability of mixing to depths of at least 200mm in a single pass;
A drum that achieves at least 2.0 m of mixing width in a single pass;
The reworked material shall exit from the mixing chamber in a manner that
prevents particle segregation. If instructed by the Engineer a motor grader
shall be used to adjust the surface regularity after initial compaction of the
material.

80
The moisture content of the stabilised material shall after mixing-in the cement
and water be such that the specified compaction level can be reached. Any
section where the moisture content of the mixed material is too high to obtain
the specified compaction shall be rejected and immediately removed.

Throughout the process of mixing-in the cement and water, a uniform

thickness of the mixture shall be maintained. Any part of the mixture that
becomes segregated shall be removed and replaced.

The Contractor shall not mix in the cement and water on a larger area than he
will be able to complete and compact within the specified time limit.
Construction Joints

The Works shall be planned and executed in a way that will minimise the
number of longitudinal and transverse construction joints.

Full width working, without longitudinal joints shall generally be preferred. Half-
width working may be accepted by the Engineer where this is required to
maintain traffic on the other half-width.

The free edge of the first half shall be provided with sufficient over-width from
the theoretical edge of the stabilised area to provide confinement for the
compaction of the stabilised material.

Great care shall be exercised when constructing joints to ensure that all
material along a joint is stabilised, but also to avoid double-dosing along the
joint. Overlap into stabilised material more than 4 hours old will require
additional cement whereas the need for additional moisture may be less in the
overlap zone as compared to the untreated material.

Longitudinal Joints
To ensure complete reworking across the full width of the road, longitudinal
joints between successive cuts shall overlap by minimum 200 mm. The
overlap shall be larger if required to reach sound, well-compacted cement
treated material having correct level, crossfall and thickness. The overlap shall
be marked-out with cut lines.

The Contractor shall pre-mark cut-lines on the surface and the soil stabiliser
machine shall be steered so as to accurately follow the cut lines. All cut lines

81
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of the cut. Any
deviation in excess of 50 mm from the cut lines by the soil stabiliser machine
shall be rectified immediately by reversing to where the deviation commenced
and reprocessing along the correct line, without the addition of any further
water or stabilising agent.

Uniform depth of stabilising shall be achieved across the crown on cambered

sections of road.

The location of longitudinal joints should avoid the wheel paths of slow-moving
heavy vehicles.

The Contractor shall prepare a cut plan detailing each overlap where the
overlap shall be subtracted from the drum width to determine the effective
stabilising width for each cut. This in turn will govern the quantity of water and
cement to be added.

Transversal Joints
Overlap shall be made between transverse joints in successive cuts by the soil
stabiliser machine. The previously laid material shall be treated again. The
overlap measured from the centre of the milling drum shall be minimum 0.75m,
but larger if required to reach sound, well-compacted cement treated material
having correct level, crossfall and thickness. All cut lines shall be approved by
the Engineer prior to commencement of the cut. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the material at the overlap length is not becoming excessively moist thus
hindering proper compaction of the material.

Trial Section
The Contractor shall perform a trial section and submit a detailed Trial Section
Report with his observations and recommendations based on the trial. The
Contractor shall not be allowed to commence construction of the permanent
work until trial sections have been finished and the Trial Section Report
approved by the Engineer.

The trial section shall include at least the following:

Demonstrate that the equipment and processes that he has proposed in his
Construction Method Statement or intends to employ are capable of
constructing the stabilised layer in accordance with the specified requirements;

82
Determine the need for pre-pulverising passes in addition to the passes
required to mix-in of cement and water;

Determine the effect on the grading of the natural gravel materials by varying
the forward speed of the mixing machine and the rate of rotation of the mixing
drum;

Determine the sequence and manner of rolling to comply with the minimum
compaction requirement. This shall be confirmed by at least 4 in-situ
compaction tests for each roller pattern;

Determine the unconfined compressive strength at 7 days and 4 hours soaking

on field cores drilled from the trial sections. The number of cores shall be at
least as specified in Table 3804/1. Diameter of the cores shall be at least
100mm;

Determine the unconfined compressive strength at 7 days plus 4 hours

soaking on specimens prepared using stabilised material sampled from the
Trial Section. The number of specimens shall be at least as specified in Table
3804/1;

Each trial section shall be at least 50 m in length of full-road width and include
longitudinal and transversal joints. The transversal joints shall be both "fresh"
and "hardened". Should the Contractor make any alterations in the methods,
processes, equipment or materials used, or if he is unable to comply
consistently with the Specifications due to changes in the in-situ materials, or
any other reason, he may be required to undertake further demonstrations
before continuing with the permanent work.

Should the trial section not be satisfactory, the Contractor shall demonstrate
his capability to satisfactorily construct the pavement in subsequent trials
without additional payment.

The trial sections shall be carried out at locations approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare the subgrade and underlying layers in a way that
will resemble the actual conditions. The trial sections shall be removed and the
area restored unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

83
The trial section shall be constructed at least 14 days in advance of the
proposed start of the work. At least 14 days prior to the construction of the trial
section, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a detailed
Method Statement.

The Method Statement shall provide details of all activities including:

Equipment & personnel;

Sources and quality of materials;

Time-cycles of major field operations, including in-place reworking and
pulverisation, correction of the profile, determination of moisture content,
mixing-in water-cement slurry, compaction and curing;

Construction methods for transverse and longitudinal joints of each type (full-
width/half-width construction) that are to be included in the permanent work;
Quality control programme.

The quality control programme shall demonstrate compliance with the

Specifications and shall include sampling and testing of untreated material,
water, mixes and constructed layers. The minimum test frequencies specified
in Table 3804/1 shall be used - irrespective of the size of the trial section may
be smaller than the lot size specified in Table 3804/1. The programme shall
furthermore include a programme for calibration of nuclear density gauge
against the sand replacement method and testing the compaction of joints.

Approval of the Trial Section Report shall be given when a trial section
complies with the Specification. The Contractor shall not proceed with normal
working until the trial section has been approved and any earlier defective trial
sections have been removed, if so instructed by the Engineer.

When approval has been given, the materials, plant, equipment and
construction methods shall not thereafter be changed, except for normal
adjustments and maintenance of plant, without the approval of the Engineer.
Any changes in materials, plant, equipment, and construction methods shall
entitle the Engineer to require the Contractor to lay a further trial section as
described in this Clause to demonstrate that the changes will not adversely
affect the permanent works.

84
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 3803(c) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The target moisture content of the stabilised material should be the OMC, but
trial sections with the actual material might indicate that a somewhat drier mix
is preferable.

Add at the beginning of Sub-clause 3803(d) of the Standard Specifications:

Compaction shall be done by means of approved self-propelled, heavy,

compaction vibratory steel rollers and pneumatic-tyred rollers.

The mass and/or pressures of the rollers shall be adequate to ensure proper
full-depth compaction to comply with the specifications or surface finish and
density.

The sequence of compaction shall be defined during trial sections.

The final compaction shall be performed by the pneumatic roller equipped with
smooth type tyres.

Nuclear gauges shall be available to control the compaction equipment and

efforts.

Add before last paragraph of Sub-clause 3803(f) of the Standard

Specifications:

The curing method shall be method (ii) of the Standard Specifications i.e.
protection by covering the stabilised surface with the specified crushed
aggregate base course material, which shall be placed, compacted and kept
wet or damp until the prime coat for the asphalt layer is placed.

The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed layer until the next
layer is applied. In addition to frequent light watering to prevent drying-out,
maintenance shall include the immediate repair of any damage to or defects in
the layer and shall be repeated as often as necessary. Repairs shall be made
so as to assure that an even and uniform surface is restored after completion
of the repair work. The cost of such repairs shall be borne by the Contractor
even when damaged by early trafficking.

85
 Over-watering shall be avoided so as not to disturb the subgrade or cause
segregation to either the stabilised material or the protective layer, should the
protective layer form part of the next layer.

Plant used for application of water, dumping and spreading material on top of
the stabilised surface and any other work operations shall not damage the
stabilised layer. Any such damages shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer who may instruct that the damaged section be removed and
completely re-worked.

Replace the paragraph after Table 3803/1 in Sub-clause 3803(g) of the

Standard Specifications with the following:

No stabilisation work shall be permitted under the following conditions:

Where the underlying layer does not meet the specified requirements;
When the moisture content of the material to be stabilised exceeds its
optimum moisture content;
When rain is imminent;
After sunset;
When at any location the moisture content of the material to be stabilised is
too high or too low to allow compaction according to the specifications;
When the layer is soft, i.e. moving excessively under load

Excessive drying out or rain falling on the working area during the process of
stabilisation may be sufficient cause for the Engineer to order any affected
areas to be reconstructed at the Contractor's own cost

Should the in-situ material be too moist it shall be ripped and dried-out prior to
any stabilisation activity.

3804 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

Replace the paragraph with the following:

All sampling and testing shall be executed by the Contractor. Random

sampling shall be as agreed with the Engineer. Table 3804/1 contains
requirements for test frequencies.
The results for the untreated material shall meet the requirements of Table
3802/2.

86
Strength of Stabilised Material
No single value of the UCS measured on laboratory samples after 7 days
curing in airtight plastic bags and 4 hours soaking in water shall be less than
the minimum value specified in Table 3802/2.

The UCS strength of individual cores shall not be less than 90% of the
minimum value specified in Table 3802/2.

Table 3804/1: Scope and Frequency of Construction Control

Test Test method Testing frequency

Untreated Material:
Moisture Content CML 1.1 Min. 4 tests per production day
Particle Size CML 1.7 Min 1 test per material source, min 1 test per
Distribution km of road
Atterberg Limits CML 1.2 and 1.3 Min 1 test per material source, min 1 test per
km of road
Soil Classification AASHTO M145 Min 1 test per material source, min 1 test per
km of road
Organic content CML 1.16 Min 1 test per material source, min 1 test per
week

Water BS 1377:Part 3 Min 1 test per source, min 1 pH test per week
Mixtures: Every change in aggregate or design but at
least:
Moisture content CML 1.1 Min 3 tests per production day
Compaction test (BS CML 1.9 1 tests per week or at changes in material
Heavy) composition
UCS (7 days airtight CML 1.21 Min 4 per production day
cured and 4 hours
soaked)
Constructed layers:
UCS at 7 days age of CML 1.21 One core per 300m2; minimum 4 cores per
layer and 4 hours production day. Diameter of cores shall be
soaking of cores 150mm
Thickness of core Same cores as used for UCS
samples
Field density AASHTO T191 Refer Table 7110/1

87
 Test Test method Testing frequency
Cement content AASHTO T211 3 tests per day
Surface levels Full cross sections every 25m
Surface regularity Two longitudinal and two transversal
measurements every 25m or as instructed by
the Engineer

Layer Thickness
The average layer thickness measured on core samples for each day’s
production shall not be less than the specified nominal thickness and no single
values shall be less than the specified nominal thickness minus 10mm.

In-situ Compaction
The minimum required compaction density for the stabilised subbase layers
shall be as specified in Sub-clause 3803 (i).

Amount of Stabiliser
The average amount of cement in the treated material measured within each
lot shall not be less than the Mix Design Cement Content. No single values
shall be less than 70% or more than 130% of Mix Design Cement Content.

Surface Levels and Surface Regularity

As per Section 7100.

3805 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3805(a) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The stabilisation work, excluding the cost of supplying the stabilising agent,
shall be paid as full cost rate under Item 38.02.

The payment for the stabiliser agent is paid for under Item 38.03.

88
 Replace Sub-clause 38.05(c) of the Standard Specifications with the following:

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

38.02 Chemical stabilization, payment for full cost of providing:
38.02 (a) Stabilized Subbase Layer, Material Class C1 (200mm thick) cu.m
38.02(b) Stabilized Subbase Layer, Material Class CM (150mm thick) cu.m
Section 38.03 Chemical stabilizing agents:
38.03(a) Portland cement, Class 32.5 or above (for the above C1) tonne
38.03(c) Portland cement, Class 32.5 or above (for the above CM) tonne

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of stabilised material, the
quantity of which shall be determined in accordance with the authorised
dimensions of the layers treated as instructed by the Engineer.

The bid rates for chemical stabilisation under Item 38.02(c) shall include full
compensation for all preparatory work such as reworking, aeration and
homogenising the material to be stabilised, procuring all materials (excluding
stabiliser agent), breaking down, placing, spreading and mixing-in the
stabiliser agent, curing including any curing membrane, any extra water
required, and all materials, supervision, labour, plant, equipment, tools and
incidentals, compacting, testing the material including the protection and
maintenance of the layer, all as specified.

3900 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

3901 SCOPE
Add at the end of Clause 3901 of the Standard Specifications the following:

The crushed aggregate layers to be constructed shall be CRR as indicated in

the drawings.

3902 MATERIALS
Add at the end of Sub-clause 3902(d) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The grading of the crushed aggregate base shall be within and approximately
parallel to the grading envelope given in Table 3902/1 for a 50mm (coarse
type). If the Contractor is unable to achieve the required grading directly and
continuously from multi stage crushing, it will be necessary for him to screen

89
 the material into at least four fractions and reconstitute the material to conform
to the Specifications by mixing it together in a pug mill.

In all cases the material shall be conditioned by the addition of water in a pug
mill to bring it to the correct uniform moisture content for the compaction as
determined in the compaction trials. After the addition of water the material
shall be transported for laying and compaction without delay.

3903 CONSTRUCTION
Add the following paragraph at the end of Sub-clause 3903(c) of the Standard
Specifications:

Crushed stone base material, CRR shall be laid by an approved type of self-
propelled mechanical spreader and finisher capable of laying to the required
widths, thicknesses, profile, camber or cross-fall, without causing segregation,
dragging or other defects.

The paver shall be provided with skid beams and fitted with automatic
electronic screed controls which can even out local irregularities and ensure a
constant crossfall.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 3903(d) (ii) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The Contractor shall when considering selection of compaction equipment

(vibrating or static/pneumatic rollers) for compaction of the carriageway base
course, be aware of the possibilities for dynamic response from semi-rigid
subbase (the "anvil" effect) if vibrating rollers are utilised. He shall therefore be
equipped to execute the trial sections with a combination of various types of
compactors and, if necessary, to adjust the settings of the vibratory rollers or
his compaction fleet as required meeting the compaction requirements of the
Specifications.

90
4000 BITUMINOUS LAYERS AND SEALS
4102 MATERIALS
Add at the end of Sub-clause 4102 (c) of the Standard Specifications
the following:

The Contractor shall in his choice of curing membrane ensure a good

bond between the membrane and the cemented layer, possibly
requiring the use of cationic emulsified bitumen.

The use of cutback bitumen MC30 or MC70 complying with AASHTO

Designation M56may be used on approval of Engineer provided that
there is no detrimental effect to the cemented layer.

The cement-stabilised subbase is alkaline and to obtain a good

penetration and bonding of the curing membrane, the bitumen may
need to have slow setting or alkaline characteristics. CSS-1h complying
with AASHTO M208 may be used provided there is no detrimental
effect to the cemented layer.

Add the following Sub-clause 4102 (d)

(d) General
The Contractor shall submit samples of the bituminous material that he
proposes to use, together with a statement as to its source, character
and all laboratory test results as specified in AASHTO M56, AASHTO
M140 and/or AASHTO M208 and written approval shall be obtained
before supplying such material to Site. The Contractor is advised to
initiate this process in due time before the intended start date for use of
the material. The actual choice of material to be used on the stabilised
subbase shall be based on trial section.

The Contractor shall require the manufacturer or producer of the

bituminous material to furnish material subject to this and all other
pertinent requirements of the Contract. Only satisfactory materials, so
demonstrated by tests, shall be acceptable.

The furnishing of the manufacturer's certified test report for the

bituminous material shall not be interpreted as a basis for final

91
 acceptance. All such test reports shall be subject to verification by
testing samples of materials received for use on the project.

4105 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED OR TO RECEIVE A

CURING MEMBRANE
Replace the second paragraph of Clause 4105 of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

No more than 24 hours before spraying, the layer to be sprayed with

prime coat/curing membrane shall be cleaned by heavy mechanical
brooming. The brooming shall clean the surface of dust, loose,
segregated and foreign matters. The CRR shall be broomed until the
coarse aggregate is standing proud of the surface. A light spray of
water, sufficient to dampen the surface, might be uniformly applied to
the layer immediately before the application of the prime. If the water is
over applied the layer shall be allowed to dry until a uniform damp
surface is obtained.

4106 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT OR CURING MEMBRANE

Replace the second paragraph after Table 4106/1 in Clause 4106 of the
Standard Specifications by the following:

Prime coat shall be applied with a spray rate of 0.8 litre/m2 - 1.2 litre/m2
with MC-70 medium curing cut-back bitumen equal to a bitumen residue
rate of 0.4 litre/m2 - 0.6 litre/m2. For tender purpose a spray rate of 1.0
litre/m2 has been assumed. The exact rate of application, which may be
varied to suit field conditions, will be determined following trials to be
carried out by the Contractor. Those trials shall be performed to the full
satisfaction of the Engineer and shall not be less than 50m in length
and the full width of one lane.

Replace the third paragraph after Table 4106/1 in Clause 4106 of the
Standard Specifications by the following:

The total width of primed surface shall be 150mm wider than the
specified width of the bituminous surface dressing.

92
4107 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
Add the following at the end of Clause 4107 of the Standard
Specifications:

The prime coat shall be left undisturbed until it has penetrated and
cured sufficiently so that the wheels of passing vehicles will not pick it
up.
Where no convenient detour is available for traffic, operation shall be
confined to one half the roadway widths at a time. The Contractor shall
provide proper traffic control in order that vehicles may proceed without
damage to the primed area. The primed surface shall be inspected and
repaired, if necessary, prior to the next layer being placed if the surface
has been opened to traffic.

4108 TOLERANCES
Change the deviation allowed from 0.10 l/m2 to 10% of target spray
rate.

4110 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add the following after first sentence of first paragraph after Pay Item
41.02 in Clause 4110 of the Standard Specifications:

The quantity of binder applied shall be checked by weighing test trays

before and after application.

Add the following at the end of the second paragraph after Pay Item
41.02 in Clause 4110 of the Standard Specifications:

Including any blinding aggregate if the surface is opened to traffic.

Delete Pay Item 41.03.

4200A BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND ASPHALT CONCRETE

SURFACING
4201A SCOPE
Replace entire Clause 4201 of the Standard Specifications by the
following:

93
 This section covers all work in connection with the construction of hot
mixed bituminous concrete layers. These works include the procuring
and furnishing of aggregate, bituminous binder, mixing at a central hot
mixing plant, haulage, paving and compaction of the mixture, testing,
etc., all as specified for the construction of virgin hot mixed bituminous
materials.

The major asphalt works are outlined below:

Virgin hot-mixed Asphalt Concrete Wearing Course, SP 12.5 in 50 mm

thickness
Virgin hot-mixed Asphalt Concrete Binder Course, SP 19 in 80 mm
thickness Base Course, SP 37.5

The asphalt mix designs to be performed by the Contractor shall be

based on Superpave.

The Site laboratory shall be equipped to perform all tests specified in

this Section.

4202A MATERIALS
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 4202(a) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The coarse and fine aggregate shall be produced by crushing of rock

obtained by blasting of hard solid rock formation. The use of boulders
shall not be accepted. The crushing shall be by multi-stage equipment
in order to produce aggregates of angular shape.

Replace Sub-clause 4202(b)(i) of the Standard Specifications by the

following:

(b) Bituminous binders

(i) General
The various bituminous binders specified shall comply with the relevant
specifications as stated in Table 4202/1 or equivalent standards
according to the Specifications and on the approval of the Engineer:

94
(a) Replace Table 4202/1 with the following:

Table 4202/1 Specifications for Bituminous Binders

Type of binder Specifications
Performance graded asphalt AASHTO M320 Table 1
Penetration grade bitumen AASHTO designation M20 and EN 12591
Cutback bitumen AASHTO designation M56
Bitumen emulsions, anionic AASHTO designation M140
Bitumen emulsions, cationic AASHTO designation M208

The bitumen used for all asphalt concrete works shall be performance
grade bitumen as specified in AASHTO M320 Table 1.

A sample of the bitumen that the Contractor proposes to use in the

works, together with a certified statement by a recognised laboratory as
to its source and properties shall be submitted at least 60 working days
before the planned date of the asphalt works.

The certificate shall include all test data necessary to classify the
bitumen according to EN 12591. It shall further include the
manufacturer's recommendations for mixing and compaction
temperatures of bitumen with mineral aggregate in (i) the laboratory;
and (ii) in the asphalt plant and field paving.

No bitumen other than that represented by the approved sample shall

be used by the Contractor.
New test certificates and samples shall be provided for approval in the
event of changes in type or source of adhesion agent, bitumen grade,
crude oil source, refinery equipment or refinery method, or as deemed
necessary by the Engineer.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 4202(b) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

(iii) Pre-construction binder investigations

The Contractor shall immediately after signing of the Contract prepare
pre-construction binder investigations, including:

95
Identification of a capable and independent bitumen testing laboratory
for comparative testing of binders;

Collection of samples of potential bitumen's;

Documentation of sample origin;
The sample shall be accompanied with a signed certificate from the
manufacturer with the above-mentioned information and a declaration
that the sample to be tested is representative of their production and
that a corresponding product will be available to the project during the
construction period;

Presentation of a bitumen testing programme according to the present

Specifications; and Testing of the bitumen samples in accordance with
this Specification and forward the results to the Engineer for his
approval.
The documentation of sample origin shall include:

The refinery (name of owners(s) and full address);

Date and time of sampling;
Point of sampling (tank no., flow line valve, truck, drum, etc.);
Person responsible for sampling;
Production date;
Manufacturing method (direct vacuum distillation, propane precipitation,
etc.);
Feed stock data;
Batch ID no.;
Composition of product (raw materials, additives, etc.);
Product characteristics (penetration, softening point, etc.); and
Storage temperature.

“Replace entire Sub-Clause 4202(c) of the Standard Specifications with

the following:
Cement as active filler shall be used in the bituminous mixes. In no
instance shall more than 2% by mass of active filler be used in asphalt
mixes. Inert filler such as rock dust used to improve grading shall not be
subject to this limitation.

Active filler (Cement) shall have at least 70% by mass passing the
0.075 mm sieve, all passing the 0.600 mm sieve.

96
Active filler for use in bituminous courses shall be introduced to the mix
prior to wetting with the binder. Payment would be made separately for
Active Filler (Cement). Measurement & Payment would be made as per
item no SS.42.05. of these Special Specifications.”

Replace paragraph 4202(d) of the Standard Specifications by the

following:

All gradations of coarse and fine aggregate shall comply with the
requirements detailed in Table 4202/2 when tested in accordance with
the specified standards.

Table 4202/2 Aggregate requirements

Property Required Test Designation
Value
Two/one fractured faces – coarse 100% ASTM D5561
aggregate
Uncompacted void content of fine ≥ 45 AASHTO T 304
aggregate
Flat and elongated particles ≤10% ASTM D4791
Course Aggregate angularity 95/90 ASTM D5561
Fine Aggregate angularity ≥ 45% ASTM C1252
Water absorption – course aggregate (> ≤1.0% by mass CML 2.2, BS 562
4.75mm) part2
Water absorption – fine aggregate (< ≤1.5% by mass CML 2.2, BS 562
4.75mm) part2
Sand equivalent ≥ 45% AASHTO T176
10% fines value (dry) > 110 CML 2.7
10% fines value (wet) >75% of TFV CML 2.7
dry
LA Abrasion < 25% CML 2.9
Coating and Stripping of bitumen ≥ 95% AASHTO T156
aggregate mixtures
Sodium Sulphate Soundness < 9% CML 2.10
Plasticity Index Non-plastic CML 1.3

The grading of the combined aggregates including any filler added in an

approved working mix shall be within the limits stated in Table 4202/3
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T11 and AASHTO T27.
97
 The approved grading shall be designed as the target grading. The
mean grading of each lot of the working mix (mínimum of 6 tests per lot)
determined from samples obtained in a stratified random sampling
procedure, shall conform to the approved target grading within the
tolerances specified in Clause 4213.

(b) Replace Table 4202/3 with the following:

Table 4202/3 Aggregate gradation control points

4203A COMPOSITION OF MIXTURES FOR BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE AND

SURFACING
Delete entirely the contents of CLAUSE 4203: MIX DESIGN AND
PROPERTIES OF MIXED MATERIALS of the Standard Specifications and
replace with the following:

The Laboratory Job-Mix Formula for the Wearing Course shall combine
mineral aggregates, bitumen and, if required, filler using the test methods and
standards for Superpave mix design as detailed in the AASHTO T 312.

At least 30 days before beginning production of asphalt wearing course and

having received approval of the aggregates from the Engineer and delivery to
site of the approved bitumen, the Contractor shall make written proposals to
the Engineer for the Job-Mix Formula. These shall be based on Trial Mixes
prepared by the Contractor in the Site Laboratory in the presence of the
Engineer and all other mix design tests specified in this section.

98
The proposal shall further include information on storage, handling, mixing,
paving and compaction temperatures as detailed. The information in the table
shall either originate from certified test reports submitted by the Manufacturer
or be based on viscosity measurements as included in the “MS-2 manual,
latest edition”.

The Contractor shall perform the Superpave investigations on at least three

different gradations to optimise the mixes. A minimum of five different bitumen
contents each offset 0.5 percentage points shall be used for each aggregate
gradation. At least two bitumen contents shall be located below respectively
above the optimum bitumen content to enable sufficient data for graphical
interpretation of the volumetric parameters.

Full scale mixing, laying and compaction site trials shall be carried out by the
Contractor on all asphalt pavement materials proposed for the Works using the
construction plant and methods proposed by the Contractor for constructing
the Works. The trials shall be carried out with the agreement, and in the
presence of the Engineer, at a location approved by the Engineer. Following
laboratory and site trials by the Contractor, the Engineer will approve the
proportions of the working mix.

The Gmm value shall be tested and determined at all bitumen contents. The
loose mixture samples shall be short-term aged in accordance with AASHTO
R30 for two hours at the compaction temperature prior to compaction by the
Superpave Gyratory Compactor.

The Superpave design gyratory compaction effort shall be as follows:

Table 4202/4 Gyratory compaction effort

99
 The Design requirement for Asphalt Concrete employing Superpave Mix
Design to be as per the “MS-2 manual, latest edition”.

The gyratory measured sample heights at Nini, Ndes and Nmax shall be
reported together with mould diameter and mass of asphalt in mould allowing
calculation of Gmb at each densification level. Gmb shall further be
determined as per AASHTO T166 and a correction factor between calculated
and laboratory determined Gmb at Nmax shall be established. This factor shall
be determined for each production date.

Criteria for humburg wheel tracking test to be as given below:

Alternative to the Humburg Wheel Tracking Test

Traffic Level (mesa) Minimum Flow Number

<3 -
3 to < 10 53
10 to < 30 190
> 740

4204A PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Replace the last line in the second paragraph of Sub-clause 4204 (a) of the
Standard Specifications with:

Obsolete, worn-out or oil/fuel leaking plant will not be allowed on site.

Replace the first line in the first paragraph of Sub-clause 4204(c) of the
Standard Specifications with:

"All asphalt layers shall be paved by an"

Add the following at the end of Sub-clause 4204(f) of the Standard

Specifications:

100
 The Engineer may instruct that hauling equipment shall have an engine
exhaust system blowing the gas vertical not to cause inconvenience to the
paving crew.

4205A GENERAL LIMITATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS AND THE STOCKPILING

OF MIXED MATERIAL
Replace the first two paragraphs of Sub-clause 4205(c)(iv) of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

Where a new asphalt concrete layer shall be laid on an asphalt pavement

layer a tack coat shall be applied to the surface to be paved.

Tack Coat of 57% stable grade bitumen emulsion (K-1-60), spread rate of 0.4
litres per square metre. . The exact rate of application, which may be varied to
suit field conditions, will be determined by the Engineer following trials to be
carried out by the Contractor.

The requirements to workmanship, equipment, etc. shall be as specified in

Section 4100.

4206A PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE MIXTURE

Replace Sub-clause 4206(a) and Table 4206/1 of the Standard Specifications
with the following:

The manufacturer of the bitumen shall inform the maximum storage and
mixing temperatures of the approved bitumen.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 4206(c) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

The mix at delivery to the paver shall be not more than 10 oC below discharge
temperature at the mixing plant. The minimum temperature for the
commencement of breakdown rolling shall be determined on trial sections. Mix
loads of temperature less than the minimum temperature shall be disposed of.

If there is consistent failure to meet the temperature requirement the paving

operations shall be suspended until suitable measures are taken by the
Contractor to ensure that the temperature requirements are met.

101
4207A SPREADING THE MIXTURE
Add before Sub-clause 4207 (a) (i) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The asphalt plant mixing capacity, the asphalt haulage fleet, the operating
speed of the asphalt paver, the number of rollers, etc. shall be so coordinated
to ensure continuous paving to avoid intermittent stopping of the paver.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 4207 (a) (i) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The paver shall be equipped with 60°sloped side plates on the screed to
confine and to form a stable and neat permanent outer shoulder edge.
Spreading shall be so arranged that longitudinal joints do not coincide with
joints in the lower layers.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 4207 (a) (ii) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

The adjustment of the screed, tamping bars, feed screws, hopper feed, etc.
shall be frequently checked to ensure uniform pre-compaction and spreading
of the mixtures. If segregation occurs, the spreading operations shall
immediately be suspended until the cause is determined and corrected.

4208A JOINTS
Add the following after the 1st paragraph of Clause 4208 of the Standard
Specification

The Contractor shall mark out the material to be cut back using string line. At
least 100mm shall be cut back but additional material shall be removed should
material still be loose, incompletely compacted or having less height than
50mm.

The cutting shall be performed the same day as paving the adjacent lane and
the joint shall be protected against traffic. Trial sections shall determine
whether the cut shall be vertical full depth or be performed at an angle of 45°.
Cores shall be taken to determine the method resulting in the highest joint
compaction.

102
 Add at the end of Clause 4208 of the Standard Specifications the following:

The paved pre-compacted "over height" after the screed shall be carefully
determined on trial sections (with e.g. 10mm and 20mm over-height) and
properly implemented for satisfactory joint construction. Joints shall have the
same texture and density as the remainder of the asphalt course.

4209A COMPACTION
Replace the fifth paragraph of Clause 4209 of the Standard Specification by
the following:

The sequence of rollers used in the compaction is at the discretion of the

Contractor provided the completed pavement shall have a density measured
on recovered cores equal to or greater than the nominal density specified in
Table 7110/2 and assessed by the statistical method defined in Section 7200.

Add after the fifth paragraph of Clause 4209 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

An adequate number of roller passes shall be used to provide the specified

pavement density. The density shall be uniform over the whole area of the
layer, as well as at the joints after approximately 10 cm back-cutting of
tentative free edges.

The tyre pressure of pneumatic-tired rollers shall be adjusted to the maximum

that the mixture can carry without excessive displacement of the asphalt layer.

The Contractor shall, when necessary, only employ approved slippage agents
for the rollers. Diesel will under no circumstances be accepted.

4211A LAYING TRIAL SECTIONS

Replace the fourth and fifth paragraphs of Clause 4211 of the Standard
Specifications with the following:

Cores shall be extracted from the completed trial section and in locations
determined in a stratified randomly sampled manner.

103
Add before the last paragraph of Clause 4210 of the Standard Specifications
the following:

The Contractor shall for each trial section prepare a plan for execution of the
trial. It shall at least include the following subjects:

Date and time, location, sketch of location, type of asphalt;

Preparation of surface, spray rate of prime coat or tack coat and curing time;
Mixing and paving temperature, cooling rate and locations for temperature
control;
Paving speed, tamper settings and type/angle of screed side plates;
Control of final asphalt layer thickness, line and grade;
Illustrate intended rolling pattern for at least 3 levels of compaction efforts
(medium, high and extra high) and describe methods to record and control
number of passes and the rolling pattern actually used;
Joint construction method, overheight of the second paving lane, control of the
overheight and compaction of joints;
Core drilling to document the effect on compaction for each of the different
roller combinations and compaction efforts. Cores shall further be used to
documents thickness of constructed material. Material shall be sampled from
the compacted mat to be tested according to the Hamburg test method as
specified in Clause 4202 - Materials;

Test programme for testing of the mix including binder content (min. 2
samples), gradation (min. 2 samples), Gmb @ Nini, Gmb @ Ndes, Gmb @
Nmax, Gmm, VMA, VFA, Va, dust ratio, IDT and TSR. At least 6 laboratory
prepared specimens shall be made for these tests;

Cutting of 2 samples from the paved trial section area. These samples shall be
tested for rutting under the test conditions specified in Clause 4202 except for
the compaction which shall be that obtained during the trial;
The smoothness of the finished surface shall be tested as specified in this
Clause; and Programme for instruction of every person involved in the trial
section.

The activity plan for the trials shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval
not less than 7 working days before the planned trials.

104
 The Contractor shall assess back-cuttings and separately document that
finished joints satisfy the compaction requirements by taking asphalt cores at a
distance of 50 mm from joints and tentative free edges.

The trial sections shall include continuous measurements of asphalt

temperatures to determine the rate of cooling and the time available for
compaction.

4213A TESTING
In the first paragraph of Sub-clause 4213(b) of the Standard Specifications
delete the second sentence.

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-clause 4213 (b) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

Cores in the carriageway lanes shall be taken at the outer permanent edge, at
the centre of the paved lane and along the longitudinal joint. Cores at the outer
edges and at the joints shall be taken 50 mm from the edge after back-cutting
as approved. Cores in the shoulders shall be taken 300 mm from the outer
shoulder edge and 50 mm from the longitudinal joints to the carriageway
pavement. Cores taken for testing of compaction shall be taken as soon as
possible after the placing of the layer, but under no circumstances later than
seven days after paving. The Contractor is required to have back-up coring
machines available at all times.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 4213 (c) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

In case the tests disclose non-conditional properties of the test specimens,

additional tests shall be carried out by the Contractor as required by the
Engineer in a format approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall at the start of the project prepare forms and summary
sheets for his reporting and present these to the Engineer for approval. The
digital format of the reporting shall be approved by the Engineer.

105
4214A MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Amend the description of Pay Item 42.01 of the Special Specifications as
follows
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
42.01 (a) Virgin Bituminous Base course:
(i) Asphalt concrete base course, SP37.5,175 mm thickness, using PG70-10 cu.m
penetration grade bitumen, using virgin bituminous surfacing materials.
(ii) Bitumen, PG70-10 penetration grade, for virgin asphalt concrete base course ton
42.01 (b) Recycled Bituminous Base course:( Provisional)
(i) Asphalt concrete base course, SP37.5,175 mm thickness, using PG70-10 cu.m
penetration grade bitumen and reclaimed bituminous surfacing materials with
recycling percentages: (50 % reclaimed and 50% virgin materials)
(ii ) Bitumen, PG70-10 penetration grade, for recycled asphalt concrete base ton
course
42.02 (a) Virgin Asphalt concrete surfacing Wearing Course:
(i) Asphalt concrete surfacing, SP12.5, using PG76-10 penetration grade bitumen, cu.m
50mm thickness
42.02 (b) Bitumen, PG76-10 penetration grade, for asphalt concrete wearing course: ton
42.03 Tack coat of 30% stable grade bitumen emulsion lts
42.04 Additives for Recycled Bituminous base course
(a) Rejuvenator Bitusol 40 or similar kg
(b) Hydrated lime to improve adhesion properties kg

The Active Filler: Cement shall be measured and paid as per actual of the
proportion as obtained from the approved design mix as approved by the
Engineer”.

“Add after the first paragraph of Pay Item 42.02 of the Standard Specifications
the following:

Only theoretical quantities will be certified by the Engineer.

Replace the 2nd paragraph of Pay Item 42.02 of the Standard Specifications
with the following:

The binder for the asphalt concrete surfacing shall be paid for separately for
the certified asphalt concrete surfacing quantity. The bitumen shall be
calculated from the approved mix design (presenting the bitumen content as a
weight percentage of the total asphalt mix), the certified quantities of asphalt

106
 mix and the asphalt densities determined at Ndes. A new mix design and recipe
shall be prepared if, in the opinion of the Engineer, this is warranted due to
significant variations in mix density or other material properties.

The Active Filler: Cement shall be measured and paid as per actual of the
proportion as obtained from the approved design mix as approved by the
Engineer”.

4200B RIGID PAVEMENT

4201B SCOPE
This Section covers the construction of a surface course of Portland
cement concrete, with or without reinforcement, and includes, inter alia,
the specifications for materials, the placing and compacting of concrete,
applying the surface texture, and constructing the joints.

The Contractor shall provide the following information as part of the

Quality Control Plan (QCP):

A detailed sequence and schedule of concrete placement operations

including, but not limited to, width of pavement to be placed, proposed
equipment, production rates, working hours, concrete hauling, and
placement, curing, sawing, and sealing methods. Identify backup
equipment and the procedures that will be followed in the case of a
breakdown of equipment.

A method to ensure the proper placement of reinforcing steel, tie bars

and dowel bars.

A traffic control plan that includes provisions for the placement and
maintenance of barriers required protecting the pavement from traffic,
for a minimum of 14 days after concrete placement.

Defined provisions for adequate lighting for all work done at night,
including finishing, curing, and sawing joints.

A method for ensuring pavement thickness is met and a consolidation

procedure is identified.

107
 If forms are to be utilized define the material, dimensions, type,
connections, and staking of the forms.

Define the procedure for the protection of the fresh concrete pavement
from inclement weather.

4202B MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE

Cement
Cement used for concrete shall be Portland cement, Type I or Type II
conforming to AASHTO M 85 or equivalent ISO standard class.

Portland cement, Type II, which has been pre-blended with a maximum
of 15 percent fly ash, by weight, and conforming to AASHTO M 240,
may be used. When blended Portland cement is used, no additional fly
ash shall be added.

Different brands of cement, or the same brand of cement from different

mills, shall not be mixed.

The use of other cementitious binders may be allowed by the Engineer,

provided that it can be proved by the Contractor that they perform
similarly to the cements specified above.

Suitable means shall be provided for storing and protecting the cement
against dampness. Cement which for any reason has become partially
set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. The
temperature of the cement at the time of delivery to the mixer shall not
exceed 71oC.

(b) Water
Water used in mixing or curing shall be clean and free of oil, salt, acid,
alkali, sugar, vegetable, or other substances injurious to the finished
product.

Water will be tested in accordance with and shall meet the requirements
of AASHTO T 26. Water known to be of potable quality may be used
without test.

108
Where the source of water is relatively shallow, the intake shall be so
enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, or other foreign materials.

(c) Admixtures to Concrete

No admixtures shall be used without the written permission of the
Engineer.

Accelerating, Retarding and Water-Reducing Chemical admixtures shall

comply with AASHTO M 194.

When a retarding admixture is required it shall be Type D, a water -

reducing -retarding admixture as designated in the above specification.

Care should be taken not to combine chemical admixtures together into

a mixture unless they are compatible.

Chloride accelerators shall not be used. Admixtures shall not contain

calcium chloride, calcium formate, or triethanolamine. An air-entraining
agent shall be included in the mix.

The Contractor shall submit details of the nominated mix and the
Contractor shall nominate the proprietary source, type and name for
each admixture to be used. Documentary evidence of the quality and
chemicals compatibility shall be furnished by the Contractor to the
Engineer upon request at any stage of the work.

(d) Air-entraining admixtures

Air entraining admixtures shall comply with AASHTO M154.

A certified affidavit and test result evidence based on tests made in

arecognised laboratory shall be submitted to the Engineer
bytheContractor.

(e) Aggregate
Aggregates from a single source shall be used in anyone construction
work. Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, the maximum
soluble sulphate salt content of aggregates, expressed as percentage
SO3 by mass, shall not exceed 0.1%.

109
Aggregates containing more than the maximum permissible amount of
sulphates or with visible encrustation of salts shall be washed and
drained before being used in concrete.The Engineer may direct washing
or rewashing of the aggregates until he is satisfied that harmful
quantities of salts are not present.

Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate can be natural sand, manufactured sand, or a
combination of natural and manufactured sand, meeting the following
requirements:

Natural Sand shall be composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated

grains, free from lumps or flaky particles, organic matter, loam, or other
deleterious substances.

Manufactured sand shall be made from stone meeting all the quality
requirements for coarse aggregates.

Mixtures of Natural Sand and Manufactured sand when the blend is

approved the two materials shall be stored and batched separately.

Organic Impurities:- all fine aggregate shall be free from injurious

amounts of organic impurities. Fine aggregates subjected to the
colorimetric test of AASHTO T21 for organic impurities and producing a
colour darker than 3 shall not be used unless the following criteria is
met: A fine aggregate with the colour darker than 3 may be used
provided that the relative strength at 7 and 28days is not less than 95%
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T71.

Soundness:- When the fine aggregate is subjected to five alternations of

the sodium sulphate soundness test AASHTO T104 the weighted loss
shall not exceed10% by weight.

Gradation of Fine Aggregate:- for all classes of Portland cement

concrete and concrete pavement shall confirm to the following gradation:

110
 Table 4200B-1 Gradation of Fine Aggregate

AASHTO Standard Sieve Per Centage by weight passing

9.5 mm
Designation 100
4.75 mm 95-100
2.36 mm 80-100
1.18 mm 50-85
0.600 mm 25-60
0.300 mm 10-30
0.150 mm 1-10
0.075 mm 0-3

Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete shall conform to the following
requirements:

General:- Coarse aggregate shall be clean, tough, durable gravel, crushed

gravel, hard durable rock, metallurgical furnace slag or gravel. It shall be free
from soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces. If required, coarse aggregate
shall be washed to produce a clean aggregate.

Los Angeles Abrasion AASHTO T96 shall not exceed 40%.

Sodium sulphate soundness test AASHTO T104, the weighted loss shall not
exceed 15%.

Adherent coating in accordance with FLHT 512 shall not exceed1.0%.

The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 37.5mm.When the
spacing between longitudinal reinforcement is less than 90mm, the nominal
size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed19 mm. In addition, when the slab
thickness is 150mm and over but less than175mm, the nominal size of coarse
aggregate shall not exceed 25mm, and when the slab thickness is100mm and
over but less than150mm, the nominal size of coarse aggregate shall not
exceed 19mm.

111
Gradation of Coarse Aggregate are as follows:

Table 4200B-2 Gradation for Coarse Aggregate

AASHTO Percentage by Mass Passing
Standard 50 37.5 25 19 12.5 9.5 4.75 2.36 1.18
37.5to19.0
Sieve(mm) 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 0-5
37.5to4.75 100 95-100 35-70 10-30 0-5
25.0to12.5 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5
25.0to9.5 100 90-100 40-75 15-35 0-15 0-5
25.0to4.75 100 95-100 25-60 0-10 0-5
19.0to9.5 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 0-5
19.0to4.75 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5
19.0to2.36 100 90-100 30-65 5-25 0-10 0-5
12.5to4.75 100 90-100 40-70 0.15 0-5
12.5to2.36 100 90-100 40-70 5-25 0-10 0-5

(f) Materials for joints

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to AASHTO M33, AASHTO M153
Type II, and AASHTO M213 and shall be punched to admit the dowels. The
filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and
width required for the joint.When the use of more than one piece is authorized
for a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely, and held accurately to
shape by stapling or other positive fastening.

The use of preformed, closed-cell, polyethylene foam backer joint filler shall
conform to ASTM D3204, Type I and shall be limited to vertical applications
only.

Preformed Elastomeric Compression Seals

Preformed elastomeric compression seals used shall comply with the
requirements of AASHTO M220. The seals shall be manufactured in
accordance with an extrusion process, from an elastomeric material consisting
entirely of polychloroprene, which is subsequently vulcanized.
Preformed Self-Expanding Cork Joint Sealer
This shall complywith the requirements ofAASHTO M153.

112
Joint Sealers
Hot-poured joint sealer shall conform to AASHTO M301. Cold-poured joint
sealant shall be silicone type conforming to US Federal Specification TT-S-
1543A, Class A.

The sealant shall be a one-part, low-modulus silicone rubber type with an

ultimate elongation of 1200 percent.

Silicone Sealant:- when specified, shall meet the detailed requirements as

stated in the special provisions or as provided by the manufacturer. The test
methods shall conform to ASTM-D- 792, ASTM D 2240, and ASTM C 794 &
ASTM C793-7. The silicone joint sealant shall be grey in colour and shall be
stored and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.

(g) Materials for reinforcing steel, tie-bars and dowels

Reinforcing steel for concrete pavements shall be of the type, length, size,
spacing and quantity shown on the plans and shall meet the requirements
specified hereinafter.

All steel shall be clean and free from mill scale, loose rust oroil.

Reinforcement steel may be either deformed steel bars or cold-drawn steel wire
conforming to the following:
Bar Mats

Bar mats shall be cold-drawn steel wire or deformed steel bars from new billet
steel conforming to AASHTO M31M. The bars shall be size No.10. All bars
shall have the tensile requirement of Grade 300 or 400.

Fabrication of bar mats using deformed steel bars shall be in accordance with
ASTMA184/A184M. Barmats fabricated using rolled cold-drawn steel wire shall
be in accordance with ASTM A56.

Welded Steel Wire Fabric

Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to AASHTO M55M/M55. Wire fabric shall
not be less than1.5meters in width and shall be shipped in sheets and not in
rolls.

113
Tie Bars & Dowels
Tie bars shall be deformed bars conforming to AASHTO M31M. All bars shall
have the tensile requirements of Grade 400.

Tie bars for use across joints shall have an epoxy coating conforming to
AASHTO M284/M284 M except that the thickness of the cured coating shall be
250+/- 50 microns.

Dowel bars shall be plain, round bars conforming to AASHTO M254 type A or
B. They shall be free from burring or other deformation restricting slippage in
concrete.

Dowel bars shall be coated with an approved material to break the bond
between the steel and concrete.

Place dowels and tie bars across joints where indicated, correctly aligned, and
securely held parallel to the surface of the finished pavement, such that after
placement they remain in their specified location. The spacing and vertical
location of dowels and tie bars shall be as detailed except where the planned
spacing cannot be maintained because of form length or interference with form
braces. In such cases, closer spacing with additional dowels or tie bars shall be
used.

All reinforcement, dowels and tie bars shall be clean and free of oil, grease,
loose rust and other foreign material when the concrete is placed. Paint free
portions of dowels, including ends, with two coats of bituminous emulsion. The
unpainted portions of dowels shall be installed in the initially placed concrete
slab.

Dowels installed in contraction joints during paving operations shall be held

securely in position by means of rigid metal frame cradles to prevent them from
rising, sliding out or becoming distorted under paving operations.

Dowels and tie bars in fixed form paving shall be placed by the bonded-in-place
method. Installation by removing and replacing dowels and tie bars in
preformed holes, including their withdrawal to assist in form stripping,will not be
permitted.

114
(h) Curing materials
Curing materials for Portland cement concrete shall conform to the following:
Liquid membrane:-forming compounds shall conform to AASHTO M148, Type
1-D, clear or translucent with fugitive dye, or Type 2, white pigmented.
Burlap cloth:- made from jute or kenaf shall conform to AASHTO M156, Class
4.

White polyethylene sheeting:- shall conform to AASHTO M171 for white

opaque polyethylene film.

White burlap-polyethylene sheeting:- shall conform to AASHTO M171.

Waterproof paper shall conform to AASHTO M171.
Hay or straw when used for insulation in cold weather shall be dry and shall not
be re-used unless otherwise approved.

(i) Separation membrane

Separation membranes, to be used between jointed reinforced concrete
surface slabs or unreinforced concrete surface slabs and the sub-base,
shall be impermeable plastic sheeting125microns thick.

(j) Concrete requirements

Proportions
Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, fly ash,water-granulated blast-furnace slag, water, and chemical
admixtures as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer to
produce concrete of the specified strength and workability.

Mix design, manufacture, placing, compaction and finishing of concrete shall be

the responsibility of the Contractor.

Concrete Strength:-the mix will be designed to produce concrete with a

minimum job average flexural strength of 35MPa at 28 days.

The concrete shall contain the amount of cement as directed by the Engineer

but in no case shall the concrete contain less than 320kg/m3.

115
Water cement ratio, including moisture on the aggregates, shall not be more
than 0.53. This shall be maintained by use of chemical admixtures and or
additional if necessary.

Workability of Concrete:-concrete shall be uniformly plastic and workable. The

consistency of the concrete shall be determined by the slump test in
accordance with Method SC-T-42. The slump shall be in the range of 25mm to
60mm or 37.5mm +or- 25mm for slip-form paving and 4 inches maximum for
hand or other means of paving.

Air Content:- Where the Contractor wishes to use an air-entraining agent, the
total air content in the freshly mixed concrete shall be M±1%, where M is the
target value within the limits of 2% to 4%. Tests shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM C231.

The percentage of entrained air voids in the mix shall be from 3 to 6 percent.
Where concrete is to be cast between fixed forms the nominal maximum size
of the mix shall be 40mm.

Where the Engineer has approved of the placement of concrete by means of a

self-propelled slip-form paving machine, the mix design, slump and workability
shall suit the machine proposed for use.

(k) Quality of Concrete

(1) The class of concrete required is specified in the following table, on the
drawings and/or in the Bills of Quantities for the particular position of the works
to be constructed.

(2) The quantity of water added shall only be sufficient to produce a dense
concrete which can be fully compacted without undue difficulty, due allowance
being made for the moisture content of the aggregates.

116
The strength class of concrete shall be as designated in the following Table.

Concrete Min. Max. Size Max. Water Min. Crushing

strength Cement of Coarse Cement Strength of Works Remarks
class{PRI Content Aggre- Ration by Test Cubes
VATE } gate Weight
7 days 28 days

Kgs mm - N/mm2 N/mm2

C30 300 20 0.55 21 30 Mass Concerete for
Rigid Pavemnet
C35 370 20 0.55 25 35 Reinforced Concrete
for Rigid Pavement
on connections
Minimum requirements for various grades of Concrete using Portland cement
to BS 8110

The above properties and crushing strengths are to be considered as the

minimum standard that will be accepted in the finish at works. The average
crushing strengths should be at least 15% higher than the minimum
permissible values given in the above table.

If during the progress of the work the requirements set out in Sub-clause 4202
B (j) are not being met by concrete manufactured from the materials or material
mix proportions being used, the Contractor shall immediately cease producing
such concrete and shall effect such changes to the mix proportions and/or
materials as may be necessary inorder to meet those requirements.

If during the progress of the work the Contractor wishes to use materials or mix
proportions other than those originally approved, or If the materials from the
sources originally approved change in regard to properties, he shall before
proceeding with further work submit adequate evidence to the Engineer that
the new materials or combination of materials will produce concrete which
complies with the requirements of Sub-clause 4202 B(j) and will not bring about
detrimental changes in the properties of the concrete.

Any such changes made shall be at the Contractor's expense,and no extra

payment will be allowed by reason of such changes.

117
Where concrete is placed by hand and vibrated or finished with hand
equipment, the requirements of Sub-clause 4202B (j) shall remain applicable
irrespective of thesize of the concrete panel or concrete patch placed. The mix
proportions, however, shall be adjusted to promote hand placing, vibrating and
finishing, and only if the Contractor has produced written proof to the Engineer
that the requirements of Sub-clause4 2 0 2 B (j) can not be complied with under
the circumstances, will the Engineer change the requirements in accordance
with Sub-clause 7102(j)(ii)4 at his own discretion.

Changes in Requirements
The Engineer shall have the power, at any time during the progress of the
work, to order changes in the requirements set out in Sub-clause 4202B(j). In
such cases, the Contractor shall be compensated in accordance with the terms
of the General Conditions for the additional cost of materials or additional
handling, placing and/or other costs, if any, entailed by such changes. If such
changes result in savings, the Engineer shall recover such savings from the
Contractor.

(k) Handling, measuring and batching materials for concrete

Storing the Materials

Stockpiling of aggregates, the location and preparation of the sites, the
minimum size of pile and the method adopted to prevent coning or other
segregation of component sizes shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than 3feet in thickness. Each
layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next, which shall not be
allowed to cone down over the next lower layer. Under no circumstances will
coningof stockpiles be permitted.
Aggregates from different sources shall not be stockpiled together unless
approved by the Engineer.

The fine aggregate and coarse aggregate shall be separately weighed into the
hopper in the respective amounts set by the Engineer in the job mix approval.

Cement shall be stored in a silo or in a dry weather proof shed with a raised
wooden floor, and each consignment shall be stacked separately. Cement shall
be used in the order in which it has been delivered at the site.

118
The varioustypes ofadmixtures shall be properlymarkedandstoredseparately.

Transporting
When mixing of the concrete is to be done at the job site, materials shall be
transported from the batching plant to the mixer in vehicles appropriate for this
job.

In the dry batch process, bulk cement shall be transported to the road side
paver in water tight compartments carrying the full amount of cement required
for the batch, or, if permitted, between the fine and coarse aggregate.

Concrete shall be so transported to its final position that segregation or loss of

any of the ingredients, or contamination will be prevented and that the mix is of
the required workability at the point and time of placing.

Concrete shall be protected against rain, heat, direct sunlight and/or

evaporation by means of covers on all open vehicles. No additional water
maybe added in transitor where delivered.

The time lapse from the moment when the cement and aggregate are
intermingled up to the time of placing and compacting the concrete shall not

exceed 60minutes when concrete is transported In temperature is 30oC or

truck agitators, and shall not exceed 45minutes in mild weather or 30minutes
when the concrete is transported in ordinary trucks.

Proportioning theComponents
All components shall be accurately proportioned in approved automatic
proportioning devices to within the following tolerances, and supplied
separately at the mixing drums.

Cement : ±2% of the prescribed mass of cement.

Aggregates: Each fraction within ±3% of the prescribed mass of the fraction in
question.
Water: ±2% of the prescribed volume or mass.

Admixtures:- Admixtures shall be admixed in part of the mixing water after

having been carefully measured in an automatic proportioning device capable

119
of proportioning the admixture in quantities which will not deviate by more than
2% from the required quantities, and shall be done so as to spread the agent
uniformly throughout the entire concrete mix during the mixing process.

Water for the mix may be measured by volume or by weight. The accuracy of
the water measuring equipment shall be within a range of error of not over 1%,
and shall be so arranged that the measurement will not be affected by
variations of pressure in the water supply line and will be accurate under all
construction conditions encountered.

Methods and equipment for adding air-entraining agent or other admixtures into
the batch, shall be as recommended bythe manufacturer.
Mixing the Concrete
Batch mixing

All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated batch mixers. The

concrete may be mixed at the site of the work in a central-mix plant, in truck
mixers when allowed, or in a roadside paver.

The mixing period shall be at least 90seconds, but may be reduced to as little
as 50seconds or increased by the Engineer if necessary, to produce a
homogeneous mass.

The production capacity of the mixing plant shall be inaccordance with the
capacity of the paver used. Where the mixing plant is supplied with more than
one drum, the same unit shall be used for proportioning the components.

The drums shall always be kept clean, and all build-up shall be removed. The
total period between the times that the cement is placed in the drums until
mixing starts shall not exceed 15minutes.

An overload upto 10% above the mixers nominal capacity may be permitted
provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency
is satisfactory and no spillage of concrete occurs.

Concrete shall not be mixed when either the coarse or fine aggregate contains
frozen particles. No more concrete shall be mixed than can be placed, finished
and covered during day light, unless the Engineer approves an artificial lighting
system.

120
 Transit-mixing
The Contractor will be permitted to use appropriate truck mixers, which agitate
previously mixed concrete in transit.

Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck
mixers, truck agitators or non agitating trucks. The time elapsing from the time
water is added to the mix until the concrete is deposited in place shall not
exceed 30minutes when the concrete is hauled in non-agitating trucks, nor
60minutes when hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators.

4203B PREPARING THE UNDERLYING LAYERS

Preparation of sub-base
The underlying layers shall be constructed in accordance with the Standard
Specifications and the Project Specifications up to the level of the underside of
the concrete slab.

The Contractor shall note the provisions regarding the construction tolerances
for underlying pavement layers and shall make provision in his prices for any
additional concrete, which may be necessary in respect of irregularities in the
layer underlying the concrete pavement.

The Sub-base shall be brought to reasonably close conformity to the lines,

grades and typical sections as shown on the plans or as designated by the
Engineer.

The Sub-base shall include an area 900mm in width extending beyond the
edges of the base-course or pavement unless shown otherwise on the plans.

When curb and gutter is constructed contiguous with the pavement the sub-
base shall include an area two 610mm in width extending beyond the back of
the curb and gutter.

The Sub-base shall be completed for at least 800meters in advance of

concrete placing operations when this distance is available.

121
Conditioning of sub-base or base course
Compaction
The entire sub-base or base layer shall be thoroughly compacted. Any portion
of the sub-base that is not accessible to a roller shall be compacted with
handtampers to obtain the density requirements for the material.
Wetting the sub-base

The sub-base shall be kept continuously wet for a period of atleast one hour
before the concrete is placed. Immediately before the concrete is placed, the
excess water shall be broomed off the road ahead of the paver so as to ensure
that the sub-base will still be damp when the concrete is placed, but no
puddles of water or deleterious matter shall be left on the road.

Protection
Before placing any surfacing material on any section, ditches and drains along
that section shall be completed to drain the subgrade effectively. Until the sub-
base or base has been checked and approved, no material shall be deposited
thereon.

Applying a bituminous prime coat or placing a separating membrane

Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, a bituminous prime
coat shall be applied to the completed and approved sub-base or capping layer
as specified in Division 6100 at a rate of application ordered by the Engineer, or
where shown on the Drawings, a separating membrane shall be placed.

Before any pavement concrete is placed, the bituminous prime coat shall be
checked and any area shaving deficient or poor coverage, or where the
bituminous coating has been damaged, shall be repaired as directed by the
Engineer. The sprayed surface shall then be thoroughly cleaned. The
bituminous prime coat shall be dry before any reinforcing steel, tie bars, dowels
or concrete maybe placed.

Separation membranes, to be used between jointed reinforced concrete

surface slabs or unreinforced concrete surface slabs and the sub-base, shall be
laid flat without creases. Where an overlap of plastic sheets is necessary, this
shall be atleast 300 mm.

122
4204B PREPARING THE UNDERLYING LAYERS
Compacting
The concrete shall be fully compacted by means of approved equipment
and shall be free from honeycombing and planes of weakness. The
average amount of air voids as measured in concrete cores shall not
exceed 3% without air-entrainment when measured byASTM C173.

Over-vibration resulting in segregation, surface laitance, or leakage (or

any combination of these) will not be acceptable.

No paving in the down hill direction will be allowed if tearing of the

concrete occurs. The Contractor shall take the necessary measures to
the satisfaction of the Engineer to prevent tearing of the concrete for
example by carrying out the paving in the uphill direction.

Time for placing and compacting

The placing, compacting and finishing of the concrete shall be carried
out as quickly as possible, and the operations shall be so arranged that
in any transverse section of the pavement the concrete shall be fully
compacted and finished within 2.5hours of having been mixed. This time

shall be reduced by half an hour for every 5oC by which the concrete

temperature is above 20oC at the time of placing, unless otherwise

permitted bytheEngineer.

Unless the Contractor provides adequate lighting facilities, approved by

the Engineer, before hand, the placing of concrete pavement shall cease
in good time so that the finishing operation can still be completed during
day light hours.

Adverse weather conditions

Protection against rain and hail
No concrete shall be placed during rainy weather. For the concrete to be
properly protected against rain and hail before it has sufficiently
hardened, the Contractor shall have available at all times frame-
mounted waterproof covers for protecting the surface of the unhardened
concrete. In addition, when slip forms are used, the Contractor shall
also provide acceptable emergency protection for the slab edges.

123
When rain appear to be imminent, all paving operations shall cease and
the Contractor shall take the necessary steps to protect the unhardened
concrete. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any
damage to the concrete, the texturing or the curing compound that may
occur.

Cold-weatherpaving
All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent the temperature of

the pavement concrete from failing below 5oC during the first 48 hours

after casting.

When prevailing temperatures are low or when cold weather is forecast

and there is a danger that the temperature of the freshly constructed
concrete pavement will fall below the prescribed limits, the Contractor
shall either cease all pavement operations or he may be permitted to
proceed, provided that the Engineer is satisfied that adequate protective
measures are available and will be taken to ensure that the temperature
of the pavement will be maintained above 5oC for the period stated.
The Contractor will be responsible for the quality and strength of the
concrete placed during cold weather, and any concrete injured shall be
removed and replaced without additional compensation.

Concrete shall not be mixed when either the coarse or fine aggregate
contains frozen particles.

Hot-weather paving
When paving is done during hot weather and when the temperature of
the fresh concrete can be expected to exceed 25oC, the Contractor
shall implement appropriate precautionary measures to place the
concrete at the coolest temperature practicable.

Paving operations shall cease when the concrete temperature as

discharged at the paver exceeds 32oC.

Responsibility for protection

The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and strength of the
concrete placed and for its protection, and any concrete damaged by
adverse weather (e.g. any combination of high ambient temperature,

124
 low humidity, wind, rain and hail) shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
Maintaining continuity during placing
The Contractor shall make adequate advance arrangements for
preventing delay in delivering and placing the concrete.

An interval of more than thirty minutes between the placing of any two
consecutive batches or loads of concrete shall constitute sufficient
reason for the Engineer to have the paving operations stopped, and the
Contractor shall then, at his own expense, make a construction joint in
the concrete already placed, at the location and of the type directed by
the Engineer.

Paving operations shall be continuous, and the rate of paving shall be

adjusted to suit the rate of delivery of the concrete.

Width of placing

The width of concrete pavement strip to be placed in a single

uninterrupted operation shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified
in the Project Specifications.

4205B SIDE-FORMS, RAILS AND GUIDE WORES

Side-forms
Side-forms and rails shall be so designed, manufactured, set and
supported that the completed concrete pavement will complywith all the
requirements of Clause 4218B.

Where the forms are tested with a 3m straight edge, the top edge shall
not deviate by more than 3mm at any place, neither the sides by more
than 6mm. The sides shall not deviate by more than 3mm from the
vertical. The height of the side-forms shall not be less than the nominal
thickness of the concrete slabless 15mm, and the resulting opening
between the side-forms and the layer on which it is supported shall be
caulked with a stiff mortar consisting of one part of rapid-hardening
cement and 3 parts of sand by volume and finished vertically on the
inside, and the mortar shall have hardened before any concrete may be
cast against it.

125
Therails,side-
formsandrunningsurfaceshallbekeptcleaninfrontofthewheelsofallpavinge
quipment.

Side-forms shall not be removed before the concrete has hardened

sufficiently to prevent damage being done to the sides and loosening of
tie-bars or dowels, if any, and not earlier than 6 hours after the
completion of the construction of the slab. The side-forms shall also be
removed in a timely manner to permit the sawing of transverse joints
upto the edges of the concrete slab.

Projecting tie-bars and/or the concrete shall not be damaged during

removal of the side-forms. Before any side-forms may be ordered or
brought on to the site, particulars regarding the side-forms shall have
been approved by the Engineer.

Rails
The wheels of spreading and finishing machines and frame-mounted
covers shall not run directly on the top surface on the side-forms but on
rails rigidly attached to the forms, unless the forms are specially made to
double as rails.

Electronic control systems

Where a slip form paver is used, the alignment levels for placing the
concrete shall be controlled automatically from guide wires by sensors
attached at the four corners of the slip form paving machine.The
alignment and level of ancillary machinesf or finishing, texturing and
curing shall be automatically controlled relative to the guide wires and to
the surface and edges of the slab.

Guide wires shall be so designed, manufactured and fixed that the paver
will be capable of producing a completed slab,which will comply with the
requirements of Clause 3918A.

Other control methods will also be considered, and should the Engineer
be satisfied that they will produce satisfactory results, their use will have
to be approved in writing.

126
 Inspection of side-forms, guide wires and rails
Before any concrete may be cast, the Engineer shall approve all
assembledside-forms, guide wires and rails. For this purpose, the
Engineer shall be given sufficient notice and opportunity.

Approvalby the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations to construct the concrete slab in accordance with the
specified dimensions and tolerances.

4206B PLACING, COMPACTING AND FINISHING WITH SIDE-FORMS

The paving train shall consist of several powered machines that spread,
compact, finish, texture and cure the concrete in a continuous operation.

Placingand Spreading
The concrete shall be spread uniformly by means of a purpose-made
mechanical hopper spreader running on rails and capable of spreading
the concrete uniformly to a specified level and to a uniform uncompacted
density over the entire surface of the slab. The machines shall be
capable of being rapidly adjusted for changes in slab thickness or
crossfall.

Compaction
The concrete shall be fully compacted by vibration or by a combination
of mechanical surface vibration, internal vibration and tamping. The
power supply to the vibrators shall cut out automatically as soon as the
compaction equipment stops moving.

Suitable internal vibrators shall be used against the side forms and at
joint assemblies to ensure compaction throughout the pavement layer.

Final Finishing
The surface of the concrete shall be finished smooth and true to grade
and level by means of an initial finishing machine equipped with a
transverse or oblique oscillating beam.

The final finish of the surface of the slab shall be carried out by a
machine that incorporates twin oblique oscillating finishing beams.The
beams in the case of both machines shall be readily adjustable for both
height and tilt. The leading beam shall be vibrated. The beam shall be

127
supported on a carriage with two wheels on either side, atleast 4metres
apart in the longitudinal direction. The oscillating beams shall be of
rectangular section, spanning the full width of the slab and each
weighing not less than 170kg/m.

Hand-finishing of the concrete surface shall be reduced to the absolute

minimum and shall be used only to correct minor imperfections and
marks on the surface.

Before the concrete starts setting, all pavement edges and the edges of
joints shall be rounded off to the prescribed radius.

After finishing, the Contractor shall test the concrete surface with a
straight edge of atleast 3metres in length. Irregularities indicated by the
straight edge shall be removed with a long-handled hand-operated
scraping straight edge of atleast 3metres length. A gang plank shall be
used when walking on the concrete.

Constructing the Concrete Pavement in More than One Contiguous

Strip
Where concrete is placed adjacent to an existing pavement, that part of
the paving equipment running on the existing pavement shall have
flanged wheels on flat-bottom section rails weighing not less than
15kg/m or by replacing the flanged wheels on that side of the machines
by smooth flangeless wheels. Before the paving operation commences,
the surface regularity of the existing pavement shall comply with
Section 7000 of these specifications and be thoroughly cleaned and
brushed to remove all extraneous materials. The wheels shall run at a
distance of not less than 300mm from the edge of the pavement to
prevent the pavement edge from spalling or cracking.

No equipment shall be run on the existing pavement until the concrete

is strong enough to prevent damage from occurring, but in any case not
earlier than 14days after the construction of the slab. Where visible
cracks occur or any other damage is done to the pavement, further
work involving the paver shall be suspended immediately.

The Contractor shall repair all damage at his own cost.

128
4207B PLACING, COMPACTING AND FINISHING WITH SLIPFORM
EQUIPMENT
General
Slipform paving equipment shall be used for spreading, compacting,
floating and finishing the concrete in a continuous operation and in such
a manner that a minimum of finishing by hand will be required and a
dense and homogeneous concrete to the proper level and grade will be
produced.

Placing and spreading the concrete

The concrete shall be deposited without segregation ahead of the paver
across its whole width and to a height,which at all times is in excess of
the required surcharge.

The deposited concrete shall be struck off to the necessary average and
differential surcharge by means of a strike-off plate or screw auger
device extending across the entire width of the slab. The strike-off
equipment shall be capable of being rapidly adjusted for changes in
slab thickness or crossfall.

Compacting and finishing

The slipform paver shall compact the concrete over the full paved width
by means of internal vibration only or by a combination of internal and
surface vibration. The vibration shall be variable with a maximum
energy output of atleast 2.5kN per meter width of slab per 300mm depth
for a laying speed of upto1.5metres per minute or prorata for higher
speeds.

The level and grades of the surface shall be automatically controlled

within the prescribed tolerances by means of a sensing device running
on guide wires as specified.

The consistence of the concrete shall be so controlled that the edge

slump will not exceed the tolerance specified in Section 7000 of these
specifications.

If approved by the Engineer, metal side-forms of sufficient thickness

may be used to maintain the proper shape and line.

129
 After the concrete has been finished by the finishing devices
incorporated in the slipform paving equipment, the surface of the
concrete shall be checked by means of a straight-edge of not less than
3.0metres in length. High spots indicated by the straight edge shall be
removed by hand floats.

After the final finishing and texturing of the concrete, but before curing,
the pavement edges shall be rounded to the prescribed radius.

Constructing the concrete pavement in more than one contiguous

strip
Except for the wheels, which are in the case of slipform pavers to be
replaced with rubber cushioned crawler tracks; the provisions of Sub-
clause 3906A(iv) shall apply when concrete is being placed in more
than one contiguous strip.

Track support
The Contractor shall at his own cost ensure that adequate track support
is provided to suit the needs of the slip form paver, either by extending
the upper pavement layers or by providing alternative support layers.

4208B PLACING, COMPACTING AND FINISHING WITH HAND

EQUIPMENT
General
Where the slabs are too small or irregular, or the site is so restricted as
to render the use of the methods described in Clauses 3 906A and
3907A impracticable, concrete shall be placed, compacted and finished
by means of hand-guided twin vibratory beams and poker vibrators. If
necessary, the consistence of the concrete shall be adjusted so as to be
suitable for placing with hand operated equipment.

Forms
Side forms complying with the requirements of Clause 3905A shall be
used.

Placing, Spreading, Compacting and Finishing the Concrete

130
 The concrete shall be placed and spread uniformly to a surcharge of
about one-fifth more than the final pavement thickness and shall then be
compacted, struck off and finished to the level of the side forms.

The concrete shall be compacted by means of vibrating finishing

beams.In addition, internal poker vibrators shall be used for slabs thicker
than150mm. whereused, the pokers shall be inserted at points not more
than 500mm apart over the whole area of the slab, and adjacent to side
forms or the edge of a previously constructed slab.

The surface shall be regulated and finished to the level of the side forms
or adjacent slabs by using twin vibrating beams. The beams shall be of
metal with a contact surface atleast 50mm wide and a vibrating unit
having a minimum centrifugal force of 4kN with a frequency
recommended by the manufacturer or an equivalent compactive effort.
The vibrating beams shall be moved forward at a steady speed of 0.5m
to 1.0m per minute while vibrating over the compacted surface, to
produce a smooth finish.

The surface shall then be further smoothed by at least two passes of a

scraping straight edge with a blade length of not less than 2.4 m.

The final surface finish of the concrete shall be effected by means of

hand-operated floats.The finishing of the concrete surface shall be to
the same standard as specified in Section 6200 of Standard
Specifications.

4209B STEEL REINFORCEMENT

General
Spacing of bars shall be as indicated on the Drawings or specified in
the Project Specifications.

Laps in longitudinal bars shall not be less than 35bar diameters or

450mm which ever is greater. In continuously reinforced concrete slabs,
only one third of the laps may be in any one transverse section, except
in single bay width construction where half the laps may be in any one
transverse section. There shall be a minimum of 1.2m longitudinally
between groups of transverse laps or laps in prefabricated

131
reinforcement sheets. Alternatively, the reinforcement may be butt
welded.

Laps in any transverse reinforcement shall be a minimum of 300mm.

Where prefabricated reinforcement sheets are used and longitudinal
and transverse laps would coincide, no lap is required in the transverse
bars within the lap of the longitudinal reinforcement. These transverse
bars may be cropped or fabricated shorter so that the requirements for
cover are met. Alternatively, prefabricated sheets incorporating splices
(i.e.flying ends) may be used to provide nesting of reinforcement in both
directions at lap positions.The lengths of the laps shall be the minimum
values previously stated.

If the reinforcement is positioned prior to concreting, it shall be fixed on

metal supports and retained in position at the required depth below the
finished surface and distance from the edge of the slab so as to ensure
that the required cover is achieved.

Reinforcement assembled on site shall be tied, or firmly fixed, at

sufficient intersections to provide sufficient rigidity to ensure that the
reinforcement remains in the correct position during construction of the
slab.

Alternatively, when a reinforced concrete slab is constructed in two

layers, the reinforcement in the form of prefabricated sheets may be
placed on or into the bottom layer, which shall be spread and
compacted to such a level that it will support the reinforcement without
distortion at the required position in the slab. The sheets shall be tied
together at overlaps and after the second layer has been spread and
compacted, the reinforcement shall have the required cover.

When a reinforced concrete slab is constructed at maximum width of

6m or more, the transverse reinforcement in the center of the slab shall
be a minimum of 12mm nominal diameter bars at 600mm center to
center. This reinforcement shall be atleast 600mm longer than one third
of the width of the slab and be lapped to other transverse reinforcement
bars or sheets,or be continuous across the whole width of each slab.

132
Jointed reinforced concrete slabs
The reinforcement shall be so placed that after compaction of the
concrete, the cover below the finished surface of the slab is as indicated
on the Drawings, with a tolerance of +/-10mm for slabs less than 270
mm thick and +/- 2 mm for slabs 270 mm thick or more.

The vertical cover between any longitudinal joint groove forming strip
and any reinforcement shall be a minimum of 300 mm.

Any transverse bars shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis of

the carriageway. Any transverse reinforcement shall terminate at the
specified distance from the edge of the slab and longitudinal joints as
shown on the Drawings, with a tolerance of +/-25mm. No longitudinal
bar shall lie within 100mm of a longitudinal joint. The reinforcement
shall terminate 300mm +/- 50 mm from any transverse joint, excluding
emergency construction joints.

Continuously reinforced concrete slabs

The reinforcement shall be positioned with the diameters and spacings
as shown on the Drawings. Except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings, the longitudinall bars shall be parallel to the centreline of the
road.

The reinforcement shall be positioned so that, after compaction of the

concrete, it shall be at mid-depth of the specified thickness of the slab
+/-25mm. No longitudinal bar shall lie within 100mm of a longitudinall
joint. In reinforcement assembled on site, longitudinal bars shall be
placed immediately above any transverse bars, which shall be at right
angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway or as otherwise
specified or shown on the Drawings.

Any transverse reinforcement shall terminate at the specified distance

from the edge of the slab and longitudinal joints as shown on the
Drawings, with a tolerance of +/- 25 mm.

133
4210 B SURFACE TEXTURE

General
After the concrete has been placed, spread, compacted, finished and
completed and before the curing membrane is applied, the surface of
the concrete shall be provided with a surface texture.

The direction of texturing shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis

of the pavement.

The surface texture shall be applied and completed before the concrete
is so hard that the surface will be torn and coarse aggregate unduly
loosened during texturing.

Equipment
The required texturing shall be effected by means of a machine which
spans the full width of the concrete pavement and which is guided in
regard to both level and direction by the rails in the case of side form
construction or by the paver guide wires in the case of slipform
construction.

Burlap Drag Equipment

Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the burlap drag shall be
attached to the front of the texturing machine or to an additional
machine which spans the full width of the concrete pavement and is
placed in such away that the full width of the concrete pavement is
covered in one operation and,when not in use, the entire drag can be
lifted clear off the pavement.

The dimensions of the burlap drag shall be such that atleast 1.0m of the
material is in contact with the surface of the concrete pavement
measured in the direction in which the drag is being moved. The burlap

drag shall consist of atleast twolayers of approximately 340g/m2 burlap

with the bottom layer atleast 150mm longer than the top layer at the
dragging end; however, at the discretion of the Engineer, the number of
layers may be increased to four. The transverse threads of the trailing
150mm to 300mm of the burlap drag shall be removed.

134
Tine Grooving Device (GroovingComb)
The pavement shall be grooved by means of a metal tine grooving
device. The tines shall be made from flat spring steel approximately
0.6mm in thickness and 3mm in width, 125mm in length and spaced at
between 12mm and 25mm in an approved random pattern. The
Engineer may, however, require a different random pattern or equal
spacing of the tines during the course of the work, and provision shall be
made to supply different sets of combs as required. No additional
payment will be made for the first two changes in the spacing of the
tines.

The combs for applying the texturing shall be atleast 3.0m wide. It must
also be possible to adjust the combs to a lower position in order to
compensate for wear.

Burlap-Drag-and-Grooved Texture
This texture shall be obtained by first applying a burlap-drag finish to the
concrete surface and then by grooving it with a grooving comb.

The first pass of the burlap drag shall be made as soon as construction
operations permit and before the wet sheen has disappeared from the
surface. Burlap dragging shall be repeated until a gritty and uniform
texture having the required depth of texture has been obtained.

Every morning the burlap drag shall be wetted and kept moist
throughout the day. At the end of each day's pour the burlap mats shall
be cleaned or discarded and replaced with new burlap if cleaning is not
possible.

After the concrete has hardened, all loose particles generated by the
cutting of the grooves shall be broomed off the surface with stiff hand
brooms or mechanically operated rotary brooms.

When measured with a suitable depth gauge, the grooves shall be not
less than 2 mm and not more than 4 mm in depth.

The Engineer may permit the use of texturing equipment other than the
grooving comb, provided that it produces a texture similar to that
produced by the metal tines.

135
 Hand texturing
Texturing the surface with hand-held brooms or combs shall be allowed
only where the pavement is so small or irregular, or the site is so
restricted as to make the use of the texturing machine impracticable, or
in cases of mechanical breakdown of the texturing machine, in which
case it may be used for the required texturing of concrete already
placed. The brush or comb to be used then shall be of the same type
and width used in the machine. In order to ensure straight grooves, the
comb shall be operated against a straight-edge placed at right angles to
the pavement centreline.

The same requirements regarding groove dimensions or texture depth

as for machine- texturing will apply.

4211 B CURING
The exposed surfaces, including the sides of the slab, shall be treated
immediately after the required texturing of the surface has been effected
and after the side formwork has been removed by the application of a
white-pigmented curing compound as specified in sub-clause 7102.8
above in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer.

The curing compound shall be sprayed onto the surface at a rate of 0.35
liter/m2 or as approved by the Engineer by means of a mechanical
distributor capable of producing a fine fog-type of spray, which will not
damage the surface of the concrete. The curing compound shall be
applied in two layers with the distributor moving in opposite directions for
the two applications. Coverage shall be uniform over the entire surface
and the rate of application of the curing compound shall be carefully
controlled.

During spraying operations, the curing compound shall be continuously

stirred mechanically to keep the pigmentation in suspension. The spray
nozzles shall be adequately protected against wind.

After shutting off the spray nozzles, no dripping of curing compound on

the concrete surface may occur. If necessary, the Contractor shall
provide drip pans suspended below the nozzles to prevent dripping of
the curing compound onto the pavement.

136
 The curing membrane shall be maintained intact for at least seven days
after the concrete has been placed. Any damage to the curing
membrane, caused by the Contractor's activities, shall be repaired by
hand-spraying the affected areas.

Areas inaccessible to the mechanical distributor such as odd shaped

areas, or those with varying widths or shapes, shall be sprayed with
curing compound by means of approved hand spraying equipment, at
the specified rate of application.

4212 B TRANSVERSE JOINTS

General
Transverse joints shall be provided in unreinforced and jointed
reinforced concrete slabs and shall be contraction, expansion or warping
joints at the spacings shown on the Drawings or as specified in the
Project Specifications.

Transverse joints shall be straight within the following tolerances along

the intended line of the joint,which is the straight line transverse to the
longitudinal axis of the carriageway except where otherwise shown on
the Drawings.

Deviations of the filler board or bottom crack inducer from the intended
line of the joint shall not be greater than +/- 10mm;
The best fit straight line through the joint groove as constructed shall not
be more than 25mm from the intended line of the joint;
Deviations of the joint groove from the best fit straight line of the joint shall
not be greater than 10mm.

Transverse joints on each side of a longitudinal joint shall be in line with

each other and of the same type and width.

Concrete pavement layers shall be isolated from fixed structures by

expansion joints, or earthworks or a granular layer over the structure, or
by bridge-type expansion joints, or by lengths of fully flexible pavement
construction. End of pavement surfaces labs shall have a transition bay
as shown on the Drawings, leading into the fully flexible construction.

137
Contraction joints
Contraction joints shall consist of:
A sawn joint groove
Dowel bars
A sealing groove

Expansion joints
Expansion joints shall consist of:
Ajointfillerboard
Dowelbars
Asealinggroove

The filler board shall be positioned vertically within the prefabricated

joint assemblies along the line of the joint within the tolerances given in
Sub-clause7112(a) above, and at such depth below the surface as will
not impede the passage of the finishing beams on the paving machines.

The joint filler board together with the sealing groove shall provide a
complete separation of adjacent slabs and any spaces around dowel
bars and between the layer underlying the slab and the filler board shall
be packed with a suitable compressible material after fixing the joint
assembly.

Warping joints
Warping joints shall consist of:
A sawn groove
Tie bars
A sealing groove

Construction joints
Construction joints made at the end of a working day in unreinforced
concrete slabs and jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be contraction
joints. In the event of mechanical break down of the concreting
machinery, or at the on set of adverse weather, emergency joints may be
formed.

Emergency joints in unreinforced concrete slabs shall be contraction

joints not less than 2.5m from the preceding or succeeding joint position.

138
 Emergency joints in jointed reinforced concrete slabs shall be not less
than 2.5m from the preceding or succeeding joint position. The stop end
formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that dowel bars, tie bars or
reinforcement will be held In position incompliance with the
Specification, and placed in such a position that it permits the
longitudinal reinforcement to project through the joint for a distance of
atleast750mm.

Construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete slabs at end of

day or in an emergency shall not be constructed within 1.5m of any lap
in the longitudinal reinforcement. The stop end formwork shall be
sufficiently rigid to ensure that the longitudinal reinforcement and the tie
bars, which project through the joint, are held in the correct position.

4213 B LONGITUDINAL JOINTS

General
Sawn or wet-formed longitudinal joints shall be provided in surface slabs
at the positions as shown on the Drawings. Generally, bay widths are not
to be greater than 4.2m (or5.0m with limestone aggregate) for
unreinforced slabs, or 6m (or 7.6m with limestone aggregate) for
reinforced concrete surface slabs with transverse reinforcement.

Wet-formed longitudinal joints shall consist of wet-formed joint grooves, a

bottom crack inducer and tie bars except where transverse
reinforcement is permitted in lieu.

Longitudinal joints shall be constructed within the following tolerances:

Deviations of the bottom crack inducer from the intended line of the
joint, parallel to the axis of the road shall be not greater than ±13 mm;

The joint groove shall be located vertically above the bottom crack
inducers within a horizontal tolerance of ±25 mm;

The best fit line along the constructed joint groove shall be not more
than 25mm from the intended line of the joint;

139
 Deviations of the joint groove from the best-fit line of the joint shall not
be greater than 10 mm.

Sawn longitudinal joints shall consist ofjoint grooves.

Tie bars may be replaced by continuous transverse reinforcement
across the joints in continuously reinforced concrete slabs, which are
constructed in more than one lane width in one operation, provided that
the transverse reinforcement is a minimum of 12mm diameter bars at
600mm centers. The transverse reinforcement in these circumstances
shall be protected by suitable bituminous paint or equivalent coating for
a distance of atleast 75mm either side of the joint.

Longitudinal construction joints

Longitudinal construction joints between separate slabs shall have tie
bars with a joint groove. Alternatively, if split forms are used, the
transverse reinforcement, if 12 mm diameter or more, may be continued
across the joint for a minimum of 500 mm or 30 times the diameter of
the transverse reinforcement bars, whichever is the greater. The
transverse reinforcement in these circumstances shall be protected by
suitable bituminous paint or equivalent coating for a distance of at least
75 mm either side of the joint. Where the edge of the concrete slab is
damaged, it shall be made good before the adjacent slab is
constructed.

4214 B LONGITUDINAL JOINTS

General
Transverse contraction or warping joint grooves shall be sawn in the
hardened concrete. Transverse joint grooves, which are initially
constructed less than the full width of the slab shall be completed by
sawing through to the edge of the slab and across longitudinal joints as
soon as any forms have been removed and before an induced crack
develops at the joint.

Sawn transverse and longitudinal joint grooves

Sawing shall be undertaken as soon as possible after the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to enable a sharp edged groove to be produced
without disrupting thec oncrete and before random cracks develop in the
slab.

140
The grooves shall be between ¼ and ⅓ of the specified depth of the
slab and of any convenient width not less than 3mm.

The sealing groove may be sawn to the required width later. Expansion
joint sealing grooves shall be sealed as soon as practical after sawing.
Wet-formed longitudinal joint grooves
When slabs are constructed in more than one lane width in one
operation, a joint groove shall be formed by inserting a groove former
ahead of the finishing beams from dispenser. The concrete so displaced
shall be re-compacted by a vibrating compactor or similar device, atleast
300mm wide operating symmetrically along the line of the joint.

After finishing the concrete, the groove-forming strip shall be in the

correct position and alignment, within 10 of the vertical, and to sufficient
depth below the surface to allow for the passage of the finishing be
within the range of 0-3mm below the finished level of the slab. Groove
forming strips in wet-formed longitudinal joint grooves shall be left in
place.

Construction joint grooves in surface slabs

The grooves shall be formed by fixing a groove former or strip or cork
seal along the top edge of the slab already constructed, before
concreting the adjacent slab.

Where the edge of the concrete is damaged, it shall be ground or made

good before fixing the groove-forming strip.

Alternatively, the subsequent slab may be placed adjacent to the first

and a sealing groove sawn later in the hardened concrete to the
minimum depth specified or to the manufacturer’s instructions if greater,
and to sufficient width to eliminate minor spalling of the joint arris, upto a
maximum of 25mm for longitudinal joints and 40mm for transverse
joints.The joint shall be sealed in compliance with Clause 3916A.

Groove formers and bottom crack inducers

Except where joint grooves are sawn, a bottom crack inducer shall be
provided at each longitudinal joint position. The bottom crack inducer
shall be triangular or inverted Y-shaped fillet, with a base width not less
than the height, made of timber or rigid synthetic material. It shall be

141
 firmly fixed to the sub-base so as to remain in position during the whole
process of constructing the slab.

The combined depth of groove-formers and bottom crack inducers shall

bebetween ¼ and ⅓ of the depth of the slab and the difference between
the depth of the groove-former and the height of the bottom crack
inducer shall not be greater than 20mm.

Groove forming sealing strips for wet-formed longitudinal joints shall be

inserted continuously along the joint.

4215 B THE BARS AND DOWELS

Tie bars
Tie bars at the time of use shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and
scale.

Tie bars in warping joints and wet-formed longitudinal joints shall be

made up into rigid assemblies with adequate supports and fixings to
remain firmly in position during the construction of the slab.

Alternatively, tie bars at longitudinal joints may be mechanically inserted

by vibration from above using a method, which ensures re-compaction
of the concrete around the tie bars.

At longitudinal construction joints, tie bars may be adequately fixed to

side forms or inserted into the side of the slab by a method, which
ensures re-compaction of the concrete around the tie bars and
adequate bond.

Tie bars in warping joints shall be positioned from the top surface of the
slab within 20-10mm of the mid depth of the slab.

Tie bars in other joints shall be positioned and remain within the middle
third of the slab depth, approximately parallel to the surface and
approximately perpendicular to the line of the joint, with the centre of
each bar on the intended line of the joints within a tolerance of 50mm,
and with a minimum cover of 30mm below any top crack inducer of joint
groove for slabs 200mm thick or more, or 20mm for slabs up to 200mm
thick.

142
At transverse construction joints in continuously reinforced concrete, tie
bars shall be fixed at twice the normal spacing mid-way between the
longitudinal reinforcement bars so that 750mm extends each side of the
joint at the same level as the longitudinal reinforcement and be tied to
the transverse reinforcement. Where paving from a construction joint is
not resumed within 5days, an extra longitudinal reinforcement bar 8m
long shall be lapped and tied to each tie bar. These extra bars may be
combined with the tie bars.Where the spacing between longitudinal
reinforcement and the extra 8m long bars is less than 90mm, the
nominal size of aggregate shall be 20mm for a sufficient number of
concrete batches to complete that section of pavement.

Where tie bars are used in longitudinal joints in continuously reinforced

concrete they shall be placed at the same level as the transverse
reinforcement and tied to the longitudinal reinforcement.

Dowels
Dowel bars shall be free from oil, dirt, loose rust and scale at the time of
concreting.

Dowel bars shall be rigidly supported, both in vertical and horizontal

alignment, on cradles in prefabricated joint assemblies positioned prior
to construction of the slab. For contraction joints, as an alternative to
prefabricated assemblies, dowel bars may be mechanically inserted
with vibration into the concrete by a method, which ensures full re-
compaction of the concrete around the dowel bars, and the surface
finished by a diagonal finishing beam, or a longitudinal oscillating float
travelling across the slab.

Dowel bars shall be positioned at mid-depth from the surface level of

the slab ±20mm. They shall be aligned parallel to the finished surface of
the slab, to the centreline of the carriageway and to each other within
the following tolerances after construction of the slab:

All bars in ajoint shallbe within ±6 mm per 300mm length of bar;

Two thirds of the bars shall be within±4 mm per 300mm length of bar;
No bar shall differ in alignment from an adjoining bar by more than 6mm
per 300mm length of bar in either the horizontal orthe verticalplane;

143
 Bars shall be equally positioned about the intended line of the joint
within a tolerance of 25 mm.

Cradles supporting dowel bars shall not extend across the line of the
joint.

4216 B SEALING OF JOINT GROOVES

General
All transverse joints in surface slabs, except for construction joints in
continuously reinforced concrete slabs shall be sealed using one of the
joint seals described in Sub-clause 7102F. Additionally, longitudinal
joints, which are sawn or widened, shall be sealed.

Preparation of Joint Grooves for Sealing

That part of the groove-former used to form the sealing groove or any
temporary seal shall be removed cleanly without damaging the joint
arises to a minimum depth of 25mm where compression seals are used
or otherwise to such depth as will provide an applied seal to the
dimensions shown in the Drawings after allowing for any necessary
caulking material.

If joint grooves are not initially constructed to provide the minimum

dimensions for the joint seals as given in the Drawings, they shall be
widened by sawing. Joint grooves formed by tapered formers need not
be widened. The sealing grooves shall be cleaned out immediately after
sawing using high-pressure water jets, to remove all slurry from the
joint, before the slurry hardens.

If rough arises develop when grooves are made, they shall be ground to
provide a chamfer approximately 5mm wide. If the groove is at an

angle up to 100 from the perpendicular to the surface, the over hanging

edge of the sealing groove shall be sawn or ground perpendicular. If

spalling occurs or the angle of the former is greater than 10 0 the joint

sealing groove shall be sawn wider and perpendicular to the surface to

encompass the defects upto a maximum width, including any chamfer,
of 40mm for transverse joints and 25mm for longitudinal joints.

144
For applied sealants, the sides of the joint sealing groove shall be
scoured by dry abrasive blasting. This shall not be carried out before
the characteristic compressive strength of the concrete is expected to
reach 15 MPa. When compression seals are used, the sides of the
groove may be ground or wire brushed.

For hot and cold applied sealants, compressible caulking material,

debonding strip or tape or cord compatible with the sealant, of a suitable
size to fill the width of the sealing groove, shall be firmly packed or stuck
in the bottom of the sealing groove to such a depth so as to provide the
correct depth of seal as shown in the Drawings with the top of the seal at
the correct depth below the surface of the concrete.

All groves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material by air blasting with
filtered, oil-free compressed air. The groove shall be clean and dry at the
time of priming and sealing.

For applied sealants, the joint grooves shall be primed with the relevant
primer for the hot or cold applied sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. When necessary, the joint grooves
may be primed and sealed earlier than 14 days after construction, as
soon as the grooves have been grit-blasted and cleaned.

Sealing with applied sealants

Sealing shall be carried out continuously along the full length of joint in
anyone rip, except for remedial areas. When t h e E n g i n e e r
r e c o m m e n d s f o r e i t h e r hot or cold applied sealants, the sealant
shall be applied within the minimum and maximum drying times of the
primer recommended by the manufacturer. Priming and sealing with
applied sealants shall not be carried out when the naturally occurring

temperature in the joint groove to be sealed is below 100C, except that

between 80C and 100C it may be carried out when the temperature is

rising.

Hot-applied sealants shall be heated in and applied from a

thermostatically controlled, indirectly heated dispenser with a

145
recirculating pump. The sealant shall not be heated to a temperature
higher than the safe heating temperature nor for a period longer than
the safe heating period, both as specified by the manufacturer. The
dispenser shall be cleaned out at the end of each day and reheated
material shall not be used.

The components of cold-applied sealants shall be thoroughly mixed in

the correct proportions in an automatic metering and mixing dispenser
or, for hand application, using a power operated paddle mixer for
sufficient time to produce a homogenous mix and without entrapped air.

As soon as possible after mixing and within the work life of the sealant,
the material shall be dispensed into the joint, or applied using a caulking
gun, to the concrete below the concrete surface. The tack-free time
shall be achieved within 3hours for machine dispensed material, or
within 12hours for hand applied material.

Sealing with compression seals

When compression seals are used, the widths of the seal shall be
selected in relation to the width of the sealing groove, the bay lengths
and the manufacturer’s recommendations so that the estimated
maximum width of the joint opening shall be not more than 70% of the
original width of the seal, the estimated maximum width being
calculated on the basis of a movement of 4mm per 10m run of slab. The
maximum calculated width of sealing groove shall be 30mm. The depth
of groove shall be such that the contact face of the seal shall be a
minimum of 3mm below the surface of the concrete.

Compression seals shall be inserted into the grooves without prior

extension or rotation and, where recommended by the manufacturer,
with a lubricant adhesive which is compatible with the seal and the
concrete. The adhesive shall be applied to both sides of the sealing
groove or the seal, or to both. The seal shall be positioned with its axis
perpendicular to the concrete surface. Excess adhesive on top of the
seal shall be removed to prevent adhesion of the top faces of the seal
under compression. Except when compression seals are used in
longitudinal joints, the transverse joint seal shall be continuous across
the slab and the longitudinal joint groove forming strips shall be cut to
the required depth after the concrete has hardened for the transverse
146
 seal to be inserted. If compression seals are used in longitudinal joints
where the grooves have been sawn after construction of the slab, they
shall be continuous across transverse joints, with the transverse seals
butted and fixed to the longitudinal seals with adhesive.

4217 B TRIAL PAVEMENT

General
When commencing with paving operations, the Contractor shall
construct a trial section of pavement, in a position approved by the
Engineer, to demonstrate the capability of the Contractor to construct
the pavement in accordance with the Specifications.

The trial section shall be constructed with the same materials, concrete
mix, plant and equipment as those intended for use by the Contractor
for the pavement, and he shall also demonstrate the methods he
proposes to use for applying the required surface texture, the
construction of joints and the placing of tie-bars, dowels,etc.

Before the Contractor commences with the construction of the trial

section, he shall demonstrate to the Engineer that all items of his paving
equipment are in a satisfactory working order.

An initial trial section of not less than 150m in length for mechanical
construction, and atleast 30m in length for manual construction, shall be
constructed in one continuous operation and be submitted for approval.
The Engineer shall also be entitled to call for a new trial section to be
constructed at any stage of the contract when changes by the
Contractor in the approved equipment, materials, mix or rate of paving
warrant the construction of another trial section.

The Contractor will be paid for the actual length of trial pavement
constructed as initial trial section and trial sections constructed in
consequence of changes in mixes, techniques, materials, etc, effected
by the Contractor, upto a maximum total length of 300m for mechanical
construction, and 60m for manual construction. In addition, he will be
paid for any trial lengths necessary as a result of similar changes
required by the Engineer, notwithstanding the fact that the trial section
built by th eContractor complied with the specified requirements.

147
 Further trial sections and permission to start constructing the
pavement
The Contractor may, unless advised of any deficiencies in the trial
section, proceed with the construction of the pavement ten (10) days
after the completion of the trial section or such earlier time as the
Engineer may determine.

In the event of deficiencies in the trial section, the Engineer may order
the Contractor to construct a further trial section, which will again be
regarded as the initial trial section.The Contractor may then proceed
with the construction of the pavement ten (10) days after the
satisfactory completion of the second or subsequent trial section.

4218 B CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

The Construction tolerances shall be as specified under Section 7000 of
the Standard Specifications.

4219 B PROCESS CONTROL

The Contractor shall conduct a sufficient number of tests necessary for
ensuring compliance with the requirements specified in this Division
during all phases of the work.

Accelerated early compressive strength shall be conducted regularly

with a view to predicting the 28-day compressive strength of the
concrete. Test procedures and methods for the prediction of 28-day
compressive strength shall be determined in consultation with the
Engineer.

Where the accelerated tests indicate that the required 28-day

compressive strengths will not be attained, the Contractor shall
immediately effect the necessary changes to the materials and/or mix
proportions in order to ensure that further work will comply with the
requirements.

4220 B QUALITY CONTROL AND WORKMANSHIP

General
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the Engineer to
determine whether the quality of materials and workmanship complies
with the requirements of this Division.

148
The assessment of test results and measurements, and the acceptance
of the work, shall bed one in accordance with a procedure developed by
the Engineer.

The following shall also apply:

Compressive-strength control
The Engineer may, at his discretion, decide to use the Contractor's test
results in the acceptance plan, if he is satisfied that the Contractor has
complied with all the process control requirements.

Relationship Between the Compressive and Flexural Strengths of

Concrete
The relationship between the 28-day compressive and the 28-day
flexural strengths of the concrete established by the preliminary tests
shall be monitored during paving operations by regular tests at the
discretion of the Engineer.

For thi spurpose, sets of three sample each for both flexural and
compressive strength tests shall be manufactured from the same batch
of concrete and tested for flexural and compressive strength
respectively.

If the test results indicate a relationship, which deviates from that

established by the preliminary tests, the specified compressive strength,
as specified in Sub-clause 3902A(j)(i) shall be adjusted accordingly.

Air Content of Concrete

If any test for air content shows a value falling outside the specified
limits, the quantity of air-entraining agent added to the concrete mix
shall be adjusted, until the air content of the concrete is within the
specified limits.

Unacceptable Work or Materials

Any work or materials which do not comply with the specified
requirements shall be removed and replaced with work or materials
which comply with the requirements or, if the Engineer so permits, shall

149
 be repaired as specified in Clause 3921A, so that it shall comply with
the specified requirements after having been repaired.

Acceptance of Concrete of Inferior Strength or Thickness at

Reduced Payment
In lieu of requiring the removal of work that has been rejected on
account of insufficient strength or thickness, the Engineer may accept
such work, at his sole discretion, at reduced payment for the pavement
concrete, on the following conditions:

Where concrete is deficient in thickness or in strength, the reduced

payment shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:

P=(dw)5(fw)4x100(ds)5(fs)4

where:
P = percentage of normal compensation dw=actual average thickness of
slab
ds = specified average thickness of slab
Fw = actual28-day compressive strength of slab (average of 28-day
compressive-strength tests)
Fs = specified 28-day compressive strength of slab

The above shall be subject to the rejection of a pavement with an

average thickness of less than 93.1% of the specified thickness or
strength of less than 91.5% of the specified strength, as determined
above.

Where both thickness and strength are deficient, it will be rejected if P is

less than 70%.Where P exceeds100%, normal compensation only will
be payable.

4221 B REMEDIAL WORK

In addition to the requirements specified in Clause1201, the following
shall apply specifically to concrete pavements:

150
Removing concrete
Where any section of the pavement, which does not comply with the
specified requirements, is to be removed and reconstructed, the entire
portion of the slab shall be removed and reconstructed as prescribed by
the Engineer in writing.

Removing high spots

Where the Engineer so permits, high spots may be removed by
approved power chisels and planers. After the high spots have been
removed, the Contractor shall, if required, grind the surface upto the
nearest longitudinal and transverse joint in order that all the ground
areas will be neat rectangular areas with a uniform texture.

On all portions of the pavement where the surface texture has been
destroyed or reduced in depth by grinding, the surface texture shall be
restored by grooves being cut into the concrete surface. The grooves
shall be approximately of the same size and spacing as specified in
Sub-clause 3910A(b).

Repairing joints
Joints along which spalls occur that exceed 5mm indepth at any point
measured from the top surface of the pavement, or any other joints,
which in the opinion of the Engineer are unacceptable, shall be repaired
with an approved epoxy resin mortar. The method of repairing joints
requires the prior approval of the Engineer.

Repairing the cracks

The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing a pavement which
will not exhibit any cracks.

Where cracks occur in the pavement which, in the opinion of the

Engineer, do not warrant the removal and reconstruction of the
particular section of pavement, the Contractor shall, if so required by
theEngineer, repair such cracks, in accordance with a method approved
by the Engineer.

Rehabilitation of concrete pavements

Where concrete pavements have to be widened or where long
continuous sections of concrete pavement have to be replaced and, in

151
the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete can be placed with pavers, the
work shall be regarded as, and shall be measured and paid for as, new
work under the applicable items for new work.

Removal of existing concrete

Where any section of the concrete pavement has to be removed, the
whole panel between longitudinal and transverse joints shall be
removed, unless it is specified in the Project Specifications or ordered
by the Engineer that only part of the panel be removed. In such cases,
the concrete shall be removed either over the full length or over the full
width of the panel between joints. Where the edge of the section to be
removed coincides with an existing joint, the edge shall be accurately
demarcated in a straight line and sawn with an approved concrete saw
to a depth of at least 50 mm before the removal of the concrete may
commence.

Existing concrete may be broken up in any approved manner, but strict

control shall be exercised to ensure that the adjacent concrete is not
damaged in any way. The Contractor shall repair any damage to the
adjacent concrete at his own cost in accordance with the instructions of
the Engineer. Such remedial work may involve the partial or complete
replacement of the damaged panel should it be deemed necessary by
the Engineer.

Care shall be taken at existing joints to ensure that tie bars or dowels
are not damaged or bent so as to render them useless.

Broken-up concrete shall be removed to approved spoil dumps.

Placing new concrete

Before concrete is placed, the underlying surface or layer shall be
prepared as specified. Except where concrete is placed in continuous
lengths exceeding 50 m, placing, compacting and finishing with hand
equipment shall be carried out as specified in Clause 3908A. Where
new concrete is placed next to existing concrete, the edge of the
existing pavement shall be properly cleaned and all bituminous and
other jointing material shall be removed.

152
Where various adjacent panels are constructed, the concrete in every
alternate panel shall first be placed. The concrete in the rest of the
panels may be placed only after the concrete in the first panels has
sufficiently hardened so that no damage will be done to the first panels
during construction activities. All formwork shall remain in position for
atleast 24 hours.

Surface texture
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, the Contractor
shall produce a surface texture on the new concrete panels which shall
be the same as that on the existing panels.

Joints, tie bars and dowels

Joints shall be shaped and tie bars and dowels shall be placed where
indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Clauses 4212A up to and
including 4216A.

At joints in new concrete, thet ie bars and dowels in the existing

concrete shall be cleaned, and the tie bars shall be straightened, should
any such bars be indicated on the Drawings.

In regard to bent dowels, the Contractor shall follow the instructions of

the Engineer. Before concrete is placed, all the bars shall be accurately
aligned as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Clause 4215A.
Where the sliding end of a dowel occurs in existing concrete, the dowel
shall be extracted, cleaned and treated in accordance with the
Specifications and then replaced.

Where tie bars or dowels are shown on the Drawings at joints between
existing and new concrete, but no such bars occur in the existing
concrete, holes shall be drilled in the existing concrete and fresh bars
placed and fixed as prescribed in the Project Specifications. In such
cases, the dowels shall be placed with their sliding ends in the new
concrete.

Where no bars are required between the existing and new concrete but
such bars do occur in the existing concrete, such bars shall be cut off
flush with the concrete edge.

153
 All joints between the existing and new concrete shall be sawn after the
new concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent splintering or other
damage from occurring.Sawing the joints may normally be done from
two (2) to five (5) days after the placing of the concrete. The width and
depth of the sawn grooves shall comply with the requirements set in the
Project Specifications and on the Drawings.

Repairing joints and cracks in existing concrete pavement

Repairing the joints and cracks in the existing concrete pavement shall
be done in accordance with the requirements set out in the Project
Specifications and on the Drawings, and as required by the Engineer.
Retexturing

Where in the opinion of the Engineer the skid resistance of the concrete
pavement surfaces is too low, or the texture is too irregular, and where
so specified in the Project Specifications, such surfaces shall be
provided with a fresh texture.

The depth of texture and groove spacing shall comply with the
requirements of the Project Specifications. The work shall be done with
approved sawing equipment.

4222 B OPENING TO TRAFFIC

Except as decided by the Engineer, Contractor shall keep the pavement
closed to traffic for a minimum period of 14 calendar days after
placement of the concrete.

Contractor shall protect the pavement from all traffic, including

construction operations, until the specified period of time has elapsed or
as decided by supervising engineer.

4223 B MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

No extra over payment shall apply to work in restricted areas, or work
requiring hand placing, for work carried out in terms of Se ct ion 4200B.
The rates tendered for the payment items of Section 4200B shall include
full compensation for work in restricted areas or for work requiring hand
placing.

154
The quantities to be measured and paid for will be the approved
quantity, in cubic meters, of Plain Cement Concrete Pavement or of
Reinforced Cement Concrete Pavement as appropriate and as shown
in the construction drawings.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and
furnishing all the materials, storing the materials, providing all plant and
equipment, determining the mix proportions, mixing, transporting,
placing and finishing the concrete, texturing and curing, including
formwork, repairs done to defective work, protecting the pavement
against damage, construction joints, cleaning and sealing transverse
and longitudinal joints, tie-bars and dowel bars, abutting joints between
existing pavement, plastic sheeting 125microns thick, placing new
pavement and process control including the furnishing of test
specimens; extraction of core samples for testing of compressive
strength of laid concrete and repair of core holes.

The tendered rate shall also include full compensation for the provision
of any additional width required by the Contract or to the earthworks
and/or pavement layers to suit the particular requirements of the paving
equipment. It shall also include full compensation for the removal of the
additional widening, which extends beyond the limits of the specified
cross-section.

In the case of rehabilitation work, the tendered rate shall also include full
compensation for cleaning existing joints where new concrete has to join
up with existing work, for straightening existing dowels and tie bars, and
for cutting off existing bars as specified.

The unit of measurement shall be a cubic metre of material excavated

and removed. The quantity shall be computed in accordance with the
authorized dimensions for the excavation. The classification of the
material shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Section
4223.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for excavating the
material and disposing there-of to approved spoil dumps, including
transport.

155
Amend the description of Pay Item 4223 of the Special Specifications
as follows
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

42.05 (a) Reinforced Concrete pavement ( Class 35)

Cast in-situ reinforced concrete class 35 to rigid pavement laid on falls

and cambers, in alternate bays not exceeding 15 square meters
(i) including all formwork to edges tamped around fabric mesh cu.m
reinforcement and laid on blinded stabilized subbase (both measured
separately) and top surface finished smooth with a vibrating tamper.

25mm Approved semi-elastic expansion joint 200 mm high at 5.00

meters centers including formworks to both sides; 25x200 petroleum
(ii) resistant filler planted to form sealing grooves; 600 mm long x16mm m
diameter mild steel dowel bars at 300 mm centers half-length coated
with bond breaker; and 25x50mm gap filled with compressive materials.

Reinforcement, bars; BS 4461; hot rolled deformed high yield steel,

42.05 (b)
straight or bent

12 mm High-yield-stress-steel reinforcement for rigid pavement fixed as

(i ) tonne
per Engineer’s specifications.

42.05 (c) In-situ Plain Concrete pavement (Class 30)

Cast in-situ plain concrete class 30 to rigid pavement laid on falls and
cambers, in alternate bays not exceeding 15 square meters including
side formworks mixing, spreading, finishing of concrete, sawing and
(i) cu.m
sealing joints, dowel bars, plastic sheeting 125 microns thick,
compaction and curing and all incidentals necessary to complete the
works

25mm Approved semi-elastic expansion joint 200mm high at 5.00

meters centers including formworks to both sides; 25x200 petroleum
(ii) resistant filler planted to form sealing grooves; 600mm long x16mm m
diameter mild steel dowel bars at 300 mm centers half-length coated
with bond breaker; and 25x50mm gap filled with compressive materials.

156
5000 ANCILLARY ROADWORKS
5100 MARKER AND KILOMETRE POSTS
5106 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add at the end of Clause 5106 of the Standard Specifications the following
additional pay item:
ITEM UNIT
51.03 Bollards number (no.)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of Bollards supplied and

erected in accordance with the Drawings.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for supplying all materials and
labour, making and transporting the Bollards, setting out, excavating and
backfilling all the holes and disposing of surplus excavated material, including
all haulage, placing and painting the Bollards and all the equipment, the tools
and incidentals necessary for completing and maintaining the Works described
in this Section.

5200 GUARDRAILS
5202 MATERIALS
Replace first paragraph of Sub-clause 5202(a) of the Standard Specifications
by the following:

Guardrails shall be W-beams complying with the requirements of AASHTO

designation M180-98, Type I (zinc-coated 550 g/m2), Class A (base metal
nominal thickness 2.67mm), or equivalent.

Replace first sentence of Sub-clause 5202(a)(i) of the Standard Specifications

by the following:

All guardrails including bolts, washers and other fixing materials as well as
steel posts shall be galvanised by hot-dip zinc coating, 550 g/m2, according to
AASHTO designation M232M/97 or equivalent.

Add at the end of Sub-clause 5202(b)(ii) of the Standard Specifications the

following:
Steel posts shall be UNP steel profiles 120 x 55 x 7 mm.

157
5400 ROAD SIGNS
5403 MATERIALS
Add the following at the end of the fourth paragraph of Clause 5403 of the
Standard Specifications:

Words, figures and other symbols shall be applied to the reflective sheeting by
the “silk screen method” using a translucent paint for coloured parts but an
opaque paint for black parts. Paint types shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the Manufacturer of the reflective sheeting.

5404 CONSTRUCTION
Replace second sentence of fourth paragraph of Clause 5404 of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

Reflective sheeting shall be applied by vacuum/heat application method.

Retro-reflective background material shall be pre-applied to individual sections
of big informative signs before assembly with the material taken around the
face edges of each extension for at least 10 mm without damaging the
material. Where possible, letters across the joint between two extrusions
should be avoided.

Replace the sixth paragraph of Clause 5404 of the Standard Specifications by

the following:

The signs shall be supported on a galvanised steel tube of not less than 75
mm outer diameter and securely bolted to it as shown on the Drawings. To
avoid theft of the signs, the ends of bolts shall be hammered or spot welded to
prevent the nuts being removed.

Where details for the construction of sign faces, the framework of the sign
faces and the attachment thereof to the supporting framework are not shown
on the Drawings, the Contractor shall design these himself and submit the
details to the Engineer for approval before manufacture.

Add at the end of the tenth paragraph of Clause 5404 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

158
 Replace the third last paragraph of Clause 5404 of the Standard Specifications
by the following:

The signs shall be erected at a distance from the edge of shoulder as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

5409 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add after definition of Item 54.01 the following:

Payment for Standard Road Signs shall differentiate between three types:
Warning Signs
Regulatory and Prohibitory Signs
Information signs and
Route Direction Guidance Signs

The price for each of these pay items shall be full compensation for all
provisions stated in this clause including sign support in accordance with the
Drawings.

Add at the end of second paragraph under pay item 54.03 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The rate for Route Direction Guidance Signs shall include for the provision and
erection of sign support in accordance with the Drawings.

5500 ROAD MARKINGS

5501 SCOPE
Add at the end of first paragraph of Clause 5501 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

This Section also covers the construction of rumble strips, speed humps and
raised pedestrian crossings as indicated on the Drawings or as specified by
the Engineer.

5502 MATERIALS
Add at the beginning of Sub-clause 5502(a) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

159
 Paint for kerb marking shall comply with the requirements as specified under
(i) below while all other road marking shall be thermo-plastic road marking
material as specified below under (iii) below.
Replace Sub-clause 5502(a)(iii) of the Standard Specification the following:

The material shall be a thermoplastic compound conforming to the

requirements of BS3262 Parts I and II. It shall have been road trialled and
certificated to show compliance with BS3262 for 2 years (Class A certificate).

The material shall have the following characteristics:

• Softening point when measured in accordance with BS3262: >100 °C

• Viscosity when measured in accordance with the Brookfield method:

400 Poise at 160 °C

100 Poise at 190 °C
Flow resistance when measured in accordance with BS3262: 2%
maximum
Indentation: 1mm maximum when using a 100g indentor for 1 hour at
70 °C
Impact test: No cracking of sample when using Falling Ball method at 0
°C
Abrasion resistance: maximum 1% weight loss when measured for 100
revolutions of modified aggregate abrasion machine.
Luminance (laboratory): 80 minimum - High grade 70 minimum -
Standard grade
Skid resistance (laboratory): 50 minimum when measured with the
TRRL Pendulum as specified in BS3262

Add at the end of Sub-clause 5502(b) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

Road studs shall be 100 x 100 mm ROADTEC, K-Lite or similar

aluminium raised road marker as approved by the Engineer. Solar road
studs Tsuji or similar solar road studs shall be installed along sharp
curves and accident-prone areas as shall be identified at site and
approved by the Engineer.

160
 (c) Rumble Strips
Rumble Strips shall be constructed by three bituminous seals using
7mm aggregates with first seal applied in 250mm width, second in
200mm width and third seal in 150 mm width using bituminous binder
and aggregates complying with Section 4500. The 250mm wide rumble
strips shall be painted with yellow thermoplastic paint in thickness of 2
mm ±0.5 mm.

5503 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

Replace the Clause heading and contents with the follows:-

PREFORMED THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A durable, retroreflective preformed thermoplastic pavement marking
material suitable shall be applied at intersections, pedestrian zebra
crossings, pavement delineation and rumble strip markings.
1.1. The markings must be a resilient white, yellow, or other color
thermoplastic product with uniformly distributed glass beads
throughout the entire cross sectional area. The markings must be
resistant to the detrimental effects of motor fuels, lubricants,
hydraulic fluids, antifreeze, etc. Lines, legends and symbols are
capable of being affixed to bituminous and/or Portland cement
concrete pavements by the use of the normal heat of a propane
torch. Other colors shall be available as required.
1.2. The markings must be capable of conforming to pavement
contours, breaks and faults through the action of traffic at normal
pavement temperatures. The markings shall have resealing
characteristics, such that it is capable of fusing with itself and
previously applied thermoplastic when heated with the torch.
1.3. The markings shall not have minimum ambient and road
temperature requirements for application, storage, or handling.

MANUFACTURING LOCATION, CONTROL AND ISO

CERTIFICATION: The marking material must be produced in the United
States, and the manufacturer must be ISO 9001:2008 certified for
design, development and manufacturing of preformed thermoplastic
pavement markings, and provide proof of current certification.

MATERIAL: Must be composed of an ester modified rosin resistant to

degradation by motor fuels, lubricants etc. in conjunction with

161
 aggregates, pigments, binders and glass beads which have been factory
produced as a finished product, and meets the equirements of the
current edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for
Streets and Highways. The thermoplastic material conforms to AASHTO
designation M249, with the exception of the relevant differences due to
the material being supplied in a preformed state.

3.1 Graded Glass Beads

3.1.1. The material must contain a minimum of thirty percent (30%)
intermixed graded glass beads by weight. The intermixed beads
shall be conforming to AASHTO designation M247, with
minimum 80% true spheres and minimum refractive index of
1.50.

3.1.2. The material must have factory applied coated surface beads in
addition to the intermixed beads at a rate of 1 lb. (± 10%) per 10
sq. ft, or equivalent 0.45kg per 0.93 sq.m. This factory applied
coated surface beads shall have a minimum of 80% true
spheres, minimum refractive index of 1.50, and meet the
following gradation.

Size Gradation
Retained, % Passing, %
US Mesh μm
12 1700 0 - 2% 98 - 100%
14 1400 0 - 3.5% 96.5 - 100%
16 1180 2 - 25% 75 - 98%
18 1000 28 - 63% 37 - 72%
20 850 63 - 72% 28 - 37%
30 600 67 - 77% 23 - 33%
50 300 89 - 95% 5 - 11%
80 200 97-100% 0 - 3%

3.2 Pigments
3.2.1. White: The material shall be manufactured with sufficient titanium
dioxide pigment to meet FHWA
Docket No. FHWA-99-6190 Table 5 and Table 6 as revised and
corrected.

162
3.2.2. Red, Blue, and Yellow: The material shall be manufactured with
sufficient pigment to meet FHWA Docket No. FHWA-99-6190 Table 5
and Table 6 as revised and corrected. The yellow pigments must be
organic and must be heavy-metal free.

3.2.3. Other Colors: The pigments must be heavy-metal free.

3.3 Heating indicators:

The top surface of the material (same side as the factory applied
surface beads) shall have regularly spaced indents. The closing of
these indents during application, shall act as a visual cue that the
material has reached a molten state allowing for satisfactory adhesion
and proper bead embedment, and as a post-application visual cue that
the application procedures have been followed.

3.4 Skid Resistance:

The surface, with properly applied and embedded surface beads, must
provide a minimum resistance value of 45 BPN when tested according
to ASTM E 303.

3.5 Thickness:
The material must be supplied at a minimum thickness of 125 mils (3.15
mm).

3.6 Versatility:
As an option, turn arrows and combination arrows may come without
surface applied glass beads, thus facilitating the use of those arrows as
either left or right indicators, thereby reducing inventory requirements.

3.7 Environmental Resistance:

The material must be resistant to deterioration due to exposure to
sunlight, water, salt or adverse weather conditions and impervious to oil
and gasoline.

3.8 Retroreflectivity:
The material, when applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
guidelines, must demonstrate a uniform level of sufficient nighttime
retroreflection when tested in accordance to ASTM E 1710. The applied
material must have an initial minimum intensity of 500-med.mex.lx for

163
 white and 300-med.mex.lx for yellow measured with a Delta pavement
marking retroreflectometer.

Note: Initial retroreflection is affected by the amount of heat applied

during installation. When ambient temperatures are such that greater
amounts of heat are required for proper installation, initial retroreflection
levels may be affected.

APPLICATION:
3.9 Asphalt
The materials shall be applied using the propane torch method
recommended by the manufacturer. The material must be able to be
applied without minimum requirements for ambient and road
temperatures and without any preheating of the pavement to a specific
temperature. The material must be able to be applied without the use of
a thermometer. The pavement shall be clean, dry and free of debris.
Supplier must enclose application instructions in English with each
box/package only pertaining to an application method that does not
require preheating of the pavement to a specific temperature before
application.

4.0 Portland Cement Concrete:

The same application procedure shall be used as
described under Section
4.1 However, a compatible primer sealer shall be applied before application
to assure proper adhesion.

PACKAGING: The preformed thermoplastic markings shall be placed in

protective plastic film with cardboard stiffeners where necessary to prevent
damage in transit. Linear material must be cut to a maximum of 1m long
pieces. Legends and symbols must also be supplied in flat pieces. The cartons
in which packed shall be non-returnable, shall contain a minimum of 35% post-
consumer recycled materials, shall not exceed 101.6cm in length and 63.5cm
in width, and shall be labeled for ease of identification. The weight of the
individual carton must not exceed tihirty two (32) kilograms. A protective film
around the box must be applied in order to protect the material from rain or
premature aging.

164
 TECHNICAL SERVICES: The successful bidder shall provide technical
services as required. Regionally located manufacturer’s representative,
employed directly by the manufacturer, can provide no-cost on-site training for
proper application.

Payment: Payment shall include supply of materials including suitable primer

for application on Portland cement concrete pavement and Asphal concrete
pavement as directed by the manufacturer, equipment and labour and all
incidentals to completion.

(e) Raised pedestrian crossings

Raised pedestrian crossings shall be with a 3.0m wide platform, 100mm above
the longitudinal profile of the road, with 2.5m long ramps on each side and
extend across both the carriageway and shoulders all in accordance with the
Drawings. The raised pedestrian crossing shall be constructed with surfacing
of cast in-situ concrete Class 30 in 120mm thickness and with 8mm weld-
mesh, 150 x 150mm in the center. Subbase and CRR base course thickness
shall be as for the adjacent road section

5504 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING

Add at the end of Clause 5504 of the Standard Specifications the following:

The machine shall be capable of spraying at a speed of not less than 5.0
km/hr.

5507 APPLYING THE THERMOPLASTIC PAINT

Add at end of the second paragraph of Clause 5507 of the Standard
Specification the following:

Where instructed, Rumble edge line shall comprise a base line and ribs
formed in one continuous integral operation. The base line shall be screed
applied at 150 C to 180 C in 2.5 mm thickness +/- 0.5 mm and the ribs at 500
mm spacing shall have a thickness of 7 mm +/- 1 mm above the base line. A
microprocessor controlled mechanical shutter shall be used to form the solid
ribs, which shall a length of 50 mm +/- 0.5 mm and a width of at least 80% of
the base line width.

Immediately following application of the all thermo-plastic road marking lines, a

surface application of solid glass beads to BS6088 Class B or equivalent shall

165
 be applied at a rate of 250 grams per square metre by an applicator attached
to the machine.

Road marking paint shall not be applied to damp surfaces or when the relative
humidity exceeds 80%, or at temperatures lower than 10°C, or when, in
opinion of the Engineer, wind strength is such that it may adversely affect the
painting operations.

The method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with BS 3262

Appendix H.

Road marking for concrete pavement shall be applied immediately after

application of a suitable primer, the contractor shall propose a suitable primer
to the Engineer for approval before applying.

5509 ROAD STUDS

Replace the first paragraph of Clause 5509 of the Standard Specifications by
the following:

Road studs shall be of the type and size specified in Sub-clause 5502(b) and
shall be fixed in position at 5 m interval along the limit of chevron markings
ahead of raised median, at bridge approaches and other locations as directed
by the Engineer.

5513 PROTECTION
Add the following at the end of Clause 5513 of the Standard Specification:
The thermoplastic road-marking shall be kept track free for at least 10 minutes.

5514 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add the following pay items to Clause 5514 of the Standard Specifications:

ITEM UNIT
55.10 RUMBLE STRIPS, SPEED HUMPS AND
RAISED PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS
(a) rumble strips metre (m)
(b) Speed humps (extra over Subitems of 37.02, metre (m)
37.04, 38.02, 38.03, 39.01 and 45.01 for forming
speed hump)
(c) Raised pedestrian crossing by full cost payment metre (m)

166
 of subbase, crushed aggregate base course and
reinforced concrete slab

The unit of measurement for rumble strips, speed humps and raised
pedestrian crossings shall be the metre of the different types constructed to
the thickness and cross sectional shape shown on the Drawings and the
quantity paid for shall be the actual number of the various types constructed in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.

The bid rates shall include full compensation for furnishing all materials,
preparing the surface including providing, heating, mixing, transporting, laying
and compacting the materials in accordance with Section 4200 and this
Section 5500 of the Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
However, for Item 55.10(b) payment shall be as an extra-over rate with all
materials paid for separately under Subitems of 37.02, 37.04, 38.02 and 38.03
as relevant as well as under Subitems 39.01(a) and 45.01(a). Any road
marking will be paid for separately.

5600 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS

5601 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING
5602 SCOPE
These works shall consist of furnishing, installing, testing and putting
into service a street lighting system comprising lighting poles,
luminaires, power supply cables with accessories and power supply
including feeder pillars and photoelectric control and all necessary
earthworks including excavation and backfilling, cable ducts, pull boxes,
etc.

The works described in this section comprise the manufacture, packing,

shipment, insurance, customs duties, deliveryto site, storage,
installation, testing, commissioning, and documentation for a complete
street lighting system covering the BRT Phase 4 corridor roads.

The works comprise all materials and workmanship required for

providing the street lighting system as specified.

The works shall include all ancillary equipment and appurtenances

which may not be particularly called for in this specification or shown on

167
 the drawings, but which are necessary for the completion and
satisfactory functioning of the works to meet the requirements of the
specification.

The Contractor shall include all labour, specialist subcontractors,

materials, shuttering, scaffolding, lifting gear, supports, hangers, etc.,
which are necessary to complete the works as specified.

5603 MATERIALS
All materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant and
applicable standards, in particular those imposed by Tanzanian laws,
regulations and/or by-laws.

For materials and workmanship not covered by Tanzanian law,

standards, codes or regulations, the following standards shall apply,
listed in order of priority:

- British standards and codes, in particular BS 5489 part 1 and BS

EN 13201, all parts
- IEC recommendations
- Other national standards and codes subject to the Engineer's
approval.

The standards and regulations to be applied shall always be the latest

issue, which is in force 30 days prior to Contract signing.

5604 SOLAR STREET LIGHTING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL INFORMATION FOR SOLAR PANEL
The solar panel will be installed on top of the lighting pole as 2 pieces. It
must be 25 years linear performance and 10 years product
warranty/guarantee. The Lighting poles shall be Twin arm mast and
luminaires 2x75 up to 10m for road and 12 m for flyover.

Technical details

Maximum power Pmax 170Wp

Open circuit voltage Uoc 23.9 V
Mpp voltage Umpp 19.0 V
Short circuit current Isc 9.44 A
Mpp current Impp 8.99 A

Component / 168
Materials
 Number of cells : 36
Cell type : Polycrystalline
Cell size : 156.75 mm x 156.75 mm
Front : Low – iron tempered glass
Back : Film, White
Frame : Anodized Aluminium
J-box : IP67
Connector : MC4 Comp.

Dimensions / Weight
Length : 1020 mm
Width : 990 mm
Height : 40 mm
Weight : 12.2 kg

Thermal Characteristics
NOTC : 460 C
Isc : 0.041%/K
Uoc : -0.30%/K
Pmpp : -0.41%/K

Optimal Sytem Integration Parameters

Power sorting :-0 Wp / +5 Wp
Maximum system voltage : 1000 V
Maximum reverse current : 25 A
Load / Dynamic load : 5.4 / 2,4 KN/m2
Number of diodes :3
Operating temperature range : from - 400C - +850C

169
170
LED Lighting Armature - 1

171
LED Lighting Armature - 2

Battery
The battery shall be Gel deep cycle with nominal voltage of 25.6 and minimum
typical capacity of 150Ah and a Depth of Discharge (DoD) of at least 80%. The
battery must have a Warranty of at least Five (5) Years with a complete
replacement guarantee for defective unit within the first 5 years.

Control system
The switching of the lighting circuits shall be through an automatic control
arrangement comprising of a contactor, photocell, timer and selector switch.

The photoelectric cell shall operate on a supply voltage of 12/24V DC Auto

select. The operating range shall be adjustable between 5 to 300 lx as a
minimum. It shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient
temperatures.

The photocell operation shall be backed up, such that the lights remain on in
case of photocell failure.

The photocell shall be mounted inside the enclosure behind a transparent UV

resistant window.

An additional 24-hour timer shall be provided as a backup to the photocell. The

synchronous timer shall be of the solar dial type designed for automatic control

172
of the lights. The unit shall be based on Sangamo Suntracker series, so that it
can automatically track sunset and sunrise over a period of the year.

The switch movement shall be by self-starting quartz stepping motor driven by

a rechargeable nickel cadmium battery, adequately rated so that the expected
life of the same is approximately 8 years minimum. The timer and the cells
shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient temperatures. The
battery shall have a reserve of 150 h to ride over any power failures. Time
keeping shall be better than 5 minutes per year.

The 24 h solar dial timer shall be of 5 minute graduation, accurately plotted to

the latitude 7˚ 47' S, automatically compensating for the seasonal variations in
sunrise and sunsets.

The timer shall be plug in type and shall have sealing arrangement to prevent
tampering of settings. It shall be possible to manually override the timer.

A selector switch shall select the following mode of operation: (1) Auto on
timer, (2) Auto on photocell, (3) Auto on timer/photocell, (4) OFF and (5)
Manual.

LED Lighting Armature/ Luminaire

The Street lighting should be LED high powered solar street lighting rated 24
VDCminimum power factor of 0.95, minimum colour temperature of 4,000 K,
protection class IP66, optical efficiency of 95% and LED life of 100,000 hours.

All luminaires offered shall have a minimum guarantee period of Five (5)
Years. The scope of this guarantee includes the LED drivers, luminaire
housing, LED module(s), brackets and protector.

The Contractor shall ensure that a warranty for luminaire is secured from the
manufacturer in such a way that if luminaires are found to have failed within
this period as a result of poor manufacturing processes and//oor poor
materials, it shall be replaced free of charge by the manufacturer.

Solar Street Lighting Pole

The columns with associated brackets, base flanges and accessories shall be
in the standard production range of the manufacturer.

173
The columns shall be made from hollow sections to BS EN 10201-2 or
equivalent norms approved by the Engineer. The hollow section shall be of
steel to BS EN 10025 grade Fe 430C / S275J0 or equivalent and shall have a
minimum ultimate tensile strength of 430 N/mm2 and minimum yield stress of
255 N/mm2. The steel plate thickness shall be minimum 4 mm.

Columns up to and including 12 m height shall be in one-piece octagonal or

circular tapered shape and flanged (bolted) type. Subject to the Engineer's
approval, columns shall be hinged type for easy access to servicing the
luminaires.

The columns shall be designed in accordance with BS5649 in steel and hot dip
galvanised internally and externally after manufacture in accordance with BS
EN ISO 1461, Table 2 or equivalent.

The design shall include safety factors in accordance with Technical Report
no. 7 of the Institution of Public Lighting Engineers, UK. They shall be
designed to withstand the wind velocities stated in the general Standard
Specifications for Roads. At 105 km/h (29.2 m/s) 3 second duration gust wind
speed the deflection of the top of the mast or column shall not exceed 1/40 of
the height.

The column shall be provided with an internal base chamber with a fully
weatherproof door/cover secured by tamperproof lock of stainless steel.
Special keys such as Allen keys to open the door shall be provided on
completion in the ratio of one key to 20 columns, minimum two keys. All doors
for the same mast- or column type shall be interchangeable.

All doors shall be fitted with a door-retaining device to ensure that the door
cannot be dropped or lost. Any steel wire or chain used to achieve captivity
shall be galvanised or stainless steel.

A base board of hardwood or similar, non-hygroscopic material, minimum

thickness 12 mm and treated to prevent attack by insects, shall be provided
and securely fixed inside the column to accommodate the service cut-out with
fuses and terminals.

The columns shall be provided in the base compartment with a corrosion

resistant earthing terminal of stainless steel or brass, minimum 6 mm diameter

174
complete with two washers and a nut and locknut of the same material as the
terminal. The terminal shall be positioned so as to be readily accessible
through the door opening.

The base compartment shall be provided with terminals for looping-in and -out
a 4x16 mm2 or 4x10 mm2 or 4x6 mm2 armoured copper cable, as indicated in
the drawings, with earth conductor and a single pole mcb for each luminaire
mounted on the column.

Cables hanging inside the column, connecting the mcb's with the luminaires,
shall be 3 x 2.5 mm2 flexible cable to BS 7919 or BS 6500 with conductors of
class 5 stranded, plain annealed copper to BS EN 60228, heavy duty class as
type HO7RN-F, min. 300/500 V grade, with EP rubber insulation and circular
jacket of polychloroprene rubber or equal to be approved by the Engineer.

The top of the column shall be designed suitably to fix the bracket arm collar to
the top of the column. A minimum of 8 nos. threaded holes on the four sides in
two rows to suit M10x16 mm knurled cup-pointed hexagon socket set screws
shall be provided for mounting the bracket arm on top of column The required
number of hexagonal socket set screws to suit these holes shall be supplied
with each column.

Brackets for street lighting poles

The specification of materials and surface treatment given above for the
lighting poles shall apply to the brackets as well.

Brackets shall be of side entry mounting type single or double arms. The
design shall be as indicated on the drawings. Outreach from the lighting
column to the spigots shall be in accordance with lighting design calculations
or as specified on the drawings.

The spigot outside diameter shall match the luminaire, but shall not be less
than 42 mm.

Base flange
A minimum of four holes adjustable (slots) shall be provided on a min. 20 mm
thick flange plate of suitable size for the foundation bolts to fix the column on
to the foundation. The base flange plate shall be manufactured from steel
plate, which is free from lamination. The main shaft of the pole shall penetrate

175
 the full thickness of the base plate and shall be fully welded above and below
in accordance with BS EN 1011. Gusset plates shall be provided to give
additional strength to the poles. Gussets shall be located between the fixing
holes.

Foundations
All foundations for road lighting poles and -masts shall be made of pre-cast
reinforced concrete. The supplier of street lighting masts shall provide a
detailed calculation / design for the Engineer's approval for all reinforced
concrete foundations for each combination of type of column, type of luminaire
mounted on the column, and type of soil.

Identification labels
Each column shall be fitted with an identification label with 50 mm high
lettering on a white background. The labels shall be stainless steel or equal
weather resistant, durable material compatible with the galvanised surface.
The labels shall be fixed with galvanised or stainless steel bolts and nuts at a
height 50 mm above the base compartment door, but facing oncoming traffic.

5605 CONSTRUCTION
General requirements
Prior to planning of construction works the Contractor shall prepare a detailed
description of methodology for all erection and installation works and submit it
to the Engineer for his comments and approval. No works shall be carried out
before a written approval from the Engineer has been issued to the Contractor.

The Contractor to ensure that all trade work shall be carried out by tradesmen
fully competent and qualified in the respective trade, and the entire installation
shall be neat, orderly and well arranged and carried out in a methodical
competent manner.

All cable runs and all equipment, boxes, labels, etc. shall be mounted strictly in
lines, horizontally and vertically. Components out of sight, for example inside
switchboards, are also covered by this requirement.

If the location of equipment is not entirely defined by the specification and

drawings, the Contractor shall agree on the exact location with the Engineer
before the equipment is mounted.

176
All materials shall be stored, handled and installed in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Particular attention shall be given to avoid
damages to surface treatments of metallic objects and to provide adequate
cover to prevent cables and cable ducts with an outer polymer surface from
being exposed to prolonged ultraviolet radiation, i.e. more than 50 hours in
total.

Lighting poles
The poles shall be erected and aligned before the luminaires are mounted on
the poles.

The bracket(s) or arms shall be aligned to be exactly perpendicular to the

tangent of the road alignment, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

Columns with flange plates shall be painted with bituminous paint at the
underside of the flange and at the inside of the pole to a height of 500 mm.

Flange plate columns shall be carefully lowered onto the foundation base
prepared for it and shall be set vertical using nuts and washers under and
above the base plate. The nuts shall be made tight to secure the column to the
foundation and the nuts and exposed bolts shall be coated with "Denso paste"
and protected with "Denso tape" or equal. The space between the flange plate
and foundation base shall be grouted and trowelled to a smooth finish.

The bracket arms shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions to prevent rotation in service. Unless otherwise clearly indicated
on the drawings, the bracket shall be mounted perpendicular to the tangent of
the road centreline at the stationing of the column.

The foundations and planted root columns shall be placed with a horizontal
tolerance of ± 20 mm in all directions and a vertical tolerance of ± 20 mm.

After final fixing and adjustment no column shall deviate more than 0.1˚ from
true vertical (≈ 18 mm per 10 m).

The base compartment door shall be positioned as per the schedule below.
The door-locking device shall be lubricated.

177
 Column position Door position
On green area between Facing away from the incoming traffic
Median
walkwayofand
BRT lanes
MTL Facing away from the incoming traffic

Installation of luminaires
The luminaire shall be securely fixed to the spigot in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation.

The lamp shall not be inserted into the luminaire until the luminaire is securely
fixed to the erected column and until any adjustable mirror- and lamp holder
positions have been set and secured in accordance with the drawings and
lighting calculations.

All luminaires shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted and aligned at

commissioning.

5606 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General requirements
Testing shall be an essential, integrated part of the Contractor's quality
assurance system.

Testing shall be used to determine whether the tested property of the street
lighting system fulfils the Contract requirements as specified directly or by
reference to other documents such as standards, etc., and/or with guarantees
issued by the Contractor.

The term "testing" shall, depending of the context also comprise examination,
inspection and measurement.

The Contractor shall have on the Site all the relevant standards required for
the work he is to undertake under the Contract. A second complete set of such
standards shall be available for the sole use of the Engineer.

Testing includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following typical tests
listed in normal chronological order:

Type tests
Factory acceptance tests (FAT)
178
Inspection and testing on delivery
Inspection and testing of the Works during the progress of the work
Tests on completion, site acceptance tests (SAT) / commissioning tests / trial
operation tests / performance tests
Specific requirements for control, testing and commissioning of different types
of components and installations are given in the individual sub-sections below.

Tools and instruments

All labour, temporary materials, equipment, tools and instruments, etc.
required for performing the test shall be provided by the Contractor, and will
remain his property unless otherwise specified.

The Contractor's measuring instruments shall be calibrated by an approved,

independent calibration laboratory. Calibration labels showing the instrument's
serial number or other unambiguous identification shall be firmly attached to
the instruments.

The Contractor shall produce calibration certificates on the Engineer's request.

The acceptable age of such calibration certificates will depend on the type of
instrument and type of test and measurement, and shall be agreed between
the Contractor and Engineer prior to the test. Without such agreement, the
calibration certificate shall be not more that 6 months old.

Test instruments that have been repaired following damage shall be

immediately re-calibrated.

Calibration on site or in the workshop will, as a general rule, not be accepted.

If agreed with the Engineer, measuring instruments forming permanent part of

the plant may in some cases be used for verification of performance during the
test. The Engineer may, at any time before, during or after the test, require
verification of such measurements by parallel measurement by the Contractor
with a calibrated external instrument of the same type.

Type Tests
Type testing is applicable to mass-produced components of a manufacturer's
standard range of products, such as cables and luminaires.

179
A population of the specific component type, model and range will have been
tested for compliance with specified standards at a testing laboratory, which
shall have certified compliance with the relevant standards.

The Engineer reserves the right to request copies of such test certificates and
to approve the issuing testing laboratory.

Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

FAT shall be performed in the premises where the tested system or Plant is
assembled, before shipment to site.

The Engineer and the Employer shall be invited to witness the FAT. The
Contractor shall call for FAT a minimum of two (2) months in advance and at
the same time submit the test plans to the Engineer.

The FAT shall be performed on a complete system under simulated load, with
selected instrumentation.

As a minimum the following shall be demonstrated and tested during the FAT:

Preliminary system documentation

System start-up, full load/overload performance
Operator interfaces / man-machine interfaces
All safety functions
All other specified functions

Prior to the FAT, the Contractor / manufacturer shall perform an in-house test
and prepare all documentation to be used during the FAT.

The systems to be tested shall be unambiguously identified by indelible

marking.

Any non-compliance to requirements or incomplete work detected during the

FAT shall be listed in the test report (punch list). Remedial work shall be
agreed for all items on the punch list.

The FAT shall be considered complete when all specified tests have been
completed with exception of mutually agreed items from the punch list.

180
Inspection and testing on delivery to site
The Contractor shall inspect all plant and material on their arrival to site and
shall satisfy himself that the items delivered are in strict accordance with the
Contract requirements and / or the material approvals issued by the Engineer,
and that items tested in the factory are identical to the items actually received
on site.

The Contractor shall record any shortage, defect or default noticed by the
inspection.
The Contractor shall retain Bills of Lading, shipping labels and similar
identification of the received Plant and materials and submit copies to the
Engineer.

The Engineer shall be invited to witness the inspection on delivery of major

items of Plant. The Contractor shall give the Engineer notice on the delivery a
minimum of two (2) days in advance.

Inspection and testing during progress of work

The Contractor shall inspect and test parts of the Works during erection and
installation in accordance with his quality plan.

All work shall be inspected and, where relevant, tested before it is covered up
or put out of sight.
In general, functional testing - hot test - of operational systems shall be
conducted after pre-functional testing (cold test, static test) and start-up has
been satisfactorily completed.

Testing shall proceed in a logical sequence from components to subsystems

to systems.

Site acceptance test (SAT)

A site acceptance test (SAT) shall be carried out when the entire street lighting
system or a substantial subsystem is substantially completed and hot test has
been completed to the Contractor's satisfaction, according to the specification
and shop drawings and the tests have been accepted by the Engineer.

The Engineer shall witness the SAT. The Contractor shall call for the SAT a
minimum of three (3) weeks in advance and at the same time submit the test
plans to the Engineer.

181
As a minimum, the following shall be inspected, demonstrated and tested for
compliance with the Contract requirements during the SAT:
- Completeness and adequacy of as-built documentation
- Mechanical completeness and integrity
- Cabling, wiring, terminations, labelling
- System functionality
- Safety systems labelling and functionality
- Performance
- Operator interfaces / man-machine interfaces
- Any non-compliance to requirements or incomplete work detected
during the SAT shall be remedied immediately.

The SAT shall be considered completed when all specified tests have been
completed and all non-conformances or incomplete work detected have been
remedied and successfully re-tested.

Results of the SAT shall be documented by the Contractor in a SAT report.

Lighting poles and luminaires

Lighting poles and luminaires shall undergo visual and functional tests.

The visual inspection shall as a minimum include:

- Visual test of alignment of all columns and angle of brackets and
vertical mounting. If the visual test reveals discernible deviations of one
or more columns/brackets from the majority, the deviating
column/brackets shall be measured.
- Random sample visual test of lamp types. After confirmation of one
lamp type in an area of similar luminaires, a visual inspection of the
entity at night with the system energised will reveal any wrong lamp
types or -sizes and any missing or burnt-out lamps.
- Visual test of light distribution / luminance. The entire illuminated area
shall be inspected and anomalies of luminance shall be recorded. If the
lighting calculations do not indicate such anomalies, the optical
adjustment of the luminaires and mirrors involved shall be checked.
- Visual test of masts and columns for completeness of bolts, nuts and
washers, tightening of nuts, and soundness of surface treatment.

182
 Visual test of correct orientation, numbering and labelling of masts and
columns.

Functional test of each individual road lighting feeder pillar including

manual/automatic function and photoelectric cell function.
In addition to the visual and functional tests, the voltage drop from the feeder
pillar to the farthest end, at full load after minimum one hour operation of all
luminaires and loads on the circuit shall be measured for all circuits together
with the full load current of the circuit.

5606 DOCUMENTATION
General requirements
The Contractor's Bid shall include specific data sheets and manufacturer
details for all types of transformers, feeder pillars, masts, columns, lamps and
luminaires that the Contractor will provide.
Technical data sheets, brochures and type test certificates for all types of
transformers, feeder pillars, masts, columns, electrical components, luminaires
and lamps shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer may
request samples of luminaires for approval.

Workshop drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit workshop drawings in accordance
with the Special Specifications.

As-built documentation
The Contractor shall prepare and submit As-built documentation in accordance
with the SpecialSpecifications.

The As-built documentation shall also include all test records.

5607 SPARE PARTS

General requirements
The Contractor's Bid shall include spare parts for minimum 2 years of
operation and maintenance, as a minimum including:

10 nos. Solar Panel, 170WP, 23.9V

10 nos Battery, 25.6V, 150Ah, 10A/10A
10 nos Charge Controller
10 nos. luminaires (75W DC-DC High Power LED)

183
 3 nos. 12 m high lighting poles with double arm incl. internal electrical
installations and foundation bolts
1 no. 10 m high lighting pole with single arm and side arm at 5m from the
finished road level incl. internal electrical installations and foundation bolts
The spares shall be of same manufacture and range as the components
actually provided and installed.

The spare parts shall prior to Taking-Over be delivered to the Employer's store
in Iringa in original packaging and clearly labelled.

The spare parts shall not be used by the Contractor for the maintenance and /
or remedial works carried out by the Contractor during the Defects Liability
period.

STREET LIGHTING ENERGIZED THROUGH COMMERCIAL POWER

5609 SCOPE
These works shall consist of furnishing, installing, testing and putting into
service a street lighting system comprising lighting poles, luminaires, power
supply cables with accessories and power supply including feeder pillars and
photoelectric control and all necessary earthworks including excavation and
backfilling, cable ducts, pull boxes, etc.

The layout of the street lighting system has been prepared for tender purpose.
During Tendering, the Contractor shall in his price; cost of designing a
complete street lighting system based the Specifications and the
manufacturer’s directions and practices. Notwithstanding this the Contractor
shall prepare detailed plans and lighting calculations for approval by the
Engineer. The works described in this section comprise the manufacture,
packing, shipment, insurance, customs duties, delivery to site, storage,
installation, testing, commissioning, and documentation for a complete street
lighting system covering the road corridors under BRT Project of about
30.45Km.

The works comprise all materials and workmanship required for providing the
street lighting system as specified.

The works shall include all ancillary equipment and appurtenances which may
not be particularly called for in this specification or shown on the drawings, but

184
 which are necessary for the completion and satisfactory functioning of the
works to meet the requirements of the specification.

The Contractor shall include all labour, specialist subcontractors, materials,

shuttering, scaffolding, lifting gear, supports, hangers, etc., which are
necessary to complete the works as specified. All liaising with TANESCO
necessary for the Contractor to provide the power supply based on the
calculated demand.

5610 MATERIALS
General
All materials and workmanship shall comply with the relevant and applicable
standards, in particular those imposed by Tanzanian laws, regulations and/or
by-laws.

For materials and workmanship not covered by Tanzanian law, standards,

codes or regulations, the following standards shall apply, listed in order of
priority:
British standards and codes, in particular BS 5489 part 1 and BS EN 13201, all
parts
lEC recommendations
Other national standards and codes subject to the Engineer’s approval.

The standards and regulations to be applied shall always be the latest issue,
which is in force 30 days prior to Contract signing.

All materials, components and systems shall be selected or constructed for

constant operation without reduction of the useful lifetime or period between
maintenance / repair under the environmental conditions stated in these
specifications.

In particular, all materials shall be able to resist, or be protected against, attack

by insects, termites, rodents and fungus.

All insulation materials shall be non-hygroscopic.

All components and items of iron or steel shall be effectively protected against
corrosion by hot-dip galvanising with a minimum average thickness of 115 μm

185
for steel thickness > 5mm and 60 μm for steel thickness ≤ 5mm (sheet steel)
according to EN/ISO 1459-1461.

Paint systems providing equal protection may be acceptable, but are subject to
the Engineer’s approval.
All materials, components and systems shall be new, factory made and
specifically designed and constructed for the actual application.

As far as it is practically possible all components and equipment of similar

nature shall be supplied from the same manufacturer and be the same type
and manufacturing range in order to achieve maximum inter—changeability
and minimum spare parts stock.

Where items of associated electrical equipment are provided from different

suppliers, it is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that they are
compatible.

The entire street lighting system shall function and work properly without
undue deterioration from the power supply of 400/230 V AC ±10%, 50 Hz, 3-
phase, 4-wire system provided by the Contractor.

Transformers
The transformer shall be designed for safe, reliable and maintenance friendly
operation under the environmental conditions at the site.
The transformer substations shall be for outdoor location on H-pole
configuration.

The transformer stations shall be a standard construction provided with the

following standard equipment:
Fuse disconnector switch (drop out).
Lightning arresters
Distribution transformer
Low voltage section with a low voltage cubicle
Earthing systems (service earth and protective earth)

The transformer rated power under the specific site conditions in accordance
with IEC 60076 shall be in ratings as specified in the drawings.

186
All power transformers shall be constructed in accordance with lEC 60076 and
be of the naturally air-cooled oil filled type (ONAN). They shall be suitable for
outdoor installation and provided with a first filling of mineral oil to comply with
BS 60l48 Grade B30 or similar. The transformers shall be hermetically sealed.

The three phase transformer windings shall be connected in a delta-star

formation with group 4-phase displacement, primary to secondary vector group
reference Dyn 11. The star point of the secondary winding shall be brought out
through the tank and suitably terminated for solid earthing. .

Winding insulation shall be to Class ‘A’. The temperature rise shall be limited
to the maximum operating temperature for Class ‘A’ materials as defined in
[EC 60076 de-rated for the climatic 187luminium187 on site.

The high voltage windings shall be provided with off-load tapping from +5% to
-5% in 22’/% stages with constant flux voltage variation as defined in [EC
60076.

Tap selection shall be by means of a five position externally operated manual

control off-circuit tapping switch, pad lockable in any position. A mechanical
tap position indicator shall be provided. A suitable padlock shall be fitted to
each tap changer and be supplied complete with two keys in a common key
system.

A metal label warning that power must be switched off before the tap changer
is operated shall be fitted.

Tanks shall be provided with external cooling tubes, fins, or ducts, to provide
natural cooling at maximum rated capacity under the site temperature and
climatic conditions.
The tank shall be fitted with lifiing lugs suitable for handling the mass of the
transformer complete with oil.

The tank covers shall be constructed to enable them to be bolted to the top of
the tank without distortion. All tank and terminal box joints shall prevent entry
of moisture or leakage of oil. All joint faces shall fit properly and no additional
thickness ofjointing shall be used to make good irregularities. All gaskets shall
be of synthetic rubber and cork composition or similar material, and not subject
to deterioration.

187
The design and construction of the transformer core, winding and tank shall
ensure that the noise level at full load is kept to the minimum, commensurate
with economic design. The tank shall be reinforced or braced where necessary
to reduce the noise level.

All windings, winding terminals and connections shall be fully immersed in oil
under all operating conditions. All materials shall be suitable for this duty and
not subject to deterioration.

All joints shall be arranged so that they may be tightened externally.

Each transformer shall be provided with the following fittings:

a. Rating and terminal diagram plates of a durable and corrosion resistant
material
b. Oil level indicator, clearly visible from ground level
c. Tank earthing terminals (minimum two)
d. Primary and secondary power circuit cable termination to suit the power
circuit cables designed by the Contractor
e. Drain valve

LV feeder pillars
Each LV feeder pillar shall be equipped with the following:
One incoming circuit breaker feeding the busbar from the transformer
One busbar
3x1 phase mcb’s per each outgoing circuit
3 no’s current transformers for incoming circuit xxx.5A Class 0.3-3VA
One energy kWh meter (LV measurement of transformer output) phase
measuring
3 no’s ammeters for measuring phase currents in the incoming circuit
Spare space prepared for additional mcb’s
Outgoing circuits protected by Incb’s and controlled by a common
photoelectric device and contactors
Feeder pillar lighting with switch
Socket outlet
Single—phase mcb for feeder pillar lighting and socket outlet

188
The design, material, construction and performance of all low voltage
distribution feeder pillars for power distribution shall comply with the latest
international standards.

All outdoor feeder pillars shall be 11’ 55 ingress protection according to BS EN

60529.

The feeder pillars shall factory built assembly to BS EN 60439-1 and BS EN

60439-5, fully type tested assembly (TTA) and components shall have ASTA
Certification or approved equivalent.

Enclosure body shall be manufactured from electro galvanised sheet steel of

min. 2 mm thickness folded construction and modular assembly or glass fibre
reinforced polyester hot moulded self extinguishing type with canopy.

Finish shall be durable and easy to clean and shall be epoxy powder coated
70-80 pm after pre- treatment RAL 7032 or manufacturer’s standard colour.

Plinth mounted feeder pillars shall be provided with a base frame. The base
frame shall be manufactured from 3 mm thick electro galvanised sheet steel,
minimum 100 mm high and RAL 7021 epoxy powder coated

Access to the inside and the protective devices shall be by means ofa hinged
door fixed shut by means of a moulded lever type latch which shall be able to
be locked with the means of a proprietary locking system.

Hinged doors shall not exceed 800 mm in width. The doors shall be lined with
adequate number ofhinges and stiffeners to avoid sagging and wobbling.

With the door in the open position, it shall not be possible to touch or gain
access to live parts without the use ofa tool. The hinged tloor shall be easily
removable when the open position to aid installation and maintenance.

All fixing accessories shall have anti-corrosion tinish. All le‘rrous materials
shall either be stainless steels with min. 2.5% Mo-content, such as AISI 316
types (BS EN 10088-2 type 1.4432 to 1.4436), or otherwise corrosion inhibited
to the Engineer’s approval and painted or hot-dip galvanised to BS EN ISO
1461. Non-ferfous metallic components shall be electroplated to protect
against corrosion

189
All low voltage exposed terminals of feeder pillars that may be exposed to
touch woth the door open or cover removed) shall be shrouded to IP 2X to BS
EN 60529.

The neutral busbar shall be the same cross sectional area as phase busbars.

The earth bar shall be sized in accordance with BS EN 60439-l Annex B

The earthing system shall be TN-S to BS 7671, i.e. the protective (earth)
conductor and the neutral conductor shall be electrically separate throughout
the installation and only be connected at one place, in the main feeder pillar
receiving the transformer feeder. Breakers rated up to 400A shall be plug in
type MCCB.

Mcb’s, ccontactors and switches shall comply with the requirements of BS EN

60947.

The main structure of the feeder pillar shall be bonded directly to the earth bar.
Installed devices, module steel cases and framework shall be bonded to earth.
All hinged covers shall be bonded to module cases via a separate flexible
copper conductor min. 2.5mm2.

All feeder pillars shall be equipped from the factory with removable lifting eyes
and all structural support necessary for installation by the Contractor.

Control System
The switching of the lighting circuits shall be through an automatic control
arrangement comprising of a contactor, photocell, timer and selector switch.

The photoelectric cell shall operate on a supply voltage of 230V AC. The
operating range shall be adjustable between 5 to 300 lx as a minimum. It shall
be suitable for operation at the specified ambient temperatures. ‘

The photocell operation shall be backed up, such that the lights remain on in
case of photocell failure.

The photocell shall be mounted inside the enclosure behind a transparent UV

resistant window.

190
An additional 24-hour timer shall be provided as a backup to the photocell. The
synchronous timer shall be of the solar dial type designed for automatic control
of the lights. The unit shall be based on Sangamo Suntracker series, so that it
can automatically track sunset and sunrise over a period of the year.

The switch movement shall be by self—starting quartz stepping motor driven

by a rechargeable nickel cadmium battery, adequately rated so that the
expected life of the same is approximately 8 years minimum. The timer and
the cells shall be suitable for operation at the specified ambient temperatures.
The battery shall have a reserve of 150 h to ride over any power failures. Time
keeping shall be better than ±5 minutes per year.

The 24 h solar dial timer shall be of 5 minute graduation, accurately plotted to

the latitude 7° 47’ S, automatically compensating for the seasonal variations in
sunrise and sunsets.

The timer shall be plug in type and shall have sealing arrangement to prevent
tampering of settings. It shall be possible to manually override the timer.

A selector switch shall select the following mode of operation: (1) Auto on
timer, (2) Auto on photo cell, (3) Auto on timer/photocell, (4) OFF and (5)
Manual.

Busbars
Main busbars shall be provided to suit the transformer rating including the
requirement of 120 % capacity, across the top or side of the feeder pillar and
secured with insulated fixings, Current rating and short-circuit withstand
current capacity shall be assessed by the Contractor.

The busbars shall be high conductivity half hard drawn, tinned copper 99.98%
purity as per BS EN 13601, [01% conductivity as per lACS (international
annealed copper standard)

The busbar shall be free from any type of cracks and insulated with heat
shrinkable colour coded sleeves throughout the length and vertical dropper.

191
The busbars shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to continuously conduct
rated current with a maximum average temperature of 20°C above an ambient
temperature of 50°C.

No diversity shall be used in busbar sizing.

All busbarjoints shall be covered with suitable proprietary insulated kit at
straightjoints and tap- offs. The live busbars and joints shall not be accessible
even alter opening the busbar chamber cover.

All interconnections between busbar and outgoing feeders shall be with rigid
insulated lengths of busbar orjumpers.

The feeder pillars shall have continuous tinned copper earth bar at full width of
the feeder pillar at bottom and at vertical cable alley. The earth bar shall have
colour-coded identification at reasonable intervals to indicate earth system
using durable non-removable labels.

Internal wiring
Internal wiring shall conform to BS 72l l.

Feeder pillars shall be furnished completely wired including all cleats and
terminal blocks.

Cables and wires shall be installed neatly and secured together in channels, or
by the use of purpose non—PVC cable clips or ties. The securing ot‘cables by
self-adhesive tape will not b%e accepted.

All panel wiring shall be copper conductors

Current transformer and instrument wiring shall be colour coded

(red/yellow/blue and black).

No cable or wire sizes smaller than 2.5 mm2 shall be used to internal power
wiring. Control wiring shall be with minimum 1.5 mm 2 except for wiring
associated with switchgear control, protection and CT circuits, which shall not
be less than 2.5mm2.

Intemal wiring shall be flexible; single core fine stranded copper with low
smoke and fume insulation.

192
The wiring on instrument panels shall have llexihle connections to the terminal
blocks. – No wires shall be teed or jointed between terminal points.

Terminal blocks and individual terminals shall be numbered in the factory with
the number as stated in the control circuit wiring diagram of the manufacturer.

Cable/wire identification tags shall be factory fitted to each end of all internal
cable cores and wires by the manufacturer and be referenced to coincide with
the internal wiring diagrams. All wiring is to be readily identifiable with
identification ferrules on each end of the cable.

Insulated ring/pin crimping type end terminals shall be used for internal wiring.

A sufficient number of terminal connections including 15% spare terminals

shall be provided for‘all control and instrument wiring.

Terminal boards
All terminal boards shall be mounted in accessible positions and, when in
enclosed cubicles, shall preferably be inclined towards the door. Spacing of
adjacent terminal boards shall be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of
each board shall be not less than 200 mm above the incoming cable gland
plate. Separate terminations shall be provided on each terminal strip for the
cores of incoming and outgoing cables including all spare cores.

Acceptable types of terminal are:

screw or stud type used with crimped ring type termination. Screws and studs
shall be of not less than size M6, but stainless steel and bronze down to size
MS may be used provided that the current carrying capacity is adequate. All
studs shall be provided with nuts, washers and lock washers,

insertion clamp type whereby the stranded conductor, or crimped termination,

is clamped between plates by a screw having a suitable locking device.
Terminal entries shall be shrouded such that no current carrying metal is
exposed. Tapped holes shall have not less than three full threads.
Interconnections between terminals shall be by an approved, purpose made
connection link and each clamp shall not be used to terminate more than one
conductor or used for terminating power cables.

193
Terminal assemblies shall preferably be of the unit form suitable for mounting
collectively on a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the
number of ways necessary to accommodate all wires, including those
ofincoming cables along with 10% spare.

Labelling
All feeder pillars containing functional units shall be clearly labelled with circuit
unit rclerence and current rating in English.

Every functional unit shall be labelled separately from all others. External
labels shall have letters not less than 10 mm in height and internal labels not
less than 6 mm. The letters shall be black in colour on a white background.
The labels shall be of Traffolyte or equal permanent indelible type and fixed
with stainless steel non-pointed selftap screw to the individual doors.

Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with

rating plate as per BS EN 60439-1 clause 5.1 and marking inside the
assembly shall be as per clause 5.2.

Warning labels shall be provided on each switchboard as per the local

regulations.
The labelling shall include:
Label for each indicator lamp describing its function.
Label for fuses, mcb‘s, terminal blocks and other assembly components
describing their purpose.

Earth electrode systems

Earth electrodes for the low voltage system shall be driven rod electrodes of
solid copper with a diameter of min.15 mm and an overall length of min. 3.5 m.
The rods shall be proprietary products fabricated for the purpose and provided
complete with driving stud and coupling dowels if required to achieve 3.5 m
length.

The rod earth electrode shall be connected to the earth electrode cable by
proprietary bolted clamp of high strength copper alloy, designed for the
dimensions of the rod electrode and the earth electrode cable.

194
Earth electrode cables shall be stranded single—core copper cable to BS EN
60228, with yellow- green insulation. Earth electrode cables shall be sized in
accordance with TANESCO’s rules, but shall not be less than 50 mmz. Other
protective earthing and bonding conductors shall be sized in accordance with
TANESCO’s rules.

Each earth electrode shall be provided with an inspection pit suitable for the
type of ground surface pavement at the place of installation. The earth
electrode inspection pits may be factory made of a manufacturer’s standard
range, to be approved by the Engineer, or the Contractor may produce it.

The inspection pits including the lid shall withstand for its useful lifetime the
traffic load at the installation place without any settling or damage.

The lid shall carry unique identification of the earthing system, such as for
example: “LV Earth” or equal. The identification shall be permanent, cast or
embossed into the top face of the lid.

Cable ducts
Cable ducts shall be of a rigid type, made from high impact PVC. The wall
thickness shall correspond with minimum class PN6 (pressure: 0.6 Mpa / 6
kp/cmz).

The inner diameter of the ducts shall be minimum 75 mm, but it will be the
option of the Contractor at his expense to use ducts of larger size if desired
and, where used, it shall be for the entire length of the crossing. Reducing
couplings shall not be used.

The Contractor shall provide all ducts with pull wire as minimum dia. 3 mm
nylon rope or equal to be approved by the Engineer.

Low voltage cables

All cables outside distribution feeder pillars shall have stranded high
conductivity copper conductors to BS EN 60228 and, for 400/230V AC, have
insulation of cross-linked polyethylene XLPE and PVC-sheathing, minimum to
rated voltage 600/l000 V.

Non-conductors smaller than 1.5 mm2 shall be used.

195
All cables to be laid underground, directly buried or in ducts, shall be steel wire
armoured. The cables be type XLPE.SWA.PVC complying with BS 6724 or
equal which provides similar nut ll protection.

Underground cables for earthing purposes may be bare high conductivity

copper cables, min. size 50 mm2. Any insulation of cables for earthing or
protection against indirect contact shall have green/yellow colour coding.

Lighting Poles for conventional commercial power (supplied by

TANESCO)
Specificatios for lighting poles for conventional power shall be as specified
above.

Identification labels
Each column shall be fitted with an identification label with 50 mm high
lettering on 21 white background. The labels shall be stainless steel or equal
weather resistant durable material compatible with the galvanised surtace. The
labels shall be fixed with galvanized or stainless steel bolts and nuts at a
height 50 mm above the base compartment door, but facing oncoming traffic.

Luminaires, lamps and control gear.

All luminaires shall be purpose built design incorporating the specified type
and size of lamp.

All road lighting luminaires shall have precise documented light distribution
with precise mirror optics specially designed for road lighting purpose

The lamps shall not contain any lead, cadmium or hexavalent chromium, and
shall be chosen from ranges with a minimum of other environmentally harmful
chemicals such as mercury.

196
Technical Specification for Anti-theft High-powered LED Street Light Luminaire
of Phillips or Thorn makes or approved equivalent

S/N Description Minimum Requirement

Input voltage 
 220 V to 270 V (47-53 Hz)
LED lamp efficacy 
 
Min 95 to 130 lumens/watt

Power factor 
 >0.95

Life expecting 
 100,000 hours
 at 80% lumen
maintenance. (Documentary evidence
from the LED manufacturer, by means of
an appropriate datasheet, co nfirming the
statistical correlation, shall be provided)
No of hours usage / day 10 to 12 hours/day



Rated watt 
 80 W and 36 W (cool white)

Luminous flux 
 7,500 to 10,500 lumens

LED type 
 High power LED (1 Watt)

Working Humidity 
 10% to 90%

Colour Temperature 
 5,500 to 7,000 K (test certificate required)
Ingress protection 
 IP 65/IP66 (test certificate required)
Total harmonic distortion < 15% (test certificate required)

(THD): < 15% with test
certificate 

Colour Rendering Index Ra>80
(CRI)

Working Temperature 
 20 deg to 50 deg C

Average lighting/ beam 120 to 160 deg

angle 

Control Circuit 
 Compatible to LED

Lamp starting time 
 Not more than 5 sec
Energy consumption 
 Not more than 1.2 times at rated voltage
System power efficiency > 85 %



Luminary Casing 
 High Pressure die cast Aluminum (LM5)
with heat dissipation design coating,
toughened glass cover and water proof
fixture

LED thermal management LED shall be mounted on heat sink

197
 S/N Description Minimum Requirement

 conductive 198luminium with fins to
dissipate the heat to ambient air
Driver board 
 Details shall be given for getting spare
Pole entry/ Retro fitting 
 Suitable for fixing in existing lighting pole
(30 mm to 55mm dia with bracket and
locking bolt & nut.

 Applicable Standard 
 IEC/EN LM 79 for fixture and with stand to
wind adverse weather conditions with test
certificate

Electrical connector 
 Connecting wires with minimum one meter
length

Warranty 
 The Cotractor to ensure that: -
All luminaires offered shall have a minimum
guarantee period of Five (5) Years. The
scope of this guarantee includes the LED
drivers, luminaire housing, LED module(s),
brackets and protector.

If luminaires are found to have failed within

this period as a result of poor
manufacturing processes and/or poor
materials, it shall be replaced free of charge
by the manufacturer.

Protections 10kV/10kVA surge protection - Short ckt,

Open ckt, Over Voltage, Under Voltage, (All
protections should be auto restart)
Beam Angle 1200 (Approx.)

The Contractor shall submit the required test certificates as specified in S/N
10, 11, 12, 24 along with facilitation for factory inspection of materials and pilot
project where the same have been installed.

All luminaires shall be fitted with integral control gear and have a heat barrier
between the lamp enclosure and gear compartment. The control gear shall be
fitted to a tool-less, quick release gear tray, equipped with a plug and socket
connector for ease of maintenance or replacement purposes. 


198
 Electrical equipment shall be installed so that levels of radio interference given
in BS EN 55014-1 are not exceeded. 


Luminaires shall be fitted with integral variable dimmable ballasts pre-set

electronic ballasts factory pre-set to allow dimming by 50% 5 to 7am and 6 pm
to 7am and also allow for dimming regimes of increments of 1%. All lanterns
must be supplied with necessary dimming regimes and shall have an Elexon
Charging Code. 


5611 CONSTRUCTION
(a) General requirements
Prior to planning of construction works the Contractor shall prepare a detailed
description of methodology for all erection and installation works and submit it
to the Engineer for his comments and approval. No works shall be carried out
before a written approval from the Engineer has been issued to the Contractor.

The Contractor to ensure that all trade work shall be carried out by tradesmen
fully competent and qualified in the respective trade, and the entire installation
shall be neat, orderly and well arranged and carried out in a methodical
competent manner.

All cable runs and all equipment, boxes, labels, etc. shall be mounted strictly in
lines, horizontally and vertically. This also covers components out of sight, for
example inside switchboards requirement.

If the location of equipment is not entirely defined by the specification and

drawings, the Contractor shall agree on the exact location with the Engineer
before the equipment is mounted.

All materials shall be stored, handled and installed in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Particular attention shall be given to avoid
damages to surface treatments of metallic objects and to provide adequate
cover to prevent cables and cable ducts with an outer polymer surface from
being exposed to prolonged ultraviolet radiation, i.e. more than 50 hours in
total.

199
Transformers
Surge arresters shall be connected to the earthing system by means of
insulated cable with a cross section not less than equnvalent to 25 mm“ Cu. he
mounting plate of the arrester shall be earthed

by means ofa separate cable. l-V le‘eder pillars l‘he le‘eder pillars shall be
installed as indicated in the drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
feeder pillars have been constructed in accordance with the approved
Construction Drawings and feeder pillar tnanula‘cturer's drawings.

Feeder pillars shall be installed level and securely attached to the concrete
foundations with appropriate fixings and/or expansion anchors.

Temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of

moving parts from switchboards units and components shall be removed after
installation.

A clear copy of certified and stamped As-built drawings shall be placed in a

dedicated compartment or pocket inside each switchboard.

Earthing and bonding

Each feeder pillar shall be earthed to an earth electrode in accordance with
local regulations.

All doors carrying electrical components shall be bonded to the assembly

frame by flexible copper cable or braid of an appropriate cross section. The
bonding of doors shall not rely on the hinges.

To provide the earth connection between the cable armour and the main earth
bar, each cable gland plate shall be connected to the earth bar using a copper
link of an appropriate cross section. Reliance on the gland plate fixing screws
to provide an earth path is not acceptable.

Trenches for cables and ducts

The depth of excavations for cable trenches shall be minimum 0.85 m below
finished ground level or as indicated on the drawings.

200
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings the trench width measured at the
bottom shall be minimum 200 mm. Trenches for more than one cable or duct
shall be 200 mm with addition of at least 50 mm plus the cable / duct diameter
for every extra cable / duct.

The use of trench digging machinery will be permitted except where its
operation will be likely to cause damage to buildings or existing structures and
installations above or below the ground. At such looations hand-methods shall
be carried out to avoid such damage.

Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be backfilled to grade with
thoroughly compacted material before placing the cables / ducts.

All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the
work or obstruct traffic.

The cables / ducts shall be laid on 100 mm. thick bedding consisting ofsand or
material free from sharp-edged stones and with no particles exceeding 15mm.
The bedding shall be thoroughly compacted to give a uniform bed.

The same material shall then be placed over the cables /ducts for not less than
l00 mm and be thoroughly compacted.

PVC or concrete tiles and marker tape shall be placed as shown on the
drawings.

Where mechanical plant is to be used for placing and /or compacting the main
backlill, the first 200 mm of cover to the cables / ducts shall be compacted by
hand. The remaining backfill shall be placed and compacted to l00% MDD/BS
compaction.

All excavations shall be backfilled to the level ofthe original ground surfaces

Cable ducts
Where cables cross under paved areas and where shown on the drawings
they shall be installed in ducts.

Ducts shall be buried with bottom level at least 0.7 m below finished ground
surface level unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Ducts of plastic

201
material laid under roads and other areas where heavy vehicles traffic may be
expected shall be surrounded with concrete class 20.

Where one or more ducts are laid under paved areas one spare duct of the
same dimension shall be provided along with the duct(s) to be used for future
cables.

The exact number, size and position of ducts, and of pull boxes if used, shall
be proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer.

PVC couplings shall be solvent welded to the ducts, using manufacturer's

recommended solvents and methods.

All ducts shall be capped until the cable will be installed. Ducts for future use
shall remain capped. A pull wire shall be installed in all ducts. At least 1.0 m of
pull wire shall be tied to a wooden block or doubled back into the duct at each
termination.

Location of the ducts, the Contractor shall carry out excavation for temporarily
buried duct ends, removal of temporary plugs or caps and cleaning of the
ducts.

After pulling cables into the ducts they shall be permanently sealed with plastic
compound.

Cables
The cable arrangements shall be well planned by the Contractor and
performed in such a way that replacement can easily be made.

Cables shall be unrolled and straightened before installation to avoid kinks.

Cables, which are installed along parallel runs, shall be arranged in such a
way that unnecessary crossing of cables shall be avoided.

At changes ofdirection parallel cables shall be arranged concentrically.

Bending radii of the cables during handling and after installation shall not be
less than: for multicore cables: 10 times the cable diameter, for single core
cables: 15 times the cable diameter.

202
Cables shall be installed free of sharp edges on metal or concrete structures
as foundations, pull pits etc.

lf possible, cables shall be laid in one length, and through joints will not be
permitted without the approval of the Engineer. T-joints will not be permitted.

Cables mounted in junction boxes or luminaires shall be properly fixed to

relieve mechanical stress and to avoid risk of displacement or damage.

Directly buried cables shall be tested for insulation and continuity before
backfilling.

The same colour of the conductor insulation shall be used for the same phase
throughout the entire installation.

The poles shall be erected and aligned before the luminaires are mounted on
the poles.

The bracket(s) or arms shall be aligned to be exactly perpendicular to the

tangent of the road alignment, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

Columns with flange plates shall be painted with bituminous paint at the
underside ofthe flange and at the inside ofthe pole to a height of 500 mm.

Flange plate columns shall be carefully lowered onto the foundation base
prepared for it and shall be set vertical using nuts and washers under and
above the base plate. The nuts shall be made tight to secure the column to the
foundation and the nuts and exposed bolts shall be coated with "Denso paste"
and protected with "Denso tape" or equal. The space between the flange plate
and foundation base shall be grouted and trowelled to a smooth finish.

The bracket arms shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions to prevent rotation in service. Unless otherwise clearly indicated
on the drawings, the bracket shall be mounted perpendicular to the tangent of
the road centreline at the stationing of the column.

The foundations and planted root columns shall be placed with a horizontal
tolerance of ±20 mm in all directions and a vertical tolerance of ±20 mm.

203
After final fixing and adjustment no column shall deviate more than 0.1° from
true vertical (≈ 18 mm per 10 m).

The base compartment door shall be positioned as per the schedule below.
The door locking device shall be lubricated.

Column Door position

On green area between walkway and Facing away from the incoming traffic
MTL
Median of BRT lanes Facing away from the incoming traffic

Installation of luminaires
The luminaire shall be securely fixed to the spigot in accordance with the
manufacturer‘s recommendation.

The lamp shall not be inserted into the luminaire until the luminaire is securely
fixed to the erected column and until any adjustable mirror- and lamp holder
positions have been set and secured in accordance with the drawings and
lighting calculations.

All luminaires shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted and aligned at

commissioning.

Electrical installations in lighting

All components to be located within the pole base compartment shall be
securely mounted on the baseboard using the fixing and bracket arrangements
provided for this purpose with brass orstainless steel nuts, bolts and screws.

Each mast and pole shall be bonded to the earthing cable. Where the supply is
looped into the column, the earthing cable shall not be cut.

Cables between fuse holders and luminaires shall hang freely inside the
column and shall enter the fuse holders / mcb' from below, thus forming a loop
allowing water running along the cables to drip off instead of entering the
terminals.

204
5612 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
General requirements
Testing shall be an essential, integrated part of the Contractor's quality
assurance system.

Testing shall be used to determine whether the tested property of the street
lighting system fulfils the Contract requirements as specified directly or by
reference to other documents such as standards, etc, and/or with guarantees
issued by the Contractor.

The term "testing" shall, depending of the context also comprise examination,
inspection and measurement.

Testing includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following typical tests
listed in normal chronological order:

Type tests
Factory acceptance tests (FAT)
Inspection and testing on delivery
Inspection and testing ofthe Works during the progress at the work
Tests on completion, site acceptance tests (SAT), commissioning tests, trial
operation tests/ performance tests

Specific requirements for control testing and commissioning of different types

of components and installations are given in the in the individual sub-section
below.

Tools and instruments

All labour, temporary materials, equipment, tools and instruments etc. required
for performing the test shall be provided by the Contractor and shall remain his
property unless otherwise spwecified.

The Contractor's measuring instruments shall be calibrated by an approved,

independent calibration laboratory. Calibration labels showing the instrument's
serial number or other unambiguous identification shall be firmly attached to
the instruments.

205
The Contractor shall produce calibration certificates on the Engineer's request.
The acceptable age of such calibration certificates will depend on the type of
instrument and type of test and measurement, and shall be agreed between
the Contractor and Engineer prior to the test. Without such agreement, the
calibration certificate shall be not more that 6 months old.

Test instruments that have been repaired following damage shall be

immediately re-calibrated.

Calibration on site or in the workshop will, as a general rule, not be accepted.

If agreed with the Engineer, measuring instruments forming permanent part of

the plant may in some cases be used for verification of performance during the
test. The Engineer may, at any time before, during or after the test, require
verification of such measurements by parallel measurement by the Contractor
with a calibrated external instrument of the same type.

Type tests
Type testing is applicable to mass-produced components of a manufacturer's
standard range of products, such as cables and luminaires. '

A population of the specific component type, model and range will have been
tested for compliance with specified standards at a testing laboratory, which
shall have certified compliance with the relevant standards.

The Engineer reserves the right to request copies of such test certificates and
to approve the issuing testing laboratory.

Factor accetance tests (FAT)

A factory acceptance test (FAT) will be relevant only for transformers, feeder
pillars and luminaires.

FAT shall be performed in the premises where the tested system or Plant is
assembled, before shipment to site.

The Engineer and the Employer shall be invited to witness the FAT. The
Contractor shall call for FAT a minimum of two (2) months in advance and at
the same time submit the test plans to the Engineer.

206
The FAT shall be performed on a complete system under simulated load, with
selected instrumentation.
As a minimum the following shall be demonstrated and tested during the SAT:
Preliminary system documentation
System start-up, full load/overload performance
Operator interfaces / man-machine interfaces
All safety functions
All other specified functions

Prior to the FAT, the Contractor's manufacturer shall perform an in-house test
and prepare all documentation to be used during the FAT.

The systems to be tested shall be unambiguously identified by indelible

marking.

Any noncompliance to requirements or incomplete work detected during the

FAT shall be listed in, the test report (punch list). Remedial work shall be
agreed for all items on the punch list.

The FAT shall be considered complete when all specified tests have been
completed with exception ofmutually agreed items from the punch list.

lnspection and testing on deliver to site

The Contractor shall inspect all plant and material on their arrival to site and
shall satisfy himself that the items delivered are in strict accordance with the
Contract requirements and / or the material approvals issued by the Engineer,
and that items tested in the factory are identical to the items actually received
on site.

The Contractor shall record any shortage, defect or default noticed by the
inspection.

The Contractor shall retain Bills of Lading, shipping labels and similar
identification of the received Plant and materials and submit copies to the
Engineer.

The Engineer shall be invited to witness the inspection on delivery of major

items of Plant. The Contractor shall give the Engineer notice on the delivery a
minimum oftwo (2) days in advance.

207
Insepection and testin durin progress of work
The Contractor shall inspect and test parts of the Works during erection and
installation in accordance with his quality plan.

All work shall be inspected and, where relevant, tested before it is covered up
or put out ofsight.

In generali functional testing - hot test - of operational systems shall be

conducted after pre- functional testing (cold test, static test) and start-up has
been satisfactorily completed.

Testing shall proceed in a logical sequence from components to subsystems

to systems.

Site accetance test (SAT)

A site acceptance test (SAT) shall be carried out when the entire street lighting
system or a substantial subsystem is substantially completed and hot test has
been completed to the Contractor's satisfaction, according to the specification
and shop drawings and the tests have been accepted by the Engineer.

The Engineer shall witness the SAT. The Contractor shall call for the SAT a
minimum of three (3) weeks in advance and at the same time submit the test
plans to the Engineer.

As a minimum the following shall be inspected, demonstrated and tested for

compliance with the Contract requirements during the SAT:

Completeness and adequacy of as—built documentation.

Mechanical completeness and integrity
Cabling, wiring, terminations, labelling.
System functionality.
Safety systems labelling and functionality.
Performance.
Operator interfaces / man—machine interfaces.

Any non—compliance to requirements or incomplete work detected during the

SAT shall be remedied immediately.

208
The SAT shall be considered completed when all specified tests have been
completed and all non—conformances or incomplete work detected have been
remedied and successfully re-tested.

The Contractor shall document SAT results in a SAT report.

Transformers and associated equipment.

Power transformers, 11/0.4 kV, shall undergo type test, FAT and SAT and
inspection upon reception on site and erection.

Earthing systems for the transformers shall be individually inspected and their
resistance to earth shall be measured and recorded.

Feeder pillars
Feeder pillars shall undergo FAT and SAT and inspection upon reception on
site and erection.

SAT shall include all tests alter installation and before and after energising
required by local regulations and by BS EN 60439. The SAT shall also include
verification oflabelling and colour coding.

Earthing systems for the feeder pillars shall be individually inspected and their
resistance to earth shall be measured and recorded.

Photocell- and timer control systems shall undergo SAT.

Cables
Cables shall undergo type tests and SAT and inspection upon reception on
site and erection.

Directly buried cables shall undergo insulation (megger-) tests and continuity
tests belo‘re backfilling.

Cable ducts
Cable ducts shall be visually checked for type, size and capping of ends
bucklilling.

209
Clearance shall be checked by pulling through each duct a mandrel with
diameter 90% of the internal diameter ofthe duct and 500 mm long, before and
after backfilling. Ducts, which do not allow the smooth drawing without binding,
shall be repaired or replaced as agreed with the Engineer.

Cable trenches for cables and ducts

Cable trenches shall be visually checked for size and cable quality and
smoothness of cable bed before laying of cables or ducts.
Lighting poles and luminaires
Lighting poles and luminaires shall undergo visual and functional tests.
The visual inspection shall as a minimum include: -

Visual test of alignment of all columns and angle of brackets and vertical
mounting. if the visual test reveals discernible deviations of one or more
columns/brackets from the majority, the deviating column/brackets shall be
measured.

Random sample visual test of lamp types. After confirmation of one lamp type
in an area of similar luminaires, a visual inspection of the entity at night with
the system energised will reveal any wrong lamp types or -sizes and any
missing or burnt-out lamps.

Visual test of light distribution / luminance. The entire illuminated area shall be
inspected and anomalies of luminance shall be recorded. If the lighting
calculations do not indicate such anomalies, the optical adjustment of the
luminaires and mirrors involved shall be checked.

Visual test of masts and columns for completeness of bolts, nuts and washers,
tightening of nuts, and soundness of surface treatment.

Visual test ofcorrect orientation, numbering and labelling ofmasts and

columns.

Functional test of each individual road lighting feeder pillar including

manual/automatic function and photoelectric cell function.

In addition to the visual and functional tests, the voltage drops from the feeder
pillar to the farthest end. at full load afier minimum one hour operation of all

210
 luminaires and loads on the circuit shall he measured for all circuits together
with the full load current ofthe circuit.

5613 DOCUMENTATION

General requirements
The Contractor's Bid shall include specific data sheets and manufacturer
details for all types of transformers, feeder pillars, masts, columns, lamps and
luminaires that the Contractor will provide.

Technical data sheets, brochures and type test certificates for all types of
transformers, feeder pillars, masts, columns, electrical components, luminaires
and lamps shall be submitted to the Engineeer for approval. The Engineer may
request samples of luminaires for approval.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all agreements made
with TANESCO regarding power supply to the street lighting systems.

Workshop drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit workshop drawings in accordance
with the Special
Specifications, comprising as a minimum:
Circuit diagrams for 11 kV connections and transformer assembly drawings
incl. connection ,details

Lighting pole assembly drawings

Foundation layout and reinforcement drawings

Earthing and bonding details

Cable plan drawings and details

Circuit diagrams and arrangement drawings of electrical components in

lighting poles

Circuit diagrams and arrangement drawings offeeder pillars

Layouts and texts of all labels and component tags

Voltage drop and short-circuit calculations for all final lighting circuits
211
 Comprehensive lighting calculations based on the luminaires and lamps
actually provided by the Contractor.

As-built documentation

The Contractor shall prepare and submit as—built documentation in

accordance with the Special Specifications.

In addition to the general requirements, the As-built documentation shall

include records of the Contractor's measurements of insulation resistance,
earth electrode resistance and/or earth loop impedance, voltage drops,
luminance and illumination values.

The As-built documentation shall also include all test records.

5614 SPARE PARTS

General requirements
The Contractor's Bid shall include spare parts for minimum 3 years of
operation and maintenance, as a minimum including: -

10 nos. luminaires (80 W LED)

10 nos. 12 m high lighting poles with double arm including internal electrical
installations and foundation bolts

10 no. 10 m high lighting pole with single arm incl. internal electrical
installations and foundation bolts ‘~

5 no. Timer switches

5 no. Photoelectric cells

The spares shall be of same manufacturer and range as the components

actually provided and installed.

The spare parts shall prior to Taking—Over be delivered to the Employer's

store at the Dar es Salaam TANROADS Regional Manager’s Office in original
packaging and clearly labelled.

212
 The spare parts shall not be used by the Contractor fpor the maintenance
and/or remedial works carried out by the Contractor during the Detects Liability
period

5615 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Amend the description of Pay Item 56.15 of the Special Specifications as

follows
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS 56.04 Solar Street Lights:
56.04 (a) Supply, install, test and commission LED street light fittings powered by
solar system, including Solar panel 250Wx2PCs for 24V lighting, mono
crystalline cilicon, high efficiency, Battery 150AH/12V 2PCS, Sealed type,
gelled, deep cycle, maintenance free, Intelligent solar controller
30A/24Vx1PC, automatic light and time control overcharging and
/discharging protection, reverse-connection protection and cabling as
approved by the Engineer.
(i) Solar powered street lights single arm and luminaire 1x80 Watts (W) No
56.04 (b) Supply and install street lights poles ,85 mm diameter galvanized steel
pipes including 2-meter arm, earthing of the pole, excavations, backfill and
reinforced concrete post base, bearing plates and anchor bolts.
(i) 10 meters high with single arm outreach No
56.04 (c) Allow for testing and commissioning of the whole electrical installation L.S
above and all unexpected expenses to comply with the Engineer's
requirement

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

SS 56.05 Concrete Crossings to Stormwater Channel
56.05(a) Provide asphalt concrete speed humps as per contract drawings, m
including warning markings.
56.05 (b) Construction of pedestrian crossing consisting in a concrete No
class30/20 frame across the 5m wide channel and a protection steel
handrail, including steps to access it if needed as per specifications
and design drawings
56.05 (c) Construction of vehicles crossing consisting in a concrete class No
30/20 frame over the 4m wide channel and a protection steel
guardrail, including ramps to access it if needed as per specifications
and design drawings
213
 The unit of measurement shall be the number of solar panels including all
accessories supplied, erected connected and tested in accordance with the
Specifications.

The items shall be measured as lump sum and shall include foundations,
foundation bolts, arms or brackets where specified or shown, terminals, mcb's
and internal cables, labelling and all accessories supplied, installed, connected
and tested in accordance with the Specifications and TANESCO's guidelines
and regulations.

The bid rate shall include full compensation for supplying to the Employer’s
store all spare parts, special tools, documentation and incidentals necessary
for completing the delivery of spare parts as described in this Section.

5616 TRAFFIC SIGNALS SPECIFICATIONS

5617 Q3x100 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS
Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electrical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Yellow LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt, the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd and in amber color tone.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2,4 volt, the illumination is in 12.000 – 15.000
mcd.
LEDs works with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 99 LEDs in (Q3X100) one group
Consumes 2 watt energy.
Works with 180-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Transformer has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made of polycarbonate
Body color is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate
Insulatıon sealing is used in it

214
5618 Q3x200 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS
Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Yellow LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd and in amber colour tone.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 186 LEDs in (3x200) Ø200mm module.
There are 186 LEDs in (3x300) Ø300mm module
Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø200-300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5619 Q3x300 mm LED AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Yellow LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd and in amber colour tone.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 186 LEDs in (3x300) Ø300mm module

215
 Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5620 Ø 2x200 mm LED PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL LIGHTS

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 88 LEDs in Red color (1x200) Ø200mm module.
There are 98 LEDs in Green color (1x200) Ø200mm module.
Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø200modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5621 Q1x200-Q1x300 mm LED ARROW AUTO SIGNAL LIGHT

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.

216
 Yellow LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd and in amber colour tone.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 88 LEDs in Ø1x200mm module.
There are 88 LEDs in Ø1x300mm module
Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø200-300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5622 Q3x200-Q3x300 mm LED ARROW AUTO SIGNAL LIGHTS

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Yellow LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd and in amber colour tone.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 88 LEDs in Ø1x200mm module.
There are 88 LEDs in Ø1x300mm module
Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø200-300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional

217
 Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5623 Q1x200 – Q1x300 mm DOWN COUNT LIGHT

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 144 LEDs in Ø1x200mm module.
There are 224 LEDs in Ø1x300mm module
Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø200-300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5624 Q1x200 - Q1x300 mm LED FLASHING LIGHT

Q5 mm in diameter and 30° degree angled.
7 LEDs connected in series and making one PCB.
Green LEDs are in blues green tone.
In case of out of break of one LED in a group, the electical circuit is not cut off
and the other groups go on working.
Green LEDs work in between 3 – 3.6 volt and the illumination is in 15.000 –
25.000 mcd.
Red LEDs work in between 1.8 – 2.4 volt and the illumination is in 12.000 –
15.000 mcd
LEDs work with maximum 0.02 ampere.
There are 186 LEDs in Ø1x200mm module.
There are 186 LEDs in Ø1x300mm module

218
 Ø200mm module consumes 6 watt energy.
Ø300mm module consumes 7.5 watt energy.
Ø200-300 modules work with 220-240 VAC (+-%15 )
Modules work with transformer which has 24 volt outlet
Resistant to abnormal air temperature ( - 40°C, + 70°C)
Body is made up of polycarbonate.
Body is in orange, black optional
Glass is made up of transparent polycarbonate.
Insulatıon sealing is used in it.

5625 Q200 - Q300 mm. ANIMATED PEDESTRIAN & COUNT DOWN LIGHT’S
LEDs used in 5mm in diameter and 30 ° angle.
The light intensity of the LEDs is 8000-10000mcd.
The LEDs used will be 100.000 hours guaranteed up to + 70 ° C.
Operate in the voltage range 170-250 VAC (50Hz (+ -5Hz)) and will not be
affected by network fluctuations.
Consume a maximum of 20 watts of power.
It will have necessary software and hardware features against interference
from network and external factors.
The materials used will be completely industrial.
Working temperature - 40 ° C + 70 ° C.
Adjusting the night light intensity will use LDR to ensure a clear view and not to
disturb the environment.
Animated pedestrian units will have 1 power signal led.
Animated pedestrian units will be completely under microprocessor control.
Animated pedestrian units will operate independently of the Intersection
control unit. (Any time without knowledge, he will show the passing and
stopping of the springs during his energy.)
By memorizing the green period of the pedestrian, the driver will accelerate the
pedestrian animation in the last few seconds and report that the pedestrian is
about to run out
Pedestrian animation will work throughout the green period.
The body should be made of polycarbonate; the body may be in black-gray-
orange colors.
By calculating the pedestrian green period, it accelerates the animation in the
last seconds and warns the floods.
Insulation seals are to be used on the bodies.

219
5626 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
Measurement and payment of all street lighting works shall be in accordance
with items listed in the bills of quantities, the preamble to the bills of quantities
and the specifications.
Amend the description of Pay Item 56.15 of the Special Specifications as
follows
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT
SS Traffic Lights:
56.06
56.09 Supply and installation of main powered Traffic LED Auto Signal lights, including
(a) 16 Group Intersection Controller, TCO3, 2 Group Intersection Controller, TCO3,
Detector Module, GPSR Module, PS Module, cabling,100mm diameter PVC
sleeve for traffic lights cabling complete with standard and overhead signal
transmitting anchorage pillars, fittings and accessories as per approved
manufacturer's specifications;
(i) Q3x100mm Auto traffic signal light (Type VI) No.
(ii) Q3x200- Q3 X300 mm Arrow Auto traffic signal light (Type VI-IZ) No.
(iii) Q2x200mm Pedestrian traffic signal light (Type PI) No
(iv) Audible Warning Device for Disabilities No
(v) Q2x200mm Animated and Countdown Pedestrian Signal light (R/G) No
(vi) Q2x300mm Animated and Countdown Pedestrian Signal light (R/G) No
56.09 Software, installation, testing and commissioning
(b)
(i) 16-32 Group turn key of the traffic signal lights system (take on the system) L.S
(ii) Traffic lighting system software, materials inspection at factory by 5 persons from L.S
the parties prior to ordering, training, testing of system and commissioning.
56.09 Allow for provision of TANESCO power supply connection for traffic lights for 46 L.S
(c) junctions
56.09 Supply and install Traffic lights poles ,85 mm diameter galvanized steel pipes
(d) including 2-meter arm, earthing of the pole, excavations, backfill and reinforced
concrete post base, bearing plates and anchor bolts.
(i) 3 meters high traffic poles No.
(ii) 8 meters long traffic poles with single arm out reach. No.

220
5700 LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING
5702 MATERIALS
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 5702(c) and after second
paragraph of Sub-Clause 5702(e) of the Standard Specifications the following:

The grass seed or seed mixture shall consist of local varieties of

Stenotaphrum secundatum, Cynodon dactylon or Pennisetum clandestinum
grass or other grass seeds approved by the Engineer.

5704 PREPARING AREAS FOR GRASSING

Add at the end of Sub-Clause 5704(d) of the Standard Specifications the
following:

It is anticipated that the fertiliser to be used will be of a type obtainable from

local branches of the TFC (Tanzania Fertiliser Company).

5705 GRASSING AND SPRIGGING

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 5705 of the Standard
Specifications the following:

A grass sod shall be placed on the top of the side slopes in one metre width
from the shoulder breakpoint in order to protect the pavement material against
erosion by water runoff. The remaining disturbed area of the embankment is to
be scarified and hydroseeded as specified in Sub-Clause 5705. The Engineer
may prescribe an anti erosion compound to be added in the hydroseeding
mixture for these areas.

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 5705(c) of the Standard

Specifications the following:

Areas to be hydroseeded shall be given a layer of topsoil of 100 mm in

thickness unless, where suitable soil is present, the Engineer orders the
topsoil to be omitted or applied in reduced thickness.

Add after the second paragraph of Sub-Clause 5705(c) of the Standard

Specifications the following:

The seed mixture for hydroseeding or handseeding is to be applied at 45 kg/ha

and is to consist of:

221
 Eragrostis (Teff) 5%
Eragrostis curvula (Weeping love grass) 20 %
Paspalum notatum (Bahia grass) 10 %
Chloris gayana (Rhodes grass) 25 %
Digataria eriantha (Finger grass) 20 %
Dactylus glomerata (Cocks foot) 10 %
Locally harvested grass seed 10 %

All areas to be hydroseeded or hand seeded are to be scarified forming

horizontal drills running parallel to the contours. The drills are to be spaced at
intervals of 150 to 250 mm apart. Seeding to take place immediately after
scarifying in order to avoid silting of the drills by rain water.

Add at the end of Sub-Clause 5705(i)(ii)(1) of the Standard Specifications the

following:

The grass sprigging shall consist of local varieties of Stenotaphrum

secundatum, Cynodon dactylon or Pennisetum clandestinum grass or other
grass seeds approved by the Engineer.

5708 GENERAL
Add after the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 5708(c) of the Standard
Specifications the following:

All side slope areas which consist of a sandy material shall be hydroseeded
with the addition of an anti erosion compound. The application rate will be as
specified by the manufacturer. PAM (Polyacrylmide) or suitable alternative
may be used.

Payment for the supply of the anti erosion compound will be made under
SUBITEM 57.08 (i) and (ii).

Vetiver zizanioides (Vetiver grass) is to be planted as a soil conservation

system of “Vegetative Contour Hedges” to minimise the erosion potential of
surface water runoff where directed by the Engineer. The Vetiver grass slips
are to be separated from the grass clump and planted in rows running parallel
to the contour and at spacings of 10-15 centimetres apart. The rows of Vetiver
grass are to be spaced at distances varying between 1 and 5 metres on 1:1.5

222
 to 1:4 side slopes. On gentle sloping areas the distances between the rows
can increase up to 30 metres apart.

Vetiver Hedge Rows can be considered for protection to cut and fill slopes,
bridge approach embankments, gully erosion protecting, storm water and
culvert outlets. Vetiver grass is available in Tanzania.

Add after the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 5708(d) of the Standard

Specifications the following:

Where so directed by the Engineer side slopes of drains etc shall be protected
by the laying of a Geo fabric such as “Soil Saver or Biomac”. The matting is to
be placed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification.

5709 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Add at the end of Clause 5709 of the Standard Specifications the following
additional pay item:

Item Unit
57.13 Soil analysis of topsoil taken from the Site No.

The quantity to be measured for payment shall be the number of soil analysis
undertaken on topsoil samples taken from the Site in accordance with the
Specifications and accepted.

The quantity measured as prescribed above shall be paid for at the Contract
unit price for the pay item, which price and payment shall be full compensation
for taking topsoil sample, laboratory testing and preparation of soil analysis
report with recommendation on type and quantity of fertiliser / soil-
improvement material, including all labour, equipment, tools, transport and all
costs necessary to complete the soil analysis.

5800 FINISHING THE ROAD AND ROAD RESERVE AND TREATING OLD
ROADS
5804 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Omit both pay items under Clause 5804 of the Standard Specifications and
replace by the following:

223
 No separate payment will be made in respect of work undertaken in
compliance with the provisions of this Section. The relevant cost shall be
included by the Contractor in his rates in the Bill of Quantities.

6000 STRUCTURES
Add the following at the beginning of Series 6000:

GENERAL
The extension of existing bridges/box/pipe culverts culverts shall in general be
made as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the latest edition of
BS 5400 for “Steel, concrete and composite bridges”.

The Section covers foundation works required for extension of existing box
culverts as well as extension and provision of new wing walls including base
slabs and toewalls as specified. It also include associated works such as
channel excavation, while excavation for clearing/desilting under bridges and
in culvert barrels is not included, but covered by Section 2100.

EXCAVATION
Excavation must be done for the approaching wing walls. The works must be
made in two stages, in order to let the river pass while doing the foundation
works. While doing the excavation and the foundation works, the river flow
must be lead to pass only through one of the cells. To minimise the temporary
drainage and pumping works the activities needs to be carried out during the
dry season. The Contractor must plan his work in such a way that this is being
taken care of.

6100 FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES

6101 SCOPE
Add at the end of Clause 6101 of the Standard Specifications the following:

It also include associated works such as channel excavation, while excavation

for clearing/desilting under bridges and in culvert barrels is not included, but
covered by Section 2100.

6102 MATERIALS
Add at the end of Clause 6102 of the Standard Specifications the following:

224
 (j) Concrete
The concrete for the manufacture of the reinforced concrete piles shall be
Class 30 in accordance with Section 6400 of the Standard Specification and
BS 5610.

(k) Reinforcement steel

The reinforcement steel for the piles shall be in accordance with Section 6300
of the Standard Specification and be hot rolled deformed bars Grade 460,
Type 2 according to BS 4449 (ribbed bars with yield strength 460 N/mm2).

(l) Drilling fluid

Bentonite used as drilling fluid shall be in accordance with American
Petroleum Institute specification API 13A.

Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special

precautions shall be taken to modify the bentonite suspension or prehydrate
the bentonite in fresh water so as to render is suitable in all respects for the
construction of piles.

6103 Backfill and Fill near Structures

(d) Fill within restricted area

Add the following to this clause:

“Fill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm in depth and
this fill in restricted areas will include all backfill to structures.”

6113 FOUNDATION PILING

Replace all the contents of Clause 6113 of standard specifications with
the following:

6113.01 General
This specification concerns permanent works and is to be read in
conjunction with the conditions of contract, drawings, the General
Specification, theparticular Specification for Precast, Pre tensioned
Spun Pile, Specification for Concrete and Reinforcing Steel for Piling
Work, Specification for Pile Testing and Specification for Excavation.

Where works are ordered to be performed by the Contractor, but are

not specified in this specification. The Contractor must carry them

225
 out with full diligence and expedience as are expected for works of
this nature.

This specification shall be used for general piling works only.

Clauses relevant to other pile types are for information only. The
Contractor may use this specification as a reference to develop his
piling specification for the alternative pile system he proposed.

All piles shall have protective sleeve for a minimum depth of 3m below
the cut-off level of the pile. This sleeve shall be plastic or metal bedded
in mastic to form a fully water-proofed seal to the concrete.

6113.02 Scope of Works

The contract comprises the provision of labour, materials, tools,
transportation, instrumentation and all things necessary to construct
the permanent works in accordance with the contract drawings and to
the quality standards set in the contract specifications, inclusive of
material and performance tests where these are specified.

Pile Foundation:-
Supply and install pile foundation to carry the working loads as
specified in the contract drawings.
Strip pile to cut-off level and check pile eccentricity at cut-off level.
Construct pile caps and ground beams (if applicable) to the underside
of slabs in contact to the ground.

Failure load test of preliminary test piles and working load test of works
piles as specified.

Integrity tests and High Strain Dynamic Load Test on preliminary test
piles and works piles.

The Contractor shall keep records for the installation of each pile and
shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not
later than noon of the next working day after the pile was installed.

6113.02.01 Provisional Number of Piles

The provisional number of piles is shown in the tender drawings. The
actual number to be installed may vary for this contract. The Contractor

226
 shall allow in his tender for variation in the total number of piles to
be installed up to 10% of the provisional number specified at tender
stage.

6113.02.02 Other
Provide temporary drains, sumps and all other measures necessary to
keep the Site dry. Any other
Incidental works, whether of a temporary or permanent nature, for the
satisfactory completion of the contract.

6113.03 Contractor to Acquaint Himself with the Site of Work

Prior to the submission of the tender the Contractor is deemed to
have visited the Site to Acquaint himself with the existing site
conditions, means of access, nature and proximity of adjacent
properties and other matters liable to affect the overall contract price.
The award of the contract shall be based on the understanding
that the Contractor is completely familiar with the climatic and
physical conditions prevailing on Site. No extra payment will be
considered at a later date due to the Contractor's failure to allow for
contingencies arising from the work and the nature of existing site
conditions.

The Contractor shall ensure that his system and method of pile
installation is suitable and safe for use at the proposed site of
work, taking into account the nature and proximity of adjacent
properties and their facilities. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Employer against any expense, liability, loss, claim or proceedings
which the Employer may incur or sustain by reason of damage to any
property real or personal other than works, injury or accident to
workmen or public caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration,
weakening or removal of support or lowering of ground water, arising
out of or in the course of or by reason of the execution of the works.

6113.04 Subsoil Data

A soil investigation factual report is available at the Engineer's office for
the Contractors/Bidders information. The factual report is intended
solely as a preliminary and approximate guide to the nature of
ground stratification as it is known to the Engineer.

227
 Neither the completeness nor the accuracy of the information provided
is guaranteed. No responsibility is assumed by the Employer or the
Engineer for any opinion or conclusion given in the soil report.

The reports limit itself to and identify subsurface conditions only at

selected points where soil samples were taken, when they were taken.
The actual conditions in areas not sampled may differ from the
reported findings.

The soil report is based on conditions which existed at the time of

subsurface exploration. Continuing adequacy of the report may be
affected by time, construction operations at or adjacent to the Site
and by natural events such as floods and groundwater
fluctuations.

The Contractor shall study the given soil report in detail and shall be
obliged to place his own interpretation on the information provided, and
to make due allowance for the effects of site conditions on his
construction operations. No claims shall be entertained or accepted on
grounds that the information provided is incomplete or incorrect.

If the Contractor is of the opinion that additional geotechnical data is

necessary for the successful installation of the foundation system, he
shall include in the submission of the tender his proposed program of
soil investigation, supported by full technical justification, for review
and agreement by the Employer and the Engineer. The Contractor's
proposal shall include among other things the time frame for the work,
numbers and locations of boreholes, and numbers and types of tests.

If the Contractor's proposal is found to be in accordance with accepted

principles of good foundation engineering and technically justifiable
without duplicating the data contained in the soil investigation report,
this work shall be included in the contract for execution within the
contract period.

6113.05 Unexpected Ground Conditions

The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any
circumstances which, in the Contractor's opinion, indicate ground
conditions that may differ from those expected by him from his

228
 interpretation of the soil investigation report. The Contractor's report
shall be in the form of a written notice of Adverse Physical Conditions
and Artificial Obstructions which shall be given to the Engineer at the
earliest possible time after encountering such conditions and
obstructions. The report shall be accompanied by all information
available to the Contractor which will materially assist the Engineer
in verifying the conditions reported, and in determining the cause and
reasonableness of any claim relating thereto in accordance with the
conditions of contract.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain a daily

record of his material, plant and labour expenditure from the time
unexpected ground conditions were first encountered and investigative
work undertaken to identify them, until such time when the problem is
resolved to the Engineer's satisfaction and construction of the affected
portion of the permanent works resumed. It is held that the Contractor
shall bear the costs of wastages which shall be reported in the daily
record. This record of expenditure shall be verified and endorsed each
day by the Engineer's representative only in his capacity as a witness to
the proceedings at the material time, and such endorsement shall not in
any way be construed to represent the Engineer's agreement to the
Contractor's claim.

In the opinion of the Engineer, if unexpected ground conditions require

the permanent substructure works to be constructed to a modified
design, the Engineer shall issue instruction for a variation to the
permanent works in the contract.

Generally, it is foreseeable that the Engineer will require the Contractor

to modify either his temporary works or' his method and sequence of
construction to suit unexpected ground conditions, regardless whether
such ground conditions require a modification of the permanent works
design, in order for the permanent works to be constructed safely and to
the required specifications.

6113.06 Systems and Nature of Neighbouring Buildings

The Contractor shall pay very careful attention to construction
constraints imposed by neighbouring buildings and other structures.
The Contractor shall exercise extra care and implement adequate

229
 monitoring measures when carrying out his piling operations so as not
to disturb or damage existing adjacent properties and building
foundations. The Contractor shall include in the submission of the
tender his proposal for monitoring adjacent properties for any
detrimental effects arising out of his execution of the piling works, so
that appropriate and timely preventive action can be taken to minimise
damage. The Contractor's monitoring program, when deemed
adequate by the Engineer, shall be included in the contract.

The Contractor shall include in the contract the cost for carrying
out a condition survey of adjacent properties to establish the condition
of the existing buildings and facilities prior to commencement of piling
work. Condition surveys shall be conducted by a registered building
surveyor. The results of the survey shall be lodged with the Architect
for record.

The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of
any claims for damage to adjacent buildings and facilities arising
from his execution of the piling works.

6113.07 Site Access

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary
approvals from the authorities concerned for the use of the temporary
access. He shall comply strictly and diligently with all conditions
attached to these approvals. He shall maintain the access as well as
the portion of public road and walkway connected with it in a clean and
safe state at all times. He shall provide at all times adequate security
arrangements in the vicinity of access points into the Site.

6113.08 System of Piles Foundation

Pile installation system shall be approved by the Engineer. The use
of dolly in connection with driven pile systems is strictly prohibited
under this contract. All materials shall be new and of the best quality.
By "best" it shall be understood that no other superior class of
specified materials and workmanship is available in Tanzania when
such are to be produced on the demand of the Engineer.

Materials, workmanship and conditions for the manufacture and

installation of piled foundations shall be strictly in accordance with

230
the relevant clauses of the contract specification and the latest
British Standard Code of Practice for Foundations BS8004:1986.
In matters not specifically covered by this specification the Contractor
shall comply with BS 8004. Where discrepancies arise between this
specification and BS8004, the provisions of this specification shall take
precedence. The Contractor shall allow in the unit rate for piles the
cost of material quality tests on concrete and reinforcement, which
shall be conducted by him in the manner and at such frequency as
required under the General Concrete Specification.

The method of placing and workability of the concrete shall be such that
a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section is
formed.

The concrete shall be placed without such interruption as would allow

the previously placed batch to have hardened. The method of placing
shall be approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall take all precautions in the design of the mix and
placing of concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in temporary
casing. No soil liquid or other foreign matter, which would adversely
affect the performance of the piles, shall be permitted to contaminate
the concrete.

Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile bore shall be in
accordance with the standard shown in Table 6113/1. The concrete
shall be of the workability approved when in its final position and shall
remain sufficiently workable for all pile construction procedures to be
safely completed.

Table 6113/1

Piling Mix Slump (mm) Typical Conditions of Use

Workability
I 75 - 150 Placed into water-free permanently lined bore of
600mm diameter or more, where casing level lies
below temporary casing; reinforcement widely
spaced leaving ample room for free movement of

231
 concrete between bars.
II 100 - 200 Where reinforcement is not spaced widely; where
cut-off level of concrete is within temporary casing;
where pile bore is water-free and diameter is less
than 600mm.
III 150 or more Where concrete is to be placed by tremie under
water or drilling mud or by pumping.

Unless designated as basement piles all piles shall be placed with their
tops at least 1 meter above pile cut-off level in their respective pile
caps. All bore holes, except for basement piles or unless otherwise
specified, shall be filled with concrete to the top of the hole so that the
Engineer can be assured that the concrete has displaced all the
bentonite. Internal vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete.

Approved measures shall be taken to ensure that the structural strength

of concrete placed in all piles is not impaired through grout loss,
segregation or bleeding. Concrete shall be directed vertically into the
center of each vertical pile so that grout is not lost from the initial
discharge.

Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is

to accumulation of silt or other material at the base of the boring, and
the Contractor shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite
suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the tremie
pipe, has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole.

Concrete to be places under water or drilling fluid shall be placed by

tremie. Pumping of concrete may be approved where appropriate.

Details of the pile caps layout are given in the contract drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for determining the lengths of piles
supported by detailed calculations in accordance with the following:

The results of the failure load tests, which shall form the basis for
assessing the depth of penetration required to achieve the pile working
capacity with a minimum factor of safety of 2.0 for compression piles.

232
 The bearing in underlying rock formation will only be allowed when
proven by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Proof
shall comprise drilling, sampling and testing of material obtained from
the pile toe and 5 metres or 5 times the pile diameter, whichever the
greater, below the pile toe.

Piles shall not be installed unnecessarily beyond the depths required

for them to develop the required load carrying capacity. No payment
shall be made for extra installation length which the Contractor cannot
technically justify.

All other relevant requirements of the contract.

6113.09 Alternative Design by Contractor

The Contractor may propose a suitable alternative piling system
subject to the condition that the assessment of adequacy of any
system and its approval shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to extra cost or time in the contract
should his proposed alternative system be disapproved.

Where a loading plan is made available to the Contractor, the column

loads shown therein refer to un-factored total compression loads,
lateral loads and bending moments to be transferred to supporting
piles, excluding the self weight of pile cap. The Contractor shall be
required to fully account for the additional load contribution from pile
cap in his design. Where indicated, net tension loads shall refer to
loads transmitted to tension piles after making approximate reductions
to account for the beneficial effect of self-weight of pile caps, ground
beams and slabs.

The Contractor is required to submit his proposed alternative design for

the Engineer's review. The Contractor's submission shall be endorsed
by his Professional Engineer and include the following information:

Calculations demonstrating the single pile and group working

capacities and pile lengths of the pile system proposed stating
clearly the underlying assumptions adopted.

233
Specifications for the proposed system, including type of piling
equipment, maximum length of piles that can be satisfactorily installed
and average output in linear metres of installed pile per piling frame per
normal working day of 8 working hours per day.

Pile layout and arrangements.

Method of construction, including method of jointing. e. Design,

drawing and quantities of pile caps.
Guarantee of pile capacity for all piles installed, regardless whether
or not the capacity of a pile is proven by test.

Any other information required by the Engineer in his review of the

alternative system.

The system or systems put forward by the Contractor shall have

good records of successful installation and performance in at least
5 local projects of comparable project size and ground conditions.

The Contractor's design calculation and specification shall comply

fully with the relevant recommendations of the British Standard BS
8004, the requirements of the Engineer's specification and the
conditions of contract, unless he has reason acceptable to the
Engineer for departing therefrom. In matters not specifically covered
by the British Standard BS 8004 and the Engineer's specification, the
Contractor's proposal shall also be subject to the Engineer's
approval. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to clearly itemise
any departure from British Standard BS 8004 and the piling
specification provided.

Prior to the acceptance of the alternative pile design and the

installation of any working piles, the Contractor shall be required to
carry out failure load tests to confirm his design. Based on the results
of the tests, the Contractor shall be required to modify his design of
piles where necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no extra
cost.

234
6113.10 Piles Group
Spacing of piles shall be not less than 2.5 times the diameter of the pile.
The Contractor shall consider the effect of size of the group when
determining the number of piles for the given column loads. He shall
submit his calculation showing the group capacity of the pile group for
the approval of the Engineer. If the group capacity is found to be less
than the required capacity, the Contractor shall provide at his own cost
additional piles as approved by the Engineer to compensate the
deficiency.

6113.11 Underground Services

Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall establish the
locations and levels of all existing underground services within and
surrounding the Site likely to be affected by his piling operations.
Drawings of buried sewer lines, electricity and telephone cables, and
water mains as they are known to the Engineer are available from the
Consultants for the Contractor's review. These drawings are indicative
only and are intended as an approximate guide for the Contractor's own
verification on Site. The accuracy and completeness of the information
shown in these drawings are neither guaranteed nor implied. It is
deemed that the Contractor shall be responsible for taking all
reasonable and necessary steps to confirm and supplement the
information provided to make them complete and accurate. No
subsequent claim from the Contractor on the basis of incomplete or
inaccurate information shall be accepted.
The Contractor shall exercise reasonable skill and care during piling
operations to minimize disturbance of existing underground services.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of any
claims for damages to underground services arising from his piling
works.

6113.12 Equipment and Labour

The Contractor shall provide all frames, equipment, lifting devices and
labour necessary for the installation of piles.

The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer regarding the suitability,

efficiency and operational capability of his piling equipment. The
Contractor shall be required to provide adequate numbers of
operational piling frames to ensure that the works are completed

235
 within the time period stipulated in the approve construction
programme. The Contractor is deemed to have made provision for
the availability of standby plant at all times to allow for the contingency
of equipment failure. Equipment found to have a consistent record of
breakdowns shall be removed from the Site.

The Engineer shall order the removal or replacement of any equipment

or staff whenever he is of the opinion that such equipment or staffs is
not suitable for the works. The Contractor shall comply with the
Engineer's instructions on these matters without extra cost or time to
the contract.

6113.13 Programme of Works

The Contractor shall adhere to the time frame requirements set by his
Construction Programme for timely completion of the project. Such
requirements shall include, among other things, submission of all his
construction schedules, method statements, construction records and
any other relevant information necessary for monitoring, inspection and
proper execution of the works.

6113.14 Method Statements for Construction Operations

Upon award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
detailed method statement for the installation of piles. For the purpose
of this clause, a method statement shall be a document containing:

A detailed construction sequence.

Shop drawings showing, among other things, details of all special

requirements for the construction activities such as hoisting of
reinforcement cages, cast in fixings, etc.

Design calculations of temporary works.

Material, plant and labour requirements at each construction stage.

Rate of production output based on resources allocated, such as the

average output in linear meters of installed piles per piling frame per
normal working day of 8 working hours per day.

236
Other information relevant to the construction activities.

Engineer shall during the execution of the works require the

Contractor to submit detailed method statements of other construction
operations not mentioned in the Construction Programme but are
subsequently required for the proper and safe construction of the
works. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit, within
such times and in such detail as the Engineer may reasonably require,
such information pertaining to the methods of construction (including
temporary works and the use of construction plant) which the
Contractor proposes to use, and such calculations of the stresses,
strains and deflections that will arise in the permanent works or any
part thereof during construction from the use of such methods, as will
enable the Engineer to decide whether the permanent works can be
executed safely and in accordance with the contract if the methods are
adhered to, and without detriment to the permanent works when
completed.

The Engineer shall inform the Contractor in writing within 14 days

after receipt of the Contractor's method statement either:

i. That the Contractor's proposed methods have the consent of the

Engineer; or

ii. In what respects, in the opinion of the Engineer, the said methods
fail to meet the requirements of the contract or will be detrimental
to the permanent works.

In the latter event, the Contractor shall take such steps or make such
changes in the said methods as may be necessary to meet the
Engineer's requirements and to obtain his consent. While the Engineer
will attempt to respond to such amendments or corrections speedily,
the Contractor shall in no case assume that it can be undertaken in
less than ten (10) working days.

The Contractor shall not change the methods, which have received the
Engineer’s consent without the further consent in writing of the
Engineer, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Works shall

237
 commence at such times when and not before the Engineer has given
his consent to the method of construction.

The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for the method of

construction in his contract price.

The Contractor shall not be entitled for extra time and/or cost for his
compliance with the Engineer's instructions on the adequacy and
safety of his method statements.

Consent by the Engineer of the Contractor's proposed methods of

construction in accordance with this clause, shall not in any way relieve
the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the
contract.

6113.15 Engineer's Inspection Program

The Contractor shall integrate the Engineer's inspection program
into his proposed method of construction. The inspection program
shall generally conform to the requirements of this specification and
the conditions of contract.

In the course of the Engineer's review of the Contractor's method of

construction and prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall
receive and incorporate into his method statement the Engineer's
requirements on frequency, type, sequence and procedure of
inspections and quality control checks at each stage of construction.

The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the Engineer's inspection

requirements and shall not deviate from the approved inspection
program without the prior consent of the Engineer. The Engineer may,
at his own discretion, make periodic improvements of the inspection
program.

6113.15.01 Adequate Notice of Supervision

The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day o f his programme
of piling planned for the following day. The Contractor shall give
adequate notice of his intention to work outside normal hours and at
weekends. For the purpose of this clause, advance notice given 1

238
 working day ahead for weekday overtime and 2 working days ahead
for weekends shall be considered adequate notice.

SS 6113.16 Setting Out

The Contractor shall provide all labour, pegs, rods, survey
instruments, concrete posts etc. needed for setting out the works. The
Contractor is to ensure that boundary marks defining the limits of the
Employer's property are in their correct positions and shall employ a
licensed surveyor to check the accuracy of these positions. The
Contractor shall be responsible for setting out the works from the
drawings and boundary marks. The Contractor shall be responsible for
safeguarding the position and level of all reference pegs, boundary
and benchmarks used for setting out the works.

The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's prior agreement on the

locations and numbers of reference baselines and datum levels
required for setting out of piles. The Contractor shall engage a licensed
surveyor to set out on site the positions and levels of each pile.

The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's prior agreement on the

locations and numbers of boundary marks. The system of boundary
marks shall be employed for cross-checking in conjunction with the
method of setting out from reference baselines for each and every
perimeter pile and pilecap to ensure these works are confined within
the limits of the Employer's property. Boundary pegs shall be
maintained in good condition at all times. While such pegs may be
removed temporarily at localised zones to facilitate construction, the
Contractor shall re-install them at the earliest possible time.
Boundary pegs shall not be removed without prior consultation with the
Engineer.
Checking by the Engineer does not in any way absolve or reduce
the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the accuracy of the setting
out.

6113.17 Emphasis on Dimensional Accuracy

The Contractor shall note that dimensional accuracy in construction is
an important requirement of this contract. Since dimensional accuracy
during construction and problems arising from the lack of it are entirely

239
 the Contractor's responsibility, due care shall be taken by the
Contractor in his planning and execution of the Works.

6113.18 Pile Position Tolerance

Ground level refers to the level at which the piling rig is stationed for
installation of pile. The tolerance limits specified under this clause shall
be taken to apply to pile eccentricities measured at pile head cut-off
level. However, an additional tolerance of pile head cut-off below
ground level may be allowed by taking into account the
permissible deviation in pile verticality between ground and cut-off
levels, subject to agreement by the Engineer.

Where piles are not arranged along a single line, the maximum
permissible deviation of the centre of each finished pile in a group of 3
or more piles shall be 75 mm in any direction from the true position of
the same pile, provided also that the centre of the finished pile group
shall not deviate laterally from the true centre of the same group by
more than 40 mm.

The maximum permissible deviation of the centre of each finished pile

in 1- pile or 2- pile groups and single line pile groups of 3 or more
piles shall not exceed 25 mm laterally from the true position of the
same pile.

The verticality of each pile shall not deviate at any point below the
ground by more than 1 in 75 from the true vertical position.

The Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor who shall follow up

directly from the stripping of pile to cut-off level to check the
eccentricity of pile positions as compared with the positions indicated
on the pile layout drawings. If any pile has been installed in a position
or verticality not within the specified tolerance, all expenditure to
remedy the work shall be borne by the Contractor. The Engineer's
decision in this regard shall be final.

6113.19 Forcible Corrections

Forcible corrections to the as-installed positions of work piles shall not
be permitted in this contract.

240
6113.20 Adjacent Piles
Piles shall be installed in such a manner as to ensure that no damage
is sustained by previously installed piles in adjacent positions.

6113.21 Faulty Piles

Any piles cracked, deformed or twisted during installation or testing or
otherwise damaged in any way, or not installed within the
specified position or verticality tolerance, or failed the specified load
tests shall be classified as faulty piles.

Faulty piles shall be rejected at the discretion of the Engineer and

replaced or supplemented with substitute piles by the Contractor at his
own expense. At the sole discretion of the Engineer, the pile caps and
any required compensating pile shall be constructed to a modified
design proposed by the Contractor to account for the variation in
pile position or alignment.

The cost and time of replacement, including all direct and

consequential costs in modifications required, shall be borne by the
Contractor.

Generally, where substitute or compensating piles are installed within

a particular pile group to make good a faulty pile, the Contractor shall
be entitled to payment, where application in the contract, on the basis
of a hypothetical working pile of the same size as the faulty pile and
with a pay lengths equivalent to the average of the pay lengths of the
adjacent working piles in the same pile group. Substitute or
compensating piles shall not be paid. In the specific case of pile
groups with single piles, and if such piles are judged faulty, the
hypothetical pay length shall be based on the average of the pay
lengths of surrounding piles of the same size as the faulty pile.
Computations of hypothetical pay lengths shall be subject to the
agreement of the Engineer, whose decision in this regard shall be
final.

6113.22 Stripping or Cutting of Piles to Cut-Off Levels

Stripping of concrete spun piles to cut-off level specified in the
drawings shall be carried out by the Contractor. Unless otherwise

241
directed, cut-off level shall be 75 mm above the underside of pile cap
and all cut-off piles shall be disposed as waste material.

When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the
Contractor shall take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging
the rest of the pile. Any cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away
and the pile to be repaired in an approved manner to provide full and
sound section at the cut-off level

Starter bars are sometimes provided as per Drawings for hollow

section precast pretensioned spun piles. The contractor shall cut the
pile head with mechanical cutter to form flush cut surface and construct
the starter bars bonded to the annulus of the hollow section precast
spun pile as per Drawings. In the Engineer’s opinion, if the pile is
defective, the Contractor shall carry out his own expenses on all
necessary remedial work as required by the Engineer.

Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles, which have recently
been cast, and which contain workable or unset concrete that a flow of
concrete could be induced from or damage caused to any of the piles.

Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion. They shall

be of uniform cross-section throughout each continuous length. During
concreting they shall be free from internal projections and encrusted
concrete, which might adversely affect the proper formation or piles.

Where boring takes place through unstable water bearing strata, the
process of excavation and the depth of temporary casing employed
shall be such that soil from outside the area of the pile is not drawn into
the pile section and cavities are not created outside the temporary
casing as it is advanced.

Where the use of drilling fluid is specified or approved for maintaining

the stability of a bore, an adequate temporary casing of all shall be used
in conjunction with the method so as to ensure stability of the strata
near ground level until concrete has been placed. During construction
the level of drilling fluid in the pile excavation shall be maintained within
the cased or stable bore so that it is not less than 1.0m above the level
of external standing groundwater at all times.

242
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them
remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.
During extraction the motion of the casing shall be maintained in an
axial direction relative to the pile.

When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete

shall be maintained within it to ensure that pressure from external
water. Drilling fluid or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither
reduced in section nor contaminated.

The concrete level within a temporary casing shall be topped up where

necessary during the course of casing extraction in such a way that the
case of the casing is always below the concrete surface under the
casting of the pile has been completed.

Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess heads

of water or drilling fluid could occur as the casing is withdrawn because
of the displacement of water or fluid by the concrete as it flows into its
final position against the walls of the pipe bore. Where two or more
discontinuous lengths of casing (double casing) are used in the
construction the proposed method of working shall be approved by the
Engineer.

For piles cast in dry bores using temporary casing and without the use
of a permanent lining, pile heads shall be cast to a level above the
specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a sound concrete connection
with the pile can be made. No pile shall be cast with its head below
standing water level unless approved measures are taken to prevent
inflow of water causing segregation of the concrete as temporary casing
is extracted; and where applicable, the standing water level for each
pile shall be agreed with the Engineer, and this level is to be treated as
the cut-off for the purpose of calculating tolerance.

For piles cast in dry bores within the permanent lining tubes or
permanent casings, or where their cut-off levels are in stable ground
below the base of any casing used, pile heads shall be cast to a level
above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming, a sound concrete
connection with the pile can be made.

243
 For piles cast under water or drilling fluid, the pile heads shall be cast to
a level above the specified cut-off so that, after trimming to remove all
debris and contaminated concrete, a sound concrete connection with
the pile can be made.

6113.23 Cleaning Up
The Contractor shall propose to the Engineer the frequency of his
periodic removal of debris from the Site in the course of the work.
The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the agreed program of debris
removal and the Engineer reserve the right to instruct the Contractor to
increase his frequency of debris removal at no extra cost to the
contract.

Upon completion of the work, all unnecessary plant, cut-off piles,

rubbish and debris resulting from the piling operations shall be
removed from the Site within a reasonable time agreed with the
Engineer. Reasonable time is deemed to be the minimum time
which the Contractor can justify to demobilize his plant and arrange
the transportation of plant and waste materials off-site, provided
always that ensuing construction operations are not hampered as a
result of this arrangement.

6113.24 Pile Length

Where applicable in the contract, the Contractor shall be paid only for
the length of installed pile measured from toe of the pile to the pile
head cut-off level. The contractor shall make provision in his unit rate
for condition of piling commencement level other than the cut-off level.

6113.25 Marking of Piles

Piles shall be indelibly marked following installation to show their
identification number, length and date of installation.

6113.26 As-Built Drawings

After the completion of the piling, the Contractor shall submit an as-built
drawing of the pile layout. This drawing shall be prepared by a licensed
surveyor. It should include the following:
a) Location marking of piles.
b) Size and type of piles.
c) Eccentricities of piles in both directions.

244
 d) Depth of penetration of each pile or reduced level of toe of each pile
and cut-off level of each pile.

6113.27 Piling Records

The Contractor shall keep complete piling records during pile
installation. Contractor shall submit in duplicate the following
information to the Engineer:
a) Signed records of all piles as the work proceeds. Individual pile
records shall be submitted not later than noon of the next
working day after the pile was installed. The signed records shall
form a record of the work. Any unexpected installation conditions
shall be noted in the record.

b) Upon completion, compile a record of the work as carried

out and as-built drawings. The drawings shall be prepared and
endorsed by a licensed surveyor.

The format of the record shall be approved by the Engineer and shall contain
but not be limited to the following information where applicable:
- Pile Location Mark (All Pile)
- Pile Type (Compression or Tension) (All Pile)
- Pile Size (All Pile)
- Date and Time of Installation (All Pile)
- Date of Concreting (Bored Pile)
- Concrete Mix (Bored Pile)
- Method of Concreting (Bored Pile)
- Standing Ground water Level (Bored Pile)
- Pile Reference (Driven Pile)
- Driving Record (penetration & blow count) (Driven Pile)
- Set Value (Driven Pile)
- Combination of Pile Lengths (Driven Pile)
- Weather Condition (All Pile)
- Ground Level Before Commencement of Pile Installation (All Pile)
- Working Level of Ground for Pile Installation (All Pile)
- Depth from Working Level to Pile Toe (All Pile)
- Level of Pile Toe (All Pile)
- Pile Cut-off Level (All Pile)
- Depth from Cut-off Level to Pile Toe (Pay Length) (All Pile)
- Length of Temporary Casing (Bored Pile)

245
 - Length of Permanent Casing (Bored Pile)
- Details of Soil Strata Penetrated (Bored Pile)
- Soil Samples taken and In-situ Tests carried out (Bored Pile)
- Length and Details of Reinforcement (Bored Pile)
- Estimated Volume of Concrete required to form the pile shaft (Bored Pile)
- Actual Volume of Concrete used in forming the pile shaft (Bored Pile)
- Type and Model of Plant, Equipment

All records shall bear the names of person who records and person who
checks.

6113.28 Wastages
It is held that the Contractor is responsible for and shall bear the cost of
all wastages in material, labour and plant arising from his execution of
the works.

6400 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES

6401 SCOPE
Add at the end of Clause 6401 of the Standard Specifications the
following:

New box culverts shall in general be made as shown on the Drawings

and in accordance with the latest edition of BS 5400 for “Steel, concrete
and composite bridges”.

6404 MATERIALS
Add at the end of Clause 6404 “(b) Strength concrete” of the Standard
Specifications the following:

The following concrete grades for use in the structures are applicable
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified by the Engineer:

Concrete Class Structural Part

Class 40 All prestressed structural concrete members
Class 30 All other reinforced structural concrete
Class 25 Mass concrete for non-reinforced structural elements, base
slabs, foundation for toe walls and gabions
Class 15 Blinding
Add at the end of Series 6000 the following Section 6900:

246
6900 REHABILITATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE AND MASONRY
STRUCTURES
6901 SCOPE
This Section covers the repair of existing concrete and masonry
structures by patching, pointing and coping.

The works include:

- Crack injection - for repair of small cracks
- Concrete patching - for repair of wide cracks and spallings of
concrete
- Pointing - for repair of joints in existing stone masonry
- Coping - for repair of damaged or deteriorated mass concrete on
top of masonry walls

The type of repair work required for rehabilitation of the structures might
change by the time of construction. Therefore the Engineer will on the
Site verify if the repair works shown on the Drawing are appropriate for
the given structure at the time of construction and shall instruct on type
and extent of repair work to be carried out.

6902 WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor should engage experienced personnel to accomplish
restoration of Concrete and masonry structures. The experience shall
be relevant to anticipated conditions and to the special techniques
required. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Engineer evidence of the above required experience and dependability
of equipment and techniques to be used and shall submit
documentation of past projects on which this type of work has been
performed. If as an experienced contractor he wants to use his own
technique for the repair works he must get the prior approval of the
Engineer on site.

6903 MATERIALS
(a) General
All materials shall conform to the relevant requirements of Section 2500
and Section 6400.

247
 Injection materials
Materials for injection shall be from a well-reputed company, and it shall
be proven that, the materials have been used for similar works in a
number of other cases with good result.

The materials shall be duly dated and may only be used if the time limit
for the materials has not expired. The materials shall be stored properly
and shall be kept dry at all time.

The materials shall unless otherwise agreed with the Supervision

Engineer be of cement based components. Alternatives of epoxy basis
may be considered.

(b) Patch materials

Materials for patching shall be of one of the following types depending
on the possibility for protecting the patch from traffic:

Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Patch MaterialsPortland cement

concrete patch materials shall be used where the patch is protected
from traffic for 24 hours or more. A sand-cement grout shall be used to
bond the patch. The bonding grout shall be composed of 1 part cement
to 1 part sand by volume with sufficient water to produce a mortar with
thick, cream consistency.

Accelerated Cement Concrete (ACC) Patch Materials

Accelerated strength cement concrete shall be used where early
opening (4 to 6 hours) to traffic is required. An epoxy-bonding agent is
required when placing patches for early opening to traffic. The epoxy
prime coat shall be applied in a thin coating and scrubbed into the
surface with a stiff bristled brush. Placement of the concrete shall be
delayed until the epoxy becomes tacky. The patch mixture shall be
placed and consolidated to eliminate voids at the interface of the patch
and existing concrete.

Rapid Set Patch (RSP) Materials

Rapid set patch materials shall be used for minimum shutdown. Patch
material shall be prepared and placed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The preparation of the repair area surface
shall be as outlined under ACC patch material unless otherwise

248
 provided. The time period recommended by the manufacturer before
opening to traffic shall be observed.

(c) Mix Design

The Contractor shall submit, for approval, a proposal for materials,
additives and the mix design that is to be used in the different works.

(d) Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall supply equipment and tools necessary for handling
materials and performing all parts of the work.

The newly constructed patching shall be similar in appearance to the

existing concrete. After curing the colour of the patching shall be similar
to the existing concrete by using appropriate type and gradation of fine
and coarse aggregates.

Temporary access for traffic shall be provided and kept good by the
Contractor for the structural restoration work.

For medium and deep patching works temporary support might be

ordered by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall prepare test repair

specimens on existing structure using materials proposed for the work.
Repair works shall not begin until the Engineer inspects the test
specimens together with the seven days and twenty eight days test
results used in the mix design and approves them.

6904 INJECTION

Personnel with experience in similar jobs shall carry out the works,
which are of a specialised character.

The equipment shall be suitable and well maintained.

The works to be carried out shall be agreed with the Supervision

Engineer before any injection activities shall commence.

When agreed the activities are as follows:

249
 Identification of cracks for injection. The cracks, which are suitable for
repair with injection, are rather deep cracks (more than 50 mm deep),
but not necessarily very wide cracks.

The actual concrete zone shall be cleaned and the drilling works shall
be carried out and cleaned again with high pressure jet air. Dependent
on the final choice of material for injection, the actual zone shall be pre-
watered.

The injection material shall be injected into the drilled holes, which shall
be sealed off after finalisation.

After sealing of the repaired zone, this shall be nicely finished, and after
hardening eventually grinded.
There shall be prepared an injection journal for the works, in which the
considerations from the injection works shall be recorded.

6905 PATCHING
This work consists of the repair and resealing of cracks and spallings in
existing concrete structures.

Cracks and spallings shall be refaced by concrete saw with small

diameter diamond and/or abrasive blades. All loose material shall be
removed. When the crack widths vary and the crack faces are ravelled
and irregular, a minimum crack reservoir depth of approximately 20 mm
shall be cut.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material. One or

more combination of the methods listed below shall be used in the
cleaning operation except for sawing, which is to be used only if the
other methods will not properly clean the joint.

(i) Wire Brush and Muriatic Acid:

The cracks/spallings shall be cleaned with a mechanical wire brush and
other tools as necessary. After all foreign material, including old sealant
if any, has been removed by brushing to expose a new, clean surface, a
solution of 10 percent commercial Muriatic acid shall be applied to the
faces of the cracks/spallings. After the foaming action of the acid has

250
 ceased, the cracks/spallings shall be flushed with water and brushed
again. After flushing and rebrushing, the cracks/spallings shall be blown
out with compressed air.

(ii) Sand Blasting

The cracks/spallings shall be cleaned with a sand blaster and other
tools as necessary. After blasting, the cracks/spallings shall be blown
out with compressed air. This process shall be repeated until the
cracks/spallings is cleaned of all foreign material, and a new clean
surface is exposed on the face of the cracks/spallings.

(iii) High Pressure Water Jet

The cracks/spallings shall be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet
blaster and other tools as necessary. After blasting, the cracks/spallings
shall be blown out with compressed air. This process shall be repeated
until the cracks/spallings is cleaned of all foreign material, and a new,
clean surface is exposed on the face of the cracks/spallings.

(iv) Sawing
Sawing shall be limited to only exposing clean, new concrete faces on
the cracks/spallings with a minimum allowable cut of 1.5 mm on each
face of the cracks/spallings. All dust, sawing residue, or other
contamination shall be removed from the cracks/spallings faces. If wet
sawing with diamond or abrasive blades is used, the sawing residue
shall be removed by blowing out the cracks/spallings and surrounding
area with compressed air. If dry sawing with diamond or abrasive
blades is used, the resulting saw laitence or slurry shall be completely
removed from the cracks/spallings and surrounding area by flushing
clean with a high-pressure jet of clean water. After flushing, the
cracks/spallings shall be blown out with compressed air.

The patching material shall be as specified in Sub-clause 6903(b).

Water cement contact time shall not exceed 90 minutes. The grout shall
be scrubbed evenly over the surface of the patch. Excess grout shall
not be permitted to collect in pockets. The concrete patch material shall
be placed before the bonding grout dries. Dried or hardened grout shall
be removed by sandblasting. The patch mixture shall be placed and
consolidated to eliminate essentially all voids at the interface between
the patch and adjacent concrete.

251
 For Accelerated Cement Concrete patching the epoxy prime coat shall
be applied in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface with a stiff
bristled brush. Placement of the concrete shall be deployed until the
epoxy becomes tacky. The patch mixture shall be placed and
consolidated to eliminate voids at the interface of the patch and existing
concrete.

If deep patching repair area abuts an existing construction joint that

penetrates the full depth of the slab, an insert or other bond breaking
medium shall be used to maintain such construction joint. The new joint
shall be formed to the same width as the existing joint.

All patches shall be finished to the cross-section and texture of the

existing structure.

If the Engineer on site, at the time of construction, finds the concrete is

past repair he can order complete or partial replacement of the
structure, after obtaining prior approval from the Employer.

6906 POINTING
(a) Scope
This work shall consist of repairing existing masonry mortar joints by
pointing after thoroughly cleaning the joints and removing of all loose
mortar and foreign material.
(b) Materials
Cement and sand for the mortar shall be in accordance with Sub-clause
6400. The mortar shall be composed of 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand
by volume with sufficient water to produce a mortar with thick, cream
consistency.
(c) Construction
Where pointing of existing masonry structures are specified for a
particular area of the structure all loose or partly disintegrated mortar in
the joints of such area shall be scraped or lightly chiselled out to a
minimum depth of 20 mm below the face of the stones.

The joints shall be made moist just before starting of the pointing. The
mortar shall be flush pointed unless the existing pointing is with raked

252
 joints in which case also the new pointing shall be raked out squarely to
the same depth as the existing pointing.

Immediately after the pointing all face stone shall be thoroughly cleaned
of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the work is completed.
Before final acceptance and if ordered by the Engineer, the surface of
the masonry shall be cleaned using wire brushes and acid if necessary.

The pointing shall be protected from direct sunshine and kept moist for
a minimum of 24 hours after completion.

6907 COPING
(a) Scope
This work shall consist of repairing existing or providing new coping on
top of existing masonry walls and gabions.

(b) Materials
Mass concrete Class 20/14 in accordance with Clause 6402 shall be
used for the coping, except for minor repairs for which the materials
shall be composed of 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand by volume with
sufficient water to produce a mortar with thick, cream consistency.

(c) Construction
Where coping of existing masonry structures are specified for a
particular area of the structure all loose or partly disintegrated mortar or
concrete of such area shall be removed.

After thoroughly cleaning the surface of the masonry it shall, just prior to
placing of coping material, be made moist. Necessary side forms for
Class F3 Surface Finish in accordance with Sub-clause 6209(c) shall be
fixed before placing of the coping concrete.

The coping shall be protected from direct sunshine and kept moist for a
minimum of 48 hours after completion.

253
6908 EXTENSION OF EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Scope
This Section covers the extension of existing concrete structures such
as pipe culverts, box culverts and underpasses.

The type of repair work required for extension of the structures might
change by the time of construction. Therefore the Engineer will on the
Site verify if the extension works shown on the Drawing are appropriate
for the given structure at the time of construction and shall instruct on
type and extent of work to be carried out.

Preperation of Construction Drawings

Existing Conditions of the Structure
The Contractor shall prepare detailed drawings of existing structures
based on recenly taken survey, which should include inlet and outlet
concrete and ground bed levels, channel dimensions and slopes, clear
dimensions of the main structure, thicknesses of walls and slabs etc.
The drawing should contain information about the existing conditions of
the structure (types and extent of cracks, degree of deterioration,
deformations from original shape, pitting and popouts, peeling and
scaling, corrosion of reinforcement etc.) and the state of ground
formation around inlet and outlet sides, stability and durability problems
related with the fill above and approaches of the structure.

Repairing Works on the Existing Structure

Based on the existing condition drawings, the Contractor shall prepare
drawings showing repairing/strengthening works to be carried out on
the existing structure in order to obtain safe and durable structure on
which extension works will be carried out.

Also Construction Drawings showing structural extension works in datail

shall be prepared and submitted to the approval of the Engineer. These
drawings should show soil improvement measures for the base ground,
preperation of contact surfaces, connection details and wáter protection
measures for the structure. All related construction works should be
based on approved construction drawings.

254
 Preparing Existing Structure for Extension
All un-necessary parts of the structure (wing walls, parapets, etc.) will
be removed with a care not to disturb the remaining parts/connections
of the structure.

Ground base of the extension shall be prepared by removing the weak,

disturbed soil to an agreed depth and replacing with well compacted
granular engineering fill.

The contact surfaces of the existing structure shall be prepared as

suitable for the type of extension approved. The extension of the
structure can be made either by ‘rigid connection’ or by a ‘construction
joint’,as shown on the Construction Drawings approved by the
Engineer.

For a rigid connection, the contact surface of the existing structure

should be roughened to a depth to reach sound level of concrete. The
roughened surface should be well cleaned. The reinforcing anchor bars
should be embedded into the surface using chemical anchorage or
other approved methodology, as given in the Construction Drawings.

For a jointed connection, details given in the Construction Drawings

shall be followed.

6909 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

ITEM UNIT
69.01(a) Crack repair by mortar injection metre (m)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete cracks repaired by

mortar injection carried out as specified in the Contract Documents and
accepted by the Engineer.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all costs and direct,
incidental and ancillary expenses for furnishing all materials and works,
including drilling of injection holes, cleaning by high pressure jet air, mortar
injection, sealing, refacing and finishing, as specified in the Contract
Documents.

255
ITEM UNIT
69.01(b) Concrete patching square metre (m2)

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of concrete patching

carried out as specified in the Contract Documents and accepted by the
Engineer.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for all costs and direct,
incidental and ancillary expenses for furnishing all materials and works,
including preparation of test repair specimens, refacing, cutting crack
reservoir, cleaning patching and finishing, as specified in the Contract
Documents.

ITEM UNIT
69.01(c) Pointing of existing masonry and gabions square metre (m2)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of stone masonry joints repaired
by mortar pointing according to the Contract Documents.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all costs and direct,
incidental and ancillary expenses for furnishing all materials and works,
including chiselling, cleaning joints, pointing, cleaning of stone surfaces and
protection of the works as specified in the Contract Documents.

ITEM UNIT
69.01(d) Coping of existing masonry and gabions cubic metre (m3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of concrete for coping of
existing stone masonry and gabions according to the Contract Documents.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all costs and direct,
incidental and ancillary expenses for furnishing all materials and works,
removal of old damaged coping, cleaning, fixing of side forms, placing of
coping concrete, finishing and protection of the works as specified in the
Contract Documents.

256
7000 TOLERANCES, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
7100 TESTING OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
7109 TAKING AND SUBMITTING SAMPLES
Add at the end of Clause 7109(a) of the Standard Specifications the following:

In case the tests disclose non-conditional properties of the test specimens,

additional tests shall be carried out by the Contractor as required by the
Engineer.

Test results shall be submitted daily and without delay to the Engineer in both
in hard copy and digital format with layout to be agreed with the Engineer.

Spot inspection and supplementary testing may be initiated by the Engineer to

check the completed work for compliance with the requirements.

Routine inspection and spot checks will be carried out by the Engineer to
check the completed work for compliance with the dimensional tolerances,
quality of material, density of compaction and any further requirements stated
in this Section 7100.

Replace the sampling frequency concerning asphalt concrete surfacing in

Table 7105/1 under Sub-clause 7109(b) of the Standard Specification with the
following:

Layer and Test to be Sampling frequency, minimum

nominal carried
class of out
material
Base Sand Equivalent 1 sample per 3,000 m3 mixture
Couse of Plasticity Index 1 sample per 5,000 m3 mixture
Bituminou Flakiness Index 1 sample per 5,000 m3 mixture
s Mix or Ten Percent Fines Value 1 sample per 3,000 m3 mixture
Asphalt Aggregate Absorption and aggregate 1 sample per 3,000 m3 mixture or
concrete Gsb and Gsa every change in aggregate source
surfacing Soundness 1 sample per 7,000 m3 mixture
Coating and Stripping as required or instructed by the
Engineer
Penetration 1 sample per 40 tonnes or twice per
Bitumen week as decided by the Engineer

257
 Layer and Test to be Sampling frequency, minimum
nominal carried
class of out
material
Softening Point 1 sample per 40 tonnesor twice per
week as decided by the Engineer

Viscosity 1 sample per 40 tonnes or twice per

week as decided by the Engineer
Mixture Bitumen content 100 m3 (min. 2 no. of each per day)
Grading 100 m3 (min. 2 no. of each per day)
Dust to Bitumen Ratio 100 m3 (min. 2 no. of each per day)
Gmm 100 m3 (min. 2 no. of each per day)
Gyratory compaction. 100 m3 (min. 2 no. of each per day)
Mixture Note 1
Penetration and Softening Once per ten production days
Point of recovered
bitumen
Superpave Mix Design Every change in aggregate source

Note 1: % of Gmm at Nini, % of Gmm at Nmax, VFA at Ndes, VMA at Ndes, Air
Voids at Ndes

7110 TESTING METHODS

Add at the end of Clause 7110 of the Standard Specifications:

The Contractor shall have on the Site all the relevant standards required for
the work he is to undertake under the Contract. A second complete set of such
standards shall be available for the sole use of the Engineer.

7114 (b) FIELD DENSITY TESTING

In Table 7110/1 under Sub-clause 7114(b) of the Standard
Specifications the last row concerning asphalt concrete surfacing shall
be deleted and replaced by the following:

258
 Layer and nominal class of material Frequency, minimum Absolute
minimum
Asphalt Field core density (AASHTO 1 test every 400 m2 6 per
concrete T166, Method A), compaction production day
surfacing percent, air voids content and
core thickness
Thickness 1 test every 400 m2 6 per
measured from cores drilled production day
for field density
Tensile Strength Ratio Every third production day (3
(AASHTO T283) dry and 3 conditioned cores
taken from the mat)

Add at the end of Sub-clause 7114(d) of the Standard Specifications the

following:
The in-place dry density shall be measured according to:

Layer Test Method

Asphalt concrete surfacing AASHTO T 233 (core sampling)

Replace the compaction requirements specified in the penultimate row of

Table 7110/2 of the Standard Specification by the following:

Wearing course mix by No single value less than 93.5% of max.

Superpave Mix Design theoretical density of mix (Gmm)

7114 (d) FIELD DENSITY TESTING

Add at the end of Sub-clause 7114(d) of the Standard Specifications the
following:
The in-place dry density shall be measured according to:
Layer Test Method
Earthworks fill and improved subgrade BS 1377:Part 9:1990 or Latest
(G3, G7, G15)
Subbase of natural gravel (G25, G45) BS 1377:Part 9:1990 or Latest
Subbase of cemented material (CM, C1) BS 1377:Part 9:1990 or Latest
Base course of crushed aggregate (CRS, BS 1377:Part 9:1990 or Latest
CRR)

259
 The Engineer may approve that AASHTO T 238 Method B (nuclear density
gauge) is used as basis for approval of the compaction work for earthwork and
CRR layers after calibration of this method with BS 1377:Part 9:1990. If
nuclear density gauges are approved the Contractor shall carry out the tests
and calibrate the nuclear density gauges for each type of material used and in
accordance with Sub-clause 7114(c). If the Contractor chooses to apply this
method a calibrated nuclear density gauge shall be available for the
Engineer's laboratory. The calibration shall be repeated at regular intervals or
when requested by the Engineer.

7115 TESTS OF SURFACE REGULARITY, LEVELS AND THICKNESS

In Table 7110/2 for base course of crushed aggregate (CRR) replace the
minimum field density requirement to "100% of BS-Heavy".

7200 QUALITY CONTROL

7204 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Replace the last sentence of Sub-clause 7204(d) of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

Where reinvestigation of a test result is not possible, the procedure described

below shall be used for identifying outliers:

Calculate the value of to from:

abs( Xo − Xn)
To =
Sn

Where Xn and Sn are the arithmetic mean and the sample standard deviation
respectively, and Xo is the value of the test differing most from the mean.
Compare the value of to with the value of T for the applicable value of n from
Table 7204/1.
If To is greater than T, then Xo is an outlier.

Every outlier shall be disregarded and replaced by another random test value.
The sample mean and the sample standard deviation shall then be
recalculated. If an outlier cannot be replaced, the sample mean and the
standard deviation shall be calculated using the remaining test results. The

260
 final number of test results used in the assessment, after the elimination of
outliers, shall never be less than three.

Table 7204/1: Values of T for Different Sample Sizes

Number of observations (n) Critical value (T)

1
2
3
4 1.46
5 1.67
6 1.56
7 1.94
8 2.03
9 2.11
10 2.18
11 2.23
12 2.29
13 2.33
14 2.37
15 2.41
16 2.44
17 2.47
18 2.5
19 2.53
20 2.56

7205 PROCEDURES
Replace the entire Sub-clause 7205 (f) including Table 7205/1 of the Standard
Specifications by the following:

At least the following number of relative density determinations shall be taken

in a random pattern (as defined in Sub-clause 7203(b) and 7204(b)) on each
section or as directed by the Engineer and assessed as a lot:

- Roadbed, fills: 3 tests

- Improved subgrade layers: 4 tests
- Gravel wearing course: 4 tests
- Subbase: 5 tests
- Base course: 6 tests

261
After outliers have been examined and replaced as directed by the Engineer,
compliance with the specified density requirements shall be determined by the
statistical method specified below unless a fixed minimum average value
and/or absolute minimum value has been specified for the compaction
elsewhere in these Specifications.

The lot will be considered to comply with the requirements for field density if
the following conditions are fulfilled:

(1) For a lower limit specification, LLs

Xn > LLs + Sn*K
Accept the lot if the sample mean satisfies the expression, otherwise
reject the lot.

(2) For an upper limit specification, ULs

Xn < ULs - Sn*K
Accept the lot if the sample mean satisfies the expression, otherwise
reject the lot.

(3) For a double limit specification, LLs and ULs

LLs + Sn*K < Xn < ULs - Sn*K

Accept the lot if the sample mean satisfies the expression, otherwise
reject the lot.

Where

Xn is the arithmetic mean of a set of n test results constituting the sample.

Sn is the sample standard deviation defined by:

0.5
 (X - X n )2 
Sn =  

 n-1 

where

X is the value of an individual sample portion, i.e. an individual test result or

measurement.
n is the number of sample portions, i.e. the number of individual test results or
measurements.

262
K is a statistical constant defined by:

t
K=
n

where
t is the Student's t.

The value of K is dependent on the number of sample portions in the sample

and the acceptance criteria. The acceptance criteria normally used where
statistical control of materials and workmanship are applied is that the
specification limit, Ls, is satisfied for more than 90% of the lot and that the risk
of accepting a lot that does not satisfy the specified requirement is less than
10%.

The value of K determined according to the above criteria is given in Table

7205/1.

Table 7205/1 Student's t and Statistical Constant, K

Number of samples (n) Student's(t) Statistical Constant (K)

3 1.89 1.09
4 1.64 0.56
5 1.53 0.68
6 1.48 0.60
7 1.44 0.54
8 1.42 0.50
9 1.40 0.47
10 1.38 0.44
11 1.37 0.41
12 1.36 0.39
13 1.36 0.38
14 1.35 0.36
15 1.34 0.35
16 1.34 0.34
17 1.34 0.32
18 1.33 0.31
19 1.33 0.31
20 1.33 0.31

263
 SIGNAL TRANSMITTER PILLAR

8301 STANDARD SIGNAL TRANSMITTING ANCHORAGE PILLAR

Standard signal transmitter pillar 3.00 meters long, 4 grid of the cylindrical
tube will be made of an iron pipe, thickness at least 3.95 mm and standard
TS EN 10255 will be in accordance.

The signal to the bottom of the pillar of the standard 300 mm diameter and
10 mm thick st 37 sheet must be flange. In addition 6x7 x120 mm, 4 flag
sheet must be secured by welding on the sheet. For wiring, sheets should
have 10cm hole in the middle of the flange.

4 Mounting holes with 12 mm diameter must be used.

2 mm thick, same colored galvanized aluminum pillar cap must be mounted

to bottom.

Pillar should have sealed terminal sliding system.

4 x M12 bolts with 30 cm diameter should be welded to sheets for lower

anchorage. Bolt lengths must be 30 cm.

Posts signal transmitters in a sufficient number of the wiring to the terminal

connector on the arrays and to access them with the socket wrench moving
up to 10x35 cm rectangles will be followed by a sliding cover at the botto m.
This cover from the base of the pillar will be the height of 100 cm. Under
the cover, Level IP 54 leak-proof rubber sealing should be used. (Screws
should be stainless) Screw nuts should be installed to side of the pillar
cover for grounding.
Pillars should be grounded for electrical leaks.

Special leak-proof top cap should be installed to pillars for water and dust
protection.

Pillars should be coated with hot dip galvanized according to Standard TS

914 EN ISO 1461.

Standard pillar foundations should be installed 10 cm higher than surface

and at least 100 cm from the edge of curb with sizes of (50 x 50 x 80) cm

264
(width x height x height) where refuge protection is available, and should
be additional 50 cm higher and as much as close to edges where refuge
protection is not available.

OVERHEAD SIGNAL TRANSMITTING ANCHORAGE PILLARS

Overhead signal transmitter pillars should be manufactured in 3 stage
cylindrical Iron pipes. Iron pipes should be thick as 3 fingered and at least
3.2 mm at consoles, thick as 4 fingered at least 3.95 mm at vertical places
and 5 fingered thick as at least 4.25 mm accordance to standard TS EN
10255.

Pillar lengths should be at least 200 cm for 5 fingered and at least 250 for
4 fingered and L shaped console pillar length should be as long as where
the middle of the road is.

The vertical sections of the pillars should be manufactured in merged and

welded of different diameter pipes as specified in the project.

Pillars should have a 75 cm high (from base) 60 mm diameter hole.

Pillars should have a wrench openable 14x35 cm sized lower sliding

access cover with sufficient number of terminal connector for signal
transmitter cable wiring. This cover should be 130 cm high from the base.
Under the cover should be sealed with IP 54 rubber seal for leaks. (Screws
should be stainless) Screw nuts should be installed to side of the pillar
cover for grounding.

Consoles on overhead pillars should be interlaced and installed with M16

bolts.

Under the overhead signal transmitter pillar st 37 sheet flange in 40 cm

diameter and 15 mm thick should be welded. In addition to 6 x 70 x 120
mm 4 flag sheet must be secured by welding on the sheet.

6 Mounting holes should have 16 mm diameter.

300 mm flange should have 10cm hole in the middle.

2 mm thick aluminum pillar colored closing cap should be installed to 5-

finger pillar bottom.

265
6 x M16 bolts with 40 cm diameter should be welded to sheets for lower
anchorage. Bolt lengths must be 53 cm.

Pillars should be grounded for electrical leaks.

With the top of the pillar konsülü the angle between the lower konsülü will
be more than 90 degrees.

Special leak-proof top cap should be installed to pillars for water and dust
protection.

Pillars should be coated with hot dip galvanized according to Standard TS

914 EN ISO 1461.

Standard pillar foundations should be installed 10 cm higher than surface

and at least 100 cm from the edge of curb with sizes of (70 x 70 x 90) cm
(width x height x height) where refuge protection is available, and should
be additional 50 cm higher and as much as close to edges where refuge
protection is not available or as approved by the Engineer.

266
SECTION VI (2C): BUILDING WORK SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUS
STATIONS

1. General Description of Materials and Workmanship

2. Demolitions and Alteration
3. Excavation and Earthworks
4. Concrete Work
5. Waterproofing
6. Walling
7. Fibercement Reinforced Panel
8. Roofing
9. Joinery
10. Structural Steel Works
11. Metalwork
12. Plumbing and Engineering Installation
13. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Finishing
14. Glazing
15. Painting
16. Drainage
17. Electrical Specicifation

267
1.0 General description of materials and workmanship
The following apply to all sections hereafter

1.1 Alterations, additions and Extensions

In alterations or extensions to the existing works, buildings and/or external
work, new work is to match up in all respects to the existing work unless
otherwise specified, shown on the Drawings or approved beforehand by the
Engineer.

1.2 Quality, samples, testing and approval

1.2.1 Materials
All materials, commodities, components and equipment are to be new and
unused otherwise specified by the Engineer. Handle, store, fix and protect all
commodities with care to ensure that they are in perfect condition when
incorporated into works and handed over on completion.

1.2.2 Manufacturer’s recommendations

Handling, storage and fixing of every commodity shall be in accordance with
the printed or written recommendations of the manufacturer and/or supplier.
Supply the Engineer with copies of manufacturer’s recommendations. Inform
the Engineer if the manufacturer’s recommendations conflict with any other
specified requirements, and obtain his instructions before proceeding.

1.2.3 Standards
Where commodities or workmanship are specified by reference of British
Standard (BS) or codes of practice (CP) or International (ISO) or Tanzania
Standard or other Standards, such standards are deemed to be the latest
published at the time of tendering. The Contractor will be deemed to have read
and understood the standards specified, and no claim of want of knowledge
will be allowed. The substitution of commodities or standards of workmanship
complying with other standards may be well allowed at the discretion of the
Engineer, but application for permission for such substitution must be made in
writing in sufficient time to allow adequate investigation. Obtain Certificate of
Compliance with standards and supply to the Engineer on request.

268
1.2.4 Local conditions
All materials, commodities, components and equipment must be suitable for
use in tropical climates.

1.2.5 Samples
Where samples of commodities or specimens of finished work are specified
submit samples or specimens to the Engineer and obtain his approval before
confirming orders or carrying out the work. Finished work must conform in all
respects with the samples or specimens approved. Remove samples and
specimens when no longer required. The cost of supplying samples and
specimens deemed to be included in finished work.

2.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS

2.1 Generally
The Contractor is required to visit the existing buildings and ascertain for
himself the nature of the Works and no claim arising from want of knowledge
in this respect will be allowed. The dimensions and quantities given in this
section are approximate given for guidance only and the Contractor is referred
to the Site to ascertain the exact nature of the works.

The items of pulling down and alterations are to include for both labour and
materials and for any shoring, needling and strutting and temporary works in
connection therewith. The contractor must allow in his pricing for making good
all works disturbed in all trades and for carting away all debris arising.

The Contractor must give all necessary notices and must exercise due care in
the demolitions. He must not collapse large sections of walls, floors, etc, and
must provide all necessary shoring and supports during the demolitions.

During demolition works the Contractor shall keep the debris constantly
watered to minimise the dust arising and this shall be included in the prices.

The Contractor is to erect dust-proof screens to the approval of the Engineer

where deemed necessary and to remove them on completion of the works, all
to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

All materials arising from the demolitions, unless specifically stated otherwise,
are to become the property of the Contractor and any credit allowed for the
value of such materials shall be shown in the space provided.

269
 All materials, including rubbish shall be removed from the Site as soon as
possible.

2.2 Interpretation of terms

‘Demolish’ shall be deemed to mean cutting away, breaking up, demolishing,
pulling down, taking down, removing, etc, as the context requires and shall
include in all cases temporarily strutting and supporting and making good
remaining work as necessary, and clearing away and removing from Site all
debris, etc.

‘Remove’ shall mean taking down, hacking up, breaking down, removing, etc,
and clearing away from Site and all other expenses thereby entailed.

‘Make good’ shall be deemed to mean, all making good, fitting, facing,
plastering, paving, repairing and painting to match and jointing to remaining
existing work.

To ‘match’ shall mean to be all equal to relevant existing work in design,

workmanship and all other aspects.

‘Re-fix” shall apply to existing materials arising from the Works and shall mean
take from store and fix in new position, including making good, repairing and
adjusting as necessary.

270
3.0 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK
3.1 Nature of excavation
The contractor must ascertain for him the nature of the material to be
excavated and price work accordingly as no allowance will be made beyond
the contract sum of any alleged ignorance in this respect.

3.2 Excavations generally

Excavations have been measured from the drawings including the Engineer's
site plan showing existing contours. It is the responsibility of the contractor to
check the commencing levels prior to commencing the work as no extra
payment will be made in respect of any alleged excavations carried out due to
the commencing levels being above that shown upon the drawings without the
prior written agreement of the Structural Engineer prior to commencement of
excavation.

3.3 Site clearance

The contractor shall clear the construction areas within the site of all bushes,
roots, boulders, natural obstructions, rubbish and any other natural or artificial
obstructions, which would interfere with construction of buildings, roads, paths
and drains.

3.4 Over-site excavation

Excavated material suitable for back-filling around foundations and for making
up levels under roads, floors etc., is to be kept separate from soil spoil heaps
and to be re-used as directed or spread and levelled on the site at the end of
excavation operations when found to be surplus. The Quantity Surveyor will
measure the amount of any such disposal on site. Vegetable soil is not to be
used for back filling around foundations.

3.5 Excavations for Foundations and Structures

Excavations for foundations and the reinforced concrete structure shall be to
the widths, depth and levels to accommodate the structure shown on the
drawings. Working space has been allowed for in the measurement of
excavation quantities given in these Bills of Quantities in accordance with the
rules of measurement laid down elsewhere in these Bills, namely 1.00 metre
from the face of any work which requires formwork over 1m deep below the
starting level of excavation, and 0.30 metre from face of any work which
requires formwork not exceeding 1 metre deep below starting level of
excavation.

271
 Generally formwork has not been measured for plain concrete foundations or
column bases and therefore, excavations for these has been measured net.
Formwork has been measured to reinforced concrete foundations and column
bases and all faces of columns and walls and working space excavation has
been measured and included accordingly. Adjustments to excavations widths
as measured will, therefore, be made only in the case of the Structural
Engineer ordering the addition of formwork to plain concrete foundations etc,
or the omissions of formwork to reinforced concrete foundations or column
bases. Ordinary use of planking and strutting along foundations to prevent
earth falls and to save concrete will not be considered as formwork.

3.6 Rock
Rock shall be defined as “Compact rock of such hardness and compaction that
it cannot be removed with a pick but requires the use of sledges or
compressor driven tools or blasting to remove it,” and the Engineer’s opinion
shall be final. Excavation in any material such as compacted murrum, soft tuff,
stiff clay or similar materials which in the opinion of the Engineercan be
reasonably be removed by pick, traxcavator or similar means will be deemed
to be included in the prices for normal excavation.

All material classified as rock may, if approved by the Engineer be used as

hardcore filling and the measured quantities of imported fillings will be adjusted
accordingly. All rock so used must be broken to the required size as hereafter
described before being so used.

3.7 Blasting
No blasting will be permitted.

3.8 Inspection
When the excavations have been made to the sizes and depths required from
the drawings, the Structural Engineer shall be called to the site immediately for
an inspection, and upon approval the Contractor shall proceed with the work to
prevent rainwater or other surface water draining into the foundations. The
excavations are to be left open until any variation in depth has been measured
and agreed.

272
3.9 Excavation below required depths
Should any excavation be made below the levels or lines shown on the
drawings or otherwise required by the Structural Engineer, the contractor must
fill up the resultant over-excavation to the proper levels or lines with concrete
nominal mix (1:4:8) at his own expense (see "concrete work").

3.10 Filling
The fill shall be clean, selected coarse sand or gravel. It should be taken from
borrow pits if the soil on the site is found to contain too much fines and to have
too low plasticity limit to be used as fill.

The fill shall be deposited in horizontal layers of maximum 200mm thickness.

As soon as possible after the fill is laid out, it should be compacted in minimum
three passes of a vibratory-roller and/or vibrating plate compactor. The
equipment to be used must be approved by the Engineer.

At each area (control area) of 500m2 compacted fill, three-field density tests
(e.g. by the sand replacement method) should be taken randomly.
The Control area shall be accepted if all three-test results are above 97% of
the maximum density as determined at a homogenous mixing of all three
samples by the Standard Proctor Method. Otherwise, repeat the test, each
time with three new samples until the above requirement is met or re-compact
and test again.

3.11 Return, fill in and ram

Return, fill in and ram suitable filling material as described above around
foundations and other concrete structure in layers not exceeding 150mm thick
and carefully ram and consolidate with power rammer. No filling in shall be
executed until concrete foundations etc., have been inspected and approved
by the Structural Engineer.

Regardless of the means of back filling and compaction adopted, the

contractor is responsible not only for the standard of the work but also for any
possible damage of the permanent work or adjacent structure.

273
3.12 Levelling
No item is measured for levelling and consolidating ground and rates for
excavation must include for levelling and preparing the ground for concrete or
other works including ramming or rolling.

3.13 Soil sterilisation

Anti-termite treatment is to be carried out by an approved specialist firm who
will be required, upon completion of the soil sterilisation, to furnish a written
guarantee qualifying the following: -

That the chemicals applied comply with the requirements specified herein for
chemical concentration and rates of application.

That the treatment will remain effective against termite infestation for a period
of five years.

The free re-treatment by the firm of any areas showing signs of infestation
before the expiry of the five-year period.

The chemicals used shall be one of the following: -

Aldrin 0.5% applied in oil solution or water emulsion.

Benzene hexachloride, 0.8% of gramma isomer applied in oil solution or water

emulsion.

Chlordane 1.0% applied in solution or water emulsion.

Dieldrin 0.5% applied in oil solution or water emulsion.

Lindane; 0.8% in oil solution or water emulsion

Pentachlorophenol; 5% in oil solution.

Trichlorobenzene; 1 part to 3 parts oil.

Some of the chemicals listed above are toxic to animal and plant life and must
therefore, be applied only with caution by an experienced person. Where
individual water supply systems are proposed precautions must be taken to

274
 prevent in filtering and endangering the water supply. Treatment shall not be
made when soils of fill are excessively wet or immediately after heavy rain.

Precautions must also be taken to prevent disturbance of the treatment by

animals or human contact with the treated soil. The treated area is to be
covered as quickly as possible after treatment.

The rate of application is to be 5 litres per square metre and the areas
measured include those under floor and round wall and column foundations.

The contractor shall notify the structural engineer in sufficient time before the
filling of foundation trenches and laying of concrete floor bed in order that the
Engineer may nominate a specialist firm to execute the soil sterilisation.

Any additional costs caused by the contractor not rendering sufficient prior
notice to the Engineer will be borne entirely by the Contractor.

3.14 Disposal of surplus excavated material

Surplus excavated material will be carted away from the vicinity of the walls
and deposited, spread and levelled on areas to be allocated by the Structural
Engineer, reasonably adjacent to the site.

3.15 Disposal of water

The contractor shall keep the excavations free from standing water and silt (or
excavated material softened by water) and he shall include for the cost of
pumping, construction of temporary drains; soak-way pits, etc., as deemed
necessary to achieve this. A Provisional Sum has covered the cost of pumping
to dispose of any spring or running water. If spring or running water is
encountered the cost of any pumping ordered by the Structural Engineer will
be paid for in accordance with the Day-works schedule.

3.16 Planking and strutting

Sides of all excavations must be supported in order to prevent falls from or
collapse of the earth face. The "Planking and Strutting" is deemed to include
any method or methods, which the contractor elects to adopt to uphold, protect
and maintain the sides of excavations. The contractor will be responsible for
any consequences of his failure in this respect including clearing away fallen
materials and any extra concrete or other works including formwork ordered by

275
 the Structural Engineer due to such failure. An item has been included in these
Bills in each relevant section.

3.17 Hardcore
Hardcore shall be hard crushed stone to pass a 100mm ring in all directions.
No sand, quarry dust or fine material will be permitted. All hardcore beds shall
be topped with a layer of fine stone or aggregates minimum size 12mm to fill
the voids on the surface to receive concrete beds. Rates for hardcore shall
include for levelling or finishing or laying to falls and consolidating by rolling as
described for "Filling" above.

3.18 Rates for excavations

The rates for excavation, including excavation in rock, shall include for
trimming, levelling and preparing bottoms and all faces to receive concrete,
etc, and for any extra excavation required for planking and strutting.

Prices shall include for excavating in any material encountered unless

specifically otherwise described, handling, etc, of extra bulk after excavating,
or before consolidating, any extra excavation required for formwork or planking
and strutting, circular work, grubbing up of any old drains, roots etc, that may
be encountered, for trimming sides and levelling and ramming bottoms,
forming steppings and trimming excavations or filling to embarkments and
batters as required.

In rates for item “allow for keeping the whole of excavations free from water”
the Contractor shall allow and make provision for keeping the whole Works
thoroughly drained and clear of water below the lowest level of any part of
them so long as may be required if considered necessary by the Engineer,
continuously day and night by petrol or hand pumps or other mechanical
appliances, pipes, chutes, dams, manholes, sumps, diversions or any other
means necessary for the that purpose. Water pumped from trenches shall not
be allowed to run down the road channels but shall be conveyed to the nearest
surface water sewer, ditch or river through troughs, chutes or pipes.

276
3.19 Rates for Disposal
Rates for disposal of excavated material are to include for selection of spoil as
it arises and for all double handling and re-excavation from spoil heaps not
specifically ordered by the Engineer.

3.20 Dampproof Membrane

Diothene sheeting shall be 500 gauge or 1000 gauge as shown and as
produced by Morogoro Plastic Ltd, or other equal and approved. Joints in
sheeting shall be treble folded with 150mmfold and taped at 300mm intervals
with 50mm wide black plastic adhesive taps of approved quality. The sheeting
shall not be stretched but shall be laid loose with sufficient wrinkles to permit
shrinkage up to 15%.

3.21 Cutting down trees

The Contractor must consult the Engineer before cutting down or pruning any
trees or shrub s encountered on the site

277
4.0 CONCRETE WORK
4.1 Materials and workmanship generally
The recommendations of the recent British Standard Codes of Practice BS
5610 for the Structural use of reinforced concrete in buildings shall be deemed
to be incorporated in these preamble clauses unless otherwise specifically
stated.

4.2. Materials generally

All materials to be used in the works shall conform as to quality and
description as specified hereunder and shall be equal to approved samples. In
particular no materials shall be used until approved samples shall be supplied
to the Consulting Engineer for approval at least one week before ordering in
bulk and delivery to the site. Any material delivered to the site, which, has not
been previously approved by the Structural Engineer shall be the Contractor's
liability. All materials shall be transported, handled and stored on site so as to
preclude damage deterioration or contamination. All condemned materials are
to be removed from the site within 24 hours.

4.3 Cement
The cement, unless otherwise specified on the drawings shall be Ordinary
Portland Cement of approved manufacture, delivered in the manufacturer's
bags and shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the latest British
Standard 12. The consignments of cement shall be delivered in sealed bags
and shall be stored on the site so as to be used in the order in which they are
delivered. The structural engineer shall have the right to take samples for
testing in accordance with BS. 12 and the contractor are to obtain current
certificates of test from the manufacturer prior to bulk deliveries. Under no
circumstances is High Alumina Cement to be used.

Rapid hardening cement may be used in lieu of ordinary Portland cement only
with the prior approval of the Engineer or Engineer, provided that all conditions
applying to its use are strictly observed. Any additional expenses in
connection with the use of such cement shall be borne by the Contractor.

4.4 Aggregate generally

All aggregate shall be from approved reputable sources and shall be strong,
hard, durable or limited porosity, free from dust, soft materials, earth or other
extraneous matter, and washed and / or screened by the Contractor if so
required by the Structural Engineer. Samples shall be provided as often as

278
 called upon by the Structural Engineer for testing in accordance with BS. 856.
Normal aggregates will have particle densities of greater than 2000 Kg / m 3 but
not exceeding 3,000 Kg/ m3.Only approved materials shall be used.

Graded samples of all types of aggregate shall, after approval, be kept on site
behind glass for visual checking of subsequent deliveries for grading, shape
and where applicable, colour. Aggregate shall be stored on site on paved
areas with divisions between each type of aggregate, and shall be used in the
order in which they are received on site. No aggregate shall be stored directly
on the ground.

4.5 Fine Aggregate

The Contractor shall ensure that the grading of fine aggregate shall be such
that not more than 10% by weight shall exceed 5mm in size and not more that
10% by weight shall pass a sieve BS. No. 100. Between these limits the
grading shall conform to the grading for either zone 1, 2 or 3 (BS.856).

4.6 Coarse aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be clean, well-graded crushed granite stone or other
equal and approved stone from Msolwa or Lugoba quarry and washed if
required by the Structural Engineer. The pieces shall be angular or rounded in
shape and shall have granular or crystalline or smooth (but not glassy) non-
powdery surface. Flakey and laminated pieces, mica and shale shall only be
present in such quantities as not to affect adversely the strength and durability
of the concrete.

The four nominal aggregate sizes shall be 40mm (1½"); 20mm (3/4"); 10mm
(3/8"); 6mm (¼"); and the grading when analysed as described in BS. 562
shall be within the limits given in BS. 856. Structural Engineer will specify sizes
of aggregates to be used in specific areas. For most work 20 mm maximum
size aggregates will be used. The nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregates should be not greater than ¼ of the minimum thickness of concrete
section or element.

4.7 Water
Water used for mixing of concrete, washing out of shuttering and similar
purpose shall be clean, fresh and free from organic impurities in amounts likely
to impair the quality of the concrete and should comply with requirements of
BS 5328 and BS 3148:1980 “Methods of test for water for making concrete”.

279
4.8 Admixtures
Structural Engineer will approve all concrete admixtures after submission of
specifications or proprietary brands and relevant trial mix verification at site by
Contractor. Admixtures to comply with BS 5075: Concrete Admixtures.

4.9 Steel reinforcement

Steel for reinforced concrete shall comply with the following specification:-
i) Mild steel rod reinforcement shall comply with BS. 4449.
ii) High tensile steel reinforcement shall be either cold worked deformed
steel bars of circular octagonal section complying with BS. 4461 or hot
rolled deformed high tensile bars having a guaranteed minimum yield
stress of 460 N/mm2 and other physical qualities in accordance with
BS. 4449
iii) Welded steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS. 4483
iv) BS. 5610, the structural use of reinforced concrete in buildings.

An approved manufacturer shall supply all steel reinforcement; and the

contractor may be required to obtain a manufacturer's test certificate in respect
of steel reinforcement supplied. In the absence of such a test certificate, the
contractor may be required to submit samples to be tested at the contractor's
expense in such manner as to comply with BS 5610 requirements.

The steel shall be stored so that it is kept clean and reasonably free from rust.

The placing of all reinforcement shall be checked by the Engineer and in no

circumstances is concrete to be deposited around any steel that has not been
passed. At least twenty-four hours notice shall be given to the Engineer that
reinforcement will be ready for inspection.

4.10 Bending and fixing of reinforcement

All bending, cutting and fixing to be in compliance with the British Standard
code of Practice, BS 5610 and BS 4466 Bending schedules are incorporated
in the contract drawings.

The number, size, form and position of all reinforcement shall unless otherwise
directed or permitted by the Engineer, be strictly in accordance with the
drawings. Bars shall be of the required lengths, and lapping, except where
indicated on the drawings, is not permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

280
 Overall dimensions shall not be exceeded and shall not be less than 6mm
below the required dimensions. The sizes of links and the like shall be within
tolerance of 3mm under or over the specified dimensions. Any tolerance in the
top length of the bar as cut shall be taken up in the end hooks or other
approved portions of the bar. The internal radius of the bends at corners of
links and the like shall equal half the diameter of the bar embraced by the link.

Laps in bars of random lengths shall be staggered in such a way that no more
than 1/3 of bars having same number are to be lapped in the same section.

The steel reinforcement shall be assembled and fixed in the form of a rigid
cage. To prevent displacement before or during concreting the bars shall be
secured to each other with approved wire. Concrete distance blocks shall,
unless otherwise directed, be used between the reinforcement and the bottom
and sides of the forms to ensure correct concrete cover to the bars, as
specified on the drawings. The specified cover shall be provided and
maintained within the specified tolerance.

The minimum clear distance between adjacent bars shall be 25mm

horizontally and 25mm vertically. Spacer bars shall be inserted at such
intervals that the bars do not perceptibly sag.

Great care must be taken to ensure the correct positioning of beam and
column starter bars and to secure projecting bars against displacement both
during and after concreting.

At the time of fixing and when concrete is being placed, all reinforcement shall
be free from oil, paint, grease excessive dust and scale or any other coating,
which would destroy its bond with the concrete.

4.11 Formwork to produce a fair face board finish(wrought formwork)

Formwork described as wrought shall be constructed of or lined with 100mm
wide planed boards well cramped together or plywood to leave a fair smooth
finish in the exposed concrete face when the shuttering is removed.

281
4.12 Construction and Movement joints
The positioning, type and frequency of construction joints are to conform to
requirement of BS 5610 and be approved by Engineer. Methods of forming
movement joints to follow drawings and the requirements of BS 5610.

4.13 Concrete grades

Only designed concrete mixes complying with BS 5328 shall be used.
Concrete must comply with the requirements set out in the following table
according to the grade (This is for guidance only)

NOMINAL
G MAX.SIZE MAX WATER MINIMUM CRUSHING
1:1:2
3 20mm 0.45 24
7 DAYS 35
8 DAYS OF
MIX
R OF COARSE CEMENT STRENGTH
1:1:2
3
5 20mm 0.50 20 30
A
1:1½:3
2 AGGREGATE
20mm RATIO
0.55 BY WORKS
17 TEST
25.5
0
1:2:4
D
2
5 20mm WEIGHT
0.60 CUBES (N/mm2)
14 20
1:3:6
1
E
0 25mm 0.60 8 15
1:4:8
1
5 40mm 0.60 - 10
0

4.14 Concrete Production, Supervision and Tests

Concrete should be produced in accordance with BS 5328 which requires
tests to be made on constituent materials in accordance with relevant British
Standards and control tests be made on concrete to ensure compliance with
specified requirement. Engineer will in addition approve procedures for
placing, compacting, curing and working in hot weather.
Concrete should meet appropriate requirements specified in BS 5328 for
Characteristic compressive strength
Specified mix proportions
Maximum and minimum cement content
Maximum free water/cement ratio
Workability
Air content of concrete
Temperature of fresh concrete
Density of fully compacted concrete.

4.15 Preliminary cube tests

The contractor shall specify the sources from which the aggregate will be
obtained and shall deliver at his own cost sufficient materials enable
preliminary cube tests to be carried out and approved by the Engineer. The

282
 Contractor will be responsible for submitting his proposals for the concrete mix
proportions together with aggregate grading curves to the Engineer for
approval and for the payment of the fees of an approved Testing Authority in
carrying out the crushing tests. The strength of the preliminary cubes must be
a minimum of 33% above those in the above table, which is the minimum
works strength.

The approval of any mix by the Engineer will not relieve the contractor of the
responsibility for ensuring that all concrete used in the works obtain the
minimum works strength shown above.

In proportioning the concrete the quantity of cement shall be determined by

weight and the quantities of fine and coarse aggregate by either volume or
weight, due allowance being made for the moisture content of the aggregate.

Only sufficient water shall be added to the cement and aggregate during
mixing to produce a concrete having sufficient workability to enable it to be
well consolidated, to be worked into the corners of the shuttering and around
the reinforcement, to give the specified surface finish and to have the specified
strength. When a suitable amount of water has been determined the resulting
consistency shall be maintained throughout the corresponding parts of the
work and the slump test or compaction factor test shall be carried out from
time to time to ensure the maintenance of this consistency. In no case should
the slump be more than 65mm as determined by the standard slump test nor
should the compaction factor be more than 0.87 as determined by the
standard compaction factor test as described in BS. 1856.

Should the Contractor wish to use patent, plasticising compounds or other

admixes, and those shall be approved by the Engineer and be used in
accordance with the manufacturer's publications.

4.16 Work cube tests

Work cube tests shall be made throughout the contract. Each cube shall be
inscribed with the date of manufacture and identification mark. A record shall
be kept for each batch of cubes showing the position in the works which the
concrete represents, the date of manufacture, the mixture and slump of the
concrete, particulars of the cement and aggregate used, a statement of
whether or not the cubes were vibrated and other information relating to the
subsequent history of the cubes.

283
The cube shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with the
requirements of BS. 1856 when directed by the Engineer and in his presence
or that of the Approved Testing Authority. A sample of concrete shall be taken
at random on eight separate occasions during each of the first 5 days of using
that mix.

Thereafter at least one sample shall be taken on each day any concrete of that
particular mix is used. From each sample four cubes shall be made two for
testing at 7 days and two for testing at 28 days. The works cube results shall
be examined both individually and in consecutive (but not overlapping) sets of
four, for which the average and the range of each set are calculated.

The mix proportions shall be modified to increase the strength if, in the first
and consecutive (but not overlapping) sets, any of the following conditions are
not satisfied:-

a. Not more than 2 individual results of the 40-cube test should fall below
the specified work cube strength.

b. No value of the range in any set should exceed 4 times the designed
standard deviation.

c. Not more than one set should have an average, which is less than the
specified strength plus 1.1/3 times the designed standard deviations.

d. No value of the average for any set should be less than the specified
strength plus the designed standard deviation.

After 10 consecutive sets of results have been obtained the overall average
and the standard deviation of the 40 results shall be calculated and any
appropriate modifications made. Subsequently, if any of the foregoing
conditions are not satisfied, the overall average and the standard deviation of
the previous consecutive 40 results, including the non-complying sets, should
be calculated and the appropriate steps taken if the overall average strength
twice the standard deviation is less than the specified work cube strength.

284
4.17 Quality control requirements
4.17.1 Supervision
A competent person shall be employed whose duty shall be to supervise all
stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. He shall supervise all
tests on the materials and cubes and the maintenance and calibration of
mixing and measuring plant. This person shall also be responsible for keeping
an accurate record of the dates on which concrete is poured and where.
Where the Engineer is not satisfied with the performance of concrete
supervisor he shall recommend to the Engineer for removal from site.

4.17.2 Batching and mixing plant

The quantities of cement and of fine and coarse aggregate shall be
determined by weight. The amount of water added shall be measured,
allowance being made for the water content of the aggregate. The accuracy of
weighing and measuring equipment shall be 2.½%. Measuring equipment for
water shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition.

4.18 Workmanship
4.18.1 Placing of reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and maintained in the position
described on the drawings or elsewhere to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer. Bars intended to be in contact at passing points shall be securely
wired together with 16 gauge annealed soft iron tying wire.

Binders and the like shall tightly embrace the bars and any slackness or
misplacement of bars shall be rectified before the Engineer is called for
inspection. Spacers of approved design shall be used for ensuring the correct
positioning of the bars and diagonal wiring shall be provided to ensure rigidity
of all assembled units of reinforcement. The vertical distance required
between successive layers of bars in beams or similar members shall be
maintained by the provision of mild steel spacer bars inserted at such intervals
that the main bars do not perceptibly sag between spacers. The rates for
reinforcement must include for all requisite wiring, spacers and precast
concrete blocks to maintain the required spacing and cover. All bars are to be
bent in accordance with BS 4466: 1969.

285
 Cover of concrete to the reinforcement shall be, unless shown otherwise:-
Columns - 40mm minimum to main bars
Base - 50mm minimum to main bars
Beams - 25mm minimum to main bars
Slab - 15mm minimum to main bars
Wall - 25mm minimum to main bars
Raft slab - 100mm minimum to main bars

Splices to future work shall be covered in a manner approved by the Engineer

to prevent rusting and deterioration. Before any concreting is carried out the
approval of the Engineer as to the correctness of the fixed reinforcement shall
be obtained but such approval shall not remove the responsibility for the
correctness of the placing from the contractor. During concreting a competent
steel fixer shall be in attendance on the concrete gang to make minor
adjustments to the position of bars should they become displaced.

4.18.2 Formwork generally

Formwork design and construction should take into account of safety and
surface finish required and to conform to requirements of BS 5610 and BS
5975. Dimensional deviations of in-situ concrete shall be to limitations set in
BS 5606

All formwork and moulds shall be rigidly constructed to accurate shape and
dimensions as described on the drawings and to requirement of BS 5975.
Timber shall be well seasoned, free from loose knots and be of a kind and
thickness that will avoid deflection and warping, remaining true to line and
level. Faces in contact with the concrete shall be free from adhering grout,
projecting nails, splits or other defects and shall be coated with an approved
mould oil so as to prevent grout adhering to them, care being taken to prevent
such coatings from any contact with the reinforcement.

Formwork shall be braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the

weight and pressure of the wet concrete, construction loads, winds and other
forces. The bottoms of beam boxes shall be erected with an upward camber
so as to prevent downward deflection. Maximum tolerances, which will be
permitted in the finished concrete work, are to BS 5606 as follows:-
Dimensions less than 3m + 3mm
Dimensions between 3m & 15m + 6mm
Dimensions over 15m + 10mm

286
 Joints in the moulds of formwork shall be carefully made so as to prevent
leakage of cement grout and particular care shall be exercised to this respect
for moulds in which it is intended to place vibrated concrete. Openings in the
formwork for inspection of the inside and for the escape of water used for
washing out accumulated debris shall be formed in such a manner that they
can effectively be closed before placing the concrete.

Formwork connections and joints shall be constructed so as to permit easy

removal of the formwork, but shall be so secured as to retain correct shape
under pressure exerted by the wet concrete during placing, vibration, setting
and hardening. If any wire ties passing through the concrete or bolts are used,
measures shall be taken to prevent rust, stains on the finished work and any
holes left by the removal of such ties shall be made good. Formwork shall be
provided for top faces of sloping work and anchored to prevent floatation, but
this shall apply only where the slope exceeds 15 degrees. The formwork for
beams and slabs shall be erected so that the sides of the beams and soffits of
the slabs can be removed without disturbing the beam bottoms. Props for an
upper storey shall be placed directly over these in the storey immediately
below and the lowest prop shall bear upon work sufficiently strong to carry this
load.

If formwork of columns; walls and other deep sections is erected to the full
heights, one side shall be left open and shall be built up in sections as placing
of the concrete proceeds. Before concreting, bolts and fixings shall be in
position. Cores and other devices used for the forming of openings, holes,
pockets, chases, recesses and other cavities shall be fixed to the formwork
and no subsequent holes shall be cut in any concrete without the Engineer's
approval

4.18.3 Mixing of Concrete

All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixing machines. Hand mixing shall not
be permitted. All mixing machines shall be of the fixed drum types and not
smaller in size than 0.40/0.28 CM drum mixers will not be permitted. The
mixer shall be of the type equipped with an accurate measuring device
designed so that no unauthorised person can tamper with the valve or vary the
quantity of water delivered once this has been approved and set. The mixing
procedure to be adopted by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer.

287
 The Engineer shall approve mixing of each batch. Mixing of each batch shall
continue until the concrete is uniform in colour and, in any case, for not less
than two minutes after all the materials and the water is used in the drum. The
entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before the materials for the
succeeding batch are fed into the drum. Upon completion of the day's mixing,
the drum shall be thoroughly cleaned free of adhering concrete.

4.18.4 Quality of Concrete

(1) The class of concrete required is specified in the following table, on the
drawings and/or in the Bills of Quantities for the particular position of the works
to be constructed.

(2) The quantity of water added shall only be sufficient to produce a dense
concrete which can be fully compacted without undue difficulty, due allowance
being made for the moisture content of the aggregates.

The strength class of concrete shall be as designated in the following Table.

Min. Max. Size of Min. Cr-ush-ing

Concrete Max. Water Cement
Cement Coarse Strength of Works REMARKS
strength class Ration by Weight
Content Ag-gre-gate Test Cubes

7 days 28 days
Kgs mm - N/mm2 N/mm2
For blinding concrete in normal
C15 220 20 - 10 15
structures and manholes

C25 280 20 0.55 17 25 R.C Foundation Footing

C30 300 20 0.55 21 30 For R.C. in Beams and Columns

For R.C. in water retaining

C35 370 20 0.55 25 35 structures and concrete in direct
contact with sewage

Minimum requirements for various grades of Concrete using Portland cement

to BS 8110

The above properties and crushing strengths are to be considered as the

minimum standard that will be accepted in the finish at works. The average
crushing strengths should be at least 15% higher than the minimum
permissible values given in the above table.

288
4.18.5 Distribution of Concrete
The concrete shall be distributed from the mixer to the position required by
approved means, which do not cause separations or otherwise impair the
quality of the concrete. All equipment shall be cleaned before commencing
mixing and distribution and be kept free from set concrete. All concrete must
be in position and consolidated before the initial set is commenced and the
contractor shall ascertain the initial setting time for the brand of cement being
used and ensure that his means of distribution are such that it is impossible for
concrete to have set prior to placing.

Distribution by means of mortar pane generally will be permitted, but for

important large structures such as slabs, large beds and elsewhere instructed
by the Engineer the minimum requirements shall be wheelbarrows, ramps and
runaways over the reinforcement.

4.18.6 Placing of Concrete

Before placing of concrete commences, the formwork shall be examined and
any accumulated water and rubbish lying therein shall be removed. The
concrete shall be placed as near to its permanent position as is practicable
and shall not be worked along the formwork to that position. It shall not be
dropped from a height not handled in a manner likely to cause separation of
the aggregate or loss of the cement matrix. In columns and other similar
members the bottom shall be first filled to a depth of between 150mm and
200mm with a cement mortar consisting of sand, cement and water with the
sand and cement in the same proportion as that specified for the general mix
in that member. The mortar shall have a consistency such that it will work up
the formwork and fill in spaces, which may occur due to close spacing of
reinforcement in the splice. This mortar must be placed immediately in
advance of the concrete and shall not be allowed to attain its initial set before
placing the main concrete for the member. Each layer of concrete, while being
placed, shall be consolidated by the approved methods of ramming/ tamping
or mechanical vibration so as to form a dense homogeneous material free
from honeycombing water and air holes or other blemishes. Concrete shall be
placed continuously until completion of the part of the work between the
specified construction joints. Approved working joints shall be made whenever
stopping of concrete placing occurs. In general, concrete shall be placed in a
single operation to the full thickness and depth of slabs, beams and similar
members and, in any case, shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding
750mm deep in walls, columns and other similar members:-

289
4.18.7 Vibration
Mechanical vibrators or hand tamping must be used in placing all reinforced
concrete work unless the Engineer has approved specially designed mixes
and preliminary work cube test results have been obtained without their use.
Rates for all reinforced concrete work include for this. Where mechanical
vibration is required the contractor shall allow for using two vibrators at any
one time.

4.18.8 Working joints

Working joints shall be of an approved shape and placed at right angles to the
axis of the member. The contractor shall submit his proposals for the design
and position of all joints on a drawing to the Engineer for his approval well
before construction is commenced. The position of day-to-day working joints
may be determined so as to meet the requirements of the contractor's
concreting programme.

Wherever new concrete is to be placed against concrete that has hardened,

the face of the old concrete shall be cut back not less than 20mm and all-loose
particles removed. The face shall then be wire brushed and thoroughly
cleaned with water and then coated with a neat cement grout immediately
before placing the concrete shall be well rammed and compacted against the
prepared face before the neat cement grout sets.

4.18.9 Protection of Concrete

Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from rains, sun
and dry winds, and exposed faces shall be kept moist with polythene sheets or
hessian coverings or other approved means for at least 7 days. Under no
circumstances shall concrete be worked upon until it has reached a cube
strength of 140kg per square centimetre. Immature concrete shall be protected
from damage by falling debris excessive loading vibrations, running or
standing water, abrasives or other influences likely to impair the quality or
strength of the finished work

4.18.10 Concrete in Excavation.

The length and widths of the excavation shall be as necessary for the proper
construction of work below ground and in accordance with the Preambles
contained in the section 'Excavation and Earthwork'. Blinding concrete has
been measured for the net width required for concrete structure and
foundations below ground level. Blinding has not been measured to the extra

290
 width, if any required for working space. The Engineer shall decide the depths
where these are not given on the drawings. Any obstructions or unusual solids
encountered during the excavation shall be reported to the Engineer and dealt
with as then instructed.

4.18.11 Removal of formwork.

The period elapsing between placing the concrete and removing the formwork
shall be sufficient to allow the concrete to mature to the extent of being able to
maintain its own weight and any constructional and structural loads imposed
without damage. The Engineer's approval for the removal of the formwork
shall be as tabulated below:

Position of Formwork Minimum striking Time

Vertical sides of wall, columns, 2 days
beams, etc
Soffits of beams & slabs (props left) 7 days
Slab and props 14days
Bottom boards of piles (intermediate 12 days
support left in)
Soffits of beams under 6m span 16 days
Additional: Period for each 0.6m span 1 day _
in excess of 6m span with a maximum
of 28 days

The formwork shall be removed in all cases by gradual easing without jarring
and the process shall be such that the sharp edges of the concrete are not
chipped and spilled away. If the imposition of a load is anticipated, props shall
be provided in an approved manner after removal of the formwork and before
the imposition of the loads.

4.18.12 Surface finishes

Upon removal of the formwork any honeycombing or damaged surfaces or
other imperfections shall be reported to the Engineer. No surfaces shall be
repaired or otherwise treated until an inspection has been carried out by the
Engineer and his instructions or approval to remedial work (if any) have been
given or obtained.

Concrete surfaces, which are to be plastered or rendered, are to be hacked or

roughened by an approved means to form a key.
291
 Sawn formwork is measured for all surfaces requiring support and
subsequently concealed or plastered.

4.19. Precast Concrete

Where precast concrete members are specified, these shall be constructed in
moulds of approved design and samples from the moulds shall be approved
before quality production of the member is commenced to requirement of BS
5610. Large precast members shall be lifted only at points, which will not
damage the member, and if necessary temporary bracing of timber shall be
used to case the member until it is in position. Small lintels and other small
members may be cast in-situ at no extra cost at the contractor's option.
Allowance must in all cases be made for any extra reinforcement to counteract
temporary stresses whilst handling, transporting and hoisting precast concrete
members. Moulds for precast units described as finished fair on exposed
surfaces shall be lined with plywood or hardboard to leave a fair finish on the
exposed concrete face when the mould is removed.

The concrete shall be of the grade specified on the drawings but with
maximumaggregate size 12mm and shall be thoroughly vibrated in the moulds
and shall not be removed until seven days after placing the concrete.

Care must be taken that no concrete is allowed to become prematurely dry

and the fresh concrete must be carefully protected from the rain, sun and wind
by means of 'Sisal-kraft' paper, well-wetted sacking, wet sand or other
approved means. This protective layer and the concrete itself must be kept
continuously wet for at least seven days after the concrete has been placed.

Prices for precast concrete shall include for all moulds, reinforcement as
specified, hoisting and fixing in the position required bedding and pointing as
described and temporary props and other necessary supports.

4.20 Sub-contractors work Incorporated in the Structure

It shall be the contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate sub-contractor's and
others for incorporating any electrical conduit, plumbing fixtures and pipes, bolt
holes, etc., in the concrete members as required and shown on the drawings.
The contractor shall submit details of cable and pipe runs to the Engineer
before the work is put in hand and shall have the Engineer's approval of the
layout. No holes or chases shall be cut on concrete without the approval of the
Engineer.

292
4.21 General
No holes or chases are to be cut in any part of the reinforced concrete
construction without first consulting the Engineer. No part of the reinforcement
shall be used for conduiting electrical current. Notice must be taken of any
appearing on the drawing and not mentioned in these preambles.

4.22 Movements and Separation Joints

Movement joints shall comprise of Bitumen impregnated softboard or similar
approved.

Joints topping are to be 'Plastic' or similar approved hot poured rubber bitumen
compound.

Pointing to vertical joints is to be 'Plastic joint' or similar approved bituminous

putty applied with a gun. Joints are to be at least 12mm deep and the gap is
to be formed either by raking cut (in the case of expanded polystyrene) or by
temporary wooden battens of the required width and 12mm deep.

Rates for the expansion or separation joint shall include all necessary labour
and the materials described above, temporary supports and cutting where
required to line with concrete surfaces finished to falls. Formwork has been
measured as a separate item to one side only of expansion joints.

4.23 Mortise and Pockets

Mortise or pockets for holding down bolts or dowels shall be formed in
concrete to the size and shapes shown on the drawings. Mortises shall be
formed by the use of expanded polystyrene blocks of the required shapes and
sizes carefully and accurately placed and maintained in position whilst the
concrete is poured.

Rates for mortises shall include for all necessary templates and raking out and
the complete removal of the polystyrene when the concrete has set. No
deduction from concrete quantities has been made for any mortise, pocket or
any other void in the concrete of 0.05 cubic metres or less and the Contractor
may take this into account when pricing. Grouting up has been measured
separately.

293
4.24 Pricing concrete work
The Contractor must allow for all costs incurred during the progress of the
Contract for complying with the provisions concerning the preparation and use
of graded mixes.

Prices for plain or reinforced concrete shall include for mixing, hoisting,
depositing, compacting, curing and protecting at various levels required
throughout the building, and shall also include for forming or hacking a
satisfactory key for all faces receiving asphalt and plaster work. Prices for
slabs shall include for forming construction joints at bay edges, including all
necessary temporary formwork and supplying records of such joints to the
Engineer.

Prices for steel bar reinforcement shall include for cutting to lengths and all
labour in bending and cranking, forming hooked ends, handling, hoisting and
fixing in position and for providing all necessary tying wire, spacer blocks and
supports. Prices for fabric reinforcement shall include for all straight cutting
and waste, handling, hoisting and fixing in position, providing all necessary
tying wire, and supports and all extra material in laps.

The prices for formwork shall include for extra materials at joints, extra labour
and waste for narrow widths, small quantities, overlaps, passings, etc, and for
fixing at the various levels including battens, struts, and supports and for
bolting, wedging, easing striking and removal. Prices for linear items such as
boxing shall include for angles and ends,

Prices of all precast concrete shall include all moulds, finishing as described,
handling, reinforcement, hoisting and fixing at the required levels and for
casting or cutting to the exact lengths required and any waste resulting from
such cutting.

Prices for expansion joints shall include for cutting to size and all temporary
supports and prices of expansion joint sealers shall include for all temporary
battens or fillets required to form the necessary grooves.

Prices fro hollow concrete block suspended construction must be “all inclusive”
to include for concrete hollow tiles, in-situ concrete ribs, concrete topping,

294
 concrete filling to open ends of hollow concrete tiles and solid concrete
bearings and beams.

The Contractor is to allow in his prices for carrying out tests as specified in this
section.

The prices for wrought (wrot) formwork shall include for fair face finish either
by rubbing down or by smooth lining all faces as described in these
preambles.

5.0 WATERPROOFING
5.1 General
5.1.1 Description
Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required for the
membrane waterproofing of the entire structure below grade and roofing
system as well as indicated and as hereinafter specified shall include all
related material and accessories as required to achieve a completely
watertight installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

Submittals
Submit shop drawings for approval prior to proceeding with work.

Shop drawings shall include: Outline of waterproofing area and size, location
and type of all penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, and special
details.

Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver materials in original, unopened containers.
Containers to be labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, installation
instructions and identification of various items.

Store materials, except membrane, between 60o F. and 80o F. If exposed to

lower temperature, restore to 60 oF, minimum temperature before using.

Store materials, except membrane, in dry area and protect from water and
direct sunlight.

Damaged materials shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.

295
Job Conditions (Cautions and Warnings)
Do not use bitumen base cement.

Do not install waterproofing membrane directly onto low melting point asphalt
(ASTMD312, Type 1 & 2).

Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or

mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with
Waterproofing Membrane. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a
constant temperature in excess of 180o F.

Cements and bonding adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are

extremely flammable.

Do not breathe vapors or use near fire.

Splicing and bonding surfaces shall be dry and clean.

Cold temperature will not restrict installation of Waterproofing System. Follow

specified precautions for storage of materials and expose only enough cement
and adhesive to be used within a 4 hour period.

Substrate surface shall be free of bonded water, ice, or snow to eliminate

future condensation problems.

Qualification
The water proofing systems including protection and all associated
accessories and works shall be executed by a specialist firm(s) having at least
7 years experience in installation of materials described herewith in the
Tanzania. The specialist(s) shall provide evidence of successful completion of
similar works for the approval of the Engineer before commencing any work.

The manufacturer's qualified representative shall visit the job site immediately
prior to commencement of works and as and when required and directed by
the Engineer to satisfy the Engineer and to instruct the specialist(s) in the
correct methods of execution of the Works.

296
Application Areas
Below and Around Foundations
Two coats of Bituminous Waterproofing coating.

Bituminous Waterproofing Coating:

Materials - The rubber bitumen emulsion shall be a water bound emulsion with
a minimum 60% total solids content by volume, comprising bitumen with fine
particles of rubber. Not less than 10% nor more than 20% of the total solids
shall be rubber. The consistency shall be such that it can be applied to the
surface by brush at normal temperature.

Application - Before the application of rubberized bitumen emulsion the

concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free from dirt, dust,
grease and other extraneous matter and lightly brush dampened immediately
prior to application of the emulsion.

The priming coat shall be made up by mixing 0.23 kg of approved powder

detergent or the equivalent of liquid detergent, with 45 litres of clean water and
adding this to 4.5 litres of emulsion. The priming coat shall be applied at the
approximate rate of 9 litres per 30 m2.

The second coat consisting of undiluted emulsion shall be applied as soon as

the priming coat is dry, at the approximate rate of 9 litres per 15 m².

The emulsion shall be applied by brush, squeegee or spraying strictly in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, It shall not be applied during
or when rain or dust storms are to be expected.

Backfilling shall not be commenced until the second coat of emulsion is quite
dry.

Around the UPS Room Wall and Foundations

Waterproof Mortars And Bituminous Coatings
Waterproof mortars and bitumen based coatings are rigid or semi-flexible
waterproofing products. They are supplied as ready to use solutions to seal
against damp soil, seepage and percolating water. They must be pre-applied

297
 on suitable substrates under new structural concrete slabs and are generally
post-applied externally on new walls.

They must be used in combination with appropriate joint waterproofing

systems for construction and movement joints. Good external drainage with a
permanent dewatering system is also necessary; normally using drainage
pipes placed at or below the level of the base slabs to prevent any build-up of
water pressure.

As a waterproofing system for Grades 1 to 2

To protect structures against percolating water
For limited ground condi- tions (no settlement, less aggressive environments,
low water pressure)

5.3 Waterproofing Mortar,

2-component, polymer modified, rigid cementitious waterproofing mortar,
internally and externally applied for full surface waterproofing and tanking.

5.3.1 Slurry,
1) component, rigid and cement based active crystalline waterproofing slurry
for internal and external applications on concrete.

5.3.2 Fibre Reinforced Mortar,

1) component, flexible, fibre reinforced mortar, based on cement modified with
special alkali-resistent polymers. Ideal for waterproofing surfaces subject to
flexural strain fibre filled bitumen basedcoatings,

2) component, flexible, solvent-free, fibre-filled bitumen basedcoatings, for use

against water ingress and in contact with ground water (positive water
pressure side). Also used for detailing in conjunction with other systems.

5.3.3 Complementary products for joint sealing and waterproofing

5.3.3.1 Waterstops,
Internal or external applied waterstops based on PVC, TPO or galvanised
steel for construction and movement joints.

5.3.3.2Sealants and Profiles

298
Range of hydrophilic profiles and gun applied sealants, designed for the
sealing and waterproofing of construction joints and penetrations (e.g. pipe
entries).

299
6.0 WALLING
6.1 Water
Water shall be as previously specified in 'concrete work.'

6.2 Cement
Cement shall be as previously specified in 'concrete work'.

6.3. Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate shall be as previously specified in 'concrete work.'

6.4 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be as previously specified in 'concrete work' and shall
comprise aggregate of 6, 10 and 20mm gradings in equal proportions.

6.5 Lime
Hydrate limes for cement/lime mortars shall comply with B.S.890 semi-
hydraulic class 'B' calcium limes

6.8 Concrete Blocks

Solid and hollow concrete blocks for walls comply with BS. 2028 type 'A'
except that the recommended mix shall be 1:3:6 cement; fine and coarse
aggregate respectively by volume and are to have sharp arises. Blocks are to
be manufactured on site in approved block making machines and shall be
solid or two cavity hollow types as specified on the drawings. No damaged
blocks shall be used in walling and half or other part blocks required to
maintain bond shall be cut true and even.

The concrete is to be placed into the moulds in thin layers and shall be
properly tamped or vibrated to secure complete consolidation without voids or
flaws produce smooth surfaces and sharp straight corners.

Blocks shall be cast on loose pellets and after removal from the moulds shall
be carefully stored under for at least 24 hours before the pellets are removed.
The blocks shall thereafter be stored under cover for a further seven days
protected from the sun and drying of the blocks may commence on the ninth
day after manufacture and no blocks may be used within 14 days of their
production.

300
 The compressive strength of the type 'A' concrete blocks shall be not less
than:-

Average of 13 blocks 50 kg. per square centimetre (700 lbs. per square inch)
Lowest individual blocks 40kg. per square centimetre (580 IBS per square
inch)

Concrete louvre blocks shall be of an approved type and manufacture. They

shall be with inclined faces and have overall size 450 x 150 x 150mm
(excluding lip protruding outside the bedding face).

6.9 Stone
Stone for walling shall be hard, dense, and stone from an approved quarry
with accurately dressed faces on all sides.

Stone walling described as load-bearing shall have a minimum crushing

strength of 14 Newtons per square millimetre and shall comply with BS 5628L:
Part 2.

6.10 Fair face work

Walls described as finished with a fair face shall be constructed with blocks
selected for their uniformity of size and with a smooth exposed face with no
chips, blemished, pinholes or cracks. Walling shall be pointed with a neat flush
joint as work proceeds and on completion shall be brushed down and left
thoroughly clean.

6.11 Wall reinforcement

All wall described as reinforced shall be reinforced with hoop iron 25mm wide
or similar reinforcement centrally in every alternative joint (vertically for the full
length of the walls, lapped and crimped 300mm at running joints and full width
of wall at angles and intersections).

6.12 Wall ties

20 Gauge hoop iron ties 25mm wide x 450mm long to be provided for every
alternative course at all connections between block walls and reinforced
concrete columns or walls. One end to be cast into concrete and the end bent
and built into mortar joint of walling.

301
6.13 Chasing
Chasing of load-bearing walls for electrical conduits, pipes, etc, is kept to a
minimum size of cut and positions and runs of chases are to be approved by
the Engineer before any cutting is commenced. Horizontal runs will not be
permitted.

6.14 Mortar
The mortar used for walling shall be composed of one part of cement to two
parts of hydrated lime to nine parts of sand (1:2:9) measured in gauge boxes
and thoroughly mixed dry and preferably with an approved mixing platform
with water added afterwards until all parts are completely incorporated and
brought to a proper consistency and used within the hour. No partially or
wholly set mortar will be allowed to be re-used or re-mixed.

6.15 Workmanship
All blocks and stone to be wetted before laying out the top of walling where left
off, shall be well wetted before recommencing building, walls to be kept wet
three days after building.

All walling to be built true, plumb and level with all perpends vertical and in line
and work shall not rise more than 900mm above the adjoining work and all
such risings are to be properly raked back.

6.16 Setting out

The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out on the same
all work showing openings, heights, cills and lintels and shall build the various
walls and piers to the thicknesses, widths and heights shown upon the
Drawings. No part of the walling shall be carried up more than one metre
higher at one time than any other part and in such cases the joining shall be
made in long steps so as to prevent cracks arising and all walls shall be
levelled round at floor and wall heads.

6.17 Bonding walling

All blocks shall be properly bonded together and in such a manner that no
vertical joints in any one course shall be within 100mm of a similar joint in the
courses immediately above and below. Alternative courses of walling at all
angles and intersections shall be carried through the full thickness of the
adjoining walls.

302
 All perpends, reveals, quoins and other angles and joints of the walls, etc,
shall be built strictly true and square.

6.18 Laying and Jointing

All blocks are to be well wetted before laying and tops of walls where left off
shall be wetted before commencing building. All joints are to be 10mm thick
and flush up and grouted in a solid as the work proceeds.

All exposed faces of walls for plastering ate to be left rough and the joints
raked out while the mortar is green to form adequate key.

All other faces shall be cleaned down on completion with wire brush or as
necessary and mortar droppings, smear marks, etc, removed and rates must
include for this.

6.19 Putlog holes

All putlog holes shall be carefully, properly and completely filled up on
completion of walling and before plastering is commenced.

6.20 Damp proof course

Damp proof course between foundations walls and the over-site concrete slab
shall be hessian based bitumen strip to BS 743 type 5A the same width as the
block walls. The damp proof course shall be bedded in cement mortar (1:4)
with 150mm-end laps and full width at passings and angles. Damp proof
courses are required on all external and internal foundation walls.

6.21 Prices to include

The rates for walling shall include for all reinforcement, all straight cutting,
bonding, plumbing angles, forming reveals, pinning up to underside of
concrete soffits and cutting up to sides of columns and building in ends of
lintels and cills.

303
7.0 FIBERCEMENT REINFORCED PANEL
General

Section Includes
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete items below not required for project.
Fibre reinforced cement panel siding system
Accessories required for complete installation.

Related Sections
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete any sections below not relevant to this
project; add others as required.
Section 05 4000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
Section 06 11 00 - Wood Framing.
Section 06 16 36 - Wood Panel Product Sheathing.
Section 07 21 26 - Blown Insulation.
Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection.
Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames.
Section 09 20 00 - Plaster and Gypsum Board.

References
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Delete references from the list below that are not
actually required by the text of the edited section.
ASCE 7 -Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
ASTM C 1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Sheets.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Materials.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure.

System Description
Performance Requirements:
Design and size components to withstand live loads caused by pressure of
wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with
ANSI/ASCE 7, and as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330.

304
Deflection:
Provide system capable of withstanding wind loading within the following
limitations:

No permanent deformation is acceptable.

Design system to accommodate, without damage to system, components or
deterioration of seals; movement within system; movement between system
and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; and
deflection of structural support framing.

Design to accommodate vertical inter-story movement and provide an

allowance for the following tolerances:

Building floor slab live load differential deflection.

Structural creep.
Thermally induced expansion and contraction of framing members.
Fabrication and erection tolerances.
Design ultimate load capacity of anchor components to withstand 2.0 times
"Design Wind Load" without failure.
Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly.

Submittals
Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

Product Data
Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

Preparation instructions and recommendations.

Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
Installation methods, including fastening patterns.

Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings and erection plans for review including the following:

Layout of furring, weather barrier, finished sheets and fastener pattern.

Details at base and top of walls, corners, at window and door trim and at other
openings and connections.
Shop drawings prepared and stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the
state where the project is located.

305
Calculations
Provide wind load calculations, engineering calculations and substantiating
data to validate wind resistance of roof system.
Product certificates including Research//Evaluation report or Code Authority
approval of the system use for intended application.
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Include the following paragraph(s) for product
specified requiring color selection. Delete selection samples if colors have
already been selected.

Selection Samples:
For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

Verification samples
For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 3 inches by 6
inches (76 mm by 150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and
patterns.

Manufacturer's Certificates:
Certify materials and accessory component products meet or exceed specified
requirements.

Manufacturer's warranties:
Executed by manufacturer and installer.

Quality Assurance
Installer Qualifications:
Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with products
similar to those specified.

Mock-Up:
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Include a mock-up if the project size and/or quality
warrant taking such a precaution. The following is one example of how a
mock-up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of
the mock-up, consider all the major different types of work on the project.
Provide a mock-up of complete panel system including furring, insulation,
weather barrier and panels for approval by Engineer.
Finish areas designated by Engineer.

306
Mock-up shall be a minimum of 4 panels showing one vertical and one
horizontal joint and complete installation system and fastener layout.

Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and color are approved
by Engineer.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

Pre-Installation Conference:
Prior to any panel application, the Contractor shall convene a pre-installation
conference.
Coordinate conference scheduling with the Engineer. Conference shall be
attended by the Contractor, Engineer, personnel directly responsible for the
installation of panels, flashing and sheet metal work and other trades
interfacing with the panel work.

Provide a copy of meeting notes and action items to all attending parties. Note
action items requiring resolution prior to start of roof work.

Discuss specific expectations and responsibilities, construction procedures,

specification requirements, application, environmental conditions, job and
surface readiness, material storage, and protection.

Delivery, Storage, And Handling

Do not deliver cement panels to site until job is ready for their installation.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation.

Store materials off the ground, flat and under cover in a dry place until
erection.

Keep materials dry and protect from freezing.

Store materials in such a way to accommodate easy inspection of the
materials prior to installation.

Project Conditions
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)
within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install
products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute
limits.

307
Warranty
Installed material shall have a manufacturer's 5 year warranty.
Warranty includes the repair or replacement of siding that does not comply
with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming or otherwise deteriorating
beyond normal weathering.

Products
Materials
Prefinished Cement Board Siding Panels: siding sheets, fiber reinforced,
cement based product conforming to ASTM C 1186 and manufactured of
cement sand, cellulose fibers and fillers.
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** SIL-BONIT™ siding panels are intended for use
for new construction, building facade refurbishment or insulation projects with
light facades. SIL-BONIT™ cement panels meet the highest requirements of
quality, function, weather resistance and aesthetics.

Panel Size:
5/16 inch 4 feet by 8 feet. (8 mm by 1220 mm by 2440 mm).
5/16 inch 4 feet by 10 feet. (8 mm by 1220 mm by 3050 mm).

Colors:
Natural colors:
Ash - Natural.
Desert - Natural.
Almond - Natural.
Stone - Natural.
Olive - Natural.
Coral - Natural.
Gold - Natural.
Iceberg – Natural
Bark - Natural
Chestnut - Natural

Mechanical fasteners:
External tamper proof screws, stainless steel, torx head fasteners.
Screws shall be length as required by the panel manufacturer for the furring
material used.
Wood screws: Size: #10 by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).

308
Steel Screws: Size: #10 by 10 inch (25.4 mm).
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Painted screws are optional delete if not required.
Use painted screws to match panel finish
Continuous cushions of black EPDM rubber, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) and 3-1/2
inch (95 mm) as required.
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select the color(s) required from the following
Natural Colors or Treated Colors paragraphs as required and delete the ones
not required. If more than one color is required indicated the location of each
on the Drawings.
** NOTE TO SPECIFIER ** Select the fastener type required from the
following paragraphs and delete those not required.

Accessories
Trim: PVC, composite and stainless steel trim shapes suitable for trim
conditions.
Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 26 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet,
or stainless steel.

Wood furring materials shall conform to the requirements specified is Section

06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

Metal furring shall conform to the requirements of Section 09 20 00 - Plaster

and Gypsum Board.

Rigid insulation between furring channels shall comply with Section 07 21 26 -

Blown Insulation. Thickness of insulation shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.

Execution
Examination
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
Ensure that framing is completed and that electrical rough-in, windows, doors,
and flashing are in place before proceeding with work of this section.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer

of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
Preparation
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Repair as necessary any
substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.

309
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

Ensure that all dust, dirt, fingerprints and all other foreign marks on the
material are removed prior to installation of the panels.

Installation - General
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop
drawings.

Panel Cutting:
Cut panels using a high-speed circular saw with a segmented diamond blade.
Cut panels from the front side and protect the face from being damaged during
cutting.
For incidental cuts, cut panels from the front side using a jigsaw with carbide
tip blade.
Provide adequate ventilation during cutting. Use of a dust extractor is
recommended.
Reseal fabricated edges per manufacturer's instructions.

Drilling:
Drilling of holes must be done from the front of the panel using a carbide tip
drill bit.
Holes are recommended to be done using a universal drill.
Larger holes, or cut-outs on the panel, can be made by a jig saw with a
carbide blade or a hole saw with a diamond blade.

Prepare structural backing with studs, backer board, weather barrier and
furring as required to meet the performance requirements specified. Install
fiber reinforced panels over a properly prepared support system in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.
Install weather barrier over prepared substrate.

Fiber reinforced cement panel siding shall be installed over an impervious

weather barrier, on furring strips with black EPDM rubber strips, and with an
air cavity behind the face panel to allow ventilation of the substrate.

310
Panels shall be attached to furring using the attachment pattern and fasteners
indicated in the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop
drawings.

Install black EPDM rubber strips to each furring member.

Pre-drill holes in cement boards in pattern indicated in the manufacturers

installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Holes shall be of size as
specified by the panel manufacturer for the fasteners being used.

Fasten fiber cement board to furring as per vendor's details with approved
stainless steel fasteners.

Protection
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Inspect walls for any damage. Replace panels that are damaged. Do not
attempt to repair.

Ensure all dirt, dust, fingerprints and all foreign marks are immediately
removed from the face of the material to avoid from permanent damage.

Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

311
8.0 ROOFING
8.1 Vermiculite lightweight screed
Vermiculite lightweight screed shall be mixed in the proportions of 6 parts by
volume of vermiculite Grade 5 to 1 part of Ordinary Portland Cement with
approximately 2 parts of clean potable water to give a density of 700 kg per
m3.

Vermiculite screed is to be finished to receive a topping coat of water proofed

cement and sand (1:4).

8.2 Roof waterproofing

The waterproofing shall be carried out with cement and sand (1:4)
waterproofed with 'Puddle' or other equal and approved waterproofing
compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

8.3 Bitumen felt roofing

8.3.1 Generally
Bitumen felt roofing shall be executed by a specialist subcontractor to be
approved by the Engineer.

8.3.2 Materials
Bitumen felt roofing (or Build up roofing) shall be Bitumat Polyframe
waterproofing to ISO 9002 or Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems or any other
equal and approved system.

8.3.3 Fixing of Bitumat Polyframe Waterproofing

Bitumen felt roofing shall be carried in accordance with the requirement of CP
144 and/or Supplier’s specifications. The roofing screed must be laid to falls of
not less than one degree from horizontal and the screed must be thoroughly
dried before laying of bituminous is commenced

Prepare screed surfaces, clean properly and apply one coat of bituminous
concrete primer. Then lay 4mm thick black sand finished polyframe under-
layer, touch bonded to screed base and finished with one layer 4mm thick
coloured (slate granules) polyframe touch bonded to under-layer.

Abutment felt finishing shall be properly wedge in groove and pointed with
mastic felt.

312
8.3.4 Fixing of Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems
Sarnafil Waterproofing Systems shall composed of first layer Sarnafil
A300g/m2 levelling layer; second layer Sarnafil S327-12EL and Sarnafil G410-
12EL as main field sheet and for detail work respectively; all laid by a
Specialist as specified in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
specifications.

8.3.5 Guarantee
The Contractors will be required submit detailed specification and fixing
method including guarantee of his proposed product to be used for the works
for Engineer’s approval.

8.4. Aluminium sheet roofing

8.4.1 Materials
Aluminium roofing shall be colour coated industrial aluminium roof sheeting
IT4 manufactured by Aluminium Africa Ltd (ALAF) or other approved
manufacturer, and shall conform to the requirements of BS 3428 type 'A'. The
roof sheeting IT4 gauge and the surface finish of the sheets shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer, in writing, and approved by the Engineer.
All accessories shall be of aluminium alloy as shall be approved.

8.4.2 Fixing
The sheets shall be fixed to steel angle or timber purlins with aluminium alloy
bolts and nuts. The bolts shall be at least 50mm longer in the shank than the
purlin to which they are fixed. All bolts shall have approved washers.

Fixing of the sheet must conform strictly to the printed instructions or otherwise
to the requirements of CP 143 part 1 BS 2855.

8.5 Zicalume roofing sheet

8.5.1 Materials
Roof covering shall be 0.8mm gauge coloured “Kinklip 700” concealed fixing
roof sheeting or similar approved Zicalume troughed sheet.

8.5.2 Fixing
The sheets shall be fixed to steel Z-purlins or timber purlins with roofing nails,
bolts and nuts or any other accessory to be approved by the Engineer.
Fixing of the sheet must conform strictly to the printed instructions.

313
9.0 JOINERY
9.1 General
The provisions contained in the carpentry section shall apply also in the joinery
section where applicable.

9.2 Hardwood Facia Board

Joinery is to be executed in approved prime, select and locally available
hardwood. Hardwood generally will be Mninga (Pterocarpus angolansis) but
hardwood for fittings and built in furniture may be Mkangazi (African
Mahogany-Khaya nyasica) unless specifically described otherwise.

9.3 Workmanship
All timber shall be wrot by machine dressing on exposed faces, with all
machine marks sanded out, unless otherwise specified.

The dimensions and thickness given in these Bills of Quantities are finished
(unless otherwise stated). In the event of nominal sizes being stated, an
allowance of 3mm should be allowed for each wrought face.

The joinery shall be worked strictly in accordance with the details drawings
and is to be framed up and put together as soon as possible, and is to be
stored for as long as possible before being wedged up . All joints and angles
are to be glued and where necessary cross-tongued with hardwood tongues,
and surfaces finished clean and smooth with machine marks sand papered out
before fixing.

Should any of the joinery work shrink, wind or fly unduly before the end of the
maintenance period of the contract, the work is to be taken down, and new
work fixed in its place, together with any other works, which may thereby be
affected at the Contractor's sole expense.

Where joinery is described as screwed, this is deemed to include sinking the

head of the screws and pelleting with similar timber and grain in with finished
joinery. Screws unless otherwise specified, shall be brass.

In pricing the items, the contractor will allow for nails and screws and fixing, all
labours, cuttings, notching, havling, mortising, tenoning and welding except
where otherwise provided. Rates are also to include for one coat approved
priming paint on all concealed surfaces.

314
 Allow in the rates for easing and adjusting all doors, and leave in perfect
working order.

9.4 Flush doors

Flush doors shall consist of hardwood core or framing covered with 6mm
plywood both sides and complying where applicable with the requirements of
BS 459,Part 2 and 2A. Doors described, as skeleton framed shall consist of
framing 75mm wide to all stiles, top and bottom rails, with suitable blocks to
receive mortise locks on each long edge. Doors described, as solid core shall
comprise a solid core of vertical laminations. All flush doors shall be edged all
round with 25mm thick hardwood lipping tongued and glued in. Doors
described as external shall be covered both sides with 6mm'exterior' quality
plywood as described below. All flush doors shall be perfectly plain on both
faces and free from all waves, ripples or distortions of any kind. Any door,
which, after the application of paint or polish shows any defects of this nature,
shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Samples of flush
doors, which the contractor intends to use, must be first submitted to the
Engineer for his approval.

9.5 Plywood
Plywood shall be manufactured from tropical hardwoods of the first grade with
BS 145, and unless otherwise stated shall be 'interior' quality. Where stated to
be of ' exterior' quality, the plywood shall be W.B.P. bonded weatherproof
grade. Where veneered plywood is specified, samples must be submitted to
the Engineer for his prior approval.

9.6 Blockboard
Blockboard shall be of Tanzania manufacture and comply with BS. 3444 and
shall be of moisture resistant quality.

9.7. Chipboard
Chipboard shall comply with BS 2604 resin-bonded wood chipboard.

9.8 Plugging
All work described as plugged shall be fixed with brass screws to plugs formed
by drilling concrete, wall, etc. with a screw of suitable "philplug", "Rawplastic",
or other approved plugging compound in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

315
9.9 Protection
Any fixed joinery which, in the opinion of the Engineer is liable to become
damaged in any way shall be cased and protected by the Contractor until the
completion of the works and the contractor must allow for this in his rates as
no separate item for protection has been measured.

9.10 Ironmongery
All ironmongery will be fixed with matching screws to be supplied by the
contractor and the contractor must allow for adjusting locks and striking plates
and handling over all keys on completion of the contract with identifying tags
attached.

The contractor must also allow for oiling locks and hinges and leaving them in
perfect working order

All ironmongery shall be manufactured by Union, Yale, Dryad and Newman-

Tonks Ltd or other equal and approved by the Engineer.

9.11 Prices to include

Prices of items hereinafter for the foregoing labours, etc, and in addition the
prices for linear items are to include all internal and external angles, either
mitred or tongued, all fair, fitted, stopped, notched or returned ends, all similar
incidental labours and all short lengths.

316
10.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
10.1 Generally
All steel to be grade 43 conforming to BS 5950-2-2000.
Structural use of steel work in buildings BS 5950-1-2000 Part 1, Code of
practise for design of rolled and welded sections form part of these
specifications.

10.2 Shop drawings

The steel fabricator shall prepare shop drawings.

10.3 Submittals
The Contractor must submit the following for approval.

Shop drawings
Certificates of structural steel
Welding materials
Shop coat primer paint
Welders qualifying tests
Final paint sample and specification

10.4 Bolts
Bolts are to be galvanised bolts grade 10.8 unless approved otherwise. Bolts
must conform to BS 4190.

10.5 Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with BS 5950 clause 6.7.

10.6 Painting
10.6.1 Shop painting
All steel shall be shop painted with epoxy primer or any other approved primer.

Surfaces within 50mm of joints to be welded in the field should not be painted.
Surfaces that will be encased in concrete must not be painted.

10.6.2 Field painting

After erection, touch up steel surfaces with specified shop primer.

Finish painting of steel surfaces with epoxy polyester based paint in two coats
to satisfaction of the Engineer.

317
11.0 METALWORK
11.1 Mild steel
Mild steel shall comply with BS 15 Grade 1, and the sizes of all small section
shall be in accordance with BS 4 and 4A.

11.2 Galvanised work

Iron and steel, where galvanised shall comply with BS 729, Part 1, entirely
coated with zinc after fabrication by complete immersion in a zinc bath in one
operation and all excess carefully removed. The finished surface shall be
clean and uniform.

11.3 Aluminium
Aluminium shall be of the alloys described in and shall comply with BS 1470.
Aluminium sheet for flashings shall be soft tamper, super purity S1 or S1A)
and not less than 18 SWG (1.2mm) in thickness.

11.4 Smithing, welding and cutting

All smithing, welding; cutting and bending shall be soundly and neatly
executed, care being taken not to overheat. All flame cut edged and welds
shall be neatly ground off on completion. All welds shall be 8mm fillet welds to
comply with Code of Practice 1856 unless shown otherwise.

11.5 Bolts
Mild steel bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with B.S.916 for black bolts
with hexagonal heads and nuts, High Tensile Steel Bolts and nuts shall be in
accordance with B.S.3139.

11.6 Anchor bolts

Anchor bolts in concrete for steelwork, etc, are to be self-drilling anchor bolts
of one of the following types:
Phillips redhead concrete anchors,
Rawplug super drill anchors,
Split self-drilling anchors,

Rates are to include for fixing complete with washer.

11.7 Perforated Aluminium Facade Sheet

Eloxal coated star shape perforated aluminium facade sheets
Hole shape: Star shape as indicated in drawings.

318
 Sheet size: 720x2000 mm, 1200x2000 mm, 900x2000 mm
Thickness: will be decided after material calculations by manufacturer..

11.8 Louvre windows

Louvre windows frames are to be aluminium with a clear anodised finish ex-
Belgium, or other equal and approved by the Engineer.

11.9 Metal doors

Steel for metal doors shall conform to the requirements of BS 1245:1975.

11.10 Roller Shutter Door

Size: Max size 5500mm w x 5500mm h

Operation: The door is arranged for an electric motor unit with manual hand
hoisting and lowering facility. The motor unit is complete with an in-built safety
drive system. Operating voltage 400V 3 phase IP54 protection 60% duty cycle
maintenance free and TUV tested, complying with all current European safety
standards. Opening speed approx. 220mm per second.

Colour: Hot dip galvanised steel* Optional polyester powder coating, RAL9010
PURE WHITE, RAL9006 WHITE ALUMINIUM, RAL3000 SUNSET RED,
BS10E55 AZTEC YELLOW, RAL6002 LEAF GREEN, RAL5010 GENTIAN
BLUE, BS08B29 VAN DYKE BROWN or RAL9005 BLACK. Other colours and
finishes available by request.

Barrel: Manufactured from seamless mild steel tube to BS4760 Grade 50C.
Size to suit door width and height. Maximum barrel deflection 1:400. Fitted
with precision-machined BDMS axles to BS970 EN33.

Main Support Brackets: The main support brackets for the barrel and motor
unit are manufactured from mild steel plates of varying thickness and
incorporate the necessary fixing positions for securing back to the opening
structure.

Vertical Side Guides: Formed from pre-galvanised material having a minimum

thickness of 2.5mm incorporating twin vertical brushes on both inner and outer
face of the guide. Brush carrier is constructed from PVC of medium impact
strength, finished black and incorporating twin siliconised polypropylene
weather strips, these running the full height of the door guide. The guide form

319
 is designed to allow reduced working faces and tapered inner faces to provide
automatic interlocking/retaining feature for performance

Curtain Construction Curtain: Constructed from pre-galvanised material. CFC

free foam infill - ODP zero with a low global warming potential value of three.
Each panel section is 94mm deep with multi-ribbed face for rigidity.

Bottom Seal: The bottom panel of the shutter curtain is terminated with a
specially designed aluminium extruded section complete with interlocking
(EPDM) rubber weather seal.

End Locks: The curtain, when assembled is held in position with purposely-
designed injection moulded end fittings, manufactured from hardwearing
nylon-6, which sits on the outside of the panels minimising scuffing and
damage.

Vision Panels: each vision panel is 200mm wide number of vision panels per
row will vary according to door width, max number of rows of vision panels is
ten.

Certification:
CE Mark (Declaration of conformity)
Type Approval (Chiltern Dynamics - UKAS approved test laboratory)
Mechanical Aspects EN12604, Safety in use of power operated doors
Side guide protection EN 12604: 2000 4.5.1 and EN 12453: 2000 5.1.1.3
Protection Against crushing, shearing or drawing in
Electrical Safety Depending on the use
Water Tightness EN 12489 Resistance to Wind Load EN 12444
Thermal resistance EN 12428
Air permeability EN 12427
Closing Forces (Auto close only) EN 12453 - 5.1.1.5
Anti fall back device EN 12453 - 5.1.1.5
Durability of Mechanical Performance EN 12635: 2002 4.1.1.1

11.11 Burglar bars

Burglar bars shall be as specified by the Engineer. The bars shall be cleaned
and painted as described on trade of painting on metalwork.

320
11.12 Structural hollow sections
All hollow sections are to be connected by electric welding. For butt welds the
fusion surfaces of each member must be aligned and prepared.

11.13 Mild steel tubing

Mild steel tubing shall be in accordance with BS 1387:1975 with screwed
sockets and joints.

11.14 Shop inspection

The Engineer shall granted full facilities and any necessary assistance for
inspection of materials and assembled parts in the contractor's (or his Sub-
Contractor) workshops. At least two weeks notice shall be given to the
Engineer in writing prior to the dispatch of finished components to the site to
enable the Engineer to inspect and approve the materials and workmanship at
the workshops. Approval of work at the workshop does not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations to carry out the work complete at the site to the
Engineer's satisfaction in accordance with the contract.

11.15 Marking
All components delivered to the site are to be marked in paint with the Mark
number in accordance with any shop and erection drawings.

11.16 Storage
All components are to be stored at site in proper racks provided for the
purpose, which provide full support to each member, and to avoid any
deflection and distortion. Steelwork is to be stored at least 250mm clear of the
ground and temporary protection is to be provided for protection against water
and damage from any other source.

11.17 Erection
Rates for all metalwork are to include for the complete erection including any
temporary supports required and any necessary templates and wedges.

321
12.0 PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATION
12.1 Execution of Works
The works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with: -

“British Standard Specification for Design, Installation, Testing and

Maintenance of Services Supplying Water for Domestic use within Buildings
and their Cartilage” BS 6700: 1987.
“British Standard Sanitary Installation: Part1: Code of Practice for Scale of
Provision, Selection and Installation of Sanitary Appliances” BS 6465: Part 1:
1994.

“British Standard Sanitary Installation: Part2: Code of Practice for Space

Requirements for Sanitary Appliances” BS 6465: Part 2: 1996.
“British Standard Drain and Sewer Systems Outside Buildings: Part 4:
Hydraulic Design and Environmental Considerations” BS EN 752-4: 1998.
“British Standard Code of Practice for Drainage of Roofs and Paved areas” BS
6367: 1983.
“British Standard Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipe work” BS 5572: 1978.
By-law of the Local Authority.
All other relevant British Standard specifications and codes of practice
(hereinafter refereed to as B.S.).
The Engineers or Project Managers Instructions.

The plumbing work shall be carried out by a specialist and if the contractor is
not a firm approved by the Engineer for the type and/or value of plumbing
installations contained in this contract, he must sublet this work to a specialist
Sub-Contractor who is so approved

The Contractor shall obtain all the necessary permits from the Local
Authorities for making connection to the existing municipal services including
permits for final disposal of effluents from the Building.

12.2 Extent of Works

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that runs for floor or wall
chases, holes to cut or left will be marked out at the appropriate stage of the
structural work.

322
 The Contractor shall undertake all modifications demand by the Authorities in
order to comply with current regulations, and produce all certificates, if any,
from the Authorities without extra charge.

The works include, unless otherwise specified, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning and delivering up clean and in working order the installations
shown on the drawings and specified in the specifications including all details
such as;

Cold water pipes, Foul water soil pipes, ventilating pipes, valves, storage
Tanks, sanitary appliances including all necessary taps and discharge fittings,
Fire fighting installations and equipment, thermal insulation etc. and all labour,
materials, tools instruments and scaffolding necessary to execute the work in a
first class manner, even such labour or materials which are not specially
mentioned in the project but are necessary for a satisfactory completion of
work.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that runs for floor or wall
chases, holes to cut or left will be marked out at the appropriate stage of the
structural work.

The Contractor shall undertake all modification demanded by the Authorities in

order to comply with current regulations, and produce all certificates, if any
from the Authorities without extra charge.

12.3 Extent of Contractor’s duties

At commencement of the work, the contractor shall investigate and report to
the Engineer if all materials and equipment to be used in work and not
specified as supplied by others are available locally. If not available, the
Contractor shall at this stage place orders for the materials in question and
copy the orders to the Engineer. Failure to do so shall in no way relieve the
contractor from supplying the specified materials in time.

Materials supplied by others for installation and/or connection by the contractor

shall be carefully examined before installation and connection. Any defects
noted shall immediately be reported to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his
work by actual measurement taken on site.

323
 After the completion of the work the contractor shall, on set of drawings,
indicate all alterations and/or modifications carried out during the constructions
period.

12.4 Quality of Materials and Workmanship

12.4.1 Materials and workmanship generally
All materials, equipment and accessories are to be new and in accordance
with the requirements of the current rules and regulations where such exists,
or in their absence with relevant British Standards.
Uniformity of type and/ or manufacture of equipment or accessories is to be
preserved as far as practical throughout the work.

The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, submit samples of material to

the Engineer for his approval before placing an order.

If in this preambles, the practice is adopted of specifying a particular item as

‘similar’ to that of a particular firm’s product, it is to be clearly understood that
this is to indicate the type and quality of the equipment required. No attempt is
being made to give preference to the equipment supplied by the firm whose
name or products are quoted.

Where particular manufacturers are specified herein, no alternative makes will

be considered, and the Engineer shall be allowed to reject any other makes.

The Contractor will be entirely responsible for all materials, apparatus,

equipment; etc furnished by him in connection with his work and shall take
special care to protect all parts of finished works from damages until handed
over.

Competent workmen under unskilled supervision shall carry out the work. The
Engineer shall have the Authority to have any of the work undertaken down or
changed, which is executed in unsatisfactory manner.

12.4.2 Tubing Generally

All tubing exposed on faces of walls shall, unless otherwise specified, be fixed
at least 25 mm clear of adjacent surfaces with approved holder bats built into
walls, cut and pinned to walls in cement mortar. Where fixed to woodwork,
suitable clips shall be used.

324
All tubing specified as chased into walls shall have the wall face neatly cut and
chased, the tubing wedged and fixed and plastered over.

All tubing specified as fixed to ceilings, roofs or roof structures shall be fixed
with approved mild steel hangers cut and pinned to ceilings, roofs or roof
structures.

Tubes shall be fixed to true lines parallel to adjacent lines of the building
unless otherwise specified.

Pipes runs shall be secured by pipe clips connected to pipe hangers, wall
brackets, or trapeze type supports. ”U” bolts shall not be used as substitute
for pipe clips without the prior approval of the Engineer.

An approximate guide to the maximum permissible support spacing in metres

for steel and copper pipe is given in the following table for horizontal runs.

Size Maximum Support

Nominal Bores Spacing
15 mm 2.0 m
20 mm 2.5 m
25 mm 2.5 m
32 mm 3.0 m
40 mm 3.0 m
50 mm 3.0 m
65 mm 3.5 m
80 mm 3.5 m
100 mm 3.5 m

Each support shall take its due proportion of the weight of the tube or pipe and
shall allow free movement for expansion and contraction.

All formed bends shall be made so as to retain the full diameter of the pipe.

Tubing shall be cut by hacksaw or other method, which does not reduce the
diameter of the tube or form a bead or feather, which might restrict the flow.

Where tubing is laid in trenches care should be taken to ensure that fittings are
not strained.

325
The Support spacing for vertical runs shall not exceed one and a half time the
distances given for horizontal runs.

All water systems shall be provided with sufficient drain points and automatic
air vents to enable them to function correctly.

Valves and other user equipment shall be installed with adequate access for
operation and maintenance.

Where Valves and other operational equipment are unavoidably installed

beyond normal reach or in such a position as to be difficult to reach from a
short stepladder, extension spindles with floor or wall pedestals shall be
provided.

Screwed piping shall be installed with a sufficient number of unions to facilitate

easy removal of valves and fittings and to enable alterations of pipe work to be
carried out without the need to cut the pipe.

Full allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe work,
precautions being taken to ensure that any forces produced by pipe
movements are not transmitted to valves, equipment or plant.

Sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through walls and solid floors to
allow movements of the pipes without damage to the structure. The overall
length of the sleeve shall be such that it projects at least 2 mm beyond the
finished thickness of the wall or partition.

Sleeves passing through the structure shall be of mild steel.

Elsewhere they shall be of P.V.C. The sleeves shall have 5-15 mm clearance
all round the pipe, or for insulated pipe work, all round the insulation. The
sleeves shall then be packed with slag wool or similar.

The Contractor shall provide all necessary rodding and inspection facilities
within the draining system in positions with easy access.

Access for rodding and testing shall be provided at the foot of each stack.

326
 Pipes for Cold Water Services

12.4.3 Galvanized Mild Steel Tubing

Galvanized mild steel tubing shall be in accordance with B.S. 1387:1967; with
screwed and socketed joints.

Fitting for the same shall be galvanized malleable iron to B.S. 1356:1952
Table 6A or 7A with threads to B.S. 21:1951. All changes of direction shall be
obtained by use of proper fittings. Formed bends will not be accepted.

Joints shall be made with fine hemp and approved jointing compound or tape.
Compound containing red lead must not be used.

Long screw connectors and flat –faced unions shall not be used; unless
otherwise specified.

Where laid underground; galvanised mild steel tubing shall be protected with
two coats ‘Flinkote’ or two coats of approved bitumen. Minimum earth cover to
underground tubing shall be 600mm.

The fixing of galvanised mild steel tubing shall be done by using:

Malleable iron ‘school-board’ pattern brackets for building in or screwing to

structure.

Malleable iron pipe rings, with either pack plate, plugs or gilder clips, or

Purpose made strap to Engineers’ approval

Other approved purpose made holder-bats

12.4.4 Black Steel Tubing

Black steel tubing shall be to B.S. 1387:1967 and B.S. 3601

Wrought fittings and tubular fittings shall be to B.S. 1740 and B.S. 1387:1967
respectively.

Permitted welding processes are:

327
 Oxy-acetylene welding carried out in accordance with the welding and testing
procedure detailed in B.S. 2633.

Manual arc-welding carried out in accordance with the welding and testing
procedure detailed in B.S. 2633

12.4.5 Cooper Tubing

Cooper tubing shall be light gauge conforming to B.S. 2871 and the fittings
shall be capillary or compression fittings to B.S. 864 of approved manufacture.

Joints on tubing up to and including 50 mm diameter shall be compression or

capillary joints or direct joints using Zinc-free self-fluxing silver brazing alloys.
Joints of tubing above 50 mm diameter shall be welded or brazed joints.

12.5 Geberit Mepla

Geberit Mepla pipes are in compliance with ISO 9000/EN 29000 series, which
corresponds to BS 5750. These pipes shall be installed for hot and cold water
supply system.
Sleeves have been provided for pipes passing through concrete, or block
work. These are HDPE pipe of sufficient diameter which gives at least 3mm
clearance around the pipe.

Geberit HDPE rain water and drainage pipes

Geberit HDPE rainwater and drainage pipes shall be in compliance with ISO
9000/EN 29000 series, which corresponds to BS 5750. Geberit HDPE
conforms to DIN 8074; High –density polyethylene (HDPE) pipes; dimensions
and DIN 8075; High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipes; general quality
requirement and testing.

Diameter of Maximum spacing of

Outside
pipes in mm Vertical (m) Horizontal (m)
32
diameter 500 1200
40 500 1200
(mm)
50 800 1200
63 800 1500
75 800 1500
90 1000 2000
110 1500 2000
160 1500 2000

328
12.5.1 PVC, HDPE and PE Pipes
PVC pipes and fittings for cold water supply shall comply with BS. 3505.

Joints for small diameter PVC pipes for cold water supply shall be done by
using special jointing solvent provided by the pipe maker. Joints shall be of
use spigot and socket tyre, having the socket formed integral with the pipe or,
alternatively, separate sleeves shall be used.

Joints for sizes of 76 mm bore and upwards shall be of the spigot and socket
type made with jointing solvent or flanged joints.

Joints of small diameter PVC pipes for water supply to metal tubing shall be by
means of union adaptors.

Joints for sizes of 76 mm and upwards shall be flexible or flanged joints.

Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings for cold water supply shall be to BS 6730
(only for above ground use).

High-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings for cold water supply shall
be to B.S. 6572 with joints in brass o-ring connectors (only for below ground
use).

12.5.2 Pipework Ancillaries

Sleeves are required for pipes passing through concrete, or block work, and
they shall be of galvanized steel tube or PVC or sufficient diameter to give at
least 3 mm clearance around the pipe.

Ball-Valves shall comply to BS 1212 Floats not exceeding 150 mm diameter

shall be plastic type complying with B.S. 1968 Class C.

Bib Taps shall comply with B.S. 1010 and shall be of brass with crutch handles
or loose key where so described shall be chromium plated or shall have nozzle
screwed for hose union and locking arm.

12.6 Valves, Cocks, Taps, Etc

Taps and valves documentations shall be in accordance with the following
Standards:
Draw-off taps comply with BS 1010 Part 2: 1973.

329
Brass ball valves comply with BS 1212.1953 Floats not exceeding 150mm
diameter made of plastic type, which comply, with BS 1968 class C.
Copper alloy gate valves shall comply with BS.1952:1964
Copper alloy float valves shall comply with BS.1953:964
Sluice valves shall comply with BS.1218:1946

Bib taps comply with BS 1010:1959 and made of brass with clutch handles or
loose key where so described chromium plated or nozzle screwed for hose
union and locking arm.

Stop valves comply with BS 1010:1959 and made of brass with crutch handles
or loose key where so described. Those in exposed positions shall have
polished brass bodies.

Gate and check valves comply with BS 5154 and made of copper alloy.
Manually operated mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes shall
comply with BS.1415:1955
Draining taps shall comply with BS 2879:1957.

Copper-alloy screws down stop valves shall comply with BS 2060:1964

Secondary backflow protection of supply pipes shall be provided by
incorporating in the water supply system; double check valve assembly that
complies with BS 6700:1987 clause 9.3.4.8.

Water hammer shall be controlled by providing pipes three times larger than
the branch line pipe and 500 mm long.These air chambers have been
provided with a shut-off sluice valve and a drain and vent cork to renew the air
periodically.

All valves and cocks shall have the same flow areas, as the corresponding
pipes and shall be accessible for operation and maintenance and suitably
labelled by an approved method. Stop valves have been and are being fixed in
positions shown on the drawings to form branch services for group control, or
where else specified.

All valves, cocks and taps shall have the correct pressure rating according to
the recommendations of the relevant British Standards or the local authority.
At commencement of the contract, the Contractor shall, if necessary, ask the
Engineer for guidance on this point.

330
 Thermal insulating material for hot and cold water supply installation shall
conform to BS 5422:1977, unless otherwise specified. Maximum permissible
length of insulated hot water pipes shall be observed. Where lengths exceed
the maximum permissible length, the whole hot water pipe shall be insulated.

12.7 Waste Traps

Where standard or deep seal traps are specified they shall be manufactured in
suitable non-ferrous materials in accordance with full requirements of B.S.
1184 or B.S. 3943.

Where anti-siphoned traps are specified, these shall be similar or equal to the
range of traps manufactured by Greenwood and Hughes Ltd of England.

12.8 Galvanized Mild Steel Water Mains

Where laid underground, galvanized mild steel tubing shall be heavy duty,
protected by ”Densotape” or similar, wound at least two layers thick or given
two coats of approved bitumen.

12.9 Sanitary and Other Appliances

Sanitary appliances such as water closets, wash hand basins and kitchen shall
be as per manufactured by Armitage Shanks or other approved by the
Engineers before installation commences.

The installation of sanitary appliances shall be in accordance with BS. 6465.

The appliances shall be fixed in the position shown on the drawings or as

directed by the Engineer.

For all sanitary appliances, the necessary number of supports, brackets, plugs,
screws, and washers, jointing materials etc. shall be provided.

Where supports, brackets etc. are screwed to wall or structure raw plugs or
similar shall be used.

No trap for any appliance whatsoever shall be with less seal than 70 mm

Upon complexion of work, all appliances shall be cleaned for plaster, paint etc.
and carefully examined for defects.

331
12.10 Floor Gully
Floor gullies shall be PVC with a 150 x 150 mm stainless steel grating as
manufactured by Key Terrain or similar to be approved with built in water trap
with 50mm water seal with bottom outlet. The gullies shall also have side inlet
(s) of diameter of waste pipe from sanitary fixture connecting into drain.

12.11 GRP Water Storage Tank

Where specified as GRP, water Storage Tanks shall comply with BS 7491:
PART 3: 1994 and shall be Braithwaite Glass Reinforced Plastic Hot Pressed
moulded Sectional Water Tanks or Equivalent.

12.12 Commissioning and Testing

When installation is completed, an acceptance test shall be carried out at the
Contractor’s own expense in collaboration with the Nominated Equipment
Supplier.

Before handing over, the Contractor shall confirm that the installation has been
examined tested and that it will operate and can be maintained efficiently.

The whole of the water and discharge installations shall be tested to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Local Authority. The Contractor shall
provide all necessary testing apparatus and facilitates for testing the
installations and any defective work shall be replaced immediately and shall be
the subject of re-testing until found satisfactory.

The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated or power

driven test pump. Where pipes are to be legged, chased into walls or
otherwise concealed, the work shall be tested prior to lagging, making good
chases, etc.

All water pipe works shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times working
pressure or 10 bar whichever is greater and this test maintained for 8 hours
.The test pressure shall not drop over the 8 hours period.

All water piping shall be flushed and cleaned thoroughly after hydrostatic
testing. All tanks and piping for drinking water after being hydrostatically tested
shall be sterilized with a solution of chloride or lime to the agreement and
satisfaction of the Engineer.

332
13.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHINGS

13.1 Sand
Sand for backings, floor and wall finishes is to comply with B.S.1199, Table 1.

13.2 Aggregate
Coarse aggregate is to be as described for ‘concrete work’.

13.3 Cement
Cement is to be as described for ‘Concrete Work’.

13.4 Lime
Lime is to be non-hydraulic hydrated lime to B.S.890 Class ‘A’ obtained from
an approved source and run into putty at least 24 hours before use.

13.5 Workmanship
All concrete beds or slabs shall be thoroughly brushed if necessary and well
wetted and flushed over with a cement and sand (1:1) grout immediately
before screeds or pavings are laid

Screeds and cement pavings shall be laid in accordance with the relevant BS
Code of practice. Working joints between bays of the floor finish should be
placed in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions and will be plain butt
joints placed over joints in the concrete bed under. Pavings shall be damp
cured with sand or sawdust and kept damp for at least 7 days after laying.

All surfaces to be plastered or rendered must be brushed clean and well

wetted before plaster is applied. Joints of walling shall be raked out and
concrete hacked to form a key. Care shall be taken to see that paving and
plastering do not dry out prematurely

Adequate time intervals must be left between successive coats in two-coat

work in order that the drying shrinkage of the undercoat may be substantially
complete. All internal and external angles shall be pencil rounded.

13.6 In-situ pavings generally

Before laying in-situ floor finishes, the concrete beds are to be thoroughly
hacked for key, cleaned off, thoroughly wetted with clean water and coated
with stiff cement slurry and rates for screed granolithic and terrazzo paving are

333
 to include for this. They are also to include for all necessary curing and
protecting until the building is handed over to the Employer.

13.6.1 Cement and sand paving

The cement and sand paving shall be in the proportions of 1:4 by volume and
incorporating or treated with an approved hardener. A mix referred to as 1:4
shall mean 1440kgs (1m3) of cement and 4m3 of sand. All other mixes shall
be construed in a like manner.

13.6.2 Concrete paving

The concrete paving shall be in the proportions of 1:2:4 by volume, the coarse
aggregate used shall not exceed 10mm nominal size. It shall be trowelled
smooth with a steel float. If the contractor wishes to use a power float he is to
seek the approval of the Engineer who may require him to complete a sample
area before granting permission.

13.6.3 Internal plaster

Internal plaster shall be applied in two coats and adequate time intervals must
be allowed between successive coats in order that the drying shrinkage of the
undercoat may be substantially complete. The first coat must be well
scratched keyed and wetted to receive the finishing coat. The finishing coat
shall be finished smooth with a steel float but care must be taken not to
overwork the surface in order to minimise the incidence of shrinkage cracks.
All internal and external angles shall be pencil rounded.

Internal plaster, unless otherwise described, shall be lime plaster of 15mm

minimum overall finished thickness applied in two coats. the first coat
consisting of cement, lime putty and sand mixed in the proportions of (1:2:9).
The finishing coat shall be a skin coat comprising cement and lime putty in the
proportion of (1:10).

Cement plaster is to be employed where specified on the drawings and is to

be applied in two coats of approximately equal thickness to a total of 15mm
minimum overall finished thickness. The composition of both coats shall be
the same and shall comprise cement and sand (1:4) but a small percentage
addition (not more than 10%) lime putty may be permitted if the Engineer
considers that this will reduce the incidence of shrinkage cracks.

334
 The contractor shall cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other
defects and leave the whole of the plastering and rendering perfect at
completion. When making good defects the plaster shall be cut out to a
rectangular shape with edges undercut to form dovetailed key, and all finished
flush with the face of surrounding plaster.

13.6.4 "Sandtex" finish

'Sandtex' finish shall consist of one part white cement to four parts sand by
volume applied in two coats in the manner as described for internal plastering
to a total thickness of 15mm and the final coat wet brushed to expose the sand
to a texture to be approved by the Engineer.

13.7 Floor tiles

Floor tiles shall be porcelain non-glazed tiles ex-Italy or other equal and
approved. It shall be laid on a smooth screed and fixed with approved
adhesive. It shall be finally pointed with approved grout to match the shed of
the tiles.

13.8 Tactile Walking Surface Tile Resilient

13.8.1 Construction
Solid Color Rubber Tiles are manufactured from a homogeneous composition
of 100% synthetic rubber, high quality additives, and colorants to meet the
performance requirements of ASTM F 1344, Class 1-A and 1-B Standard
Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. Tactile Walking Surface Tiles meet the
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) B651-12, current ISO/FDIS 23599
Assistive Products for The Blind and Vision-Impaired Persons – Tactile
Walking Surface Indicators, Division A of Ontario Regulation 332/12, and
Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act (AODA). Johnsonite Rubber
Floor Tiles are designed for interior applications only and not recommended
for environments where the product will be exposed to animal fats, vegetable
oils, or petroleum based materials (e.g.: commercial kitchens). Rubber floor
tiles require the use of chair pads or chairs with casters designed for resilient
flooring in work stations or similar environments. Rubber floor tiles are not
warranted against cuts or lack of protection under caster wheels designed for
carpeting or other types of flooring.

335
13.8.2 Styles
Tactile Warning Tile (Attention Tile) Rubber Tiles (TW1): 4.0 mm dome height
with 3.2 mm base thickness; 7.2 mm overall thickness.
Tile Size: (20 cm x 20 cm or 40 cm *40 cm)

13.8.3 Product Performance and Technical Data

Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D 3389): < 1.0 gm weight loss
Hardness (ASTM D 2240): Not less than 85 Shore A
Slip Resistance (ASTM D 2047): Meets or Exceeds a static coefficient of
friction of 0.8 Color Heat Stability (ASTM F 1514): < 8.0 E
Static Load Limit (ASTM F 970): Passes at 250 psi
Fire Resistance (ASTM E 648 - Critical Radiant Flux): Class 1
Smoke Development (ASTM E 662): < 450
Chemical Resistance (ASTM F 925): Passes - 5% Acetic acid, 70% Isopropyl
alcohol, Sodium Hydroxide solution (5% NaOH), Hydrochloric acid solution
(5% HCl), Sulfuric acid solution (5% H2SO4),
Household ammonia solution (5% NH4OH), Household bleach (5.25%
NaOCl), Disinfectant cleaner (5% active phenol).

13.8.4 Installation
See rubber tile flooring installation instructions for complete details.

Adhesives:
Tarkett 965 Adhesive Coverage: Porous Substrate: 125-150 sq. ft. per gallon
Non-porous Substrate: 150-175 sq. ft. per gallon
Tarkett 996 Two-Part Epoxy Adhesive Coverage: Porous & Non-porous
Substrate: 150-175 sq. ft. per gallon
Tarkett 975 Two-Part Polyurethane Adhesive Coverage: Porous & Non-porous
Substrate: 150-175 sq. ft. per gallon

Warranty:
Limited 5 year warranty. For complete details, contact Tarkett or an authorized
Tarkett distributor.

336
14.0 GLAZING
14.1 General
Glass generally shall comply with the requirements of B.S.952 and shall be
free from bubbles, specks waves, flows or any other defects.

The thickness and type of the glass shall be as specified by the Engineer.

Glass for louvre blades shall be clear sheet flat drawn or roughcast obscured
rolled glass to the thickness shown on the drawings with all exposed edges
ground and polished.

14.2 Putty
The putty shall be hard setting tropical putty to B.S.544

14.3 Workmanship
All glass is to be accurately cut to fit easily into rebates with a tolerance of
2mm all round. It is to be well puttied at the back and to the sprigged with non-
ferrous pins. The putty is to be mostly trimmed and cleaned off and care must
be taken that it does not show beyond the slight lines of the saches. All
rebates must be treated with one coat of lacquer (as described under 'Painting'
hereafter) prior to glazing.

14.4 Cleaning and protection

The contractor must allow in his rates for the protection of all work in this
section and for replacing any cracked, scratched, broken or defective glass
prior to handing over to the Employer. He must also allow for cleaning all the
windows inside and out and other glass on completion with an approved
window cleaner and wash-leather and for removal of all paint splashes.

337
15.0 PAINTING
15.1 Colour range
All painting shall be carried out in colours selected by the Engineer.

15.2 Materials
Paints generally shall be ready mixed and supplied by one of the
manufacturers listed below and delivered to the site in sealed containers
clearly labelled with the a manufacturer's name, type of paint and colour. Oil
based priming paint shall comply with B.S.2521-2524 inclusive.

Jotum Paints
Coral Paints
Galaxy Paints
Leyland Paints (T) Ltd
Robbialac Paints (T) Ltd
Sadolins Paints (T) Ltd
Goldstar Paints Tanzania Ltd

Paints are to be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions and no contamination by mixing with other brands or materials will
be permitted. Thinning is only permitted in so far as it is in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.

15.3 Preparation
All surfaces to receive treatment are to be clean and dry before paint
application and surface irregularities are to be removed by filling or the use of
suitable abrasives.

15.4 Plastered surfaces

Internal plastered wall surfaces generally are to be treated with plastic
emulsion paint. Surfaces are to be allowed to dry out thoroughly prior to paint
application. All crack and surfaces imperfection are to be cut back and filled
with a patent filler in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
rubbed down to a true and even surface.

Apply one primer coat thinned with water and two subsequent coats of
Leyland's Leymure Co-polymer' or other approved plastic emulsion paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where specified internal
plastered wall surfaces are to be painted gloss. In addition to the preparation

338
 described above, apply one coat of Leyland’s P 20 or other approved alkali,
resistant primer and flat down with 320 grade 'wet or dry' abrasive paper.
Apply two coats Leyland's Leylac Polymeric gloss finish or other equal and
approved gloss paint lightly rubbed down coats in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

15.5 Woodwork preparations

Large knots in woodwork are to be cut back and replaced with sound wood or
scorched back and after priming the surface made good with stopping. All
knots are to be treated with two thin coats and patent knotting free from resin.

After priming all nail holes and other imperfections shall be filled with stopping
and the whole surface rubbed down to a smooth even finish. The stopping
must be 'Scadofil' or other approved make.

15.6 Metalwork
All rust and loose scale on steel and ironwork must be removed by wire
brushing and rubbing with emery paper. Where patches of ingrained rust
cannot be removed they are to be thoroughly rubbed down and treated with
one coat of 'Galvafroid' or other zinc paint in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. One coat of zinc chromate primer will then be applied followed by
two undercoats and one finishing coat of gloss paint as described for
woodwork above. The contractor is to note that where mild steel burglar bars
are housed into wood frames the full length of the bar is to be treated before
fixing.

Galvanised metalwork is to receive one coat of white spirit or mordant de-

greasing solution washed off prior to the application of calcium plumbate
primer followed by two undercoats and one finishing coat of gloss as
previously described.

Galvanised metalwork is to be painted only where instructions are given by the

Engineer as in some cases galvanised metalwork is to be left untreated.

339
16.0 DRAINAGE
16.1 Generally
The preambles for the previous trade sections are applicable to this section
together with the following preambles. The drainage is to be carried out in
accordance with the directions of the Engineer and the requirements of the
Byelaws. No length of drain is to be covered until it has been tested and
passed.

16.2 PVC drain pipes

PVC Drain pipes comply with ISO R161 (4kg/cm2) 'Pipes of plastic materials
for the transport of fluids.

The drainpipes shall be spigot and socket glued joints.

16.3 Cast iron drainpipes

Shall be centrifugal cast (spun) iron drainpipes with spigot and socket to
BS.437 thoroughly coated inside and outside, alternatively similar pipes but
class 'B' in accordance with BS. 1211 may be used according to availability.
Fittings shall be in accordance with BS.1130.

Pipes shall be jointed with asbestos yarn and caulked with molten lead or
jointed with special jointing compound all to approval.

16.4 Concrete drain pipes

Precast concrete pipes shall be in general conformity with BS 556. Concrete
cylindrical pipes and fittings. The concrete mix used for the manufacture of
ordinary pipes shall not be weaker than grade '30'.

For foul water drainage sulphate resisting concrete pipes shall always be
used. The manufacturer of sulphate resisting pipes shall be in general
conformity with BS. 556. The concrete mix not weaker than grade '30'. Pipes
up to and including 45cm diameter shall be un-reinforced and shall incorporate
spigot and socket type joints. Pipes above 45cm diameter shall be reinforced
with not less than steel fabric required by British Standard BS 5610 or the
equivalent in mild steel and shall have spigot and socket joints or if the
Engineer so approved shall have open type joints. The main reinforcement to
be in circumferential direction. Pipes reinforcement shall be placed midway
between the inner and outer surfaces of the concrete. In socketed pipes the

340
 reinforcement shall be extended continuously from the pipe barrel into the
socket, the longitudinal bars cranked as necessary.

No wall thickness of the pipe barrels is specified but the reinforcement (if any)
and the wall thickness must be so balanced that the pipes are in conformity
with B.S.556 and the test specified therein.

16.5 Pitch impregnated fibre drainpipes

Pitch impregnated fibre pipes; couplings and fittings shall comply with BS 2760
Part 1 and 2.

16.6 Manholes
Manholes shall be constructed on drain lines in the positions indicated or
wherever ordered by the Engineer.

Manholes on pipe drains be constructed with an-in-situ base in concrete grade

"20" which shall be raised to form the benching and invert of the manhole.
The benching and channels shall be carefully formed to shape according to
the number, diameter and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The
channels in the manholes base shall have circular inverts. The benchings
shall be sloped towards the channels at a gradient of 1 in 6 or as otherwise
detailed on the drawings.

Benching shall be carried out in concrete grade "20" and rendered with 15mm
1:3 cement mortar. Rendering to be carried out in sulphate resisting cement
for foul water drainage .The ends of all entering the manholes are to be
carefully cut to shape to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes and are
to be as short as possible and are to be surrounded with 150mm concrete up
to the first pipe joint.

The manhole shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings for typical
and special manholes.

Manholes cast iron steps for manholes shall comply with BS. 1247. All steps
be hot dip galvanised after manufacture.

Manhole covers and frames shall be in accordance with the requirements of

BS. 497 and as specified on the drawings.

341
16.7 Concrete beds etc
Concrete beds shall be grade "15" laid to correct falls, 300mm wider than the
external diameter of the pipe. Rates are to include for laying in two parts, the
first part being laid on the trench bottom 75mm thick and allowed to set before
pipe laying is commenced. Individual pipes shall be firmly supported on
precast concrete blocks placed immediately behind the socket and in such a
manner that each pipe is accurately position in both line and level and the
underside of the barrel is at least 75mm above the top of the concrete.

After the joints have been made and the pipelines satisfactorily tested, the first
layer of the concrete bed shall be thoroughly washed down and cleaned and
the remainder of the bedding concrete (and the launching or surrounding
concrete where required) shall be placed and consolidated under and around
the pipe in such manner as not to cause any damage or disturbance to the
pipe or joints.

The contractor is to ensure that his, method of placing this second layer of
concrete is such that the full length of each pipe is fully supported. The overall
depth of beds is to be in accordance with the table given on the drawings.
Where pipes are specified to be haunched, the bed shall be brought up with
the second layer of concrete to a minimum overall depth of 150mm to the
underside of the barrel of the pipes plus half the diameter of the pipe and then
sloped up to the top of the barrel of the drain pipes. Where pipes are specified
to be surrounded, the bed shall be brought up with the second layer of
concrete to a minimum overall depth of 150mm to the underside of the barrel
of the pipe and then completely surrounded with concrete with 150mm
minimum cover all round. Rates for this item are to include for any formwork
required.

16.8 Trenches and manhole excavation and back filling

The bottom of drain trenches is to be trimmed and consolidated to correct
levels and gradients. If any trenches are over- excavated the contractor to fill
up to the proper depth at his own expense with concrete grade "10" where
required. Rates for drain trenches are to include for grading bottoms, any
necessary planking and strutting and keeping the excavations free from water,
returning, filling in and ramming ground over and disposing of surplus material
to spoil heaps on site. They shall also include for sieving and hand filling
trenches where required for the first 300mm over the drainpipes.

342
 Back filling shall be executed with selected material in 150mm layers (300mm
layers if a mechanical rammer is used) each layer being well rammed and
watered to obtain the maximum compaction. Care should be taken to ensure
that no stone or other work is placed within 300mm of such work.

Rates for manhole excavation shall include for levelling the bottoms. All
surface material including topsoil, which differs in any nature whatsoever from
the substrata, shall in every case be carefully set aside and stored separately
from other excavated materials. No claim for extras will be allowed for setting
aside topsoil for later use.

16.9 Pipe laying and jointing generally

All laying and jointing of pipes shall conform generally with C.P. 301. Each
cast iron, or concrete pipe shall be tested for soundness before laying by
striking with a hammer and any pipe or joint which does not ring true or which
shows in any other way any sign of being defective shall be regretted.

Each pipe shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that the finished
pipeline shall be in a straight line both in horizontal and vertical planes. The
contractor shall fix properly painted and securely positioned sight rail, the
levels and positioning of which shall be checked by the Engineer's
representatives before the rails are used and as often thereafter as may be
necessary. There shall be at no time less than three sight rails in position on
each length of pipeline under construction to any one gradient and the sight
rails shall be situated vertically above the line of pipes or immediately adjacent
thereto.

16.9.1 Jointing PVC Drainpipes

The type of joint used for drain PVC pipe is cemented spigot and socket. The
jointing procedure is as follows:

The spigot end shall be chamfered

Clean spigot and socket with wet cloth and let dry
Un-grease spigot and socket with acetone
Mark length of joint and spigot
Apply first a relatively thick layer of cement onto spigot and then a thin layer
into socket
Flush home the joint to the mark quickly and give at once a 90 twist.
Remove pressed out cement

343
 Do not disturb the joint for five minutes whilst cement is hardening

The cement used shall be supplied by the factory, which is supplying the pipe.

16.9.2 Jointing precast concrete pipes

The contractor shall adopt such measures as may be approved by the
Engineer to ensure that every laid down pipe is concentric with previously laid
pipes with which it joints. Unless otherwise approved pipes shall be laid in an
up-gradient direction and the spigot shall be laid in the direction of the flow.
Before commencing the laying operation, the contractor shall ensure that the
portions of pipe, which come into contact with jointing materials, are perfectly
clean.

Cement mortar joints for concrete pipes with spigot and socket joints shall be
made as follows:

Before commencing the jointing operation the socket of the previously placed
pipe and the spigot of the new pipe shall be cleaned and thoroughly soaked
with water.The spigot shall be wrapped one complete lap with tarred hemp
spun yarn and the new pipe shall be carefully drawn towards the previously
laid pipe so that the spigot enters the full depth into the socket of the
previously laid pipe. The new pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its
correct position in line, level and gradient and the yarn shall be caulked tightly
home into the socket. On completion of this operation the yarn shall not fill
more than one quarter of the total depth of the socket.

The remainder of the socket shall be completely filled with cement mortar
consisting of one part of cement (sulphate resisting cement for foul water
drainage) to three parts of sand. The mortar filling shall terminate flush with
the socket and shall be neatly trowelled to a smooth finish completely around
the pipe.

To assist the curing of the mortar the contractor shall cover the joints
immediately after they are made with a layer of hessian which shall be kept
continuously wet during daylight hours and he shall further adopt such other
measures as the Engineer may direct all at the Contractor's expense.

344
16.10 Position of floor gullies etc.
The contractor shall before positioning floor gullies duck-foot bends for
ventilating stacks, etc should consult the Engineer in order to ensure the
correct position of these. Failure to do so, shall in no way relieve the contractor
from positioning floor gullies, duck-foot bends for ventilating stacks etc in
positions, the Engineer later may direct.

16.11 Testing
After the drains are laid and jointed and before the trenches are filled in, they
are to be tested in the presence of the Engineer's representatives. The drains
shall be tested in lengths between manholes or such shorter lengths as the
representative or the Engineer may approve.

Water shall be passed into the length under test until such time as all the air
has been expelled and the line is full of water and subjected to a head of
1500mm at the upstream end. The test shall be considered to be satisfactory
if there is no visible leakage, see page or weeping from any of the pipes of
joints and if the head of water in a 76mm diameter upstand tube fitted at the
upstream does not fall at a rate faster than 12mm per minute per 30 metres
length. The contractor shall make such time allowance as may be necessary
for the pipe to absorb water being subjected to test.

Manholes are to be tested for water- tightness in the same way as for drains
by filling with water but not exceeding 1500mm head.

The contractor is to supply all testing apparatus and materials necessary for
these tests and provide all labour and assistance required. Any failure
whatsoever in the drainage system to withstand the specified tests and any
defects appearing are to be made good and the drains re-tested to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

345
17.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
17.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
17.1.1 Scope of work
The work includes, unless otherwise specified, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning and delivering up clean and in working order of the entire
electrical installation as shown on the drawings in compliance with the
specification, drawings and generally accepted utility standards required of
buildings. The work to be undertaken shall include, but not be limited to the
following:

Installation of Main LV Panel and LV distribution boards

Liaising with TANESCO for connection of power supply
Installation of lighting system
Installation of stand-by generator
Installation of cable management system
Installation of fire alarm and detection system
Installation of data and voice cabling system
Installation of Telephone System
Installation of lightning protection and earthing systems
Testing and commissioning of the installation
Builders work associated with the above works

The Contractor shall supply all materials, labour, installations, fixing,

connecting, testing, labelling, commissioning and delivering the installations
complete and working in every detail as described elsewhere in the
specifications and on the drawings to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

17.1.1.1 Working drawings

The Contract Drawings as previously defined and forming part of the
specification are listed in an appendix to the Specification of Works. The
Contractor shall prepare such working drawings as may be necessary
for the proper execution of the contract works showing explicitly all the
installation details and arrangement. All drawings shall be submitted for
the approval of the Engineer before any work is carried out. The
milestones for submission of drawings shall be indicated in the Program
of Electrical Works, on submission of tender.

346
17.1.1.2 Record drawings
During the execution of the Works on Site, the Contractor shall in a
manner approved by the Engineer record on working Drawings all
deviations or modification on the electrical work as actually installed
from work indicated on the drawings. All construction drawings on-site
shall be updated by the contractor on a regular basis to reflect current
as-built conditions and as commissioned drawings are submitted to the
Engineer for final approval.

Marked-up working or other Drawings and other Documents shall be

made available to the Engineer as he may require for inspection and
checking.

Record Drawings may, subject to approval, include approved working

drawings adjusted as necessary and certified by the Contractor as a
correct record of the installation of the Contract Works.

17.1.1.3 As Built Drawings

On completion of the contract and before final payment certificate is
issued, the contractor must provide a complete set of “As built drawing”
drawings of the entire installations. Drawings shall be in a scale and
size approved by the Engineer and shall be submitted in six (6)
hardbound volumes and electronically in form of Compact disc (CD).
Drawing files shall be in AutoCAD format release 2006

17.1.1.4 Shop drawings

Shop drawings (also spare part list, operating instructions etc) of
equipment installed shall form part of the “As built “documentation.

Coordinated drawings
A co-ordinated set of construction drawings will be issued based on
tender drawings showing all the services and equipment described in
the specification. The contractor shall be responsible for developing
the final coordinated drawings for construction purposes. The
drawings shall show the precise routing of all the services, all fixing and
bracketing details for all plant, equipment and distribution systems and
the builders work.

347
The Engineer must grant structural approval for all plant and builders
work requirements but this approval shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for complying with the specification.
Setting out and Builders Work

The contractor shall execute all builders’ work in connection with the
Electrical installation.

The builders’ work in connection with the electrical installation shall

include cutting away and making good after electrical installation and
laying of all the necessary foundation for generators, switchgears, cable
trench or piping and backfilling, and support of various equipment and
plant.

Works are to be executed in compliance with the existing standards and

or codes of practice adopted.

Testing and Inspection of Contractor’s work

The Engineer or his representative shall at all reasonable time have

access to such part of the contractor’s work as may be necessary for
the purpose of inspecting and testing the materials,workmanship and
performance of the equipment or plant.

On completion of any section of the installation and before they are

concealed or insulated, they shall be tested according to the good
practice of the relevant trade. Any defects revealed by the test must be
rectified and the test repeated at the contractor’s expense.

In the event of any portion of the work or materials failing to pass the
test specified herein, or set forth in the manufacturer’s lists for that
particular item, The Engineer may, at his discretion, reject that portion
of the work or material entirely.

Working drawings
All controls and safety devices must be tested to ensure that they
function according to their design.

348
 During commissioning, the contractor shall instruct the Employer’s
representative on how to operate and maintain the installations.

Materials
Where materials of particular manufacture are called for in the
specification, the Engineer shall have the Authority to reject any
materials that are not of the make specified. Where the word “or other
approved equivalent “ are used, it is understood that this means make
of equal quality but written approval of the Engineer for the use of any
such alternative shall be obtained prior to their use in the installation. In
the absence of any such request the Engineer is entitled to suppose
that the material as specified will be used.

17.1.1.10 Workmanship
The whole work shall be carried out in a straightforward manner by
competent workmen, under skilled supervision as stipulated in
conditions of contract. The Engineer shall have authority to have portion
of the work taken down, removed or undone, which is executed in a
poor workmanship like manner or with improper materials. Where
required, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of
materials that he proposes to install for tests and approval for
installation.

In the event of the portion of the work or materials failing to pass the
specified test, or approval of the Engineer, the Contractor will be
required at his own expense to put right such defects.

17.1.1.11 Codes, Standards and Regulations

The works and installation of equipment will be governed by the
applicable codes and standards from the issuing organizations and
regulatory bodies listed below. The latest editions of the codes and
standards, effective on the date of contract award, will apply.

Where there is a conflict between the specified codes and regulations,

the standard, which requires the highest quality materials and
workmanship, and offers the highest degree of safety to personnel, will
be the governing standard.

349
 In addition, all facilities will be constructed and put into service
according to Tanzanian laws, regulations, codes and guidelines.

The codes and regulations shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:

Current Government Electrical Regulations

The current edition of “The Institution of Electrical Engineers Wiring

Regulations, 16th Edition” for Electrical Equipment of Buildings, and
incorporating any amendments applicable in the country of installation

The Bye-Laws of the Electricity Supply Authority

Relevant current editions of the IEC Standard Specifications and Code

of practice
Relevant IEEE regulations
Relevant UL regulations

Relevant IEC regulation

Relevant British Standard and Code of Practice

Relevant ANSI regulations

In addition to the minimum requirements described in the codes and

standards referenced herein, the contractor shall comply with all other
requirements contained in this specification. Alternative codes and
standards at least equivalent to those referenced may be substituted,
but the Engineers written approval will be required for this substitution.
In the event of any conflict, the Contractor shall seek resolution with the
Engineer.

17.1.1.12 Safety and Property Protection

All facilities of this contract shall be of the highest standards with
respect to public, employee and equipment safety.

The design and construction activities shall meet the safety

requirements of the Employer, TANESCO, Government of Tanzania,

350
 and normal practices as stipulated by the Contractors Registration
Board.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and protection
of persons and property on or near the place of Work.

Environmental Protection

17.1.2.1 General
The impact on the environment and on the surrounding community
during construction, commissioning and operation shall be minimized.

Use of materials known to be hazardous to personnel or the

environment such as asbestos, chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) based
refrigerant, halon, PCB, Tritium, etc. is prohibited

17.1.2.2 Noise criteria

All works shall be carried out in such that noise to the surrounding
areas is minimized.

17.1.3 Drawings, Data and documentation

17.1.3.1 Drawings
Drawing format shall be in accordance with the Employer’s
requirements. One (1) reproducible and three (3) copies each of
certified drawings should be submitted to the Employer for approval.

No more than one (1) month after the completion of the contract, the
contractor shall update all drawings to as-built and as-commissioned
status. These as-built drawings to be submitted to the Employer shall
include:

Three (3) sets of reduced sized print

Three (3) sets of full size prints
Three (3) sets of full sized reproducible
Electronic files of drawings in AutoCAD format 2006

All construction drawing on-site shall be updated by the contractor on a

regular basis to reflect current as-built condition until the final as-built

351
 and as commissioned drawings are submitted to the Employer for
approval.

17.1.3.2 Operator’s Instruction and Facility manuals

The contractor shall within one month after practical completion submit
to the Engineer Five (5) sets of hard covered bound volumes, each one
set containing the following information.

Operating instructions - covering all aspect of the system in detail

Check list - outlining a detailed step-by-step routine and preventive
maintenance procedures for all equipment in the system

Spare Parts list - This list shall show the recommended items and
quantities for each of the system as a whole.

Test Certificates - For both manufacturers and contractors site tests.

As-Installed drawings of each item of equipment and installation in full

detail showing all gadgets or components layout to the extreme of work
done.

Note:Each volume shall also include external tab-markers and a fully

detailed list of contents.

17.1.3.3 Service and maintenance manuals

The contractor shall prepare five (5) sets of service and maintenance
manuals for the equipment supplied by the contractor prior to the
commencement of pre-commissioning.

17.1.3.4 Language, Measurement and format

All communication between the contractor, his subcontractors and the
Employer, including all documents, notes on drawings, and submissions
required under this contract, shall be in English language.

Manuals shall be divided into sections covering the various system or

equipment supplied and shall be properly indexed and cross-
referenced.

352
 The International system of Units (SI) with imperial in brackets shall be
used on all drawings and design documents, except that imperial units
may be used if followed by SI equivalent in brackets.

17.1.4 Equipment registration

17.1.4.1 Certificate and registration of Equipment
The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining relevant certificates and
registration (for the equipment), which may be required by the
authorities, named in the "Codes and Regulations". The certificates
and registration will be transferred to the Engineer prior to Final
Acceptance

17.1.4.2 Plant and Equipment

The Contractor shall ensure that all plant and equipment that require
registration are registered and approved.

17.1.4.3 Electrical Equipment

All electrical equipment shall be tropicalized and approved by the
electrical authority having jurisdiction.

17.1.4.4 Materials
All materials and equipment shall be new and unused commercially
available materials, and shall be suitable to perform satisfactorily under
the operating conditions described in this specification.

All equipment shall be of a proven type that has been in successful

operation. The proposed use of equipment that is unproven shall be
clearly identified in the Contractor's proposal.

17.1.4.5 Site Testing

The Contractor shall submit his standard Quality Assurance (QA)
procedure for the Engineers’ approval.

Before submitting any finished site work for inspection by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall completely inspect such work and shall carry out all
tests that the specifications require. The Contractor shall keep
inspection and test records covering all phases of the work and shall
submit these records to the Engineer

353
17.1.5 Tagging and identification
All equipment shall be identified by a permanently attached tag or
nameplate. The tag shall identify the service, identification number and
use. Wording on tags and nameplates shall be in English

17.1.6 Painting
Where painting is required a priming coat of paint shall be applied to the
surfaces, followed by an undercoat and finishing coat. The paint
system used shall have a minimum total dry thickness of 0.15 mm with
no porosity. The finishing coat shall be resistant to weathering.

The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer’s approval, the painting
method and color standards he intends to adopt. In particular, he shall
specify paint material and the nominal value of the thickness of each
coat.

Finished painted surface shall be properly protected against possible

damage.

17.1.7 Spare parts

The Contractor shall provide a priced list of mandatory spares for
startup and two years operation for all service equipment.

All spare parts shall be interchangeable with, and of, the equipment
furnished.

The Engineer may at his discretion order all, any or none of the
recommended spares.

Spare parts shall be packaged for indefinite storage in the climate at the
Site. Each part shall be marked with its description and purpose and
stock number on the outside of the packaging.

17.1.8 Use of Site

The contractor shall provide all barriers, notice, hoarding, watchmen
and lighting to prevent unauthorized access and due protection of the
work, materials and equipment from being stolen or damaged.

354
 The contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and the Employer
of all adjacent highways, roadways, and footpaths, and shall conform to
all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitation
of traffic and movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for
delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only
at the locations approved by the Employer’s site representative. The
contractor shall be responsible for all damages to roads, crossovers,
service and the like arising from his execution of the work.

The contractor shall not house any labour on the site, with the exception
of the watchmen. He shall allow for all cost of moving the labour to and
from the site daily and at such times and by routes approved by the
Police and Local Authorities.

The contractor shall provide all temporary roads, tracks, hard standings,
crossing and the like to ensure satisfactory and efficient access to the
work. All such temporary roads and structures shall be to the approval
of the Employer’s site representative and may have to be removed on
completion of the work.

17.1.7 Procurement, Inspection and Expediting

17.1.7.1 Contractor’s responsibility
General
The contractor shall be wholly responsible for the procurement
inspection, expediting and shipment to the site of all materials and
equipment, etc within the contractor’s scope.

Placement of purchase order

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the negotiation and
placement of purchase orders for all equipment, etc. within the
Contractor's scope.

The Contractor shall submit major equipment manufacturers' production

schedules to the Engineer for information. These schedules shall
indicate, as a minimum, dates for start and completion of procurement,
fabrication, inspection, testing and shipping. All orders shall carry
notations that the material and workmanship are subject to inspection
by the Engineer. The Engineers reserves the right to attend any or all

355
meetings and to review any or all-technical correspondence between
the Contractor and major equipment manufacturers.

Inspection
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the inspection of all
materials and equipment within the Contractor's scope at the sub-
vendor and sub-contractor's works, including establishing inspection
and test points. All such points shall be indicated in the Sub-vendor's
production schedule.

The Engineer shall be notified of all upcoming inspection points at least

five (5) days in advance, and shall reserve the right to accept or decline
the invitation to attend inspections. In any event, the Contractor shall
be fully responsible for the quality of the material and equipment.

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certified copies of all
testing reports

Expediting
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the expediting of
information, documentation, equipment, materials and/or services from
its Sub-contractors and major equipment manufacturers in a timely
manner to meet the agreed-upon project schedule.

Shipment, Off-Loading and storage

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the shipment, off-loading
and proper storage on site of all required materials and equipment in
accordance with good shipping and storage practices (and as
recommended by the Contractor's Sub-contractors and equipment
manufacturers). The Contractor shall prepare all materialsfor shipment
and storage in such a manner as to protect them from damage or
deterioration and shall be responsible for and make good any and all
damage due to improper preparation and loading for shipment.

The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that all
materials that may be subject to deterioration in humid tropical
conditions are packed in such a manner as to prevent such
deterioration.

356
 All parts shall be carefully boxed or otherwise suitably prepared for
shipment to a tropical climate. All openings shall be tightly closed
before shipment. Equipment that will be vulnerable to damage due to
seawater or moisture during transportation or storage at the Site shall
be protected by a suitable vapour barrier and, if considered necessary
by the Contractor or on Engineers request, by an internal atmosphere of
inert gas or approved desiccant.

All parts exceeding 100 kg gross weight shall be prepared for shipment
so that slings for handling by crane may be readily attached while the
parts are on railway cars or on broad ship. The Contractor shall paint or
mark the weight of all pieces in excess of 5 tones. The Contractor shall
take necessary measures to avoid ingress of moisture during
transportation, storage and installation.

Three (3) copies of all bills of lading and packing lists shall be forwarded
to the Engineer on shipment of materials and twenty (20) days notice
shall be given to the Engineer of the arrival of any materials at the Port
of Entry.

Permit
The Contractor shall prepare applications and submit on Employer's
behalf, for all necessary permits for the safe and legal construction,
installation and operation of the equipment from the required approving
bodies.

The costs of these permits and submittals will be borne by the

Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging inspections and

approvals as required by the authorities.

17.1.8 General requirement for commissioning

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price the
services of a specialist or manufacturer's Engineer and/or Technician to
assist in the Installation and Commissioning of the Works or any part
thereof if the Contractor has not his own suitable and competent staff
available at site to carry out such functions.

357
The inspection, testing and commissioning of all works under the
project shall be carried out in accordance with the acceptable
TANESCO procedures.

A detailed test procedures document shall be prepared by the

Contractor, based on the requirements on the TANESCO Inspection
and Certificate Manual, and submitted for approval by the Engineer
before commencement of any testing. All tests shall be run in
accordance with the agreed procedure and recorded as required.

Where commissioning procedures are contained within the Inspection

and Certification Manual, these shall be adhered to. Where procedures
do no exist or the commissioning is subject to specialist vendor
commissioning, then the procedure to be adopted shall be developed
and agreed with the Engineer.

The provision of suitable test equipment to enable testing and

commissioning to be carried out shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Where the contractor doesnot have the necessary
equipment, he shall arrange its hire at his own cost to prevent any delay
to the testing and commissioning programme.

The Contractor shall not submit equipment for testing or inspection until
he has completed his own inspection and remedied any faults.

Before formal testing commences, the Contractor shall ensure that a

complete set of documentation is available which accurately reflects the
installation. This documentation shall be for the use of system
commissioning

The Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating the satisfactory

operation of all equipment within the scope of works, and the provision
of all consumable equipment required for testing and commissioning.

Upon practical completion of the works and before handing over the
building and installations to the employer, an acceptance test on proper
operation of the electrical installations will be carried out.

358
 These will involve but not restricted to:

Check the compliance of all installed system operation with design

parameters.

Operation of all control components and if they have been installed in

accordance with specified requirements and manufacturers instructions.

Checking all safety devices including circuit breakers, fire protection

equipment, emergency lighting and cut-outs if they have been installed
correctly

17.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

17.2.1.0 General
These specifications shall strictly be read in conjunction with the
preceding sections, except where stated otherwise elsewhere. The
General Specification shall be treated as Particular Specification as far
as this Contract is concerned except where stated otherwise elsewhere.
Further more these Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the
Bills of Quantities and the Contract Drawings.

17.2.1.1 Scope of Works

The detailed works are as indicated on the tender drawings and as
described later in these specifications and bills of quantities but as a
guide the main elements will include but not necessarily be limited to
the following:

Installation of LV switchgears and equipment

Installation of standby generators
Installation of lighting system
Installation of cable management system
Installation of cable and wiring
Installation of data and voice system
Installation of fire alarm system
Installation of lightning protection and earthing systems
Testing and commissioning of the installation
Builders work associated with the above works

359
 The Contractor shall supply all materials, labour, installations, fixing,
connecting, testing, labeling, commissioning and delivering the
installations complete and working in every detail as described
elsewhere in the specifications and on the drawings to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.

17.2.1.2 Codes, Standards and Specifications

The works and installation of equipment will be governed by the
applicable codes and standards from the issuing organizations and
regulatory bodies listed below. The latest editions of the codes and
standards, effective on the date of contract award, will apply.

Where there is a conflict between the specified codes and regulations,

the standard, which requires the highest quality materials and
workmanship, and offers the highest degree of safety to personnel, will
be the governing standard.

In addition, all facilities will be constructed and put into service

according to Tanzanian laws, regulations, codes and guidelines.

The codes and regulations shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
Current Government Electrical Regulations

The current edition of “The Institution of Electrical Engineers Wiring

Regulations, 16th Edition” for Electrical Equipment of Buildings, and
incorporating any amendments applicable in the country of installation

The Bye-Laws of the Electricity Supply Authority

Relevant current editions of the IEC Standard Specifications and Code

of practice

Relevant IEEE regulations

Relevant UL regulations

Relevant IEC regulation

Relevant British Standard and Code of Practice

360
 Relevant ANSI regulations
In addition to the minimum requirements described in the codes and
standards referenced herein, the contractor shall comply with all other
requirements contained in this specification. Alternative codes and
standards at least equivalent to those referenced may be substituted,
but the Engineers written approval will be required for this substitution.
In the event of any conflict, the Contractor shall seek resolution with the
Engineer.

17.2.2 Supply of Electricity

TANESCO will be responsible for the extension of the existing HT line
along Morogoro road up to the last pole to be located inside the
Terminal ground. The contractor shall be responsible for installation of
underground cable from the last pole and all other equipment as shown
on the drawings. TANESCO shall provide metering on the high voltage
side. The contractor shall be responsible for arranging the necessary
applications for the service line and tariff meters.

Any and all applicable costs that the client is liable for to TANESCO in
conjunction with this service in any way shall be included. The client will
reimburse the Contractor of the TANESCO costs for service line and
commissioning at actual.

The Contractor is strongly advised to inspect the site. Any claim due to
lack of knowledge that should otherwise have been obtained by so
doing shall not be entertained.

17.2.3.0 Supply and Distribution

17.2.3.1 Sub Main Lv Switchboard
The main switchboards (MS) shall be of the cubicle type, free standing
& front access. The maximum height shall be 2.2 metres and the
maximum depth shall be 400mm. Layout of the main switchboard is
subject to approval. The main LV switchboard shall be manufactured
and tested in accordance with IEC 439-1, 947, 408, BS EN 60439 – 1
and type tested according to IEC 439-1 for the main switchboard(s) is
subject to approval.

361
17.2.3.2 MCB Distribution Boards
Distribution boards shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 364,
439-1, BS 5486, IP 31. The Distribution Boards shall be fitted with
components as shown in drawings.

The distribution boards shall be surface mounted, fitted with DIN rail
and integral RCD incomers and current limiting circuit breakers. The
MCB’s for lighting shall be type B in accordance with IEC 898 and BS
EN 60898.

The enclosures for distribution boards shall be manufactured from

robust material preferably mild steel sheet with epoxy powder coating.
The doors shall be provided with a latch and shall be reversible i.e. able
to open from left or right side.

The distribution boards shall be labelled and be provided with typed

chart showing outgoing circuits.

17.2.4.0 Electrical Installations Related to Mechanical Plants

17.2.4.1 Scope
The contractor shall supply all labour, material and incidentals
necessary to provide a complete, workable electrical installation to all
mechanical plants as stated or implied by mechanical service
specification or accompanying drawings as listed in schedule of
drawings for mechanical service.

17.2.4.2 Motor Control Centres

17.2.4.2.1 Scope
Motor control centers for all the mechanical plants shall be supplied and
installed under the mechanical works scope of works. Supply of power
to the respective control panels for the mechanical plants shall be
undertaken as part of the electrical scope of works.

The mechanical contractor shall undertake power reticulation from the

control centers to the specific mechanical plants.

The Contractor shall ensure that cables are run and connected to the
appropriate equipments on the suitable location of the feeder
connection at the motor control centres.

362
 The motor control centres to be supplied shall comply with the short
circuit levels as indicated in the drawings.

17.2.4.2.2 Mechanical Plants

Mechanical plants shall include but not be limited to water pumps, fire
fighting pumps, air conditioning together with their associated automatic
pressure and water level control.

17.2.5.0 Lighting Installation

17.2.5.1 Lighting Fittings
Lighting fittings shall be of high quality, of type and make as shown on
the drawings and/or as specified herein and in the measured works.
Lighting fittings shall be manufactured to relevant British Standards and
they shall be supplied complete with suspension accessories, lamps,
canopies, hickeys, casings, sockets, holder, louvres etc.

The Contractor shall exercise particular care in hanging of all fixtures to

ensure that supports, hickeys, studs, saddles etc. are sufficiently strong
and properly installed to prevent the failure of supports during the
normal process of cleaning and maintaining lighting fixtures.

Where fixtures are attached directly to concrete slabs or walls, they

shall be installed in such a manner as to be completely readily
removable without damage to the unit.

Fixtures shall in general be mounted parallel to or at right angles to

walls and column lines except where specifically shown otherwise.

Rows of fixtures shall be truly aligned and of uniform mounting height

within each particular area.

The Contractor shall ensure that all mounting arrangements, trim and
accessories for all fixtures are complete and to suit ceilings and walls in
which they are installed.

The Contractor shall refer to the Engineerural drawings and

specifications for ceiling details and be completely familiar with the

363
 types of ceilings used, with particular regard to supporting frames,
spacing, ceiling panels etc. prior to ordering the fixtures.

The Contractor shall provide and install all lamps as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
All fluorescent fittings shall be power factor compensated to a minimum
of 0.9 and their control gears shall be rated 230V AC.

17.2.5.2 Emergency Lighting

The Contractor shall supply and install emergency lighting and exit
signage of the type indicated in bills of quantities and tender drawings.

Emergency luminaires shall conform to BS 4533 and 5499 parts 1,2&3.

The emergency luminaires shall have maintained mode of operation
and three-hour duration upon mains failure.

Exit signage shall provide clear and unambiguous light for the escape
route to final exits. The signage shall conform to BS 5499 part 1.

17.2.5.3 Internal Lighting

The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of the surface
mounted luminaries on the ceiling or structural soffit or recessed in the
ceiling etc. Wire all the luminaries from the respective distribution
boards using single core PVC insulated cables. Install cables in heavy
gauge steel conduits in ceiling, walls and partitions where possible

17.2.5.4 External Lighting

The Contractor shall be responsible for erection, fixing of complete set
of lamp, fitting and brackets, alignment and provision of foundation for
the external lights as shown on the drawings.

The contractor shall also be responsible for excavation of trenches and

routing of the cables for outdoor lights.

17.2.6 Fire Alarm System

The contractor shall supply and install a complete functioning fire alarm
system complying with BS5839 consisting of components, which
comply with BS5364, 5445 and 5446.

364
 Mounting of detectors and alarm sounders as detailed below: -
Call points mounted at a height of 1400mm above finished floor lever to
centre.
Alarm sounders 1800mm above finished floor lever to centre.
Smoke and heat detectors shall be mounted on ceiling.

All fire alarm system call and sounder points shall be connected using
1.5mm2 Fire tuf cable with red PVC over – sheath. Surface mounted
accessories shall be supplied with the necessary bases.

Cables shall be drawn in conduits concealed in walls or surface run

within ceiling voids.

A surface mounted alarm panel shall be installed with alarm circuit and
sounder circuits as indicated on the drawings. All sounders shall ring on
the operation of one or more of the manual call points.

Provide a 240V AC supply to the alarm panel from a separate

appropriately indicated position on main switch panel. A label at the fire
panel shall be provided noting clearly the location of the controlling
switch and procedure to isolate all supplies from panel. Including in the
supply are sealed acid batteries and charger to support operation for 24
hours after the loss of mains supply and a further 30 minutes in alarm
mode.

17.2.6.1 Voice and Data Installation

The scope of work includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of voice and data outlets and cabling to category 5E
standards and equipment defined in this specifications and the
associated drawings.

The telephone system/handsets and installation of PBAX are excluded

from this contract.

Data outlets shall comprise of dual shielded RJ 45 shuttered outlets as

MK, Marshall Tuflex etc. The contractor shall provide suitable mounting
boxes either in wall or trunking as the case may be.
A 4 pair UTP cable shall be run from the data cabinet in the server room
to each outlet.

365
 Cables shall be installed flat, parallel and without kinks or twists. Care
must be taken to ensure that the bending radius at a turning is not less
than that recommended.

The protective sheath, screen and insulation of all the installed cables
shall be intact at all points along each cable. Any cable found to be
damaged during or after installation should be replaced in its entirety.

17.2.8 Earthing Systems

17.2.8.1 Types of Earth Termination Networks
The following earthing systems are recognized as being in application in
electrical installations:

Deep Driven Earthing: Metal rods, pipes, plates or dynamic electrodes

are driven deep in ground, at least 3.3 and more for good dissipation.
They are lined to the inspection joint.

Trench Electrodes: in rocky areas or seabeds, the metal tapes are laid
in 0.5 m deep trenches of length as per the required resistance
(minimum of 9m length is required). Shorter lengths in parallel, dully
interconnected, or single length depending on space available are used.
Ground Grid Mesh Electrodes; Combination of plates and rods of
identical metals are put deep in ground for Grid mesh earthing.

The deep driven earthing and ground grid mesh electrodes systems are
the preferred methods. The design assumes that the ground grid mesh
electrodes shall be applicable for this installation.

The Contractor shall measure the soil characteristics and pit resistance
and accordingly recommend to the Engineer the type of earthing and
the earth electrodes to be used.

17.2.8.2 Earthing and Equipotential Connections

The earthing conductors, clamps, connectors, terminals and
connections shall be installed to ensure that the system earthing is in
accordance with the requirements of power authority or BS 7430:191.

366
 Non live conductors and parts designed to become live during
operation, all metal work forming part of or associated with electric
installation shall be earthed or protected as required by BS 7430:1991

Each apparatus shall be earthed through the shortest direct route with
minimum joints. Earthing by series of conductors looped from an earth
terminal on one equipment to another shall be prohibited.

The disconnection of protective conductor or conductors from any

equipment shall not isolate equipment from the earth grid. The
protective conductors shall be installed such that all equipment shall be
connected to earth grid during maintenance and servicing.

17.2.8.3 Earthing and Protective Conductors

The conductors shall be made of PVC insulated stranded copper wire
or annealed high conductivity copper tape. The cross section areas
shall be as indicated in the drawing. Each downward earth conductor
shall be protected by conduit from ground level to 1500mm above the
ground. Earth conductors shall be firmly clipped to wall. No any Cu/Al
joints shall be allowed in the system.

Under no circumstance shall conductors be run through plates,

sections, conduits or pipes of iron, steel or other ferromagnetic
materials which completely surround them unless all live conductors
which these protect pass through the full length of such apertures,
conduits pipes etc.

Where support for a conductor is required, a steel channel or a non-

magnetic support or insulated pipe shall be used.

There shall be one conductor to each circuit or cable where the

equivalent cross section and measured resistance values can be
maintained at adequate levels. The sheaths (including armouring of
cables) and metal conduits shall be bonded to earth potential.

17.2.8.4 Principal Earth Continuity Conductors and Joints

A principle protective conductor shall be run from the main electrical
intake position in one unbroken length to each distribution board, and
hence to any major equipment fed there from. Branch protective

367
 conductors shall be jointed and sweated or attached in other permanent
and approved manner to the principal protective conductor as required.

In any run of cable trunking exceeding one length of trunking shall be

provided. Each individual length of trunking shall be earthed to this
conductor. Straight through joints shall not be permitted unless the
situation is unavoidable and approved by the engineer. Principal and
Branch earth Conductors shall be laid out so that any earth leakage or
fault current passes to earth through the shortest reasonable length of
conductor and the minimum number of joints.

Branch conductors shall be properly jointed into principal conductors

and the joints sweated solid, or made in other approved manner. Where
earth clips are required, they shall be of substantial construction in
copper or galvanized steel. Clips shall be provided with washers
designed to secure the earth continuity conductor.

17.2.8.5 Branch Protective Conductors and Bonding

Each equipment required to be earthed shall be connected to the
principal protective conductor directly or via a branch conductor. No
branch protective conductor (other than one incorporated in a plastic
sheathed cable by the manufactures or the earth core of a multi core
flexible cord) shall have a cross-sectional area of less than 4sq.mm
copper or equivalent.

In all cases where plastic conduits are used a protective conductor shall
be drawn into it in addition to circuit wiring. The protective conductor
shall run from the distribution board to the farthest point in each circuit
directly and without any break or looping point.

Bonding shall be provided where necessary to ensure continuous

electrical conductivity across conduit and trunking joints. Bonding metal
pipes shall be with copper earth clips provided with washers to secure
the connection.

17.2.8.6 Earth Terminations

The earth termination from the transformer neutral point shall be copper
plated steel rods driven to ground at not less than 1 metre below ground

368
 level. The earth wire of 95 sq. mm shall be connected to the said rods
by copper clamps supplied with electrodes.

Other earth terminations shall be of solid copper or copper-clad steel

not less than dia.16mm in sections of 1500mm. Joints between lengths
shall be made by internal coupling pieces and shall make good copper
to copper contact between lengths. A hard steel point shall be
connected to the leading end of the first rod driven at each termination.
A half-hard steel driving head shall be used to protect the upper end of
the rod while driving. Rod electrodes shall be driven into the ground
with the top set 100mm below finished ground level.

The earth dispersion resistance shall be not more than 1.0*ohm at the
socket to the combined earth grid by earth plates and shall be not more
than 10*ohm at the socket to earth grid for lightning discharge earth
terminal.

17.2.8.7 Earthing Conductor and Connections

The earth wire or tape shall be secured to the rod with an approved
clamp. The upper end of each earth rod shall be housed in a concrete
lined pit with a concrete slab cover. The house may be of the
prefabricated cast iron type with "EARTH" written on the cover.

When required by the drawings or by variation order, base copper tapes

on bare copper solid conductors shall be used as earth terminations.
These shall have a cross-section of not less that 95mm2 and will be
coiled and assembled into mats or laid at length as instructed. The
earth terminations shall contain no buried joints other than those
required by the drawings and shall be buried at the depths specified,
but normally not nearer the surface than 100cm.

Water carrying pipes shall not be used as earth terminations except

when authorised by the Engineer.

Where more than one earth termination is required the earth leads from
these will be brought to a convenient point and bolted individually to a
common bar, which will form part of the main earth lead. Where multiple
earth terminations are used, the spacing between these will normally be
twice the maximum depth of the terminations.

369
17.2.8.8 Earth Resistance
The desired earth resistance is less than 1 ohms for equipment earth
and less than 5 ohms for lightning earth.

17.2.8.9 Soil Resistivity

The Contractor shall conduct a soil resistivity survey and details of the
local soil conditions. The soil resistivity of various depths shall be
measured at the site using the Wenner Method. The optimum soil
resistivity shall be used to determine a suitable earth electrode system
in accordance with BS 7430.

17.2.8.10 Conductor Type and Size

Earthing can be made using copper/GI plates, pipes and rods.
However, only copper plates/rods or GI pipe earth pits shall be
permitted. Use of salt and charcoal is strictly prohibited. The use of soil
conditioning agents shall have to be approved by the Engineer.

Appropriate length of copper cable 70mm2 or copper strip 25 mm x 3

mm shall be taken with necessary clamps to be placed on electrodes
for interconnection.

17.2.8.11 Depth of Burial of Earth Grid

An earth electrode shall be connected to each down conductor with test
link incorporated into every down conductor path. The lightning
protection system shall not exceed 10 ohms.

The minimum dimensional requirement of the electrode system shall

consist of a minimum combined rod length as defined by BS 6651.

17.2.8.12 Duration of Fault Current

The system is designed for fault duration of one second.

17.2.8.13 Magnitude of Fault Current

A transmission may be provided for telephone and data communication.
The Contractor shall state whether the full earth current will flow from
the earth mesh into the surrounding soil or whether it will be
proportioned through the cable sheaths or aerial earth wire of a
transmission tower.

370
17.2.8.14 Test Points
There shall be a test point in every down lead of a lightning protection
system, and in every earth lead to multiple earth terminations where
they cannot otherwise be disconnected for testing individually.

Test points shall be provided 150cm from ground level in all down
tapes. They shall be a screw down type test clamp of an approved
pattern and the ends of the tape at this point shall be tinned. Both ends
of tape shall pass through both sides of the test clamp. Special
requirement will be stated in the particular specification.

17.2.9 Emergency Power Supply

17.2.9.1 Stand by Generators
17.2.9.1.1 General
This section covers the particular specifications for the design,
manufacture, transport, erection and commissioning of the
containerised standby diesel generator sets to be installed outdoor as
shown on drawings. The diesel generator set will be required to provide
the necessary standby power supply during mains failure.

17.2.9.1.2 Scope of Supply

15 kVA, Stand-By Diesel Generator System, including housing, all parts
and accessories for Type A- Bus Stations

Supply and installation of 15 kVA, Stand-By Diesel Generator System,

including housing, all parts and accessories.

The emergency power system must be sufficient to operate all

important consumers if main power is failing. These are all consumers
that are needed to lift the water through the plant and to keep the plant
in a standby condition. Current peaks e.g. by start-up of big drives must
be taken into account at the design of the generators.

In case of power failure, the diesel generating sets must automatically

guarantee the electrical power supply. Following only the legimated
consumers for emergency case will be supplied.

The Contractor has to deliver and install the Diesel Generating Sets,
including all additional equipment and accessories that are necessary to

371
get a very reliable emergency power system which meets the present
state of the art.

Fulfilled and carried out:

Basic Requirements
Genset designed for operation according to DIN 6280 for emergency
power supply
Speed: 1500 rpm
Cos : 0.8
Voltage:400V, 3-phase
Frequency:50 Hz
Generator:3-phase synchronous alternator, 1500 rpm
Design standard:DIN 6280 for

Intake air temperature: up to 45 °C

Site altitude: 830 m
Overload capability to DIN 6280: 10% for transient load
response
The Diesel Generating Set has to be tested on the manufacturers' test
stand in the presence of the Employer’s Representative (if wanted). The
test stand has to be equipped with different adjustable resistances,
restrictors, etc. that allow the following requirements to be realised:
Verification of all control and monitoring functions
3 starts with preheated engine.

Load imposition: Dynamic behaviour must comply with DIN 6280, part 3
50% load 8 seconds after start command.

30% load after each subsequent 3-4 second period, so that start-up and
load imposition sequences are completed at maximum 15 seconds after
start initiation

Load test sequence:

1h 100% load
¼ h 75% load
¼h 25% load
¼h 110% load
Load testing to be performed with cos  = 0.8
Fuel System

372
The fuel system shall provide 6 hours Genset operation under full load.
30 kVA, Stand-By Diesel Generator System, including housing, all parts
and accessories for Type B - Bus Stations

Supply and installation of 30 kVA, Stand-By Diesel Generator System,

including housing, all parts and accessories.

The emergency power system must be sufficient to operate all

important consumers if main power is failing. These are all consumers
that are needed to lift the water through the plant and to keep the plant
in a standby condition. Current peaks e.g. by start-up of big drives must
be taken into account at the design of the generators.

In case of power failure, the diesel generating sets must automatically

guarantee the electrical power supply. Following only the legimated
consumers for emergency case will be supplied.

The Contractor has to deliver and install the Diesel Generating Sets,
including all additional equipment and accessories that are necessary to
get a very reliable emergency power system which meets the present
state of the artfulfilled and carried out:

Basic Requirements
Genset designed for operation according to DIN 6280 for emergency
power supply
Speed: 1500 rpm
Cos : 0.8
Voltage: 400V, 3-phase
Frequency: 50 Hz
Generator: 3-phase synchronous alternator, 1500 rpm
Design standard: DIN 6280 for
Intake air temperature: up to 45 °C
Site altitude: 830 m

Overload capability to DIN 6280: 10% for transient load response

The Diesel Generating Set has to be tested on the manufacturers' test
stand in the presence of the Employer’s Representative (if wanted). The
test stand has to be equipped with different adjustable resistances,
restrictors, etc. that allow the following requirements to be realised:

373
 Verification of all control and monitoring functions 3 starts with
preheated engine

Load imposition: Dynamic behaviour must comply with DIN 6280, part 3
50% load 8 seconds after start command 30% load after each
subsequent 3-4 second period, so that start-up and load imposition
sequences are completed at maximum 15 seconds after start initiation
Load test sequence:
1h 100% load
¼h 75% load
¼h 25% load
¼h 110% load
Load testing to be performed with cos  = 0.8
Fuel System
The fuel system shall provide 6 hours Genset operation under full load.

17.2.9.1.3 Technical Requirements

The generator sets shall have the following specifications:

17.2.9.1.3.1 Diesel Engine

The engine shall be of four-stroke compression ignition, pressure
charged (turbo charged) water-cooled combustion type. The units shall
run on diesel fuel and shall operate at a speed not exceeding 1500 rpm.
The engines shall comply with the specifications set out in BS 649 BS
5514 - or equivalent national standard, and shall be capable of
producing the rated output continuously under the most adverse
climatic conditions maximum ambient temp 400C. Maximum altitude
relative humidity at site in Dar es Salaam. The offered equipment shall
be of a well-proven type, with reference of similar engines installed
preferably at locations of similar climatic conditions (tropicalized).

The overload capacity shall be 10% of the rated output for one hour
every 12 hours of operation.

17.2.9.1.3.2 Coupling and Bearing Arrangement

The tenderer is free to choose the Coupling and bearing arrangement,
i.e. solid flange coupling and one generator bearing concept, or flexible
coupling and two generator bearings. However the tenderer shall
carefully investigate the torsional behaviour of all rotating points within

374
 the engine/generator unit, and take all necessary steps to avoid
excessive stresses being set up.

17.2.9.1.3.3 Foundations
The engine and generator shall be mounted on a common base frame
to simplify alignment and to allow anti vibration mounting supplied by
Contractor to be introduced between base frame and foundation.

The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to minimize the

transmission of engine vibration to the building structures by isolating
the engine foundations from the structural members, by utilizing flexible
piping and conduits bridging the engine and the floors or walls etc.

The Contractor shall also take necessary steps to minimise engine

noise levels to the building and its surroundings by incorporating special
containers to serve the purpose.

17.2.9.1.3.4 Pumps
The pumps for cooling-water, lubrication oil and fuel injection shall be
gear driven.

17.2.9.1.3.5 Governor
The Governor shall be of electronic sensing type, meeting the
requirements of BS 649 or equivalent approved standards as specified
for class A2, viz:

On suddenly taking off load while running at rated speed, the max.
change in speed shall not exceed 15% and permanently 4.5%. The
recovery time shall be 15 seconds.

Onchange of load by any step of 25% of the rated load while running at
rated speed, the maximum change in speed shall temporarily not
exceed 4% and permanently 1.5%. The maximum recovery time shall
be 5 seconds.
The steady load speed band shall not exceed 1% of the rated speed.

An external means of adjustment of the nominal speed setting by 5% at

all loads between zero and rated load shall be provided.

375
17.2.9.1.3.6 Charge Air System
The engine shall draw the charge air inlet. The Contractor shall take
care to ensure that the distance between the air intakes and the air
discharge is adequate to prevent air short-circuiting.

17.2.9.1.3.7 Cooling System

The engine shall utilize water circulated through the engine jacket by
means of a cooling water pump driven off the engine. The coolant is in
turn cooled in or air cooled radiator.

The cooling water pump shall be of the centrifugal type and the cooling
water circuit shall be fitted with a thermostatically operated bypass in
order to enable the engine to read the operating temperature in a
minimum time.

Provision shall be made for the checking of the return cooling-water for
rust and corrosion, acidity and impurities.

17.2.9.1.3.8 Lubrication Oil Cooler

The engine lubrication oil shall be circulated to lubrication oil cooler by
means of a pump gear driven off the engine. The oil may be cooled in
the radiator described above or alternatively in a separate heat
exchanger.

17.2.9.1.3.9 Exhaust System

The engine shall be furnished with a piped exhaust system allowing the
discharge of exhaust gases via a silencer to the atmosphere. The
silencer shall be installed close to the engine. The exhaust piping must
be designed to allow free expansion, and together with the silencer,
shall be lagged to a thickness of at least 3cm for reasons of heat and
noise. All strapping and supporting shall be made with vibration - free
mountings, thereby minimizing the transmission of engine vibration to
the building.

17.2.9.1.3.10 Service Tank

The diesel engine shall be equipped with a steel fuel tank mounted on
suitable steel structure in an elevated position in order to provide fuel
under pressure to the engine fuel injection pumps. The capacity of the

376
 tank shall be sufficient for approximately twelve hours operation on full
load. The tank shall be provided with a float switch and fuel level gauge.

The fuel shall pass through a fine mesh filter before entering the fuel
injection pump on the engine. The tank shall be provided with all
necessary cocks including drain cock to enable maintenance crew to
isolate the tank from the rest of the fuel system for repairs.

A drip tray shall be installed below the service tank to each minor leak.
To drain the drip tray a cock shall be provided in a suitable position.

17.2.9.1.3.11 Starting System

The stand by plant shall be electrically started using a battery operated
DC starter motor. The battery shall be heavy-duty type capable of
providing power to spin up to firing speed within 10 seconds. It should
be capable of making 10 consecutive starting attempts without using
engine pre-heaters. The starter battery shall be mounted on the engine
base frame, and designed for continuous charging. It shall be capable
of supplying total starting load of the engine, and the control circuits of
the engine control panel.

The battery charger shall be of current limiting type with automatic and
manual control. The capacity shall be sufficient to recharge a
completely discharged battery in a maximum of 24 hours.

The cranking cycle shall be 10 seconds cranking and 10 seconds

waiting through 5 complete cycles. If the start is unsuccessful after 5
complete cycles the engine shall be locked out and the fail to start
alarm shall be initiated, so that addition manual attempts may be made.

Charger Specifications
Power supply - 230V single phase
Output voltage adjustment - +15% of nominal
Stability of output - +1.5% for maximum input and F Variations and 1%
to 95% of rated output current.
Dry type transformers and solid state (thyristor) rectifiers.
Toggle switch for independent battery measurement of voltage
Instruments - MCBs for protection on AC and DC side
One VDC – meter

377
 One ADC – meter
One lamp indicating the charger is charging.

17.2.9.1.3.12 Automatic Change-over Switch

An automatic change over switch shall be installed in order to start the
stand-by generator, disconnect the mains upon registering a main
failure, and hence load the essential load feeders. Similarly on
registering the return of healthy mains the stand by plant will be
shutdown and the mains reconnected.

Mains failure conditions is one or more of the following

Failure of one or more phases

phase reversal
line voltage unbalance exceeding 15% + 5%
low line voltage limit set to 65% + 10%

The change over switch shall be air integral part of the main LV
Switchboard as shown on drawings.

17.2.9.1.4 Control and Supervisory System

17.2.9.1.4.1 Control Panel
The control panel shall be of freestanding, front access; self ventilated
metal clad design, housing all the necessary instruments, controls,
supervisory equipment and protection devices. Ant-condensation heat
element, internal lighting and one double earthed single phase socket
outlet.

17.2.9.1.4.2 General Protection Features

As a minimum requirement the standby generator shall be equipped
with protective features in order to prevent.

Engine over speed

Low lubrication oil pressure
High cooling water temperature
Over crack
Abnormal generator voltage
Generator over current
High generator stator temperature

378
 Generator earth fault
Bearing temperature supervision with alarm and stop should the control
circuit power fail, the standby unit must shut down
High oil temperature
Low coolant level
Prolonged overload.

17.2.9.1.4.3 Protective Features, Warning

In the event of one or more of the following situation, alarm shall be
given and cause displayed:-
lubrication oil pressure low
cooling water temperature high
fuel oil level low
generator stator temperature high
battery voltage low

Any other alarm condition may be suggested.

17.2.9.1.4.4 Protective Features, Alarm

In the event of one or more of the following situations arising, the alarm
shall be sounded, the unit shutdown locked out, and be unable to
restart until the fault has been corrected and the circuit reset.

Engine over speed

Generator voltage outside limits
Generator overload (over current)
Generator earth fault
Unit failed to start
Fire blocking signal

Any additional alarms may be suggested

17.2.9.1.4.5 Instruments
As minimum requirements, the following shall be provided either engine
mounted or in control panel:-

Engine speed measuring device, rpm

Lubrication oil pressure, N/cm2
Lubrication oil temperature, oC

379
 Cooling water temperature, oC
V-meter with selector switch, V
A-meter, one in each phase A
W-meter, W
Generator stator winding temperature oC
Engine running hours counter

17.2.9.1.4.6 Alarms and Indicators

Indications (alarms) shall at a minimum be provided, either in the form
of an annunciator panel or as indicating lamps installed in the control
panel;

Engine running; - engine over speed;

Lubrication oil pressure low; - cooling water temperature
high,- failed to start; - Generator over voltage;
Generator under voltage; - generator over current
Generator stator temperature high; - generator earth; fault;- fuel oil level
low; battery voltage low;
Controls of normal; - control current switched off.

17.2.9.1.4.7 Controls
The following shall be installed in the control panel

On-off master control switch

Manual auto selector switch
Start-stop push buttons
Emergency stop push button
Slow faster speed control switch
Governor characteristics adjustment
Voltage regulator characteristics adjustment
Generator breaker manual auto selector switch
Generator breaker discrepancy switch
Reset button
Generator anti-condensation heater on-off selector switch
Control panel anti-condensation heater on-off selector switch
Panel internal lighting switch
Control current on-off selector switch
Lamps test switch

380
17.2.9.1.5 Operation
17.2.9.1.5.1 Starting Sequence
Should the control register a mains failure for a period between 0.5
second and 2 minutes (to be set) the ACOS shall initiate the automatic
starting sequence of the standby unit. When the generator stabilizes, a
tripping signal shall be given for the busbar breakers in the low-voltage
boards from the supply. Therefore the associated generator breaker
and other breakers necessary to connect the low voltage boards shall
close and connect the standby generator to the busbar.

17.2.9.1.5.2 Engine Shutdown Sequence

The standby generator shall continue to supply the load until the mains
has been restored to within limits mentioned above, and has remained
stable and healthy for the duration of the present time.
Time delay (adjustable from 2 to 15min), this time delay shall prevent
premature initiation of the shutdown sequence before the mains has
been fully restored.

When the returning mains supply has proved to be satisfactory, the

ACOS shall initiate the standby plant shutdown by tripping the
generator breaker. As soon as the standby generator is disconnected,
a signal shall be given for the distribution boards normal breakers to
close.

The standby plant shall be allowed to idle for some time before the
engine is brought to a stand still in order to effect after cooling of the
unit.

Time delay (adjustable from 2 to 15 min), this time delay shall prevent
premature initiation of the shutdown sequence before the mains has
been fully restored.

17.2.10 POWER CABLES

17.2.10.1 GENERAL
Cable routes are indicated on the drawings for tender purposes but the
exact final routes shall be agreed with the Engineer.

The work shall include for the supply and installation of all jointing
materials, cable supports, steel racking and making all the necessary

381
cable joints. The cable shall be installed and tested in strict accordance
with the appropriate clauses of the IEE Regulations, the Factories Acts
and B.S. 6346 P.V.C. Insulated cables.

Cables shall at all times be handled with care and every effort made to
avoid damage. Unloading, rolling to position and mounting of cable
drums shall be carried out efficiently and carefully in the recognized
manner and cable shall be pulled from the top of drum and twisting shall
at all times be avoided.

Adequate numbers of drum jacks, rollers and other handling

accessories shall be used and makeshift arrangements will not be
tolerated. In all cases care shall be taken to break the rotation of the
drum and cable shall not be dragged over ground, concrete or any
surface but shall be adequately supported on rollers or man-handled
into position.

The Contractor shall take particular care to avoid damage to other

services, which may run adjacent to or across the route of the cable
being installed.

Cables shall be installed with a minimum of 200 mm clearance of any

equipment or pipe work including lagging associated with other
services. Where this condition is unavoidable or difficult to maintain the
Engineer shall be informed prior to the installation being commenced,
otherwise the Contractor may be called upon to divert or adjust the
route of any cable so affected.

Cables shall not be installed within 300 mm of a metal roof, unless

clipped to the lower side of wooden joints or otherwise protected from
radiant heat.

Cables passing through structural floors shall be tightly wrapped with

asbestos tape and grouted in with a hardwood filling below, shaped to
suit the cables passing through.

Where cables are run vertically heavy gauge sheet metal guards shall
be supplied and fixed to the wall. The casing shall be fixed from floor

382
level to the underneath side of the appropriate end diving box or to a
height of 1.5 meter above floor level.

Where cables run through service ducts or cable trenches they shall be
fixed by means of purpose made cable hangers.

Hangers shall be of non-ferrous metal or of steel and shall be treated

with one coat of metal and two coats of anticorrosive paint and shall be
suitable for horizontal and vertical mounting either cast in or secured to
concrete structure using such brackets and adaptors as are available
from the manufacturers.

Hanger shall be spaced according to the IEE Regulations or to the

Manufacturer's recommendations, as appropriate, for the supports of
the cables. The Contractor shall take particular care to avoid sagging or
stress on any cable by wrongly positioned or inadequately spaced
hangers.

The sizes of cleats shall be selected such that all cleats can be
tightened down without exerting undue pressure or strain on the cable.

In the case of vertical cables the cleats shall be so designed and of

sufficient number to grip the cable firmly to prevent creeping. No cable
shall be without fixings and all cable hangers and racks shall be
approved by the Engineer before installation.

Where cable routes are subject to numerous changes in level and

direction, additional cable hangers shall be provided to satisfactorily
negotiate all such obstructions.

Where cables are spaced some distance from a supporting surface, the
cable racks shall be separately bolted to additional lengths of channel
section which in turn shall be fixed to brackets bolted and fixed into the
structure. Cables shall be colour coded throughout their length.

Identification of cables installed within buildings shall be supplied and

attached to each cable at intervals not greater than 15 metres and at all
conspicuous positions such as within cable trenches, manholes, and at

383
all cable terminations. Characters shall not be less than 3mm high and
shall be clearly visible.

The Contractor will carry out trenching and back filling, and he will be
responsible for marking out the cable route and for the supervision of
the back filling insofar as the prevention of damage to cables in this
process is concerned.

Cables in trenches are to be laid at a minimum depth of 0.6 m for LV

cables and 0.9 m for 11 kV cables and are to be on a 110 mm bed of
sifted soil or sand and a further 100 mm shall be added before laying
cable covers in position. The Contractor will carry out the sand bedding
and covering.

Where laid in trenches the cables are to be completely protected by

interlocking concrete or other approved cable covers indelibly marked
"Danger - Hatari", to be supplied and laid by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall supply and install concrete marker post at each
cable entry into a building, each change of direction, each change road
or pathway crossing and throughout the length of the cable at intervals
not exceeding 50 metres.

The position of all cable marker posts shall be agreed with the Engineer
before installation.

The Contractor will be responsible for the supply of the ducts as

indicated in the drawings.

After the installation of cables all ducts shall be adequately sealed to

prevent the ingress of moisture. The sealing substance shall be of the
non-hardening type.

The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that all cable size, circuit
breakers and fuse ratings given in the specification and/or Contract
Drawings are based on the use of cables with copper conductors unless
specifically specified to the contrary.

384
 The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his prices for
supplying sufficient cable lengths of each type and size to complete the
system and for making allowance for any additional length for cutting
and waste.

In the event that alterations to the system cable routes become

necessary the Contract Drawings will be revised and any adjustments in
lengths shall be measured there from and a variation order will be
issued to the Contractor based on the rates in the bills of quantities.

The Contractor shall attach his proposal and a breakdown of all

components forming the system on tendering.

17.2.10.2.1 PVC, SWA, PVC Cables

PVC sheathed multicore cables shall have stranded copper conductors
and shall be 600/1000-volt grade, manufactured in accordance with B.S
6346.An approval system of compression terminations as
recommended by cable manufacturer shall be used. Cable sizes and
application shall be as indicated on particular drawings.

17.2.10.2.2 LV Cables
These shall be of steel wire armoured capable to withstand highest
equipment voltage of 1200V at 50Hz, and they shall be single core.

Inner live conductive parts shall be of copper strands.

End terminations shall be of direct crimp on method while connections

to other live conductive parts shall be through compression copper lugs
of appropriate sizes.

17.2.10.2.3 Wiring
Wiring shall be carried out in an approved type of PVC insulated single
core copper conductor cable. The colours of the cores shall comply with
the colour code requirements of the IEE Regulations. Under no
circumstances shall it be permitted to draw cable into an incomplete
section of the conduit installation. The wiring shall be carried out in the
looping-in principle. All joints shall be made at the terminals of main
switches, and socketed outlets, etc, and fixed apparatus only. No joints
shall be made in boxes unless approved.

385
 The cable shall be run in the conduit so as not to exceed the capacities
as set out in the IEE Regulations (16th Edition) with current
amendments.

Where fittings and accessories require earthing, an earth continuity

conductor shall be run through the conduit. The earth continuity
conductor shall be a bare copper wire of minimum size 2.5mm2 and
shall be continuous between terminals. All metal boxes shall be
equipped with an earth terminal. Each final sub-circuit that is required to
be earthed shall be provided with its own individual earth continuity
conductor which shall be run from a terminal on the earth bar in the
distribution board or consumer's control unit protecting the particular
final sub-circuit. Attention is drawn to the requirements to install earth
continuity conductors when plastic conduit system are used. The load
and return conductors of the same circuit or circuits shall, in all cases,
be drawn in the same conduit.

Not more than six final sub-circuit cables shall run in conduits feeding
outlet boxes without the approval of the Engineer. Not more than eight
cables running straight back to the distribution board shall be enclosed
in any one conduit.

Flexible cords shall be of 250-Volt grade VR or PVC insulated and shall

comply with B.S. 6007 & 6500. No flexible cord smaller than 0.75 mm2
shall be used. Flexible cords for pendant fittings shall be circular, heat
resistant type, white finish.

17.2.11 Conduits, Trunking and Associated Fittings

17.2.11.1 General
Surface conduit shall be run in square symmetrical lines and shall be
marked on site for approval before installation. Conduits shall be fixed
by means of distance saddles spaced at not more than 1.2m (for 20 and
25 mm diameter conduit) and 1.5 m for larger sizes and steel conduits
and 0.7m for PVC conduits. Surface conduits shall also be fixed on both
sides of all boxes at a distance not greater than 0.9. Surface conduit
shall also be fixed on both sides of all boxes at a distance not greater
than 0.2 m, the box itself being securely fixed. Where such an
arrangement of boxes and saddles would prove to be both unsightly

386
and unnecessary, short lengths of conduit not exceeding 0.9 m in length
between boxes need not be secured further than by connection to the
adjacent boxes. Sunken conduit run in chases in walls shall be fixed by
means of mild steel pipe hooks or non-metallic saddles spaced not
more than 0.9 m. Where conduit is concealed behind plaster it shall be
sunk to a depth of either 15 mm below finished plaster level, or installed
flush with the structural wall level before application of plaster,
whichever is the lesser depth.

Conduit cast-in-situ shall be frequently secured to the steel

reinforcement work, with heavy binding wire to prevent movement of the
conduit and conduit boxes during the pouring and vibrating of the
concrete.

Outlet boxes shall be filled with paper to prevent ingress of concrete,

and all boxes shall be securely fixed to the shuttering with nails, or by
means which shall be visible as a marker on removal of the shuttering
only where these marks can be concealed. Conduit shall be installed
after the first grid of steel reinforcement work is securely fixed and
couplings plugged with a suitable non-metallic stopping plug shall
protect all open ends of conduit. The number of right angle bends in
conduit cast-in-situ shall not exceed two between boxes. Where straight
runs of conduit are installed, draw-in boxes shall be provided at
distances not exceeding 15 metres.

Immediately prior to installing the wiring all conduit and fittings shall be
dried and cleaned out by drawing through a cloth swab. Rawlplugs shall
be used for fixing to aluminium section, rawlnuts, spring toggles,
gravitytoggles or rawlbolts shall be used for fixing to other materials as
approved by the Engineer. Corners shall be turned by easy bends or
sets made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions without
altering the section or splitting the conduit.

Conduits shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent interference

with other services and shall be kept at least 150 mm clear of gas or
water pipes and heat in excess of 700C.

Where conduit runs enter specified areas requiring flameproof

equipment, barrier boxes shall be inserted immediately before the

387
 conduit enters the flameproof area. All Conduits installed within this
areas shall be solid drawn galvanized, as shall be conduit fittings and
accessories and Buxton Certified as suitable for Group II hazards.
Equipment shall comply with B.S.229, B.S. 889, and Code of Practice
C.P. 1003.

17.2.11.2 Steel Conduits - Steel Trunking

Conduits shall be of heavy gauge class B welded to British Standard
Specification B.S.31. In no case will conduit smaller than 20 mm
diameter be used on the works. Conduits installed within buildings shall
be PVC heavy gauge except where specified otherwise. Where
installed externally or in damp conditions they shall be galvanized.
Conduit fittings, accessories or equipment used in conjunction with
galvanized conduits shall also be galvanized or otherwise as approved
by the Engineer.

Metal Trunking shall be fabricated from galvanized steel of not less than
18 swg. All section of trunking shall be rigidly fixed together and
attached to the framework or fabric of the building at intervals of not
less than 1.2 m. Joints in trunking shall not overhang fixing points by
more than 0.5m.

All trunking shall be made electrically continuous by means of

galvanized flat iron strips.

All trunking fittings (i.e. bends, tees, etc.) shall leave the main trough
completely clear of obstruction and continuously open except through
walls and floors, at which points suitable fire resisting barriers shall be
provided as may be necessary. The inner edge of bends and tees shall
be chamfered where cables large than 35 mm2 are employed.

Where trunking passes through ceilings and walls the cover shall be
solidly fixed to 150 mm either side of ceilings and floors and 50 mm
either side of walls.

Screws and bolts securing covers to trunking or sections of covers

together shall be arranged so that damage to cable cannot occur either
when fixing covers or when installing cables in the trough.

388
Where trunking is used to connect switchgear or fuse boards, such
connections shall be made by trucking fittings manufactured for this
purpose and not by multiple conduit couplings.

Where vertical sections of trunking are used which exceed 4.5 m in

length, staggered tie off points shall be provided at 4.5 m intervals to
support the weight of cables.

The number of cables to be installed in trunking shall be such as to

permit easy drawing in without damage to the cables, and shall in no
circumstances be such that a space factor of 50% is exceeded.

Conduit and trunking shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.

Metal conduit shall be tightly screwed between the various lengths so
that they butt at the socketed joints. The internal edges of conduit and
all fittings shall be smooth, free from burrs and other defects. Oil and
any other insulating substance shall be removed from the screw
threads. Where conduits terminate in fuse-gear, distribution boards,
adaptable boxes, non-spouted switchboxes, etc., they shall, unless
otherwise stated, be connected thereto by means of smooth bore male
brass bushes, compression washers and sockets. All exposed threads
and abrasions shall be painted using galvanizing paint for galvanized
tubing immediately after the conduits are erected. All bends and sets
shall be made cold without altering the section of the conduit. The inner
radius of the bend shall not be less than four (4) times the outside
diameter of the conduit. Not more than two right angle bends will be
permitted without the interposition of a draw-in box. Where straight runs
of conduit are installed, draw-in boxes shall be provided at distances
not exceeding 15 m. No tees, elbows, sleeves, either of inspection or
solid type, will be permitted.

Conduit shall be swabbed out prior to drawing in cables, and they shall
be laid so as to drain off all condensed moisture without injury to end
connections.

Conduits and trunking shall be run at least 150 mm clear of hot water
and steam pipes, and at least 75 mm clear of cold water and other
services unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

389
 Conduits installed and buried in walls shall allow a minimum of 15 mm
cover. Sunk circular conduit boxes shall be provided with break joint
rings of white moulded material or metal.

All conduit boxes, except loop-in pattern in concrete floors shall be fixed
direct to the structure apart from the support provided by the conduits.

Box lids where required shall be heavy gauge metal, secured by means
of zinc plated or cadmium plated steel crews.

All adaptable boxes and lids of the same size shall be interchangeable.

Boxes used on surface work are to be tapped or drilled to line up with

the conduit fixed in distance type saddles allowing clearance between
the conduit and wall without the need for setting the conduit.

Draw-in boxes in the floors are generally to be avoided but where they
are essential they must be grouped in positions approved by the
Engineers and covered by suitable floor traps, with non-ferrous trays
and covers.

Where buried in the ground outside the building the whole of the buried
conduit is to be painted with two coats of approved bitumastic
composition before covering up. Paint damaged and joints under screed
are to be similarly treated.

Where run on the surface, unpainted fittings and joints shall be painted
with two coats of oil bound enamel applied to rust and grease free
metalwork.

17.2.11.3 Non Metallic Conduits - Trunkings

Conduit shall be best quality new super high impact grade heavy gauge
Class "A" rigid PVC unplasticised conduit. The conduit shall be bend
and formed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Small sizes i.e. 20 mm diameter and 25 mm diameter shall be bent cold
by inserting the correct size bending spring. It is essential for right angle
bends that the conduit is bent past 90o to allow for "spring back".

390
Large sizes of conduit shall be pre-heated before inserting rubber cord
to prevent kinking. Conduit badly formed or bent, or damaged in any
way, shall not be used.

Joints shall be made water-tight by the use of cement applied with a

brush or rag. Cement shall be applied to the complete circumference of
the conduit. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure
an odd adhesion to the ends fittings. Cement shall not be permitted to
enter into the conduit.

All conduit fittings and accessories including coupler, ordinary clips,

saddles pipe hooks, reducers, stopping plugs, locknuts and male and
female bushed shall be manufactured dimensionally, similar to B.S.
31/1940 where applicable. Solid tees shall not be used. Solid or
inspection elbows or bends or inspection tees shall be used only in
exceptional circumstances and then only with the approval of the
Engineers.

Where it eases the installation of cast-in-situ back entry boxes on the

loop-in system purpose made bends may be used. They shall comprise
a tight bend with push sockets.

A means of expansion shall be provided in conduit runs in excess of 10

m without any bend or set, by the use of expansion couplings which
shall also be used at building expansion joints.

Unless it is clearly specified or shown on the drawing, the method of

installing conduit shall be subject to the approval of the Engineers.

Small standard circular non-metallic Conduit boxes, conforming

dimensionally with B.S. 31/940 with standard circular non-metallic lids
and brass fixing screws, shall be provided and fixed at all junctions.

Where ceiling roses occur and the ceiling box is recessed below the
finished level of the ceiling, suitable extension rings to accommodate
the ceiling rose must be provided.

All spare ways in junction boxes etc. left for possible future extension
shall be fitted with stopping plugs.

391
 Non metallic trunking shall be manufactured from high impact resistant
PVC-U material in compliance with the requirements of BS 4678 Part 4
(1956). All screening lengths shall be butt jointed and corners mitred.
Joints shall be electrically connected by means of screening bonding
straps to maintain continuity when earthed.

17.2.11.4 Flexible Connections

All flexible connections shall be made by armoured cable.
Flexible conduit will not be accepted in this contract. The armoured
cable shall be secured at each end by means of proper purpose made
glands for armoured cables.

17.2.12 Testing and Inspection

The Contractor shall carry out all inspections and testing of the
installation to verify full compliance with this Specification and to meet
the requirements of BS 7671 (initial verification) and other relevant
standards. Testing shall be carried out in such a manner that no danger
to persons or equipment can arise.

All testing and inspection shall be carried out in the presence of and to
the entire satisfaction of the Engineer at such times as may be required.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least seven clear days notice
of the commencement of any tests in order that he may, at his
discretion, make arrangements to attend and witness the tests. The
Contractor shall ensure that he completes his own inspections and
tests, and rectifies any installation faults, prior to submitting the
equipment for witness tests.

The Contractor will be required to prepare and follow through a

thorough inspection and testing procedure, which will be subject to the
Engineer's approval. Tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that all
equipment has been installed correctly and is free from any defects. In
the event that any modification work or remedial action is required, the
Contractor shall immediately carry out the work to the Engineer's
satisfaction before further tests proceed. Any previously tested parts of
the installation, which may have been affected by such work, shall be
re-tested.

392
 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide, at his own cost,
all the test equipment necessary for the complete testing of the
installation in accordance with this Specification. All test equipment
used shall be calibrated "in date" and records of equipment serial
numbers together with calibration details shall be available for
examination by the Engineer on demand.

Manufactured equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer’s works

prior to delivery to site in accordance with agreed procedures and any
British Standard applicable to the equipment. In this event copies of the
manufacturer's test certificates shall be submitted to Engineer.

When necessary the Contractor shall provide assistance to equipment

suppliers during the site testing and commissioning of their equipment.
This shall include the provision of any temporary power supplies which
may be required by the suppliers.

Five copies of the records of inspection and complete results of all tests
shall be delivered to the Engineer, together with copies of the
manufacturer's test certificates.

17.2.12.1 Site Tests

Site tests and inspections shall include: -

17.2.12.1.1 Verification of Polarity

This shall include all S.P switches and socket outlets and checking for
the correct connection of all cables with regard to phase sequence.

17.2.12.1.2 Earthing
Measurement of resistance/impedance of earth bonding and earthing
conductors. Continuity shall be checked with one lead of an ohmmeter
at the main earth termination and the other probing all conductive metal
to verify that the protective conductors are electrically sound and
correctly connected.

Testing of effectiveness of earthing, including line/earth loop impedance

testing and earth electrode testing. This is best carried out using
significant current to detect any bad connections or other weaknesses
in the protective conductor path. Prior to commissioning, tests of Earth

393
 Fault Loop impedance shall be carried out using both substantial
current testers and also with intrinsically safe tester. The results of both
tests shall be recorded so that subsequent tests may be carried out
using only Intrinsically Safe testers, allowing the condition of the Earth
System to be assessed by comparing the results of the I.S. test with
results obtained initially in conjunction with the high current test.

17.2.12.1.3 Insulation
The insulation resistance between cores and earth on all LV and MV
cables shall be checked and recorded. Cables shall be tested for
correct insulation resistance as follows: -

Before and after jointing or making off, low voltage cables shall be
tested with a 500-Volt insulation tester.
Before and after joint or making-off, high voltage cables shall be tested
with a 2500 volt high voltage tester.
Phasing out and continuity tests on M.V. and L.V. cables shall be
carried out with battery operated lamp or bell set and not with an
insulator tester.

All M.V. cables, and when required L.V. cables, shall be pressure tested
in accordance with BS 6480 Part 1 after laying and jointing (i.e. before
commissioning)

17.2.12.1.4 Continuity
All cores of all cables shall be tested for point-to-point continuity to
ensure that conductors are not damaged or connected incorrectly.
Where cables are installed in underground trenches, point to point
checks shall be carried out before the trench is backfilled to avoid
having to re-excavate the cable route if any faults are discovered.

17.2.12.1.4 MCB’s and Overload settings

The Contractor shall check that correctly rated MCB’s are fitted in all
equipment and that overload devices have been set to the correct value
according to the design drawings. Protective overload devices fitted in
L.V. starters and switchgear shall be subjected to primary injection
testing at 110% and 600% full load current and the results recorded and
checked against manufacturer's published curves.

394
General
Equipment is installed and wired in accordance with final approved
drawings.

All labels and warning notices are correctly located and secured.

Glands have been correctly made off and any barrier glands properly
filled and sealed. In particular, on steel wire armoured cables, no amour
is visible outside the seal on the outer sheath on the cable when the
shroud is pulled back.

All steelwork, brackets and fixings are properly painted or adequately

protected against corrosion.
Enclosure covers are tight and sealed against ingress of water or dirt.
The correct keys are provided for key switches and padlocks and keys
are provided for any lockable enclosures.
All terminations, joints and connections are tight.
Wires are neatly loomed, properly secured and free from stress
There is no visible damage to equipment
Workmanship is of an acceptable standard
On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall install a Traffolyte
or similar label, which shall be fixed by means of non-corrodible screws,
in a prominent position, at or near the main switchgear position,
reading:

IMPORTANT - THIS INSTALLATION SHOULD BE PERIODICALLY

INSPECTED AND TESTED, AND A REPORT ON ITS CONDITION
OBTAINED, AS PRESCRIBED IN THE REGULATIONS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ISSUED BY THE INSTITUTION OF
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER"

After carrying out initial inspections and Tests but before the installation
is put into service, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
Completion Certificate in accordance with BS 7671.

395
17.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE A – BUS
STATIONS
17.3.1 EARTHING SYSTEM
17.3.1.1 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip
Supply and installation of 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip as shown
in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled.

17.3.1.2 D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod

Supply and installation of D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod as shown in
related drawings. They have to be factory assembled.

17.3.1.3 Thermo Welding

Supply and installation of Thermo Welding as shown in related

drawings.

17.3.1.4 Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm

Supply and installation of Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm as shown in
related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. This bar shall be
connected to the main earthing system. The Contractor shall connect to
this bar all metallic parts.

17.3.1.5 Earthing Cable, 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable

Supply and installation of 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable as
shown in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. Cables
shall be laid on cable trays.

17.3.1.6 Bonding Cable, 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable

Supply and installation of 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable as
shown in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. They
shall be used for all metalic parts bonding.

17.3.2 LIGHTING, SOCKET OUTLET, POWER DIST., VANTILATION

SYSTEM
17.3.2.1 Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED Lamp
Supply and installation of Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED
Lamp including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
All fixed devices are to be connected to the power supply via cable-
connection-boxes or junction boxes.
Operating voltage: 100 - 277 VAC (50 / 60 Hz)
396
 Light source: SMD-LEDs
System performance: 162.2 - 264 W
Lighting current: 17'089 - 32'327 lm
System efficiency: up to 136.5 lm / W
Light colour: 5'000 K
CRI: Ra > 80
Beam angles: 30° / 60° / 90° / 120°
LED-Operating life: [L70 / B10] > 80'000 h
Protection category: IP65
Protection class: I
Dimming: optional 1~10V or DALI
Operating range of temperature
160 W: –30° C to +60° C
Max. Surface temperature: +90° C (suitable for use in industrial
Housing: Die-cast aluminium
Housing colour: black

17.3.2.2 Battery Pack for emergency lighting (1 hour)

Supply and installation of Battery Pack for emergency lighting (1 hour)
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.

17.3.2.3 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail

Supply and installation of 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Light colour: ~ 4'000 K / ~ 5'500 K
Beam angle: 120°
Protection class: IP67

17.3.2.4 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting Fixture

Supply and installation of 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting
Fixture including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Working voltage shall be 240V and frequency shall be 50Hz.
All lighting fittings shall be of an approved manufacture.

17.3.2.5 Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp

Supply and installation of Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Working voltage shall be 240V and frequency shall be 50Hz.
All lighting fittings shall be of an approved manufacture.

397
17.3.2.6 Single Pole One Gang lighting switch
Supply and installation of Single Pole One Gang lighting switch
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
All wall mounted lighting switches shall unless otherwise specified be
mounted 1.5 m above finished floor level.
Switches and socket outlets installed in rooms with embedded wiring
shall be designed for flush mounting in moulded plastic wall boxes and
rated for 10 A.

17.3.2.7 Grounded Socket (1 phase)

Supply and installation of Grounded Socket (1 phase) including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Socket outlets and plugs for small power shall be according to IEC
standard, two-pins and earth type up to 10 Amperes.
three phase (380 V) sockets of 32A,
single phase (220 V) sockets of 16 A

17.3.2.8 Data Socket

Supply and installation of Data Socket including all parts. They have to
be factory assembled.
Cat6 cables shall be used between network switch and socket.

17.3.2.9 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH cable including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.3.2.10 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH cable including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.

0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and

halogen free type.

398
 The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.3.2.11 0.6/1 kV, 4x4+4 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 4x4+4 mm2 N2XH cable including
all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.3.2.12 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable including
all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.3.2.13 Ventilation Fan, 220V, 300W

Features
Robust, durable construction.
Height of the stand mounted unit is adjustable from 1400mm to
1660mm.
90° oscillating head with 200 up and down tilt.
Finished in a durable grey coloured paint.
Wall mounted unit comes with easy to fit wall mounting kit.
3 operating speeds to suit specific cooling needs.
Fans are supplied in kit form ready for easy assembly.
Finger guards comply with Australian standards.

399
 Construction
Stand mounted unit fitted with heavy cast iron base.
Wall mounted unit comes with a heavy duty wall bracket and tube.
Impellers are of aluminium and fully balanced.
Wire finger guards are grey painted mesh.
All steel components have a corrosion resistant finish.

Motors
Type - squirrel cage induction motor
Electricity supply - 220-240V, single-phase, 50Hz
Bearings - sealed-for-life, ball
3-speed motor with switchImpellers shall be manufactured from
aluminium and shall operate in 3 speeds which are controlled by a
switch that includes an off position. Wire finger guards shall be of grey
painted mesh.

17.3.2.14 Air Condation, 1000W

8,000 BTU 750W/6.3A cooling, 3,500 BTU 1320W/11.6A supplemental
heating functionality
This Koldfront unit offers several energy-saving features, including a
Check Filter light, thermostat-controlled operation, sleep mode, and
Energy Saver modeWindow width: 26 7/8"- 36" Minimum window
height: 16 1/2"; Input voltage: 115 V / 60 Hz; 2 year warrantyInstallation
hardware and weather seals included; Coverage area: 350 sq. ft. (cool)

17.3.3 Pipe and Cable Tray System

17.3.3.1 D:100mm, PE Pipe
Supply and installation of D:100mm, PE Pipe including all parts.
Pipes locations as shown in the related drawings.

17.3.3.2 Galvanized Steel Cable Trays, Cable Ladders And Their

Accessories
Supply and installation of Galvanized steel cable trays, cable ladders
and their accessories.

Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on

trays or cable ladders. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size
to carry in one layer the weight, number and configuration specified for
each tray and an additional quantity of cables, not less than 25% by

400
 weight and dimensions in excess of the specified quantity. The design
of such trays shall include a factor of safety to guard against permanent
distortion when supporting erection staff during cable installation. The
trays shall be of suitable aluminium alloys or hot-dip galvanized steel
standard material.
All trays, supports, ladders, etc., shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel
elements.

17.3.4 Distribution Boards

17.3.4.1 415V/240V, 25A, 10kA(1 sec) Normal Lighting Distribution Board
Supply and installation of lighting panel including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.
The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,
manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:

EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-

gear assemblies.
EN60439 IEC 439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies.
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating
transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-
gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour
meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify

401
 extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:
Frame: 2.5 mm
Cladding: 2.0 mm
Top cover: 1.5 mm
Division sheet: 1.0 mm
All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.
The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.

Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper

conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running

the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.3.4.2 415V/240V, 25A, 10kA(1 sec) Emergency Lighting Distribution

Board
Supply and installation of emergency lighting panel including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.

The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,

manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:

EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-

EN 60439 IEC Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies.
gear assemblies.
EN
439607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-
IEC 60044 Instrument
gear. transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

402
 Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,
with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:
Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding: 2.0 mm
Top cover: 1.5 mm
Division sheet: 1.0 mm
All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.

The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.

Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper

conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running

the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.3.4.3 415V/240V, 50A, 16kA(1 sec) Main Distribution Board

Supply and installation of Main Distribution Board including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.
The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,
manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:

403
EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-
gear assemblies.
EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
IEC 439 assemblies.
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating
transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-
gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour
meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:
Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding: 2.0 mm
Top cover: 1.5 mm
Division sheet: 1.0 mm

All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.

The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.
Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper
conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

404
 Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running
the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.3.4.4 415V/240V, 40A, 16kA(1 sec) UPS Main Distribution Board

Supply and installation of UPS Main Distribution Board including all
parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.

The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,

manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:
EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and
EN 60439 IEC Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
control-gear assemblies.
EN
439607421 Isolation
assemblies. transformers and safety isolating
EN 60947 Specification
transformers. for low-voltage switchgear and
IEC 60044 Instrument
control-gear. transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
hour meters.
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic
(IP Code). compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:
Frame: 2.5 mm
Cladding: 2.0 mm
Top cover: 1.5 mm
Division sheet: 1.0 mm
All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.
The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.
Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper
conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,

405
 comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.
Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running
the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.3.5 STAND-BY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM

17.3.5.1 10kVA or 15 kVA, 6 hours UPS System, including all parts and
accessories
Supply and installation of 15 kVA, 6 hours UPS System, including all
parts and accessories.
It shall be supplied from the three-phase system to a line-commutated
silicon controlled rectifier. The rectifier converts the main voltage using
a fully controlled three-phase bridge into DC-voltage, simultaneously
supporting the inverter and charging the batteries. The rectifier shall
operate with an IU-characteristic in accordance with DIN 41773.

In the inverter the DC-voltage is converted into AC-voltage by using

transistorised pulse wide modulation (PWM) technology. Due to the
relatively high switching frequency compared to the basis frequency
and the optimised regulation of the pulse width a low distortion factor
shall be achieved at low filter expense.

In the event of main interruption or failure, the battery must be brought

in automatically without interrupting the supply current to the inverter.
The system must give alarm before turning off by self-monitoring
system.

An electronic by-pass and a manual service by-pass must be contained

in the UPS system to give additional security.
The UPS includes all components and the batteries.

406
 Technical data
Input 400/230 V +/- 10 % , 50 Hz +/- 5 %
Intermediate 220 V or 372 V +/- 15 %
Output
circuit 230 V +/- 1 % static, +/- dynamic, 50 Hz +/- 0.1 %, Quartz
Overhead 50%
synchronised for 60 sec.
Short
behaviour circuit short
25 circuit proof,
% short circuit
for current <
10 2*I-nom for 20
min.
Wave form
behaviour sine
sec. wave
10 % for 20 min.
Power factor 0.0 ind. – 0.0 cap
Distortion
range < 3 % with lin. load
System
factor > 90 %
Battery
effectivity for 3hr back-up time
Norms
capacity IEC, VDE, DIN, EN

17.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE B – BUS

STATIONS
17.4.1 EARTHING SYSTEM
17.4.1.1 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip
Supply and installation of 30x3.5 mm Galvanized Steel Strip as shown
in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled.

17.4.1.2 D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod

Supply and installation of D20 mm, 1,5m Galvanized Rod as shown in
related drawings. They have to be factory assembled.

17.4.1.3 Thermo Welding

Supply and installation of Thermo Welding as shown in related
drawings.

17.4.1.4 Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm

Supply and installation of Earthing Bare, 50x10x500 mm as shown in
related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. This bar shall be
connected to the main earthing system. The Contractor shall connect to
this bar all metallic parts.

17.4.1.5 Earthing Cable, 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable

Supply and installation of 1x25mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable as
shown in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. Cables
shall be laid on cable trays.

407
17.4.1.6 Bonding Cable, 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable
Supply and installation of 1x16mm² Yellow-Green Insulated Cable as
shown in related drawings. They have to be factory assembled. They
shall be used for all metalic parts bonding.

17.4.2 LIGHTING, SOCKET OUTLET, POWER DIST. SYSTEM

17.4.2.1 Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED Lamp
Supply and installation of Downlight Lighting Fitting, IP65, 160W LED
Lamp including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.

All fixed devices are to be connected to the power supply via cable-
connection-boxes or junction-boxes.
Operating voltage: 100 - 277 VAC (50 / 60 Hz)
Light source: SMD-LEDs
System performance: 162.2 - 264 W
Lighting current: 17'089 - 32'327 lm
System efficiency: up to 136.5 lm / W
Light colour: 5'000 K
CRI: Ra > 80
Beam angles: 30° / 60° / 90° / 120°
LED-Operating life: [L70 / B10] > 80'000 h
Protection category: IP65
Protection class: I
Dimming: optional 1~10V or DALI
Operating range of temperature
160 W: –30° C to +60° C
Max. surface temperature: +90° C (suitable for use in industrial
Housing: Die-cast aluminium
Housing colour: black

17.4.2.2 Battery Pack for Emergency Lighting (1 hour)

Supply and installation of Battery Pack for emergency lighting (1 hour)
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.

17.4.2.3 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail

Supply and installation of 60 W LED Lamp for Hand Rail including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Light colour: ~ 4'000 K / ~ 5'500 K
Beam angle: 120°

408
 Protection class: IP67

17.4.2.4 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting Fixture

Supply and installation of 2x36W Weather-Proof Fluorescent Lighting
Fixture including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Working voltage shall be 240V and frequency shall be 50Hz.
All lighting fittings shall be of an approved manufacture.

17.4.2.5 Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp

Supply and installation of Lighting Fitting, 60 W Incandescent Lamp
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Working voltage shall be 240V and frequency shall be 50Hz.
All lighting fittings shall be of an approved manufacture.

17.4.2.6 Single Pole One Gang lighting switch

Supply and installation of Single Pole One Gang lighting switch
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
All wall mounted lighting switches shall unless otherwise specified be
mounted 1.5 m above finished floor level.
Switches and socket outlets installed in rooms with embedded wiring
shall be designed for flush mounting in moulded plastic wall boxes and
rated for 10 A.

17.4.2.7 Grounded Socket (1 phase)

Supply and installation of Grounded Socket (1 phase) including all
parts. They have to be factory assembled.
Socket outlets and plugs for small power shall be according to IEC
standard, two-pins and earth type up to 10 Amperes.
three phase (380 V) sockets of 32A,
single phase (220 V) sockets of 16 A

17.4.2.8 Data Socket

Supply and installation of Data Socket including all parts. They have to
be factory assembled.
Cat6 cables shall be used between network switch and socket.

17.4.2.9 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 3x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable including
all parts. They have to be factory assembled.

409
 0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.

The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to

the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.

Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.

Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.4.2.10 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 5x2.5 mm2 N2XH Cable including
all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.4.2.11 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 4x6+6 mm2 N2XH Cable including
all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.4.2.12 0.6/1 kV, 4x10+10 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 4x10+10 mm2 N2XH Cable
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.

410
 The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.4.2.13 0.6/1 kV, 4x16+16 mm2 N2XH Cable

Supply and installation of 0.6/1 kV, 4x16+16 mm2 N2XH Cable
including all parts. They have to be factory assembled.
0.6/1 kV LV indoor cables shall be low smoke, flame reterdant and
halogen free type.
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to
the latest version of IEC 61034-1/2, IEC 60754-1/2, IEC 60332-1-2 and
IEC 60332-3-24.
Cables shall be produced acc. to VDE 0276-604.
Permissible operaton temperature shall be 90 oC.

17.4.2.14 Ventilation Fan, 220V, 300W

Features
Robust, durable construction.
Height of the stand mounted unit is adjustable from 1400mm to
1660mm.
90° oscillating head with 200 up and down tilt.
Finished in a durable grey coloured paint.
Wall mounted unit comes with easy to fit wall mounting kit.
3 operating speeds to suit specific cooling needs.
Fans are supplied in kit form ready for easy assembly.
Finger guards comply with Australian standards.

Construction
Stand mounted unit fitted with heavy cast iron base.Wall mounted unit
comes with a heavy-duty wall bracket and tube.Impellers are of
aluminium and fully balanced.Wire finger guards are grey painted
mesh.All steel components have a corrosion resistant finish.

411
 Motors
Type - squirrel cage induction motorElectricity supply - 220-240V,
single-phase, 50HzBearings - sealed-for-life, ball3-speed motor with
switch
Impellers shall be manufactured from aluminium and shall operate in 3
speeds which are controlled by a switch that includes an off position.
Wire finger guards shall be of grey painted mesh.

17.4.2.15 Air Condation, 1000W

8,000 BTU 750W/6.3A cooling, 3,500 BTU 1320W/11.6A supplemental
heating functionality
This Koldfront unit offers several energy-saving features, including a
Check Filter light, thermostat-controlled operation, sleep mode, and
Energy Saver mode
Window width: 26 7/8"- 36" Minimum window height: 16 1/2"; Input
voltage: 115 V / 60 Hz; 2 year warranty
Installation hardware and weather seals included; Coverage area: 350
sq. ft. (cool)

17.4.3 PIPE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM

17.4.3.1 D:100mm, PE Pipe
Supply and installation of D:100mm, PE Pipe including all parts.
Pipes locations as shown in the related drawings.

17.4.3.2 Galvanized steel cable trays, cable ladders and their accessories.
Supply and installation of Galvanized steel cable trays, cable ladders
and their accessories.

Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on

trays or cable ladders. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size
to carry in one layer the weight, number and configuration specified for
each tray and an additional quantity of cables, not less than 25% by
weight and dimensions in excess of the specified quantity. The design
of such trays shall include a factor of safety to guard against permanent
distortion when supporting erection staff during cable installation. The
trays shall be of suitable aluminium alloys or hot-dip galvanized steel
standard material.

412
 All trays, supports, ladders, etc., shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel
elements.

17.4.4 Distribution Boards

17.4.4.1 415V/240V, 40A, 10kA(1 sec) Normal Lighting Distribution Board
Supply and installation of lighting panel including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.

The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,

manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:
EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
assemblies.
EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies.
IEC 439
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:
Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding : 2.0 mm
Top cover : 1.5 mm
Division sheet : 1.0 mm

413
 All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.
The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.
Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper
conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running

the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.4.4.2 415V/240V, 32A, 10kA(1 sec) Emergency Lighting Distribution

Board
Supply and installation of emergency lighting panel including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.
The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,
manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:
EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
assemblies.
EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies.
IEC 439
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The

414
 cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:

Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding : 2.0 mm
Top cover : 1.5 mm
Division sheet : 1.0 mm

All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.

The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.
Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper
conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.
Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running
the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.4.4.3 415V/240V, 80A, 16kA(1 sec) Main Distribution Board

Supply and installation of Main Distribution Board including all parts.
Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related
drawings.

The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,

manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:

EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear

assemblies.
EN 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies.
IEC 439
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control-gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.

415
 IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:

Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding : 2.0 mm
Top cover : 1.5 mm
Division sheet : 1.0 mm

All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.

The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.

Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper

conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running

the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.4.4.4 415V/240V, 40A, 16kA(1 sec) UPS Main Distribution Board

Supply and installation of UPS Main Distribution Board including all
parts.

Panels shall be included all circuit breakers as shown in the related

drawings.

416
The LV switchgears and the relevant equipment shall be designed,
manufactured and tested according to the latest version of:

EN 60439 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and

control-gear assemblies.
EN 60439 IEC Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear
439 assemblies.
EN 607421 Isolation transformers and safety isolating
transformers.
EN 60947 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and
control-gear.
IEC 60044 Instrument transformer.
IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC 60186 Voltage transformers.
IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watt-hour
meters.
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
(IP Code).
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).

Electrical cubicles shall be constructed of braced rolled steel sections,

with recessed panels, and substantial mounting frames for mounting of
power and control cables. The frame shall consist of sturdy steel
sections that are bolted together by means of corner pieces. The
cladding shall be bolted to the frame from the outside to simplify
extension at side. The frame and cladding shall be fabricated from
sheet steel at least as follows:

Frame : 2.5 mm
Cladding : 2.0 mm
Top cover : 1.5 mm
Division sheet : 1.0 mm

All bolts, screws, washers, etc., shall be corrosion protected.

The cubicles shall be complete with all locks, cable end boxes, colour
coded busbars, internal wiring, terminal boards and accessories.

417
 Busbars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper
conductors suitably protected against corrosion and rigidly supported on
approved type of insulators and shall, unless otherwise specified,
comply with the requirements of the latest relevant approved standard
specifications.

Busbars shall be suitably mounted in enclosed compartments running

the full length of the distribution boards. Access to the busbars shall be
possible only by removing bolted covers.

17.4.5 Stand-By and Emergency System

17.4.5.1 15 kVA, 180 min.UPS System, including all parts and accessories
Supply and installation of 15 kVA, 180 min. UPS System, including all
parts and accessories.

It shall be supplied from the three-phase system to a line-commutated

silicon controlled rectifier. The rectifier converts the main voltage using
a fully controlled three phase bridge into DC-voltage, simultaneously
supporting the inverter and charging the batteries. The rectifier shall
operate with an IU-characteristic in accordance with DIN 41773.

In the inverter the DC-voltage is converted into AC-voltage by using

transistorised pulse wide modulation (PWM) technology. Due to the
relatively high switching frequency compared to the basis frequency
and the optimised regulation of the pulse width a low distortion factor
shall be achieved at low filter expense.

In the event of main interruption or failure, the battery must be brought

in automatically without interrupting the supply current to the inverter.
The system must give alarm before turning off by self-monitoring
system.

An electronic by-pass and a manual service by-pass must be contained

in the UPS system to give additional security.
The UPS includes all components and the batteries.

418
 Technical data

Input 400/230 V +/- 10 % , 50 Hz +/- 5 %

Intermediate circuit 220 V or 372 V +/- 15 %
Output 230 V +/- 1 % static, +/- dynamic, 50 Hz +/- 0.1
Overhead behaviour 50 %
%, Quartz synchronised for 60 sec.
Short circuit behaviour short
25 circuit
% proof, short
for circuit current
10 < 2*I-
min.
Wave form sine
nom wave
10 %forfor20
20sec.
min.
Power factor range 0.0 ind. – 0.0 cap
Distortion factor < 3 % with lin. load
System effectivity > 90 %
Battery capacity for 3 h back-up time
Norms IEC, VDE, DIN, EN

18.0 Specifications for ICT Installations

18.1 Description.

The ICT installation shall be classified in accordance to BS XXXX as follows

a) Automatic Fare Collection System, abbreviated as AFCS
b) Intermodal Transport and Control System, abbreviated as ITCS
c) Optical Fibre Networks abbreviated as OFN

1.11 AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION SYSTEM (AFCS)

1.11.1 TIER 0: FARE MEDIA

B Smart Token (Onetime Ticket)
C Contactless Smart Card
1.11.2 TIER 1: FRONTEND DEVICES
D Ticket Office Machine complete with Printer, Cashdrawer, and Smart Card
Reader/Writter
E Bidirectional Optical Flip Turnstile (Normal width)
F Bidirectional Optical Flip Turnstile (Extended width for Disabled)
G Token Collector Complete with Token Reader/Writter for exit validation
H Smart Card (NFC based) Gate Validator and Activator
J Mobile Inspection Devices with Smart Card Reader (NFC Based), Camera and
biometric scanner
1.11.3 TIER 1: DEVICES COMMUNICATION

A Integrated Service Router/Firewall

419
B Gigabit Ethernet Switch - 24 x 10/100/1000 PoE Ports - 4 x SFP
C 12-Core ODF
D 12-Core MM Fiber Cable ( Provisional)
E MM SFP Card complete with Modules
F MM Fiber Patch Cords
G 24 Port Ethernet Patch Panel
H Cat 7 UTP Ethernet Cable
I Cat 7 UTP Ethernet Patch Cords
J Cat 7 Dual Port Ethernet Faceplate complete with backboxes
K Cat 7 RJ45 complete with rubber cap
L 120mm PVC Pipe for ducting
M 30x30 ducting manholes complete with anti-rust metal cover
N 18U Standing/Wall mounted Data Cabinet complete with PDUs and Ventilation
fan
1.11.4 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
O Allow for provision of three(3) sets of as an installed drawings for the whole of
AFCS installations including operation and maintenance manuals.

1.12 INTERMODAL TRANSPORT AND CONTROL SYSTEM-ITCS

Street lighting points wired using 6.0sq.mm PVC/SWA/PVC/cu 3core cable
drawn in 50mm dia. pvc conduit burried underground; including wiring ;conduit and
conduit accessories
1.12.1 FRONTEND DEVICES
A Main board Display at Stations and Terminals - The LED "Plasma
Replacement" Full Matrix display
B Wide Screen Display: Ferrograph 28" Ultrawide TFT display
C 3-Dimentional People Counter with Vision Tracking Technology
D Vandal-Proof IR IP CCTV Camera, Weatherproof Indoor/Outdoor Dome
E Vandal-Proof IR IP CCTV Camera, Weatherproof Indoor/Outdoor Bullet
F Public Addressing Sound System complete with Ceiling mounted
loudspeakers and push-to-talk paging microphones
G Desktop/Wall Mount Installation SIP IP VoIP Phone
1.12.2 DEVICES COMMUNICATION
H Gigabit Ethernet Switch - 48 x 10/100/1000 PoE Ports - 4 x SFP
I 48 Port Ethernet Patch Panel
J Cat 7 UTP Ethernet Cable
K Cat 7 UTP Ethernet Patch Cords
L Cat 7 RJ45 complete with rubber cap

420
1.13 OPTICAL FIBER NETWORK-OFN
Mobile Inspection Devices with Smart Card Reader (NFC Based), Camera and
biometric scanner
B Outdoor Fiber Optical Single Mode Core 12 G652D
C In-Line Type Fiber Optic Spicing Closure complete with spice trays of
appropriate sizing and sleeves as required
D Fiber Patch Cord with LC/E2000/SMA Connectors
1.14 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
E Allow for provision of three(3) sets of as an installed drawings for the whole of
OFN installations including operation and maintenance manuals.

18.18 Payment and Measurement

Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this
Section, including supplying, Installations, Testing, Commissioning and associated
buiders work.

The Method of measurement and unit of measurement shall be according to SMM

version 7 and Contract Bills of Quantities, including preambles.

421